Acoustic Profiles

Acoustic Profiles
The Oxford Music /Media Series

Daniel Goldmark, Series Editor
Tuning In: American Narrative Television Music Back to the Fifties: Nostalgia, Hollywood Film,
Ron Rodman and Popular Music of the Seventies and Eighties
Michael D. Dwyer
Special Sound: The Creation and Legacy of the
BBC Radiophonic Workshop The Early Film Music of Dmitry Shostakovich
Louis Niebur Joan Titus
Seeing Through Music: Gender and Modernism Making Music in Selznick’s Hollywood
in Classic Hollywood Film Scores Nathan Platte
Peter Franklin Hearing Haneke: The Sound Tracks of a
An Eye for Music: Popular Music and the Radical Auteur
Audiovisual Surreal Elsie Walker
John Richardson Unlimited Replays: Video Games and
Playing Along: Digital Games, YouTube, and Classical Music
Virtual Performance William Gibbons
Kiri Miller Hollywood Harmony: Musical Wonder and the
Sounding the Gallery: Video and the Rise of Sound of Cinema
Art-Music Frank Lehman
Holly Rogers French Musical Culture and the Coming of
Composing for the Red Screen: Prokofiev and Sound Cinema
Soviet Film Hannah Lewis
Kevin Bartig Theories of the Soundtrack
Saying It With Songs: Popular Music and the James Buhler
Coming of Sound to Hollywood Cinema Through The Looking Glass: John Cage and
Katherine Spring Avant-Garde Film
We’ll Meet Again: Musical Design in the Films of Richard H. Brown
Stanley Kubrick Sound Design is the New Score: Theory, Aesthetics,
Kate McQuiston and Erotics of the Integrated Soundtrack
Occult Aesthetics: Synchronization in Sound Film Danijela Kulezic-Wilson
K.J. Donnelly Rock Star/Movie Star:
Sound Play: Video Games and the Musical Power and Performance in Cinematic Rock
Imagination Stardom
William Cheng Landon Palmer
Sounding American: Hollywood, Opera, and Jazz The Presence of the Past:
Jennifer Fleeger Temporal Experience and the New Hollywood
Soundtrack
Mismatched Women: The Siren’s Song Through
Daniel Bishop
the Machine
Jennifer Fleeger Metafilm Music in Jean-Luc Godard’s Cinema
Michael Baumgartner
Robert Altman’s Soundtracks: Film, Music and
Sound from M*A*S*H to A Prairie Home Acoustic Profiles:
Companion A Sound Ecology of the Cinema
Gayle Sherwood Magee Randolph Jordan
Acoustic Profiles
A Sound Ecology of the Cinema
R A N D O L P H J O R DA N
Oxford University Press is a department of the University of Oxford. It furthers
the University’s objective of excellence in research, scholarship, and education
by publishing worldwide. Oxford is a registered trade mark of Oxford University
Press in the UK and certain other countries.
Published in the United States of America by Oxford University Press

198 Madison Avenue, New York, NY 10016, United States of America.
© Oxford University Press 2023
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in

a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means, without the
prior permission in writing of Oxford University Press, or as expressly permitted
by law, by license, or under terms agreed with the appropriate reproduction
rights organization. Inquiries concerning reproduction outside the scope of the
above should be sent to the Rights Department, Oxford University Press, at the
address above.
You must not circulate this work in any other form

and you must impose this same condition on any acquirer.
Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data

Names: Jordan, Randolph, author.
Title: Acoustic profiles : a sound ecology of the cinema / Randolph Jordan.
Description: New York, NY : Oxford University Press, 2023. |
Series: Oxford music/media series | Includes bibliographical references and index. |
Contents: Introduction. Acoustic Profiling—Audible Transparency :
Modernist Acoustic Design in Jacques Tati’s Playtime—Immersive
Reflexivity : Documenting the Inaudible in Peter Mettler’s Picture of
Light—Reflective Empathy : Soundscape Composition and the
Spatialization of Music in Gus Van Sant’s Last Days—The
Schizophonographic Imagination : Visualizing the Myth of Sonic Fidelity
in David Lynch’s Twin Peaks—Unsettled Listening : Tracking
Vancouver’s Contested Acoustic Profiles across Media—Conclusion.
A Position Piece.
Identifiers: LCCN 2023011412 (print) | LCCN 2023011413 (ebook) |
ISBN 9780190226145 (paperback) | ISBN 9780190226077 (hardback) |
ISBN 9780190226176 (epub)
Subjects: LCSH: Film soundtracks—History and criticism. |
Motion picture music—History and criticism. | Sound (Philosophy)
Classification: LCC ML2075 .J7 2023 (print) | LCC ML2075 (ebook) |
DDC 781.5/42—dc23/eng/20230523
LC record available at https://lccn.loc.gov/2023011412
LC ebook record available at https://lccn.loc.gov/2023011413
DOI: 10.1093/oso/9780190226077.001.0001
Paperback printed by Marquis Book Printing, Canada

Hardback printed by Bridgeport National Bindery, Inc., United States of America
Dedicated to my father, Robert Christopher Jordan (1933–2020),
who taught me how to listen.
And to my colleague and friend, Danijela Kulizic-Wilson (1966–2021),
with whom I enjoyed listening.
Contents
Acknowledgments ix
Introduction: Acoustic Profiling 1

1. Audible Transparency: Modernist Acoustic Design in
Jacques Tati’s Playtime 29
2. Immersive Reflexivity: Documenting the Inaudible in
Peter Mettler’s Picture of Light 61
3. Reflective Empathy: Soundscape Composition and the
Spatialization of Music in Gus Van Sant’s Last Days 97
4. The Schizophonographic Imagination: Visualizing the
Myth of Sonic Fidelity in David Lynch’s Twin Peaks 127
5. Unsettled Listening: Tracking Vancouver’s Contested
Acoustic Profiles across Media 171
Conclusion: A Position Piece 211
Notes 227
Index 231
Acknowledgments
The road to this book has been longer than I wanted it to be. It began as a
simple plan to revise my PhD thesis (Concordia University, 2010), and ended
up becoming a major re-imagining of my interest in acoustic ecology fol-
lowing my postdoctoral research fellowship (Simon Fraser University, 2012–
14). Originally contracted by Oxford at the end of my postdoc, the project
slowed under the burden of a seemingly endless stream of short-term yet de-
manding teaching contracts over the past ten years, none of which came with
much (if any) provision for research activities. It is largely due to the patience
of my editor, Norman Hirschy, that this project has finally seen the light of
day. His willingness to wait out those periods during which I was not able
to produce any work, while maintaining his encouragement and enthusiasm
for the project, is the reason this book is finally being published. Thanks,
Norm. You have been wonderful to work with. Here I must also thank series
editor Daniel Goldmark and the various anonymous reviewers who have
provided valuable commentary on this work throughout the various stages
of the project.
My family also needs a hearty thanks up front. If it wasn’t for the open-
ness and support of my parents, Maya and Robert Jordan, I would never
have found my way into the field of film studies and this book never would
have materialized. I have wanted to write books since I was a kid, and they
encouraged my writing at every turn. They are also responsible for bringing
music and the arts to my life at a very early age, my dad a professional clas-
sical guitarist and my mom a potter, and in my passion for film I found a way
to bring attention to music and sound into my writing. All along the way
my younger brother, Ed, has been a kindred spirit in the endless quest for
new experiences in sound and image, and we have shared countless hours in
meaningful contemplation of art and life as we forged our often intersecting
paths through the world. I have dedicated this book to my dad who was born
in Oxford and would have been thrilled to see his son’s first monograph
emblazoned with the name of his hometown. Sadly, he died two years ago in
my own hometown of Vancouver, British Columbia, where he lived most of
x Acknowledgments
his life after leaving England in the early 1950s. I offer some thoughts about
his influence on my work in this book’s conclusion.
And then there’s my new family. My partner, Sarah, entered my life just as
I was starting my doctoral studies twenty years ago, so she has been there to
suffer through the entire process. During that process we’ve had three chil-
dren of our own. Keelia was born during the last year of my dissertation and
she took her first steps just before I submitted—we found our legs at the same
time. Myla was born just as I began my first full-time teaching contract at
Concordia University, and Drake was born right in the middle of my subse-
quent postdoctoral fellowship. The nature of contract teaching is such that
my writing has always been a separate activity from my paid employment
and is generally done during evenings and weekends, which is time I could
have been spending with my family. While I often chose to back-burner the
book for the sake of family time, my general anxiety surrounding the ever-
incomplete project has been hard to manage and has often spilled over into
our home life. It has been largely thanks to Sarah’s rare combination of stable
employment and lifestyle flexibility that we have been able to make this all
work. Here I must also offer thanks to her side of the family, Phyllis, Laura,
John, and Chris, for frequently stepping in to help with child care when
needed. We all look forward to a better work/family balance now that this
project has come to a close.
Since this book is the result of several distinct stages in my academic ca-
reer, there are a few clusters of people that have had a major influence on what
is contained in these pages. This goes all the way back to my first advisor,
Mario Falsetto, who died a few years ago. I wrote my MA thesis (Concordia
University, 2003) on sound in the films of David Lynch, and some of that ma-
terial has come full circle here in my chapter on Lynch’s Twin Peaks (1990–
2017). Mario’s guidance during my first experience with long-form writing
laid the foundation for all the work to follow. Mario also introduced me to the
wonderful world of experimental cinema through his grad seminar on the
American avant-garde, which helped me understand what I loved so much
about filmmakers like David Lynch and Gus Van Sant, for whom Mario and
I had a mutual passion, an influence that can felt across this book. During my
doctoral studies, Mario gave me the opportunity to workshop my early ideas
around Gus Van Sant in his grad seminars on the director, and this work has
taken shape in the form of my chapter on Van Sant’s Last Days (2005) here.
Then there’s my PhD thesis committee, consisting of Catherine Russell,
Rosemary Mountain, and Jonathan Sterne. Katie was a fabulous thesis
Acknowledgments xi
advisor, providing timely feedback and useful advice through all stages of
that process. Her scholarship has been influential on my thinking about
both experimental and documentary film, an influence that is clearest in my
chapter on Peter Mettler’s Picture of Light (1994). And her continuing sup-
port for my work after graduation has been very important to my develop-
ment. It has been a pleasure to spend several years on faculty with Katie in
the cinema department at Concordia.
Rosemary Mountain’s guidance through the world of electroacoustic
music was formative for my early thinking about intersecting acoustic
ecology with film studies, and it was thanks to her that I was able to work
with R. Murray Schafer as a teaching assistant for an interdisciplinary the-
ater course at Concordia in 2005, an experience that exposed me not only to
a broader scope of Schafer’s work but to the very man himself, an important
step toward articulating my thoughts about his work and influence in these
pages. Rosemary and her husband, Harry, also provided a real feeling of
family during my doctoral years with frequent occasions to dine with them at
their home just two blocks from my own in Montreal’s NDG borough.
Jonathan Sterne’s influence on this work cannot be overstated. He arrived
in Montreal to take a position at McGill University one year after I started
my doctoral studies, and his first seminar on sound studies in 2004 (to which
I was alerted by my friend and colleague Mike Baker) was a revelation to
me. I invited him to come on as an external advisor after the very first class
and he did not hesitate to accept. His knowledge of, and contributions to,
the field of sound studies are all over this book (maybe a little too much),
and some of my work for that class has found its way in here, too, particu-
larly around the issue of sonic fidelity. But Jonathan’s influence on my career
has moved well beyond scholarship; he has become a long-term mentor to
me through the trials and tribulations of the academic marketplace in the
years following my graduation. Much of the material in this book has been
workshopped through his graduate working groups at McGill University, in-
cluding the book proposal itself, and it was Jonathan who introduced me to
Norman Hirschy at the SCMS conference in 2013, which opened the door to
discussions about working together on this project. The rest, as they say, is
history.
I will take a moment here to also thank my friend Donato Totaro, who
teaches in the cinema department at Concordia University and is founder
and editor of the online film journal Offscreen. I have been a regular con-
tributor to Offscreen since the early days of my MA, and Donato has given
xii Acknowledgments
me several dissertations’ worth of space in the journal to wax at great length

about my cinematic fixations, particularly around festival coverage here in
Montreal. He and his partner Sandra also provided valuable commentary on
the last draft of my dissertation, which has gone on to inform the revisions
present in this book. Through all of that we have become good friends and
he and his family have provided an important base to help make my adopted
city of Montreal feel like the home that it is now.
For the postdoctoral fellowship phase of this work, funded by the Fonds
de recherche du Québec (FRQ), I am greatly indebted to my supervisor
Barry Truax at Simon Fraser University. As an original member of the World
Soundscape Project he was a wealth of information and lived experience
about the formation of the field that I was researching. He provided me with
boundless resources, including his own working group at the Sonic Research
Studio, where I was able to present various stages of my research and learn
about related work being done by others in the school. It was there that I met
a remarkable group of colleagues including Vincent Andrisani, Nathan
Clarkson, Milena Droumeva, Dave Murphy, and Jennifer Schine (who where
collectively dubbed the “acoustic crew”) along with Tim Newman, a fellow
historian of BC film completing his PhD at SFU, and a former student of my
father. Over my two years in town we had wide-ranging conversations about
our work and the state of acoustic ecology today, sometimes while playing
bocce on Vincent’s carefully groomed lawn. I will remember this time as the
most rewarding period in my academic life, carrying the skills I had honed
during my doctoral studies into two years of intensive discovery and relative
freedom. This was also the period during which my book project became
something quite different from my dissertation, and I thank everyone asso-
ciated with the Sonic Research Studio during my time there for their input
into reshaping my thinking about how acoustic ecology might intersect with
film studies. Milena and I went on to edit the recent collection Sound, Media,
Ecology (Palgrave, 2019) that offers new accounts of the history of acoustic
ecology and a survey of new work that extends the scopes of the field for the
twenty-first century. In turn, materials in this collection are cited frequently
throughout my book here.
In 2017–18 I spent a year on faculty in the School of Image Arts at Ryerson
University, where I was given space to present my work in a variety of ways,
including teaching courses on Vancouver cinema and sound production, a
faculty talk on my research, and gallery space for an installation version of
my related multimedia project Bell Tower of False Creek (which I reference
Acknowledgments xiii
in the conclusion to this book). I have also worked with colleagues there in
ways that have shaped this book, including filmmaking collaboration with
fellow Concordia PhD and long-time friend Gerda Cammaer, an aspect of
my creative practice that has been an important part of my research process
and methodology. I have also contributed chapters to several books ed-
ited by Gerda and other Ryerson faculty that have helped shape my present
arguments around acoustic ecology and cinema. I am also grateful for my
friendship with Karla McManus, who arrived at Ryerson for a limited term
contract at the same time as I did, and who was also commuting weekly from
Montreal for the gig. Karla and I spent a great deal of time in discussion
around our mutual interests in ecology and media, the books we were deep
in the middle of writing, the job market we were both navigating, and the
neck pain induced by long train rides. Karla’s encouragement during these
challenging times is one of the reasons I got this book done.
Every chapter in this book once lived in the form of conference
presentations, and I am grateful in particular to the Film Studies Association
of Canada, the Society for Cinema and Media Studies, and the Canadian
Communications Association for providing platforms and audiences to get
this material rolling with a great deal of valuable feedback along the way, in-
cluding an award of second place in the 2011 SCMS student writing compe-
tition for a draft of my chapter on Jacques Tati’s Playtime (1967). But there is
one conference that stands out from all the rest, becoming a true community
well beyond academic networking: Music and the Moving Image (MaMI),
hosted by New York University and organized by Ron Sadoff and Gillian
Anderson. I have presented at the conference every year since 2011, where
I have met the most incredible group of scholars dedicated to the study of
film music and sound, gathered in a spirit of exuberant exchange and cama-
raderie that I have not seen matched anywhere else. There I have made life-
long friends in Eric Dienstfrey, Kevin Donnelly, Rebecca Fülöp, Liz Greene,
Danijela Kulezic-Wilson, Anthony Linden Jones, Mike Miley, Katie Quanz,
Katherine Spring, and Elsie Walker, among others with whom I have shared
many a post-conference meal, film, and/or concert, and who produce work
that continues to intersect with my own in a variety of ways. I will single
out two from this list for special mention. I first became aware of Katherine
Spring’s work when she presented on the pedagogical value of soundwalking
for film studies, in which she cited my dissertation. We went on to collabo-
rate on related projects, including the organization of a yearly soundwalking
event for the MaMI conference, and an entry to the Journal of Cinema and
xiv Acknowledgments
Media Studies Teaching Dossier. And more than anyone else at the confer-
ence, Danijela Kulezic-Wilson shared my passion for the experiential quali-
ties of sound design and her work has shown me the value in accounting for
these qualities in the context of academic scholarship. Danijela died last year,
shortly after the publication of her last book, Sound Design is the New Score
(2019). I was honored to serve as a reviewer on her manuscript, for which
I broke anonymity so as to foster a deeper dialogue with her around this
provocative material. I had hoped that she would be able to return the favor
on my own book, but I was too slow to make it happen in time. Thankfully
we have had many discussions about my work over the years, particularly
around the films of Gus Van Sant, about whom she also wrote quite a bit.
These conversations have informed my work here. Above all else, though,
I cherish our time out on the streets of New York City during the MaMI
conference year after year. Danijela was always game to venture into lesser
charted territories like John Zorn’s jazz club The Stone and the Dream House
installation by La Monte Young and Marian Zazeela. I last saw Danijela in
person on the night of our Dream House excursion in 2019. We spent some
good time in there, wandering amidst the layering frequencies blasting from
the four corners of the room, lying on the floor, inviting the heavy contin-
uous multi-tonal droning to work its vibrational magic on our collective con-
sciousness. I would like to think of her this way now, at rest in the house of
dreams. In that spirit, this book is dedicated to Danijela as well.
Like the listener in the Dream House, this book resonates at the inter-
section of multiple sources firing from all directions with simultaneously
overlapping tones. As you can imagine, for a project that came together
over such a long period, various elements in these pages have had lives in
prior publications. The threads across my previous work are too complex
to account for here, and the relevant works have been cited appropriately
throughout the book. But I would like to acknowledge a few works that were
particularly important in transitioning from my dissertation to the present
book by way of my postdoctoral research. Key aspects of my general meth-
odology for intersecting acoustic ecology with film studies were laid out in
my essay, “The Ecology of Listening while Looking in the Cinema: Reflective
Audioviewing in Gus Van Sant’s Elephant” (2012), which also provided the
basis for my opening analysis of Elephant (2003) in this book’s introduction
and my discussion of Gus Van Sant’s subsequent film Last Days in Chapter 3.
My work on phonograph turntables in the films of David Lynch in Chapter 4
Acknowledgments xv
reaches back to arguments and analyses found in my MA thesis, but this ma-
terial has been greatly reworked and expanded in the wake of Lynch’s film-
ography since 2003, which has confirmed my original arguments while
allowing room to substantiate my claims across a much broader scope of the
director’s work. On the occasion of the return of Twin Peaks for Season 3 in
2017, I published some initial thoughts about sound in the new series in the
francophone journal 24 Images, translated as, “Interference: Le geographie
sonore chez David Lynch” (2017a), which I revised for English publication in
Offscreen as, “Three Soundtrack Albums and a Record Player: A Twin Peaks
Music Review (Sort Of)” (2017b). Finally, Chapter 5 is based on my post-
doctoral research into the use of sound in the cinemas of Vancouver, British
Columbia. This research has yielded a number of publications containing ma-
terial that has been adapted for this book, beginning with a pair of blog posts
on Sounding Out! for a series edited by Katherine Spring (2014) and another
by yours truly (2015). These posts were revised and expanded for the essay,
“Unsettling the Soundtrack: Acoustic Profiling and the Documentation of
Community and Place,” published in The Routledge Companion to Screen
Music and Sound (2017c), edited by MaMI organizer Ron Sadoff and con-
ference regulars Miguel Mera and Ben Winters, and this essay formed the
basis for the even greater expansion in Chapter 5 here. I am grateful to all
the reviewers and editors who have provided feedback on this work over the
years as I developed the methodology and analyses that are now formalized
into a sustained argument across this book.
Finally, I am particularly grateful to Hildegard Westerkamp for her avail-
ability to discuss my interest in her work over the years, and especially for
her essay, “The Disruptive Nature of Listening: Today, Yesterday, Tomorrow,”
(2019), in which she offers thoughtful responses to my critiques of the early
work of the World Soundscape Project found in some of my writing about
Vancouver cinema. In turn, I have been able to take these responses into ac-
count for my revised analyses in this book.
I conclude by acknowledging that this book was written on the unceded
lands of the Kanien’kehá:ka Nation of the Tiohtià:ke region, now called
Montreal, where I live and work, and in the territories of səl̓ilw̓ətaʔɬ (Tsleil-
Waututh), Sḵwx̱wú7mesh Úxwumixw (Squamish), səl̓ilw̓ətaʔɬ (Tsleil-
Waututh) and xʷməθkʷəy̓əm (Musqueam) Nations in the region now called
Vancouver, the subject of Chapter 5 and about which I follow up in the con-
clusion to this book.
xvi Acknowledgments
References
Droumeva, Milena, and Randolph Jordan, eds. 2019. Sound, Media, Ecology.
New York: Palgrave Macmillan.
Jordan, Randolph. 2003. Starting From Scratch: Turntables, Auditory Representation,
and the Structure of the Known Universe in the Films of David Lynch. MA Thesis, Film
Studies Program, Concordia University.
Jordan, Randolph, 2010. The Schizophonic Imagination: Audiovisual Ecology in the
Cinema. PhD Dissertation, Humanities Program, Concordia University.
Jordan, Randolph. 2012. “The Ecology of Listening while Looking in the
Cinema: Reflective Audioviewing in Gus Van Sant’s Elephant.” Organised Sound 17, no.
3 (December): 248–256.
Jordan, Randolph. 2014. “Unsettled Listening: Integrating Film and Place.” Sounding Out!
blog (August 14). https://soundstudiesblog.com/2014/08/14/unsettled-listening-inte
grating-film-and-place/
Jordan, Randolph. 2015. “Unsettling the World Soundscape Project: The Bell Tower of
False Creek, Vancouver.” Sounding Out! blog (September 3). https://soundstudiesblog.
com/2015/09/03/unsettling-the-world-soundscape-project-the-bell-tower-of-false-
creek-vancouver/
Jordan, Randolph. 2017a. “Interference: la geographie sonore chez David Lynch.” 24
Images 184 (October/November): 31–35.
Jordan, Randolph. 2017b. “Three Soundtrack Albums and a Record Player: A Twin Peaks
Music Review (Sort Of).” Offscreen 21, nos. 11–12 (November/December).
Jordan, Randolph. 2017c. “Unsettling the Soundtrack: Acoustic Profiling and the
Documentation of Community and Place.” In The Routledge Companion to Screen
Music and Sound, edited by Miguel Mera, Ron Sadoff, and Ben Winters, 590–602.
New York: Routledge.
Westerkamp, Hildegard. 2019. “The Disruptive Nature of Listening: Today, Yesterday,
Tomorrow.” In Sound, Media, Ecology, edited by Milena Droumeva and Randolph
Jordan, 45–64. New York: Palgrave Macmillan.
Introduction
Acoustic Profiling
Early in Gus Van Sant’s film Elephant (2003), loosely based on the Columbine
High School massacre in Colorado, USA, we find student Alex (Alex Frost)
mapping out the space of the cafeteria in preparation for the shooting spree
that he’ll soon embark upon with his friend Eric (Eric Deulen). In the final
shot of this sequence, he pauses for a moment and glances around the room
in distress as the noisy lunchtime crowd rises to higher levels of amplitude
and reverberation. The shot ends as he raises his hands to his head, wincing
as though in pain.1 The next time we find Alex in this space it has been
emptied of all life, his own footsteps now reverberating through the vacant
space as the chaos of the mid-day bustle has been replaced with the sounds
of a forest environment underscored by electronic drones. For a moment he
can sit in peace, having violently banished the sounds he apparently found
so disturbing the previous day, able now to hear his own place in the world
again. Yet the peace is disturbing, a forced emptying of interior space into
its surrounding exterior reflected by the bizarre co-existence of electronics,
birds, and wind-rustled branches within the boundaries of an institutional
enclosure.
The soundtrack we hear at this moment is a combination of the loca-
tion recording made during the shoot and a pre-existing piece by electro-
acoustic music composer Frances White entitled “Walk Through Resonant
Landscape #2” (1992).2 White’s piece provides the climax to the film’s recur-
ring use of soundscape composition, a musical genre based on field recordings
as the basis for sound art that invites listeners toward a heightened environ-
mental awareness, a goal imported from the field of acoustic ecology out
of which the practice developed. Acoustic ecology was born of Canadian
composer R. Murray Schafer’s program of public education about the
sonic environments in which we live, which he began in the 1960s at Simon
Fraser University in Vancouver, British Columbia, Canada. Schafer called
for an interdisciplinary approach to thinking about the role of sound in
Acoustic Profiles. Randolph Jordan, Oxford University Press. © Oxford University Press 2023.
DOI: 10.1093/oso/9780190226077.003.0001
2 Acoustic Profiles
our lives, lending a composer’s ear to hearing the soundscapes of the world
as compositions that can and should be orchestrated according to taste.
Instead of joining the chorus of noise abatement campaigns that had been
dominating public discourse on urban sound, he proposed acoustic de-
sign as the goal of acoustic ecology: the creation of better sounding sonic
environments through increased attention to the auditory aspects of archi-
tecture and urban planning. Some of his colleagues took the idea of acoustic
design as the premise for creating soundscape compositions that called at-
tention to the reorchestration of specific sound environments as acts of
media intervention, which could then inspire interventions into the design
of the built environments.
Van Sant’s decision to use Frances White’s piece, along with two other
soundscape compositions by Schafer’s colleague Hildegard Westerkamp,
invites an intertextual reading of the film through the field of acoustic
ecology and its emphasis on acoustic design, whether in musical compo-
sition or the architecture of public space. In Elephant, Alex takes a militant
approach to the reorchestration of his acoustic environment, the extreme
end of the negatively charged noise abatement that Schafer hoped to steer
away from. Yet in framing this horror by way of intersecting film sound
design with the art of soundscape composition, the filmmakers invite us
to reflect upon the narrative situation by way of its formal execution, a re-
flexive call to open our ears wider to the environments outside the walls of
our screening rooms.
No doubt it is a cynical move to suggest that we think of something as har-
rowing as a high school shooting spree as a kind of militant acoustic ecology.
But the loaded nature of such a claim brings the key premise of this book
to the fore: that hearing films through the tenets of acoustic ecology can re-
veal powerful themes of environmental (dis)engagement at work in their
narrative, aesthetic, and industrial contexts that would otherwise go unad-
dressed. The confluence of soundscape composition and film sound design
in Elephant provides a way of thinking about this film as inviting a level of au-
dience engagement unaccounted for by the common critical description of
the film as inevitably distancing, the film that prompted Kent Jones to crown
Van Sant as “the prince of calculated disaffection” (2003, 28). If we listen to
the film as a call to reflect upon the mutually affecting relationship between
people and their soundscapes, we find an alternative way into the sociopolit-
ical issues at its heart. At the same time, we can cast a necessarily critical ear
toward the work of acoustic ecology, a field that has sustained a great deal of
Introduction 3
critique over the years, largely directed toward the didacticism of Schafer’s
prescriptions and biases (both implicit and explicit).
Acoustic ecology was created to get people thinking about the
relationships between our sonic environments and the social contexts that
sustain them. The field hasn’t (yet) managed to prompt the mass awareness of
environmental sound or shift in approaches to urban planning that Schafer
had hoped for. Yet acoustic ecology’s mandate for listening has been taken up
in a broad variety of fields interested in the relationship between sound and
culture, loosely associated through the World Forum for Acoustic Ecology
founded in 1993 (see Droumeva and Jordan 2019). Indeed, you would be
hard pressed to find a work of contemporary sound studies that doesn’t make
some reference, however small, to the concepts developed by Schafer and
his colleagues. Yet there exists no model for the systematic exploration of
acoustic ecology’s potential contribution to other fields. I argue that broad-
ening the scope of acoustic ecology for media studies will help open sound-
scape research to new models of analysis, while also opening the ears of
media studies scholars to issues of sound ecology embedded in our objects
of research. In this book I begin the work of making acoustic ecology and
media studies work for each other through the intersection of film sound and
the media practices of soundscape researchers. While I focus on “cinema” as
more traditionally defined around design for theatrical exhibition and op-
erating in mode of the European art film, the later chapters expand into the
worlds of television, contemporary streaming content, and expanded cinema
forms that blur the lines between fiction/nonfiction and modes of exhibi-
tion/reception, to demonstrate how thinking about sound in film can serve
as the basis for considering a broader array of audiovisual works in a variety
of contexts. I conclude with an example of how the methodology I propose
here can transition from a tool for analyzing audiovisual media to a tool for
conducting research, producing creative works, and affecting a change in
ideology around settler positionality.
Thinking about film sound through acoustic ecology, and vice-versa,
addresses a major issue in contemporary sound studies: the consistent em-
phasis on recording and transmission as inexorably transformative acts of
mediation. The new wave of film sound theory that kicked off in the 1980s
is premised upon this line of thinking, scholars like Rick Altman and James
Lastra calling to abandon the language of “reproduction” when discussing re-
corded sound and moving instead to the idea of “representation” to acknowl-
edge the mediation at work in the construction of all film soundtracks (Lastra
4 Acoustic Profiles
2000, 153). This has been an important thrust in documentary film studies as
it moves away from naïve notions of film’s ability to offer unmediated ac-
cess to real world events, perhaps finding its most provocative expression
in Jonathan Sterne’s equation of recording with embalming, the “resonant
tomb” in which the interior of a sound event is utterly transformed while its
exterior might continue to serve a social function for listeners (2003, 290).
These are essential conceptual moves for the climate of twenty-first century
media literacy, understanding how the construction of listening practices by
individual filmmakers or major technology companies has revolved around
selling ideas about transparency that mask the machinery animating the
product. However, I have long felt that these arguments overstate the idea
of mediation; in compensating for the dangers inherent in uncritical accept-
ance of the media we lose an appreciation for the power of technologies to
facilitate real and deep engagement with the world.
Consider the role of Frances White’s “Walk Through Resonant Landscape
#2” in Elephant more closely. Van Sant and sound designer Leslie Shatz
map White’s work onto the film as a way of turning the space of the high
school inside out, calling attention not only to the narrative situation that
finds the student body scrambling about trying to find exits to the outside
world, but also triggering reflection upon how the film is connecting with the
world outside of its own making. Most obviously we are meant to meditate
upon events like the Columbine shootings, the reality outside the film that
its audiences cannot escape. But we can also meditate upon what it means
to create an intertextual relationship with White’s material at such a loaded
moment in the film, prompting us to think about similarities between White
and the filmmakers in their aesthetic strategies and thematic concerns. In so
doing we can become attuned to the role of media practice in raising impor-
tant ecological issues equally applicable to the film as to the world to which it
refers and in which the audience takes it in.
“Walk Through Resonant Landscape #2” enacts the process of engaging
with the world by way of sound technologies. It is based on recordings that
White made when she first moved from Brooklyn, New York, to Princeton,
New Jersey, and was hearing the wooded environment around her new house
for the first time. Out of these recordings she created an installation piece that
allowed users to control the movement and the layering of recorded elements
by way of a computer interface, constructing virtual “walks” through this
space that rendered the materials differently each time. The piece now exists
only as a recording of one such “walk,” opening a window into one person’s
Introduction 5
reorchestration of a sonic environment experienced by another (Pritchett

2007, 2–3). As such, “Walk Through Resonant Landscape #2” is an exten-
sion of the practice of soundwalking born of acoustic ecology. Soundwalking
is a form of spatial practice that calls for individuals to shift their audi-
tory attention while moving through and listening carefully to their sound
environments, becoming aware of their component parts and how they are
being combined, and emphasizing the role of active attention in constructing
these soundscapes within the mind (see Westerkamp 1974). Initially
conceived as a listening practice without aid of sound technologies, White’s
piece offers one example of how sound technologies can aid the process of
enhancing environmental awareness through the art of the soundwalk.
Van Sant and Shatz extend White’s electroacoustic soundwalk by mapping
her sounds onto a new space of their own construction to aid in their own
powerful exploration of the audiovisual practice of space. Much of the film is
comprised of long tracking shots following characters as they move through
the space of the high school as we hear a wide variety of auditory material
that prompts reflection upon these environments in various ways. In con-
junction with the film’s structural loops, continually revisiting the same nar-
rative events from different perspectives and with changing soundscapes,
Elephant can be understood as a walk through the resonant landscape of
its own making, and an invitation for the audience to become aware of the
process of this continual reorchestration of the space in order to reflect upon
the events taking place within it. Alex has enacted his own reorchestration
of the high school soundscape, and it is this reorchestration that White’s
piece emphasizes. As the soundscape shifts on the soundtrack, the audience
is made privy to the film’s overt construction of audiovisual space. This is a
reflexive move, but one that is designed to bring the audience in rather than
push them away, a key strategy for soundscape composition as well.
Film sound design shares with soundscape composition the power of
enacting new forms of spatial practice that call attention to our own practices
in the spaces we occupy every day, and considering these art forms relation-
ally is ideal for exploring acoustic ecology in the context of media studies.
It is the argument of this book that a literal connection between acoustic
ecology and film sound design, such as we find here in Elephant, can inform
our understanding of all sound films. In turn, understanding how films work
to shape our experience of space, inside and out of the screening room, can
help us understand the value of making acoustic ecology work in a media
studies context.
6 Acoustic Profiles
A Sound Ecology of the Cinema
This book proposes a sound ecology of the cinema by way of establishing

an interdisciplinary methodology for hearing film sound through the tenets
of acoustic ecology. In so doing I reveal the commonalities between sound
design practices for the cinema and the media practices that drive sound-
scape research. My method is to draw on the discourse of acoustic ecology
to engage in close readings of specific films and audiovisual works across a
range of international narrative fiction, documentary, and experimental
forms. Through my analyses I address ecological issues at play within the
aesthetic and thematic content of these works while rethinking acoustic
ecology as a set of media practices, which Jonathan Sterne has likened to
early manifestations of what we now call the “digital humanities” (2019). To
that end, I demonstrate how the creative use of media technologies in dif-
ferent fields can be understood relationally through the ecological issues that
connect them, revivifying acoustic ecology for media studies while broad-
ening the latter’s ecological scope. With my film analyses I provide a tool kit
for my readers to hear films with new ears, to think critically about this new
listening practice, and to extend that engagement beyond the walls of the
screening room by opening works of audiovisual media up to the considera-
tion of soundscape research.
I focus on the framework for acoustic ecology established by the practices
of the World Soundscape Project (WSP), which began in 1970 at Simon
Fraser University (SFU) in Vancouver as a case study of that city (which
continues to this day). The basic frames of reference that coalesced in their
methodology continue to inform soundscape research across the globe
today while also inspiring heated debate. There are four key dimensions to
the WSP’s practice: field recording in specific sonic environments to docu-
ment and “preserve” aspects of these environments for posterity and anal-
ysis; establishing secondary accounts of the soundscapes of the present and
past through appeals to painting, literature, interviews, and other sources;
prescribing acoustic design practices for the built environments of the fu-
ture; and the creative practice of soundscape composition that explores
all three previous areas through the use of field recordings as the basis for
musical composition with the intention of fostering environmental aware-
ness. All of these areas involve the use of media as tools for engaging the
soundscapes of specific geographic locales, hence my assertion that acoustic
ecology functions as a set of media practices.
Introduction 7
The key question driving my inquiry is how the use of media technologies
can facilitate a closer connection with the world rather than putting us at
a mediated distance from it. I first encountered the work of the World
Soundscape Project through their 1996 CD release entitled The Vancouver
Soundscape/Soundscape Vancouver 1996, which contained a selection of
recordings made in the 1970s and 1990s, along with audio documentaries
about the changing soundscape and some soundscape compositions
designed to promote reflection upon the sonic distinctiveness of the city
(World Soundscape Project 1996). I had recently moved cross-country from
Vancouver to Montreal for graduate school and there was something com-
pelling about hearing my city through these recordings, filtered through the
WSP’s media practices and my new geographical separation from home. The
profundity of my engagement prompted questions beyond the glint of nos-
talgia with which my personal association with the city was charged. In par-
ticular, I asked how it is that the naturalistic approach of these recordings
meshed ideologically with their composed counterparts on the disc to
heighten my experience of engagement, changing the way I interacted with
the city upon subsequent visits while prompting me to take a new approach
to my academic investigations of film sound. My graduate work was founded
upon a love for art cinema, while my postdoctoral research dove into the
location-specific cinemas of my hometown. This trajectory is mapped in this
book so as to demonstrate the value of embedding traditional appreciations
of film as art into investigations of how films are embedded in the sociopo-
litical dimensions of the spaces in which they are made, and how the tools of
acoustic ecology can inform that bridge.
So much contemporary sound studies theory focuses on the idea of me-
diation as distanciating, but it was clear to me that the World Soundscape
Project was driven by a profound belief that such recordings and
compositions could engender a deep connection to the world. There is a
level of naïveté present in the work of the WSP, which has resulted in a lack
of self-reflection upon their practices—particularly in the early days. Yet
it would be to the great benefit of sound studies to think through just how
their enthusiasm for the power of recording to provide access to the world
in front of the microphones might be brought to other areas of inquiry
within the world of sonic representation. I begin by demonstrating this
value for the field of film studies by way of examining how acoustic ecology
allows us to engage more deeply with films, recognizing how they invite us
to rethink our experience of the spaces we occupy every day. In turn, I show
8 Acoustic Profiles
how the tools provided by film sound studies can fuel critical reassessment
of the work of acoustic ecology.
Film sound theory offers a rich discursive framework through which to
account for the use of media technologies in the work of acoustic ecology,
an essential move for taking a media studies approach to understanding
the field’s desire to foster environmental awareness through attention to
the role of sound in culture. My approach is based on a double critical
movement. On the one hand, a sound ecology of the cinema entails the ap-
plication of acoustic ecology’s prescribed listening practices to film sound
studies. On the other hand, my approach implies a new way of thinking
about acoustic ecology born of film studies, a way to consider acoustic
ecology’s practice through film studies’ long history of dealing with
problems of fidelity and realism through recording technologies. Learning
to hear the practical and aesthetic commonalities between the work of film
sound design and acoustic ecology’s media practices enriches soundscape
research by opening up a vast collection of recorded film materials for in-
clusion in the document pool under consideration by acoustic ecology. At
the same time, this intersection of fields also offers a necessary critical dis-
course for handling the challenges inherent in navigating acoustic ecology’s
media practices.
In the chapters that follow, I address each of the four dimensions of acoustic
ecology—documentation, analysis, prescription, and composition—through
a set of films that demonstrate, enact, and challenge these dimensions.
I argue that these films invite audiences to reflect upon their approaches to
the audiovisual construction of space so that we may carry this reflection
out to the world beyond the frame of the screen and its surrounding walls.
In so doing I demonstrate how the intersection of acoustic ecology and film
sound studies can make films work as both extensions of acoustic ecology
and means for critically rethinking the field.
Keeping the Faith
At the core of my investigation lies the notion of fidelity, a long-standing

emblem of the relationship between recordings and the world they record,
enshrined equally in the languages of sound reproduction and visual doc-
umentary media. What it means for a film or sound recording to be faithful
Introduction 9
to that which it represents has long been debated amidst the shifting tides
of sound studies and documentary studies alike, and these debates have
informed the practices of acoustic ecology as well. It is productive to con-
sider how these areas overlap as a key aspect of my methodology. Across
this book I intersect the language developed for soundscape research in
acoustic ecology with key concepts from film sound theory, and this inter-
section centers on the discourse of fidelity that has been fundamental to
sound studies at large, long governing debates about realism and representa-
tion in film sound and equally applicable to acoustic ecology’s interest in the
functioning of the sonic environments in which we live.
Schafer developed his general program for acoustic ecology within the
heyday of hi-fi stereo culture, and he used the language of this culture in
the listening pedagogy he developed as a way of attuning his students to
the sounds of their daily environments. As Jonathan Sterne reminds us, the
term soundscape itself, popularized by Schafer (though it was in use prior to
Schafer’s first publications), must be understood as the product of this cul-
ture: “Soundscape was shaped by a relationship to recording, reproduction
and Western art music concert tradition. . . . Soundscape implies a way of lis-
tening to compositions—a rapt, total attention—and a sense of the world that
is much like a compositional work” (Sterne 2013, 191). Once we are listening
to our sonic environments as an audiophile might listen to her stereo, Schafer
evocatively uses descriptors like hi-fi and lo-fi to refer to different kinds of
balance between various categories of sound in any given environment. In
his words, “the quiet ambiance of the hi-fi soundscape allows the listener to
hear farther into the distance just as the countryside exercises long-range
viewing,” the opposite of the lo-fi soundscape that Schafer associates with
urban settings in which “perspective is lost” when “individual acoustic sig-
nals are obscured in an overdense population of sounds” (1977, 43). Here
Schafer deliberately draws on the inherent bias in the language of hi-fi stereo
culture with its emphasis on a high ratio of “signal” to “noise” that allows
listener’s awareness of the media itself to disappear from our attention, a van-
ishing mediation made possible by differentiating between those character-
istics that studio engineers want listeners to focus on and which they would
like us to ignore (Sterne 2003, 285). Schafer has been all too happy to play off
that bias in his own writings about what kinds of sounds might constitute
valuable signals in our everyday environments, and what kinds of sounds
should be banished as unwanted noise.
10 Acoustic Profiles
While Schafer was an early advocate for the use of sound recording
technologies to document bits of the sonic environment to aid analysis
and track changes (while attempting to “perverse” aspects that disappear),
he also displayed a vocal distaste for the presence of sounds emanating
from loudspeakers in our daily environments. He famously coined the
term schizophonia to describe an imagined state of anxiety and alienation
provoked by the experience of sound that is transmitted electroacoustically
(1977, 90–91). Many have taken Schafer’s term to be the guiding concept of
acoustic ecology in general. As Timothy Morton puts it, through the con-
cept of schizophonia, acoustic ecology “criticizes disembodiment as a fea-
ture of modern alienation. Like forms of Romanticism, acoustic ecology
yearns for an organic world of face-to-face contact in which the sound of
things corresponds to the way they appear to the senses and to a certain con-
cept of the natural” (2007, 43). This concept of the natural is tied directly to
Schafer’s idea of “human scale” as the defining concept for the ideal sound-
scape (Schafer 1977, 207), or what Jonathan Sterne has called “the spatiality
of the unamplified voice” (2003, 342).
Schafer’s notion of human scale is incompatible with the technological
realities that govern our daily activities of communication in the world today,
and as such Schafer’s anti-technological bent has been the subject of much cri-
tique. Indeed, it is perhaps the most common criticism of Schafer’s writings
that he uses language borrowed from hi-fi stereo culture to make arguments
against the effects of sound technology in modern sonic environments,
all the while advocating the use of this technology in the study of our
environments through the World Soundscape Project. Andra McCartney
extends these critiques to question the ethics of conducting soundscape
research guided by the discourses of fidelity that have so problematically
constructed ways of thinking about the relationship between sound tech-
nology and sonic objects in the world (2010). The model listener implied by
Schafer’s writing has also been critiqued for its lack of diversity in addressing
a variety of listening positions, whether in terms of general listening prac-
tice (attentive vs. distracted) or along intersectional lines (race, class, gender,
etc.), with some scholars suggesting ways of incorporating a broader array of
listening positions into the way we theorize our relationships with the sonic
environment (see Bijsterveld 2008, 23; Birdsall 2012, 21–23), a move Barry
Truax began when he laid out a continuum of listening positions in Acoustic
Communication (first published in 1984 and revised for the second edition in
2001). Some have called Schafer out on the explicit racism on display in some
Introduction 11
of his writings, most powerfully in the opening to Dylan Robinson’s book

Hungry Listening, in which he quotes Schafer belittling Inuit throat singing,
an all-too-common example of how colonial encounters with indigenous
music have typically unfolded (2020, 1). And Hildegard Westerkamp has re-
cently gone on record about her experiences as the only female member of
the WSP and the gender biases she faced from Schafer and other members
of the team (see Westerkamp 2019). All of this is to say that the theoretical
biases in play in Schafer’s writings are part and parcel of the real-world con-
text of social inequities that need to be accounted for in any discussion of
acoustic ecology’s influence and relevance on the broader field of sound
studies. The problematic construction of fidelity takes center stage in these
conversations, and will serve as the basis for how I address these issues in the
chapters that follow.
Given that the discourse of fidelity lies at the heart of the development
of acoustic ecology, it is essential to keep this discourse in mind when
addressing the media practices at work in the field, with all their problems
taken alongside their benefits. Fidelity, for Schafer, is characteristic of a
sonic environment in which sounds do not compete with each other for
our attention, and in which human communication is unhindered—in es-
sence: a fantasy, along the same lines as the fantasy of transparency that
holds the possibility that sound technology could provide direct and un-
mediated access to the sound event that was recorded. The fact that Schafer
can use the language of fidelity to describe environments free of the kinds
of technology for which this language was invented is not a paradox or con-
tradiction: it is Schafer developing a theoretical construct for an idea of
fidelity that is in line with the fantasy of transparency espoused by hi-fi
stereo culture, carrying the biases of his own privileged positionality along
with it. Schafer and the proponents of hi-fi technologies want us to learn
to listen in the ways that suit their positionality the best. Recognizing
the constructed nature of these ideas about fidelity, and the role of media
technologies in shaping these constructions, makes acoustic ecology espe-
cially well-suited for application to the analyses of media arts. Across this
book, I endeavor to illustrate how starting with the problems embedded
in the theoretical constructs of Schafer and the WSP, like fidelity, provides
the basis for a deeper understanding of how acoustic ecology can inform
our knowledge of film sound, and how engaging with film sound in this
way can, in turn, offer pathways into rethinking acoustic ecology for the
twenty-first century.
The Medial Move
Each of the films I discuss in this book enact what I will call a medial move: a
reflexive strategy designed to call particular attention to the ways in which
technologies of sound create portals of access to the world through conven-
tional notions of mediation. Through a medial move, that which is frequently
considered distanciating shifts to an alternative notion of mediation that
emphasizes inclusion; audiences are brought in rather than pushed away.
Such medial moves frequently hang on foregrounding problems with the
construct of fidelity as the basis for exploring the cinema’s sonic potential,
and these problems are my focus in this book.
Jonathan Sterne takes issue with conflating the term media with media-
tion, asserting that “Mediation is not necessarily intercession, filtering, or
representation. Another sense of mediation describes a form of nonlinear,
relational causality, a movement from one set of relations to another” (Sterne
2012, 9). He uses the term mediality to address the reality “that communi-
cation technologies are a fundamental part of what it means to speak, to
hear, or to do anything with sound. Mediality simply points to a collectively
embodied process of cross-reference,” without assuming that one form of
experiencing the world is automatically less mediated than another (10).
Sterne’s use of the term mediality thus allows for thinking about the use of re-
cording media as ways of engaging with the world rather than exemplifying
our removal from it.
For the purposes of this book we will need to understand the value of
mediality for discussions of works of sound and film art. Here I turn to
Timothy Morton’s use of the term medial as part of a taxonomy of strategies
in play in art works that engage in ecomimesis, or “nature writing”: devel-
oping an idea of nature embedded in the formal strategies through which
the idea is expressed. What he calls medial writing stands as an interdisci-
plinary alternative to the literary notion of phatic writing designed to call at-
tention to how the act of writing itself invokes the mediation involved in the
writing process (2007, 37). In film studies we generally defer to reflexivity as
the relevant term, most often referred to as a distancing device. Yet Morton
argues that medial strategies in nature writing are used not to distanciate the
reader, but rather to generate the illusion that the reader is there with the
writer to create a sense of immersion (38). Morton’s goal in defining medial
aesthetic strategies is to illuminate the ways in which ideas about “nature”
are constructed in ecowriting so that we may, in turn, recognize these ideas
Introduction 13
as problematic constructs that stand in the way of addressing nature as it is

rather than how we imagine it to be. Understanding the medial quality of
art works that represent the world allows us to understand the processes of
representation. While Morton wants to call attention to these processes in
order to undo our imaginary and learn instead to engage with the world as it
is, I argue that it is precisely this mediality that allows for engaging the world
by way of our imaginative uses of technologies. The key is to understand how
mediality functions to put us in touch with the world, not simply to represent
it according to prescribed ideologies.
The most instructive aspect of acoustic ecology lies in the development
and proliferation of soundscape composition as an artistic embodiment of
the World Soundscape Project’s initial impulses toward documentation,
analysis, and prescription. Soundscape composition exemplifies the form
of mediality that I will be applying across this book. WSP member Barry
Truax has identified a continuum of practices within the sphere of sound-
scape composition. On one end of the spectrum lies what he refers to as
“phonography” (2008, 106), privileging the kind of untouched single-take
location recordings that make up the bulk of the raw material in the WSP’s
archive, R. Murray Schafer’s preferred approach to both the documentation
and presentation of the sounds of Vancouver when he founded the WSP in
1970. On the other end of the spectrum lies the “abstracted soundscape”
often including heavily processed recordings in which any material captured
on location may no longer even be recognizable as such (106). Soundscape
composers like Truax and Westerkamp have moved away from the limita-
tions of the single-take approach to documentation and embraced the power
of technology as tool for composition to explore the many ways that alter-
native recording practices and studio techniques can foster heightened en-
gagement with place. These differing ideologies are partially responsible
for the rift that opened up between Schafer and his colleagues on the World
Soundscape Project, perfectly illustrated by the differences across the two
iterations of the Vancouver Soundscape releases. The first in 1973 consists
mostly of raw single-take field recordings annotated by audio commentary
and notes in the accompanying booklet, while the 1996 release expands
the repertoire to include heavily composed sound pieces that offer creative
explorations of the changing nature of Vancouver’s soundscape across a
twenty-year period (Droumeva and Jordan 2019, xiii).
Through the development of soundscape composition as both a mode of
research within acoustic ecology and an artistic offshoot of the movement,
the WSP shifted from implicit to explicit acknowledgment of the role

that sound technology can play in fostering engagement with geographic
locations. Soundscape composition thus becomes a useful touchstone for
addressing how we can read engagement with place through the recording
and transmission of sound across a variety of media. Soundscape compo-
sition actively engages acoustic ecology’s emphasis on understanding par-
ticular geographic locales while foregrounding its own medial processes
as part of this understanding. In short, soundscape composition’s goal is
medial: to promote listener engagement with real-world space through
foregrounding the ways in which our experience of this space can be
shaped by sound technology.
Katharine Norman uses the term reflective listening to refer to a mode
of listening based on heightened environmental awareness through the
use of sound technologies that guides artists in the creation of soundscape
compositions, a mode of listening that these compositions are designed
to engender in the audience as well (1996, 5). Central to this mode of lis-
tening is the foregrounding of mediality through the balance between the
naturalism of the recorded environments that make up the compositional
building blocks and their treatment through technologies of electroacoustic
recording and transmission, a balance that Barry Truax describes as the “di-
alectic . . . between the real and the imaginary, as well as between the ref-
erential and the abstract” (2001, 237). For Hildegard Westerkamp, the key
to linking soundscape composition with acoustic ecology is recognizing this
dialectic not only in terms of the aesthetic treatment of field recordings as
heard in the finished piece, but in the relationship between the composer and
the environments she engages with while making the piece (see Westerkamp
2002). This is a dialectic between the act of recording and the manipulation
of these recordings in the studio, both of which involve the use of sound
technology to change listening practices. For Norman, reflective listening is
applicable both to the composer’s listening practice while making the piece
and her desire to inspire such reflection in the audience hearing the fin-
ished piece.
Later in this book I bring Norman’s concept of reflective listening into
the audiovisual context of the cinema, deliberately drawing a connection
between the work of soundscape composition as an extension of acoustic
ecology and the work of film sound designers interested in provoking au-
dience engagement through their contribution to the representation of au-
diovisual space. Listening to film sound in a reflective way is based on the
Introduction 15
awareness of various levels of mediality between sound and the built envi-
ronment, environment and recording, recording and composition, compo-
sition and listener, and listener and environment. When we think of acoustic
ecology in general as a media practice, it is by folding the ideologies that
drive soundscape composition back onto the other dimensions of the field’s
use of media technologies for soundscape research, particularly as they relate
to the four dimensions I have outlined: field recording as documentation,
analysis of primary and secondary documents, prescriptions for shaping the
soundscapes of the future, and the role of the arts in engaging all of these
dimensions to enhance listener consciousness. I argue for the value in con-
sidering these practices in relation to the work of film sound design to un-
derstand the ecological implications of cinematic spatial practices, while
drawing on the rich discourse of film sound theory to bring acoustic ecology
into the sphere of media studies.
Acoustic Profiling
To enable my examination of the mediality on display in the films under

discussion here I propose a methodology called acoustic profiling, a way of
intersecting useful terms and concepts from acoustic ecology and the dis-
course of film sound theory in order to attend to the sonic strategies used in
films to articulate space in ways that challenge established notions of sonic
fidelity. I begin with film historian James Lastra’s use of the term perceptual fi-
delity as a category for auditory representation in the cinema that emphasizes
the relationship between a listener’s position in the world and the role of
technology in constructing this position. In arguing for thinking about all
film sound as representation rather than reproduction, Lastra demonstrates
that sound recording for film has brought together two traditions of repre-
sentation: those of the phonographic industry and those of the telephonic in-
dustry. The telephonic model emphasizes the intelligibility of speech over all
other elements of the soundtrack, often at the expense of realism. The phono-
graphic model, on the other hand, emphasizes perceptual fidelity, referring
to the idea that the sound in a film remains faithful to what might be heard if
the listener were occupying the space represented on screen (2000, 138–139).
Built into these modes of representation are ideologies about what sounds
are important and what sounds are not: “The ‘fidelity’ approach assumes that
all aspects of the sound event are inherently significant . . . The ‘telephonic’
approach . . . assumes that sound possesses an intrinsic hierarchy that renders

some aspects essential and others not” (Lastra 2000, 139).
The idea of perceptual fidelity is caught between two different concep-
tual frameworks: on the one hand, it refers to the way an environment would
sound to an objective listener; on the other hand, the emphasis on percep-
tual recognizes that no such objective listener actually exists, and that every
listener will hear a given soundscape in their own way—what Rick Altman
refers to as the Rashomon phenomenon in reference to the Akira Kurosawa
film (1950) and its play on the idea of subjective realities (1992, 24). So the
concept of perceptual fidelity bridges the goals of objective and subjective
representation of space, and is as much about human engagement with the
sound environment as it is about “faithful” representation of the world.
The term perceptual fidelity is useful for present purposes in the way that it
calls attention to the relationship between perception and fidelity, a tension
that was built into the very definition of soundscape once formalized as a
concept for acoustic ecology (Truax 1978, 126–127). This tension can be pro-
ductively linked to Schafer’s problematic formulation of ideal soundscapes
operating at a human scale in which all the sounds of the natural world are
bent around the basic premise of unamplified human communication, just as
filmmakers will adjust music and sound effects around dialogue. It is almost
as though Schafer developed his idea of the hi-fi soundscape after listening to
one too many movies that privilege telephonic intelligibility over perceptual
fidelity. The hi-fi soundscape he wants to live in would be designed around the
intelligibility model, but for the purposes of documenting these soundscapes
it’s the phonographic model all the way. Tellingly, if we address the subjective
element in Lastra’s configuration of the phonographic model’s aim at realistic
representation, we find a way out of the Schaferian conundrum.
As Sabine Breitsameter points out, no critic has been able to sort out
the many paradoxes present in Schafer’s work, and that this gives Schafer’s
writing a “shimmering” quality that is instructive in its tensions. Schafer’s
“listening pedagogy . . . wants all sound experiences . . . to be considered
worthy of attention” (Breitsameter 2013, 27), contrary to the judgmental hi-
erarchy set up by the notions of hi-fi and lo-fi sound. She contends that, for
Schafer, it is the very act of filtering according to value judgment espoused
by hi-fi stereo culture that leads to impoverished listening practices in so-
ciety (24–25). Yet Schafer’s insistence upon the terms hi-fi and lo-fi, and the
inarguably negative take on sound technologies inherent to his concept of
schizophonia, obscure the ecological goal behind his call to hear the world
Introduction 17
with fresh ears. In short, Schafer’s personal biases dominate his writing about
the soundscape, and it has been nearly impossible for critics to hear past
these to the original spirit of new environmental listening practices that are
ultimately open to myriad listening positions within the soundscape. Lastra’s
move is, in part, to expose the very idea of perceptual fidelity as a represen-
tational choice by filmmakers, the first step toward accessing the ecological
implications of this choice and how it can speak to acoustic ecology. In this
representational choice lies a prescription for listening through technology
without bias, and I use this as the basis for intersecting film sound theory
with acoustic ecology.
We can refer to the relationship between listener position and choices in
representation as “staging” sound following Karin Bijsterveld and her co-
contributors to the Soundscapes of the Urban Past (2013). Here they bring
some of the analytical tools developed by the WSP into a comparative media
approach to the historiography of specific urban locales, while addressing
key critical issues in the WSP’s practice and how these can be worked
through the broader field of media studies. They adopt some of the WSP’s
broad categories of keynote sounds, soundmarks, and the adapted concept of
sonic icons to categorize the kinds of sounds presented across various media
that stage urban environments (15). Within these categories she then applies
her own auditory topoi to determine the role that these sounds play: the in-
trusive sound, the sensational sound, the comforting sound, and the sinister
sound (15). In appealing to representations of urban spaces across a variety of
media, the key challenge is to understand that sound in radio, film, television,
and so on is always staged for specific purposes, and that these purposes are
often specific to the medium for which the sound is produced.3 With this in
mind, questions of “faithful” representation are always at the fore in learning
to hear the mediality in play so that the processes of fabrication can be un-
derstood as part of a cultural and historical form of engagement. By bringing
attention to medium specificity, and situating this within the cultural and
historical contexts of production, productive comparisons can then be made
across media to flesh out the roles that such media play in establishing the
dynamics of particular places at any given historical moment.
I build off Bijsterveld’s work by intersecting another handful of terms that
allow us to consider listener positionality as a function of fidelity. For ex-
ample, Michel Chion uses the term auditory extension to refer to how far into
the distance a film’s soundtrack allows us to hear, the auditory equivalent of
depth of field (1994, 87). Rick Altman’s concept of spatial signature similarly
refers to the distance between a sound source and point of audition by

emphasizing the fact that sound will bear the markers of the space in which
it is heard (1992, 24). Both of these simple concepts address how filmmakers
can construct hi-fi or lo-fi soundscapes within the world of the diegesis by
controlling our sense of space through evocations of the distance between
source and listener. Chion’s concept of on-the-air sound is also pertinent as it
addresses sounds that are transmitted electroacoustically within the diegesis,
such as music coming from a character’s car radio or a voice from a public
address system. Chion argues that such sounds “are not subject to ‘natural’
mechanical laws of sound propagation” and “enjoy the freedom of crossing
boundaries of cinematic space” (1994, 76). Sounds that are on-the-air can
take on different levels of spatial signature depending upon whether the film-
maker intends them to be grounded within the world of the diegesis, the
realm of non-diegetic sound, or ambiguous spaces in between. The on-the-
air category of sound is charged with the implications of schizophonia but
without necessarily buying into Schafer’s ableist bias against the technologies
that make it possible. On-the-air sound can be a celebration of schizophonic
potential; its use depends upon fluctuating levels of extension and qualities
of spatial signature, and as such it acts as a nexus point around which the idea
of schizophonia in the cinema can be tied to descriptive tools for film sound
analysis.
Each of the aforementioned concepts can be read through the ideolog-
ical underpinnings of acoustic ecology’s project to reveal ecological issues
at work in the audiovisual treatment of a film’s narrative. In particular, these
tools for film sound analysis become significant when read through Barry
Truax’s extended delineations of Schafer’s acoustic horizon, acoustic commu-
nity, and acoustic profile, each of which define particular acoustic ecologies
through the limits that sound events reach and the particularities of their
interaction within a given space (see Truax 2001). Particularly interesting,
here, is how schizophonia is bound up with Schafer’s notion of the hi-fi
soundscape, equating fidelity not only with a strong signal-to-noise ratio but
also with the ability of sounds to travel a long way in an environment without
being masked by density (1977, 43). Here fidelity is embedded within geog-
raphy as mapped by auditory extension. As such, this geographical fidelity
can also map community, allowing us to account for the way that sound
within a given acoustic profile can articulate the communities that hear it.
In this book, I use the term acoustic profiling to formalize the process
of framing the issue of fidelity around the recognition of how filmmakers
Introduction 19
articulate the acoustic profiles of their narrative spaces, and how this artic-
ulation serves as a medial move to engage audiences with our everyday spa-
tial understanding on deeper levels. This approach provides the possibility
of reframing issues of fidelity, typically treated as the relationship between
what is in a film and what lies beyond, around mediality as an immersive
process that dissolves the boundary line between the two. Attention to how
films delineate spaces through sound’s capacity to move through them, and
be limited by them, puts the audience in a fluctuating position with respect to
the films themselves and how they are embedded in our lives. So in Elephant,
when Frances White’s “Walk Through Resonant Landscape #2” opens the
high school cafeteria out into spaces beyond and unknown, we have a dra-
matic shift in the acoustic profile of that location from its previous represen-
tation as a noisy but contained environment. For Alex, the contained nature
of the space provided the conditions for the noise that contributed to his
sense of confinement, a lack of fidelity between his experience in the school
and his experience outside. In turning the space inside out, he extended the
profile of the space outward into the impossible. We could say that the repre-
sentation of this space in this moment lacks fidelity in the traditional sense,
as the sounds we hear do not reflect what we expect from the space we see on
screen. However, when binding the idea of fidelity to the functioning of the
acoustic profile as both a cinematic tool and a loaded concept within acoustic
ecology, we open to the possibility that Alex’s experience in this moment
is now more authentic, a successful shift from the lo-fi to the hi-fi environ-
ment, expressed by heightened sonic extension, and laden with the troubling
implications of the means by which this extension has been achieved.
The Films
In the chapters that follow, I employ the method of acoustic profiling,

exploiting the aforementioned terminological intersections, to reveal how a
variety of films illustrate principal concepts in acoustic ecology while getting
us to think about the role of spatial representation along medial lines. Each
chapter addresses a single film or set of films with critical attention to a partic-
ular line of division that can be productively analyzed through the idea of the
acoustic profile: to what extent do the spaces on either side of the line extend
into each other? How can this extension be tracked with attention to sound?
What narrative and political purposes do the variable extensions across these
lines serve? In some examples, these lines are diegetically physical: the archi-
tectural quality of the simultaneously transparent and reflective windows of
Jacques Tati’s Playtime (1967) that demarcate the spaces of modernity and
their hindrance to community engagement; or the doorways of Gus Van
Sant’s Last Days (2005) that modulate empathy between friends gathered in
a single house. In other examples, these lines are tied to media technologies
and their capacity to foster audience engagement with the worlds they repre-
sent: Peter Mettler’s overtly reflexive attention to the line between cinematic
sound and image in Picture of Light (1994), exploited through asynchro-
nous aesthetics; or the role of visualized sound technologies like the pho-
nograph in the world of David Lynch’s Twin Peaks (1990–2017), prompting
questions about the possible fidelities that such technologies can afford.
In still other examples, it is the very line between real-world locations and
their audiovisual treatment on film, as in the tour through the cinemas of
British Columbia in the book’s final chapter. Of each example, the driving
question is this: how does the simultaneous appearance and invisibility of
these boundary lines that determine any acoustic profile—their apparitions
and vanishings—create the medial moves that can support arguments for the
value of including cinema as an important element of media practice in the
world of acoustic ecology?
In Chapter 1 I introduce Schaferian acoustic ecology through an anal-
ysis of Jacques Tati’s film Playtime. The film is a meditation on the spaces
of modernist architecture as exemplified by the use of glass as building ma-
terial in the International Style. Emphasizing the fact that glass enclosures
are visually transparent while blocking the passage of sound, Schafer has
dubbed such spaces as examples of “the glazed soundscape” wherein the
view out the window is dissociated from its soundscape, an example of what
Schafer laments about the current state of acoustic design (1993, 71–73).
Emily Thompson equates this characteristic of the modernist soundscape
with schizophonia, establishing architecture as a sound media much like the
electroacoustic technologies that Schafer denounces (2002, 321). Yet just as
hearing sound emanating from speakers need not be a disjunctive experi-
ence, nor should the experience of architectural glass necessarily be. Playtime
challenges any overt critique of modernist architecture by setting up a rigor-
ously Schaferian glazed environment in the first hour, only to subvert it in the
second: by film’s end Tati presents a total reversal of the glazed imperative,
glass becoming highly reflective while sound is allowed to pass through un-
hindered. This shift is only detectable through careful attention to the film’s
Introduction 21
handling of auditory extension, with equal attention to sound and image, and
as such it provides a clear example of how acoustic profiling provides access
to a dimension of the film that would be otherwise inaccessible. The dramatic
reversal in the representation of architectural space is the film’s mediality on
display, emphasizing the fabricated nature of the ideologies that govern not
only the construction of physical space but also our habits of experiencing
it. To reveal this mediality I refer to the film’s shift as an example of audible
transparency, the glass on display in the film acting as both literalization
of, and challenge to, the metaphor of transparency in hi-fi stereo culture
(the myth of media’s capacity to vanish from its representations) that also
forms the basis for Schaferian acoustic ecology. My reading offers a way of
rethinking Schafer’s thought along perceptual lines by linking the shifting
representation of glass in Playtime to the creative repurposing of the built
environment that formed the basis for the psychogeographic practice of space
espoused by the Situationists who were contemporaries of Schafer and Tati in
the 1960s. As such, acoustic design is as much a function of our perception as
it is about the physical environment itself.
With the idea of media transparency as a perceptual construct now firmly
in mind, Chapter 2 addresses Peter Mettler’s film Picture of Light as an ex-
ploration of what is at stake in the debates about the documentary recording
practices essential to soundscape research. Mettler and his crew travel to
Churchill, Manitoba, and attempt to capture the aurora borealis on film.
They take an overtly reflexive strategy that foregrounds the filmmaking
process while continually questioning if our experience of the lights on film
could be anything like being there in person. While the filmmakers do cap-
ture some fine images of the lights, Mettler simultaneously asks what it might
mean to hear these lights, staging the soundscape of Churchill through a
combination of location recording and electroacoustic music that he pairs
with images in ways that continually challenge the limits of documentary
representation while meditating upon the role of media in shaping our en-
gagement with the world they seek to document. The dividing line in Picture
of Light is that between image and sound, and to what extent the realm of
the seen can extend into the realm of the heard, and vice versa. My anal-
ysis of the film’s acoustic profile works issues of documentary representation
through the discourse of fidelity, with a particular emphasis on theories of
performativity in documentary practice in which reflexivity is shown to have
become a norm in the age of media skepticism (see Nichols 1994; Bruzzi
2006). However, I argue that Mettler “performs” his documentary as a way
of moving past skepticism about the media’s power to provide access to the
world. Instead, Mettler calls attention to how we perform with our media as
the very basis of our engagement with the world. I call this strategy immersive
reflexivity: the foregrounding of mediality as a tool for engagement rather
than distanciation, a mode that draws on the long history of experimental
film and its attempts at generating more holistic experiences through self-
conscious means, particularly with respect to sound/image relationships.
By framing Picture of Light through the discourses of documentary and ex-
perimental film, I demonstrate how Mettler’s film teaches us to address the
practice of field recording in soundscape research as highly staged material
that can, nevertheless, provide faithful means of engaging with the world that
presents itself to the microphones.
The first two chapters explore how two of the core tenets of acoustic
ecology, acoustic design and media documentation, play out in films that
question the very nature of these tenets through their reflexive approaches
to sound/image relationships. In Chapter 3 I make an explicit connection
between film sound and another core practice in acoustic ecology, sound-
scape composition, through an analysis of Gus Van Sant’s film Last Days.
Like his previous film Elephant, discussed at the start of this introduction,
the sound design for Last Days incorporates the soundscape compositions of
Hildegard Westerkamp, original member of the World Soundscape Project.
I examine how her piece “Türen der Wahrnehmung (Doors of Perception)”
(1989) is mapped onto the space of the house occupied by Blake (Michael
Pitt), a character loosely based on Kurt Cobain, who spends the days leading
up to his suicide wandering around his estate in a drug-addled mental con-
dition, surrounded by people who position themselves as his friends but who
do not communicate with him effectively. Westerkamp’s piece is premised
on the use of door sounds to explore relationships between separate acoustic
spaces that can be superimposed by way of the architectural construct of the
doorway. The film is preoccupied with how Blake stands at an emotional re-
move from the people around him, and maps this remove onto the spaces
they inhabit through a formal exploration of how the rooms of the house ei-
ther join together or remain separate by way of the doorways through which
the characters must continually pass. In heightening our attention to the ar-
chitectural space of the house, the film also heightens our attention to the
role of music in that space as several pieces—either pre-existing records or
live performances—play out spatially. I argue that to properly understand
how soundscape composition works as a sound design element we need a
Introduction 23
new model for theorizing how the compilation film soundtrack makes use of
pre-existing pieces of music, extending the work of Anahid Kassabian (2001)
on audience identification to undertheorized considerations of the spatial
qualities of music. With the goals of acoustic ecology at heart, soundscape
composition attunes us to the spatial dimensions of music, and bringing
theorizations of the genre to questions of the compilation film soundtrack
offers a new pathway into thinking about film music along ecological lines.
I demonstrate how the presence of Westerkamp’s piece in the film opens
up ways of thinking about the function of space across all the sound design
elements, as well as the image track, to reveal the heart of the film: reflective
empathy, the term I use to describe the problems of opening up empathetic
space between characters in the film, and between films and their audiences,
similar to the problems of vanishing mediation in the discourse of fidelity.
The acoustic profile under examination here is demarcated by the boundary
line between human individuals, the extent to which any one person can truly
experience the world as another, a requirement for empathy. The problem of
reflective barriers to empathy is articulated formally by the role of doorways
within the diegesis that mirror the boundaries between people, and echoed
by the limits to which pre-existing music can enter into an empathetic rela-
tionship with films that build them into their soundtracks.
In Chapter 4 I focus on one particular sound technology, the phonograph,
as a highly visual marker of the myth of vanishing mediation at the crux of
the fidelity thesis, ideal for cinematic evocations of the schizophonic condi-
tion. With David Lynch and Mark Frost’s Twin Peaks saga as a case study, I use
the term schizophonographics to refer to cinema’s capacity to represent the
split between sound and source through graphic representation of the ma-
teriality of phonographic processes. Twin Peaks ties its schizophonographic
representations of phonography to questions of neurodivergence in its nar-
rative focal point: the figure of Laura Palmer, the high school senior found
murdered in the opening minutes of the pilot episode, and whose trou-
bled life unfolds through the police investigation that follows. Twin Peaks,
through the original series (the first two seasons, 1990–91), the subsequent
theatrical film Fire Walk with Me (1992), and the series’ return for Season 3
(2017), extends Lynch’s long-standing interest in the onscreen presence of
sound technologies—especially record players—whose materiality serves as
the basis for slippage between worlds, be they psychological states or spati-
otemporal territories. For Lynch, dating back to his first feature, Eraserhead
(1977), it is the material substance of the phonographic process that opens up
portals to other times, places, and experiences. These portals are metaphors
for the ideal of vanishing mediation, paradoxes that drive his narratives for-
ward, perfectly illustrating the problem of the fidelity thesis at the heart of
hi-fi stereo culture. As with the audibly transparent windows in Playtime,
the immersively reflexive presence of on-screen filmmaking technologies in
Picture of Light, and the reflectively empathetic relationship between sound-
scape composition and film sound design in Last Days, Lynch’s interest in
phonography inverts the fidelity thesis by fetishizing the materiality of the
medium as the basis for its capacity to vanish. With reference to scholar-
ship on early twentieth century anxieties surrounding sound and image re-
cording technologies, and late twentieth century anxieties around the shift
to digital processes, I demonstrate where Twin Peaks sits in the context of
Lynch’s history of schizophonographics to bind alternate modes of percep-
tion to medium-specific materiality.
The crux of my investigation into Twin Peaks is the fact that in Season
3, for the first time in Lynch’s oeuvre, we are presented with a phonograph
that emits sounds with no visible media: there is no record on the player—
the media has vanished. What are we to make of this shift? This vanishing
media is part of how Season 3 extends the pre-digital world of earlier Twin
Peaks into the digital present, posing questions about the nature of media
materiality along the way. The acoustic profile under consideration, then, is
the one demarcated by the question of how these phonographic sounds are
being transmitted, and from whom, where, and when. In demonstrating how
the schizophonographic process works across these shifting manifestations
in Twin Peaks, I offer an adjustment to the theoretical value of the fidelity
thesis, particularly around Michel Chion’s figure of the acousmêtre: the voice
without a body whose evocation of the technological split between sound
and image becomes the basis for supernatural powers. The way that Lynch’s
phonography shifts from materially specific to ethereally vague presents a
model for the sound/body split that can help us better understand the issues
in play with Schafer’s reference to the schizophonic condition. In the figure of
Laura Palmer, a character whose psychological instability drives much of the
formal experimentation with sound and image in the series, we find a prac-
tical use for Schafer’s negative evocation of schizophrenia in articulating the
presence of sound technologies in our daily lives. The key to understanding
the shift in schizophonographic representation is to understand how Laura
Palmer, as the center of the Twin Peaks universe, has shifted along with it.
Her trajectory across the entire Twin Peaks cycle maps the acoustic profile of
Introduction 25
the absent media, charting new ways of thinking about sonic fidelity along
the way.
Finally, in Chapter 5 I consider how film sound can become an essential
part of soundscape research conducted by acoustic ecology, and how folding
the discourse of film sound theory back onto acoustic ecology can correct for
a variety of gaps in the field’s foundational texts. I use the city of Vancouver,
British Columbia, birthplace of acoustic ecology and longest running case
study of the World Soundscape Project, as an example of how the sonic en-
vironment of a specific geographical locale can be researched through film
and audiovisual media. Here I ask: how can the work of the WSP teach us to
hear things in films produced in and around Vancouver that have gone unac-
counted for in the existing literature? In turn, how can listening to these films
through the research of the WSP help us hear things that the WSP themselves
failed to acknowledge? Here, the dividing line under consideration is that
between the city itself and its appearances in films and media: to what extent
can a study of one side of this line inform the other? After an analysis of how
the sounds of Vancouver have been staged in the publications of the WSP,
I apply my conclusions to an investigation of sound aesthetics and practices
in Vancouver-based based film and media production. I use the sound of
trains as represented in Vancouver film as the foundation for addressing how
sound is tied to geographical specificity in local media, demonstrating why
film sound design should be an important area of consideration for sound-
scape research. In the WSP’s original Vancouver Soundscape documents
of 1973, the sound of trains figured heavily in discussions of the city’s ge-
ographically specific soundscape and its changes over the decades. This is
not surprising, given that Vancouver was incorporated in 1886 as part of an
agreement with Canadian Pacific Railway (CPR) that the city would serve
as their western terminus, thus earning the name Terminal City. With the
birth of cinema around the same time, and the immediate fascination that
early filmmakers had for trains, the CPR instantly recognized the medium’s
potential as promotional tool, ensuring that train travel was a staple of films
shot in the region since the beginning. Through a selection of film examples
that feature the sounds of trains, ranging from the “silent” era through to the
present, I construct a history of Vancouver’s soundscape on film that reveals
unheard dimensions of local film practices and their intersection with the
development of the city.
The sound of the train is the locus for examining the city’s acoustic pro-
file: given that the sounds of trains have become a defining characteristic of
the city, we can say that the entire city becomes the range across which these
sounds can be heard. However, a problem arises when imagining a homog-
enous set of responses to these sounds within such a highly diverse popula-
tion as is found in Vancouver. The work of acoustic profiling in this chapter
leads to what I am calling unsettled listening, following Nicholas Blomley’s
work on Vancouver in his book Unsettling the City (2004), whereby listener
positionality is taken into account when trying to understand the relation-
ship between sound and culture within a given acoustic profile. While the
work of the WSP was fairly limited in its imagination of what the sound
of trains means to Vancouverites, my study of a variety of films and media
across a wide range of historical periods, genres, and formats reveals a com-
plex set of overlapping responses to this omnipresent sound. And here I illus-
trate why the work of film sound studies, informed by acoustic ecology, needs
to reflect back onto acoustic ecology itself, bringing new perspectives to bear
on their methods for studying the soundscapes in which we live. The issue
of fidelity, finally, comes to rest on how well the complexity of overlapping
communities can be represented in documentation, analysis, prescription,
and composition in and around the spaces they occupy.
I conclude the book with a reflection upon how the methodology I have
established for intersecting acoustic ecology with the film and media has
influenced my approach to thinking about the spaces I occupy outside the
screening room walls. Having examined the four key dimensions of acoustic
ecology as established by the World Soundscape Project, and demonstrated
the value of intersecting these with the study of film sound, I explain how the
revelations about the myth of vanishing mediation that I take away from all
the films examined in this book have given me a tool kit for living more con-
sciously of the complexities of the spaces that live in, which, in turn, have in-
formed my approach to creative practice. As a concrete illustration, I explain
how some of my own biographical details have informed two artistic projects
that I have worked on that both explicitly frame an approach to audiovisual
design through the method of acoustic profiling used as an analytical tool
throughout this book, now a tool for critically examining my own listener
positionality as a settler on indigenous lands. In the end, my wish for this
book is not only to inform new ways of thinking about film sound for use
in research, analysis, and teaching, but also to inform new ways of thinking
about where we stand in relation to the world that we live in. In this time of
dire need for full accountability in the relationship between settler and in-
digenous positionalities, we need ways of listening that provide a foundation
Introduction 27
for action in the world. Creative practice with full disclosure about settler
positionality is one form of productive action that can work to prevent con-
tinuing imposition of fixed positions upon the multiply diverse spaces of
the world. I conclude by showing how this has begun to work for me, in the
hopes that it might also work for you, too.
References
Altman, Rick. 1992. “The Material Heterogeneity of Recorded Sound.” In Sound Theory,
Sound Practice, edited by Rick Altman, 15–31. New York: Routledge.
Bijsterveld, Karin. 2008. Mechanical Sound: Technology, Culture, and Public Problems of
Noise in the Twentieth Century. Cambridge: MIT Press.
Bijsterveld, Karin, ed. 2013. Soundscapes of the Urban Past: Staged Sound as Mediated
Cultural Heritage. Bielefeld: Transcript Verlag.
Birdsall, Carolyn. 2012. Nazi Soundscapes: Sound, Technology and Urban Space in
Germany, 1933–1945. Amsterdam: Amsterdam University Press.
Blomley, Nicholas. 2004. Unsettling the City: Urban Land and the Politics of Property.
Breitsameter, Sabine. 2013. “Ways of Listening; Figures of Thought.” In Ways of
Listening; Figures of Thought: A Festschrift for R. Murray Schafer on the Occasion
of his 80th Birthday, edited by Sabine Breitsameter and Eric Leonardson, 17–36.
Darmstadt: Hochschule Darmstadt.
Bruzzi, Stella. 2006. New Documentary. 2nd edition. New York: Routledge.
Chion, Michel. 1994. Audio-Vision: Sound on Screen. Translated by Claudia Gorbman.
New York: Columbia University Press.
Chion, Michel. 2009. Film, A Sound Art. Translated by Claudia Gorbman.
Dienstfrey, Eric. 2023. Making Stereo Fit: The History of a Disquieting Film Technology.
Berkeley: University of California Press.
Donnelly, Kevin. 2008. The Spectre of Sound: Music in Film and Television. London: British
Film Institute.
Droumeva, Milena and Randolph Jordan. 2019. “Historical Timeline for the Development
of Acoustic Ecology at Simon Fraser University Through to the Foundation of the
World Foum for Acoustic Ecology.” In Sound, Media, Ecology, edited by Milena
Droumeva and Randolph Jordan, vii–xiv. New York: Palgrave Macmillan.
Gorbman, Claudia. 1987. Unheard Melodies: Narrative Film Music. Bloomington: Indiana
University Press.
Jones, Kent. 2003. “Corridors of Powerlessness.” Film Comment 39, no. 5: 28.
Jordan, Randolph. 2007. “Case Study: Film Sound, Acoustic Ecology, and Performance in
Electroacoustic Music.” In Music, Sound and Multimedia: From the Live to the Virtual,
edited by Jamie Sexton, 121–141. Edinburgh: University of Edinburgh Press.
Kassabian, Anahid. 2001. Hearing Film: Tracking Identifications in Contemporary
Hollywood Film Music. New York: Routledge.
Lastra, James. 2000. Sound Technology and the American Cinema. New York: Columbia
University Press.
McCartney, Andra. 2002. “Sharing Experiences Towards the Possibility of an
Electroacoustic Ecology.” Soundscape: The Journal of Acoustic Ecology 3, no. 1: 22.
McCartney, Andra. 2010. “Ethical Questions about Working with Soundscapes.” Text
from keynote presentation at the World Forum for Acoustic Ecology in Koli, Finland
(June 19). http://soundwalkinginteractions.wordpress.com/2010/06/24/ethical-questi
ons-about-working-with-soundscapes/
Morton, Timothy. 2007. Ecology Without Nature: Rethinking Environmental Aesthetics.
Cambridge: Harvard University Press.
Nichols, Bill. 1994. Blurred Boundaries: Questions of Meaning in Contemporary Culture.
Bloomington: Indiana University Press.
Norman, Katharine. 1996. “Real-World Music as Composed Listening.” Contemporary
Music Review 15, nos. 1–2: 1–27.
Pritchett, James. 2007. “Frances White: Centre Bridge.” Liner notes to Centre Bridge by
Frances White. New York: Mode Records 184, compact disc.
Robinson, Dylan. 2020. Hungry Listening: Resonant Theory for Indigenous Sound Studies.
Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press.
Schafer, R. Murray. 1977. The Tuning of the World. Toronto: McClelland and Stewart.
Schafer, R. Murray. 1993. Voices of Tyranny, Temples of Silence. Indian River: Arcana
Editions.
Sterne, Jonathan. 2003. The Audible Past: Cultural Origins of Sound Reproduction.
Durham, NC: Duke University Press.
Sterne, Jonathan. 2012. MP3: The Meaning of a Format. Durham, NC: Duke
University Press.
Sterne, Jonathan. 2013. “Soundscape, Landscape, Escape.” In Soundscapes of the Urban
Past: Staged Sound as Mediated Cultural Heritage, edited by Karin Bijsterveld, 181–192.
Bielefeld: Transcript Verlag.
Sterne, Jonathan. 2019. “Multimodal Scholarship in World Soundscape Project
Composition: Toward a Different Media-Theoretical Legacy (Or: The W.S.P. as OG
DH).” In Sound, Media, Ecology, edited by Milena Droumeva and Randolph Jordan,
85–109. New York: Palgrave Macmillan.
Thompson, Emily. 2002. The Soundscape of Modernity: Architectural Acoustics and the
Culture of Listening in North America, 1900–1933. Cambridge: MIT Press.
Truax, Barry, ed. 1978. Handbook for Acoustic Ecology. Vancouver: A.R.C. Publications/
The World Soundscape Project.
Truax, Barry. 2001. Acoustic Communication. 2nd edition. Westport, CT: Alex Publishing.
Truax, Barry. 2008. “Soundscape Composition as Global Music: Electroacoustic Music as
Soundscape.” Organised Sound 13, no. 2: 103–109.
Verma, Neil. 2012. Theater of the Mind: Imagination, Aesthetics, and American Radio
Drama. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
Westerkamp, Hildegard. 1974. “Soundwalking.” Sound Heritage 3, no. 4: 18–27.
Westerkamp, Hildegard. 2002. “Linking Soundscape Composition and Acoustic Ecology.”
Organised Sound 7, no. 1 (April): 51–56.
Jordan, 45–64. New York: Palgrave MacMillan.
World Soundscape Project. 1973. The Vancouver Soundscape. Sound recording and book.
Burnaby: Sonic Research Studio, Dept. of Communications, Simon Fraser University.
World Soundscape Project. 1996. The Vancouver Soundscape 1973/Soundscape Vancouver
1996. Sound Recording. Vancouver: Cambridge Street Records (CSR-2CD 9701).
1
Audible Transparency
Modernist Acoustic Design in Jacques Tati’s Playtime
The 1967 premiere of Jacques Tati’s film Playtime coincided with the pub-
lication of Guy Debord’s Society of the Spectacle (1967), the most famous
of the works to be produced by a member of the Situationist movement
that had been functioning in France since the mid-1950s. Perhaps un-
likely bedfellows, there is no question that Tati’s cinematic explorations of
a modernizing France were grappling with many of the same issues that
drove the Situationists in their critiques of the alienating qualities of con-
sumer culture. Meanwhile, on the westernmost frontier of Europe’s expan-
sion, Canadian composer R. Murray Schafer had just published Ear Cleaning
(1967) while on faculty as a music educator at Simon Fraser University (SFU)
in Vancouver, British Columbia. This is the publication that laid the foun-
dation for what would become the field of acoustic ecology, a call to develop
new listening practices that would “clean” our ears in order to be better
attuned to the sonic environments in which we live. Ear cleaning is the first
step toward Schafer’s goal of acoustic design, most fully articulated ten years
later in The Tuning of the World (1977),1 which proposes a refashioning of the
built environment according to the new listening practices that he espoused.
Like Tati and the Situationists, Schafer was responding to a particularly vi-
brant moment for global urbanism, said to be homogenizing the cities of the
Western world through a shared language of urban architecture epitomized
by the International Style. While it is fairly common to find discussions of
Tati’s films contextualized by way of the Situationists, discussions of Schafer’s
work in relation to either Tati or the Situationists is essentially nonexistent.
Bringing Schafer into this discussion allows for addressing important
questions of sound in Tati’s film that, in turn, opens the door for a way of
unpacking Schaferian acoustic ecology and situating it in the context of film
sound studies.
In this chapter I offer a reading of Playtime at the intersection of Schaferian
acoustic ecology and Situationist thought. I argue that the film is a reflexive
DOI: 10.1093/oso/9780190226077.003.0002
meditation on the role of cinema in fostering heightened awareness of how

we engage the spaces we inhabit by way of the technologies that determine
their shape. There is a double benefit to the intersection of Schafer and the
Situationists in developing this reading. Firstly, Schafer’s concepts allow us
to hear Tati’s work with fresh ears to acknowledge a highly reflexive approach
to the relationship between sound and image in the representation of mod-
ernist architectural space that has not yet been critically examined. Tati is
foregrounding the medial quality of his aesthetics as a way of inciting reflec-
tion upon the real-world architectural spaces through which we move every
day. Secondly, this reading of Playtime invites us to take a step back from
Schafer’s emphasis on redesigning our acoustic environments and focus
on the role of creative listening practice as his key contribution to acoustic
ecology. The humorless didacticism, to say nothing of the settler’s impulse,
found within Schafer’s prescriptions for a “better” sounding environment
have soured many on engaging too deeply with his concepts, one of the
many reasons why Schaferian acoustic ecology has not yielded large-scale
acoustic design in any urban planning project to date. A similar fate befell the
Situationists, whose (often humorous and contradictory) prescriptions for
ideal urban forms were never realized either. Yet the tools that Schafer and the
Situationists provided for new ways of experiencing the built environment
are invaluable for the critical reassessment of our worlds whether inside the
walls of a screening room or out. Playtime presents a perfect storm in which
key issues in both Schaferian acoustic ecology and Situationist thought play
out. Tati’s project ultimately celebrates the process of changing our awareness
of urban space by inviting us to become aware of how we engage with such
space by way of the technologies of architecture and the media on which they
are founded. As such, Playtime makes an ideal starting point for introducing
the relationships between acoustic ecology and film sound studies that sit at
the foundation of this book.
Playtime is dedicated to imagining a Paris of the near future when the glass
and steel of the burgeoning International Style, increasingly associated with
postwar Americanism, starts to take over Europe as well. The film charts a
wide range of the possible interactions that such spaces could engender with
its denizens. The key to my analysis is recognizing a major transformation
in the aesthetic treatment of glass as a building material—a transformation
only accessible by way of equal attention to sound and image. The film’s first
hour emphasizes glass as a material imbued with an apparent paradox: on
the one hand, glass allows for a persistent illusion of community through its
Audible Transparency 31
visual transparency; on the other hand, glass separates individuals through

its effectiveness as a physical barrier against sound (as well as a variety of
other elements). These material characteristics of glass are governed by what
Michel Chion has termed auditory (and visual) extension: how far we can
hear or see into the distance of a film’s diegesis (1994, 86–89). By the film’s
conclusion, however, the formal treatment of architectural space that allows
long-range views combined with isolated sonic environments gives way to a
situation in which glass—now more reflective than transparent—no longer
acts as an acoustic barrier. Visual extension decreases while auditory exten-
sion increases. The physical properties of the architecture have not changed,
but their formal treatment within the film has. This decisive reversal of
sound/image relationships is the crux upon which the substance of Playtime
hangs, and it is a medial move: it calls attention to the cinematic construc-
tion of architectural space as a means of inviting reflection upon the ways in
which we all construct our spaces by way of our perceptual processes.
Listening to how sound functions in relation to the visual treatment of
architectural space in Playtime allows us to trace the film’s audiovisual shift
through three fairly distinct acts in what has been described as an open form
film that resists such linear readings (see Burch 1973, 47). The first act follows
characters through various glass enclosures that are presented as agents of
separation between individuals and impediments to physical interaction;
the second act is a sequence in the Royal Garden restaurant and night club
where the people of the city gather in a communal spirit as the architecture
begins to lose its divisive qualities; and the third act finds the partygoers on
the streets of Paris in the early morning where the same city, once divided,
is transformed into a space of heightened human interaction. As such, the
progression of the film presents a shifting perspective on the function of
modernist architecture exemplified by glass barriers, and ends with a play
on the concept of transparency that casts the idea in range of the discourse
of fidelity that governs the film’s approach to modernist architecture. Three
factors will be key to my discussion of this progression: spatial isolation and
containment as major goals of modernist architecture; debates in acoustic
ecology and Situationist thought about the effect of this containment on
the people exposed to it; and the solutions to the problems identified within
these debates suggested by the film’s shifting approach to the audiovisual rep-
resentation of architectural space.
Debates continue about whether the film is ultimately a celebration or cri-
tique of modern urban spaces and the social practices they situate. As David
Bellos notes, the film “provokes political and historical interpretations, but
avoids giving simple confirmation to any one of them” (1999, 274). I argue,
however, that the film does confirm one reading when we pay attention to
the role of sound in Tati’s construction of architectural space: that the film
is overtly reflexive about the fabricated nature of this space, and this reflex-
ivity calls attention to the role of ideology in guiding our attitudes toward
such spaces. The central issue here is the very idea of transparency, a con-
cept that forms the core of the discourse of fidelity in sound studies. Held up
as an indicator of how closely a recording is said to be faithful to whatever
presented itself to the microphones, transparency is, in fact, born of a way of
listening that aims to ignore mediality. A pane of glass might be transparent
in its ability to let us see through to the other side, but this transparency is de-
pendent upon material qualities that also reflect light and impede other sen-
sory information, not the least of which is sound. The notion of transparency
is also at the core of critiques of Schafer’s use of the language of the hi-fi stereo
culture he ultimately decries, using terms like hi-fi soundscape to describe
idealized rural environments free of the sound technologies that gave rise to
the term hi-fi in the first place. Tati’s reversal of the audiovisual transparency
of glass calls attention to the artificiality of transparency as a constructed
practice of both listening and looking, and it does so by emphasizing the
role of sound technology—whether in the cinematic apparatus or the way
architecture shapes sonic space—offering a way of understanding the value
of Schafer’s evocation of the language of fidelity discourse in articulating his
listening practices. I refer to Tati’s audiovisual strategies here as audible trans-
parency: a false invisibility that makes itself known through sound, a medi-
ation that attempts to vanish but cannot. Rendering the visual transparency
of the architecture audible through the soundtrack is the medial move in
Playtime, and understanding how this works allows for rethinking Schafer’s
contribution to acoustic ecology as an emphasis on perception as the basis
for creatively expressing different ways of engaging with the soundscape by
way of media technologies—whether architectural or electroacoustical in
nature.
Reversing Tativille
Playtime is a thorough examination of International Style modernism. Not

yet the norm in mid-1960s Paris, Tati had limited options for shooting such
a project on location—none of which would have allowed the kind of con-

trol he needed. So at great personal expense he had a full-scale set built in-
spired by the works of Le Corbusier and Mies van der Rohe (see Bellos 1999,
241–250). Dubbed “Tativille,” this set is the main focus of the film, and his
large cast of characters—including the perennial Mr. Hulot, played in all
of Tati’s films by the director himself—are choreographed to reveal myriad
nuances of these architectural spaces. Because Tati’s filmmaking is struc-
tured around gags, both sight and sound, the most important moments are
designed as points of comedy. Tati’s comedy is highly sophisticated in that it
often depends upon elaborate choreography of character movement within
dense mise-en-scène, and so the jokes are inextricable from the architectural
space that takes central position in the film. Accordingly, my analysis will
focus on those gags that are designed to illustrate the particularities—and
peculiarities—of the International Style. It is upon these gags, each exploring
the relationship between transparency and reflectivity (both visual and au-
ditory), that the film’s mediality rests. I begin my analysis by comparing the
opening of the film to the closing in order to chart a dramatic shift in the au-
dibility of the film’s architectural transparency.
The film opens with a shot of a glass and steel skyscraper framed against
the sky, emphasizing the airiness of the International Style designed to free
architecture from the cumbersome weight of stylistic excess and assume a
form that aligns with its function, embracing the aesthetic beauty that such
an alignment entails. The glass is both reflective and transparent. Some glass
panels reflect the clouds to create a continuum between sky and building,
while others allow for a view inside the edifice, the space of the sky opening
into the offices within. The ability of glass to be both reflective and trans-
parent is the conundrum that rests at the heart of Tati’s film: glass can bring
spaces together and keep them separate—often at the same time. In purely
visual terms, this duality is a function of the angle from which we view a glass
pane, and the lighting differential between the spaces on either side. When
considering the other senses, however, glass is much less variable in its me-
diation of space: a closed window allows for a view out into the world while
keeping sound and weather out along with their sensorial tactility. Yet what if
the glass window’s variable transparency were to encompass the other senses
as well? This variability is the subject of two key gags that bookend the film
in a reversal of how sound and image function through the medium of glass.
From the outset the film establishes a very clear approach to the way that
glass enclosures prevent the flow of sound between interior and exterior
spaces. One of the first gags comes as Mr. Hulot approaches the Strand
building with walls of glass, positioned next to a street with a fair bit of
noisy traffic. Before Hulot arrives at the door, we are given a preview of
the delineation Tati will continuously draw between inside and outside
in the first half of the film. The scene involves a concierge (Léon Doyen)
positioned within the lobby area inside the building, and a construction
worker on the street just outside. We are presented with an interior me-
dium shot behind the concierge looking out onto the street, but framed in
such a way that we do not see the edges of the windowpane. The effect is
as though there is no division between the concierge’s position inside the
building and the street beyond, though the traffic noise diminishes dra-
matically when the film cuts from the exterior shot to the interior. Tati then
builds a sight gag around the effect created by the framing: the construction
worker approaches the concierge from the street, asking for a light for his
cigarette, not realizing that there is a pane of glass separating him from his
fire. The concierge gestures toward the door, and the construction worker
indicates that he now sees the edges of the frame. As the two men move
toward the door, the camera dollies leftward to follow, revealing the edges
of the windowpane. The worker opens the door as the concierge holds out
a match, and a rush of environmental noise from the street becomes ap-
parent on the soundtrack once again. We then cut to a shot from outside
the building as Mr. Hulot approaches, and the level of the environmental
noise remains the same. Here it becomes clear that glass acts as a pow-
erful barrier to sound while remaining nearly invisible to the eye. At this
point the film also makes it clear that doors will be positioned as powerful
mediators to the flow of sound between interior and exterior spaces.
The rigorous approach to the auditory distinction between interior and
exterior space is consistent throughout the first hour of Playtime (as I will
demonstrate in more detail below). By the end of the film, however, we find a
very different treatment of glass and its role in mediating the divide between
interior and exterior space. In the film’s final moments there is a shot that
works in parallel to that involving the concierge and the construction worker.
After a series of exterior views onto the city streets transformed into a car-
nival environment, complete with street noise and suitable music, we then
cut to an interior shot of a window cleaner working on a pane of glass at street
level. However, the shot begins as a view out onto the street traffic with no
indication that we are looking through a window (save for a bit of reflection
toward the bottom left). The exterior sound from the previous shots remains
constant as we cut to this one, suggesting that we are still being presented
with an exterior point of view. The camera then tracks backward revealing
the frame of the window and the fact that we are actually positioned in an in-
terior space. The figure of the window cleaner appears and opens the window,
begins wiping it down with a rag, and closes it again in the process. As the
window opens and closes there is no change in the dynamics or content of
the music or environmental sound. To punctuate this point, Tati cuts from
interior to exterior as a car drives by with a loud motor sound that bridges
the shots with no auditory distinction between these spaces once so divided.
Once positioned outside, the camera frames the window so that we can see
the reflection of a tour bus and its passengers, who then appear to rise up and
down as the window tilts open and closed. The effect renders the bus riders as
though on an amusement park ride, and Tati seals the gag by synchronizing
a squeaking sound along with each of the window’s movements that sounds
at once like a wet rag streaking on the glass and the amused exclamations of
ride passengers. Here the reflectivity of the glass is made explicit in the gag
where it was hidden in the previous example, and this reflectivity is cued to
the soundtrack so that we might listen and become aware of the new realities
of the film’s representation of architectural space.
Like the cigarette lighting gag, the window cleaner sequence uses a visual
strategy whereby a shot of activity out on the street is revealed—through a
moving camera—to have been filmed through a window. This time, how-
ever, the sound does not provide us with a clue that we are inside as it did in
the example of the concierge and the construction worker: the bustle on the
street is clearly audible during the interior shots, and the presence of music
diminishes the possibility of delineating this interior space as being sonically
confined. This situation continues as we then cut to shots of a tourist bus, al-
ternating between interior and exterior perspectives. Here we find Barbara
(Barbara Dennek), a tourist with a group of Americans who has been
crossing paths with Hulot throughout the film, who is seen here unwrapping
a gift finally given to her by Hulot. It is a charming statuette of long-stemmed
flowers that resembles the assemblage of streetlamps visible just outside the
bus window. This visual parallel is emphasized by framing Barbara and the
statuette through the window of the bus, then cutting to a wider shot with
Barbara, the statuette and the lamps, and then moving the camera left to
frame the lamps by themselves. This is a final visual pun on bridging the gap
between inside and outside, and as this occurs on the image track we hear the
voices of the people along with the street noise and music on generally equal
terms—regardless of where the camera is positioned. With this, Tati sends

the bus off into the dusk and the film fades to black.
The second of these set pieces inverts the first: glass is first visually trans-
parent and sonically opaque; then glass becomes visually reflective and
sonically transparent. This move is medial in that it puts the materiality of
the medium of glass on display within the diegesis while, at the same time,
calling attention to how the film constructs the audiovisual space. This is a
good example of a variance in acoustic profile: the shift from visual transpar-
ency to reflection is tied to a similar shift in auditory extension. Neither of
these gags work without equal attention to sound and image, both on the part
of the filmmakers and the audience. Acoustic profiling allows us to under-
stand how the film can shift its handling of the relationship between sound
and image at will, inviting the audience to think of their own perception
in the same way. Specifically, this mediality invites us to reflect upon how
Tati’s handling of architectural space is tied to ideas about transparency in
other media technologies, and how it can allow us to understand Schaferian
acoustic ecology while moving through it to a better way of accounting for
how we live with media technologies as tools for potential engagement.
Glazing the Soundscape
I can think of no better point of entry into the conceptual issues raised by Tati’s
audiovisual reversal than R. Murray Schafer’s notion of the glazed sound-
scape, centered upon an apparent paradox at work in the functioning of glass
as architectural material. “Plate glass shattered the sensorium,” Schafer says,
“replacing it with contradictory visual and aural impressions . . . framing ex-
ternal events in an unnatural phantom-like ‘silence’ ” that ultimately “craves
reorchestration” to make these spaces “more sensorally complete” (1993, 71–
73). The use of piped-in sound creates a contradiction between inside and
outside: “The world seen through the window is like the world of a movie set
with the radio as soundtrack” (73), a fitting analogy when addressing how Tati
reorchestrates his glazed spaces across the two window gags described above.
Schafer’s positioning of the window at the center of audiovisual disjunction is
heavily loaded with his more general biases against media technologies, and
so it is instructive to read his biases through critical discourses on modernist
architectural space. At the heart of the matter lies the concept of transparency
and how it is constructed according to particular expectations for looking
and listening through media technologies, attempting either to make these

media disappear or to bring medial qualities to the fore.
It is essential that we situate architecture in general, and windows in par-
ticular, as media technologies that can be discussed in the same terms as
technologies of sound and image recording and transmission. In The Virtual
Window (2006) Ann Friedberg traces the evolution of the window from ar-
chitectural aperture to screen technology, emphasizing the shift from the
window as a tool for ventilation to the window as a device for framing a view.
A general argument that runs throughout her book is that this framing of
views is not in service of making the viewer feel a part of the world pictured
within the borders of the frame, but rather keeps the viewer at a distance
from it. The frame becomes an agent of modernist isolation, and the window
is a way of emphasizing the boundary between the spaces that it separates.
The transparency of glass, then, is tempered by its frame, augmented when
we account for the medium’s reflectivity that can result in a complex layering
of spatial representations that Friedberg ultimately traces through to the
computer screen as assortment of virtual windows.
Issues of framing, isolation, and virtuality are key to the soundscapes
of modernist architecture as well. In The Soundscape of Modernity (2002),
Emily Thompson charts modernist ideals that sought to banish reverbera-
tion from interior spaces and create quiet and direct soundscapes that could
be managed independently of the environment that surrounded them. As
Thompson notes, “Walls of expansive glass and hard, thin plaster partitions
resulted in uncomfortably reverberant spaces that easily transmitted sound”
(209). Le Corbusier, among the first to design such a space, was also among
the first to try and regulate its sonic effects (209). Eventually, the visually ap-
pealing design of modernist glass enclosures was rendered sonically accept-
able through acoustical treatments that were developed in the United States.
These treatments were refined to the point where reverberation could be ef-
fectively banished, leaving a quiet and direct sound to match the clean and
airy designs of such spaces. Thus these spaces managed to contain sound and
isolate it from the context of its surroundings, ultimately making the perfect
vehicles for filling in with electroacoustically transmitted sound (228).
Tati’s formal treatment of audiovisual space lives at the intersection of
these visual and auditory characteristics of modernist enclosures, exploiting
the potential range of possibility in their confluence. Importantly, R. Murray
Schafer’s critique of modernist architecture also lives at the intersection of
its image and soundscapes. In particular, it is the possibility of disjunctive
experience between vision and hearing that Schafer finds most offensive, a
quality dependent upon a window’s apparent visual transparency combined
with its auditory opacity. For this visual transparency to work, however,
the frame has to be deemphasized—what Ann Friedberg identifies as the
project of “dematerialization” that modernist architects sought in expanding
the size of glass panes used for construction (2006, 117). These effects are
at their peak, Friedberg says, “in the paradigmatic modernist ‘glass box’ ” in
which windows give way to transparent walls (117). Here the frame expands,
diverting attention away from itself to create a greater sense of transparency,
while keeping the containment of the other senses intact. In this sonic con-
tainment, the transparency of the glass box is audible.
The cigarette lighting gag reflects Schafer’s attitude toward glass very well.
The window as framed view is a function of modernist isolation and con-
tainment, yet this gag is premised upon a citizen’s lack of awareness of the
window’s frame; the mise-en-scène is framed in such a way that makes the
audience complicit in this illusory community between separate spaces.
However, the film does not present an auditory equivalent of the visual
gag. Once we have cut to the interior shot, the isolationist properties of the
building’s modernist soundscape take immediate effect, even before we re-
alize that we are now positioned inside. The nature of the interior sound is
contained and cut off from the world visible outside. This situation is reversed
in the window-cleaning gag at the end of the film in which there is no longer
any auditory differentiation between interior and exterior.
Concerns over the isolationist qualities of modernist architecture are
echoed in Situationist critique of modern society in general. As Guy Debord
reiterates in various different permutations throughout The Society of the
Spectacle, “Everything that was directly lived has moved away into a rep-
resentation” (1983, para. 1). This situation creates an experiential par-
adox: “The spectacle, like modern society, is at once unified and divided”
(para. 54) ensuring “a constant reinforcement of the conditions of isolation
of ‘lonely crowds’ ” (para. 28). While Debord’s prose is often intentionally
cryptic, the theme of modern society’s thrust toward virtual realms of experi-
ence creates illusions of unification between the people in this society when,
in reality, the very fact of experience through representation keeps people
divided from one another. The planes of virtuality enabled by windows that
frame views while reflecting other views are architectural embodiments of
the illusion of community that Debord critiques. The same is true for the
decontextualization of the modern interior soundscape and its replacement
by virtual materials. These aspects of modernist architecture contribute

to the Situationist critique of an emphasis on functionalism that results in
the fabrication of “uninhabitable ambiances” despite its positive aesthetics
(Internationale Situationniste 3 [December 1959], para. 5). For Schafer, these
“uninhabitable ambiences” come in the form of isolationist and virtualist
soundscapes. As he says about the International Style that emerged from
the Bauhaus: “Bellevue—mais mauvais son” (1977, 222). In other words: the
transparency has a sound, and it isn’t good.
Reflecting upon Transparency
It is instructive to situate Schafer’s concerns over architectural isolation

within the apparent contradiction at work in his distaste for technologies of
sound recording and transmission while evoking the language of hi-fi stereo
culture to articulate this distaste. Schafer displays his biases most promi-
nently through his concept of schizophonia, first used in The New Soundscape
(1968) and later developed in The Tuning of the World to attribute negative
connotations to “the split between an original sound and its electroacoustical
transmission or reproduction” (1977, 90). Emily Thompson productively
equates this concept with the goal of sonic isolation in modernist architec-
ture: “Fifty years after it was first accomplished,” she says, “R. Murray Schafer
dubbed this splitting ‘schizophonia’ to emphasize its pathological nature”
(2002, 321). Here Thompson shows how schizophonia can be understood as
an architectural possibility as well as an electroacoustical one: the separation
of a contained soundscape from the context of the environment just beyond
its walls. Thompson’s move to situate architecture on the same plane as media
technology is the key to understanding how Tati’s film puts mediality on dis-
play, and how we can follow his aesthetic treatments as a guide to thinking
through the oft- critiqued contradictions in Schafer’s anti- technological
biases.
In Schafer’s thought, the fundamental fear underlying the experience of
schizophonia is “the complete portability of acoustic space” in which “any
sonic environment can now become any other sonic environment” (1977,
91). This is a nearly impossible situation that I have dubbed “space replace-
ment” (2007, 132). Schizophonic space replacement assumes a level of per-
fection in sound reproduction whereby an electroacoustically transmitted
sound could be mistaken for the naturally occurring soundscape of a given
environment. To complicate matters, space replacement also has a tem-

poral aspect, since prerecorded sounds piped into other environments are
also originating from an earlier time. These factors bind Schafer’s evocation
of schizophrenic experience to more general critiques of postmodernity, as
when Fredric Jameson invokes schizophrenic symptoms to describe what he
sees as the fragmentation, isolation, and surface reassemblage of experience
characteristic of postmodernist architecture, amounting to a loss of histor-
ical context (1991, 21). As Barry Truax has noted, the fear of schizophonia
is essentially a fear of virtual reality (2000, 104). The virtuality in ques-
tion is premised upon the goal of the “vanishing mediator” described by
Jonathan Sterne as an impossible situation wherein “the medium produces
a perfect symmetry between copy and original and, thereby, erases itself ”
(2003, 285). Within this construction, any technologies of recording/trans-
mission should vanish from perception when listening to the final product.
As Sterne argues, however, the idea of an “original” sound object or event is
bound up with the notion of its copy (282), a symptom of the “modernity
thesis” governing ideas about sound technology: “First, it posits the moment
of unmediated sonic reality prior to sound’s technological mediation. Then,
it posits the ideal form of mediation as a vanishing mediator” (285). But since
technologies of reproduction cannot vanish, Sterne argues that any claims
to transparency at the heart of the discourse of fidelity have been programs
for development never fully realized by the designers of sound technologies,
but happily used as tools for marketing ways of listening to their targeted
consumers. These ways of listening are premised upon what Sterne calls an
“audile technique” training listeners to “differentiate between sounds ‘of ’
and sounds ‘by’ the network, casting the former as ‘exterior’ and the latter as
‘interior’ to the process of reproduction” (283). With this audile technique,
listeners can identify exterior sounds and ignore them, thus using a percep-
tual trick to render the medium of reproduction transparent.
In film sound theory, the idea of vanishing mediation has been addressed
at length by James Lastra. Expanding on the work of Rick Altman and
others who have challenged the idea that recording technology can effec-
tively “reproduce” any given sound event, Lastra concludes that we should
always think of sound recordings as “representation” rather than “repro-
duction” (2000, 153). In other words, all recorded sound is acknowledged
as a product of mediation. This allows Lastra to move past expectations for a
film soundtrack to reproduce some “original” sound events “faithfully,” and
focus instead on philosophies of representation that guide the choices that
filmmakers make when designing their soundtracks. In this way the expec-
tations for fidelity between original and copy can be changed according to
an understanding that all copies are little more than representations to begin
with. This is a reality compounded by the fact that even the events being
copied cannot be pinned down to stable and original wholes either, and are
dependent upon listener positionality (Altman 1992, 28). So the distinction
between original and copy is rendered artificial, an issue I will address in
greater detail in the chapters that follow. For the moment, what is most im-
portant is that we recognize the mediation at work in all auditory contexts,
cinematic and otherwise. This is the work of Tati in his exploration of trans-
parency here, and it can be used to rethink Schafer’s call for fidelity in the
soundscape.
Schafer’s concept of schizophonia implies the problems within the dis-
course of fidelity, a fact supported by Schafer’s own use of the related concept
of the hi-fi soundscape in which one can hear far into the distance because
of the absence of the ubiquitous masking sounds that characterize the lo-
fi environment (1977, 43). Here Schafer borrows one of the key definitions
of fidelity from hi-fi stereo culture: that a good recording is one with a low
signal to noise ratio, one of the main factors in striving for the vanishing me-
diator. Schafer is equating two varieties of noise: system noise, a marker of
the recording apparatus, acting as a presence that inhibits our ability to hear
through the technology to the recorded event; and urban noise, which simi-
larly prevents us from hearing far into the distance.
Though Schafer doesn’t make an explicit connection between
schizophonia and the lo-fi soundscape, the two are closely related: the pres-
ence of electroacoustically transmitted sound creates an artificial sense of
distance while in reality contributing to the density of sound that ultimately
hinders long-range listening within the environment. And, of course, the
vanishing mediation required to make schizophonic space replacement a
reality is an imaginary construct invented by the hi-fi stereo industry itself.
Schafer’s concept of a hi-fi soundscape, then, is one premised upon a way of
listening that requires attention to certain features of that soundscape while
ignoring anything that calls attention to how aspects of this environment
mediate the sound.
What is missing in Schafer’s account of schizophonia is that it can be
a productive incitement toward developing an awareness of technolog-
ical mediation, thereby enhancing our engagement with modern sound
environments rather than degrading it. As Barry Truax suggests, “The
challenge of the schizophonic situation for the listener is to make sense

out of the juxtaposition of two different contexts” (2001, 134), a situation
made possible through electroacoustical transmission. Many artists have
gravitated toward exploiting schizophonic media in search of what Andra
McCartney calls an “electroacoustic ecology,” a way of engaging with our
environments that acknowledges the electroacoustic portion of the modern
soundscape as just another element to be understood and engaged with
(2002, 22). As Sterne points out, such “virtuality” is already a feature of
what he calls “speaker culture,” and a rather banal one at that: “the overlay
of physical and mediatic space in digital media has already happened in the
sonic domain. . . . [I]‌t is a basis for the coherence of a modern hearing sub-
ject, not its dissolution or supersession” (2015, 120). If we’re all taking the
confluence of spatiality in stride, then it is acoustic ecology’s job to account
for this, not argue against it.
Now, a window can only function in a schizophonic way if we don’t rec-
ognize the medial quality of glass. The contradictory visual impression only
comes from the illusion of transparency, hence the key problem with Schafer’s
figuration. If glass were to be recognized for what it is—a barrier—then the
quietude it frames would not seem contradictory. Mediation doesn’t vanish
in a glaze. One purpose of glaze, whether on a pot or a donut, is to make the
glazed object shine, thus calling attention to the surface of the object rather
than attempting to make that surface disappear. Therefore, Schafer’s notion
of the glazed soundscape needs to be rethought along the lines of mediality.
There is also the problem of the ableist stigmatization of mental disability
implied by evoking the condition of schizophrenia to support the negative
connotations of the schizophonic experience. This aspect of Schafer’s figu-
ration can also be instructive when considering the role of neurotypicality
in establishing the norms and conventions of audiovisual representation,
and the need to break from the neurotypical when exploring alternative
perspectives on the experience of sound in space. I will elaborate on this
angle of the schizophonic experience in Chapter 4, when I consider the nar-
rative role of neurodivergent experience through the character of Laura
Palmer in David Lynch’s Twin Peaks. For the moment, let us rest on the fact
that the neurodivergence implied by the prefix “schizo” might also help ex-
plain the transformations of spatial perception in Playtime as suggested by
the window gags that bookend the film.
With the heavy baggage of the discourse of fidelity in mind when reading
Schafer’s call for hi-fi soundscapes, we can think more clearly about what is
at stake in Tati’s reversal of audiovisual glazing across the two window gags
described above. The cigarette lighting gag is in line with Schafer’s original
formulation of the disjuncture at the heart of the glazed soundscape. Yet
Tati inverts this in the window cleaner gag, suggesting a way of thinking
about glazing from the opposite perspective: attention to the mediality of
the window by way of its reflective nature frees us of the burden that comes
with labeling its hindrance to sonic flow a bad thing. At the end of the film,
Tati makes his surfaces shine to incite audience reflection, and he ties this to
a newly liberated soundscape through which the divisive characteristics of
these architectural spaces can be rethought.
Tati exchanges one disjuncture for another, never bringing visual and
auditory transparency into perfect alignment. Thus the conclusion to
Playtime is not particularly utopic; rather, it is revelatory in highlighting the
contradictions at work in differing perceptions of modernist architectural
space, medial in how it asks us to contemplate these contradictions. In the
end, we can situate Schafer’s contradictions the same way. As I mentioned
in the introduction, Sabine Breitsameter ascribes a “shimmering” quality
to Schafer’s contradictions that is instructive in its tensions. This goes back
to Schafer’s original intentions for the use of the term soundscape that
emphasizes the listener’s role in the construction of space (see definition in
The Handbook for Acoustic Ecology 1978, 126). This emphasis on positionality
has been critiqued for its clear settler orientation, another problem that I will
take up in Chapter 5 through my call for unsettled listening practices. But in
the Schaferian context, Breitsameter insists that, “The soundscape offers a
convincing model by which space is brought into existence via an act of per-
ception performatively experienced by the listener/soundmaker” (2013, 35),
and this, I argue, is what Tati is after. He makes his spaces shine so that we
can perceive their materiality, and thinking this mediality through Schafer
allows us to hear the “shimmer” in Schafer’s contradictions as instructive
in and of itself. The very notion that attitudes toward listening can hold si-
multaneously contradicting positions, shifting quickly between them, is the
premise of Tati’s reversal, and the substance of how Playtime charts this shift
over the progression of its treatment of audiovisual space. So I continue now
by investigating the film’s processes of highlighting mediality with an em-
phasis on how Tati constructs gags around the perception of the characters
who attempt the navigation of his modernist architectural spaces. This per-
ceptual quality to Tati’s audiovisual treatments is the key to the film’s punch
line in the reversed glazing, and after demonstrating these treatments I will
situate their importance within the culture of Situationist thinking in mid-

twentieth century France.
Enclosures
The dramatic transformation at Playtime’s end depends upon the formal

rigor with which Tati sets up the audiovisual functioning of architectural
space in the opening half. I now provide a thorough examination of three key
scenes in the film’s first hour that illustrate a variety of approaches to the rep-
resentation of the modernist architectural isolation discussed so far. I begin
with the scene that follows the above-described gag between the construc-
tion worker and the concierge. As the construction worker exits the frame,
the concierge ushers Mr. Hulot inside. Hulot has come to meet with an im-
portant businessman, Mr. Giffard (Georges Montant), and the concierge has
Hulot take a seat while he calls for the man to come down. The events that
follow are presented in a single static long take. Hulot is seated screen left
next to the concierge who stands in front of a floor-to-ceiling intercom ap-
paratus, all of which occupies the left half of the frame. In the right half of the
frame we see a long hallway recedes in deep focus. After a frustrating time
fussing with the newfangled intercom system, the elderly concierge assures
Hulot that Giffard is on his way down. Footsteps of hard-soled shoes on a
hard floor emerge on the soundtrack, and then Giffard appears at the end of
the long hallway. The intercom apparatus blocks Hulot’s view of the hallway,
so he depends upon his ears to judge the man’s proximity. Here the film plays
with the artificiality of the soundscape of this building by keeping Giffard’s
footsteps at relatively equal volume even as he draws closer and closer to
Hulot. The volume fluctuates only twice, going briefly up and then back down
again each time. Iain Borden suggests that the strange consistency of the
footsteps, with minor and seemingly random fluctuations, is an example of
how Tati explores the illogicality of modern architectural space (2002, 224).
Borden is correct in identifying that the logic of the space is skewed in its ten-
dency toward a presentness that denies the natural markers of distance and
proximity, particularly through Tati’s consistent ratio of direct to reflected
sound on the footsteps which would ordinarily increase as the sound source
moves closer to the listener. However, Borden misses an important part of
the gag: the volume fluctuations, thought to be random, actually correspond
with Hulot’s subjective auditory perspective. Twice Hulot believes Giffard to
be almost at the end of the hallway, each time rising to greet him only to be
shooed back to his seat by the concierge. Each time Hulot rises, the volume of
the footsteps rises with him, suggesting that these sounds represent Hulot’s
subjective experience of the sound. As Hulot sits back down, the volume of
the footsteps returns to its previous level. Not until Giffard finally arrives in
front of Hulot do his footsteps rise in an objective presentation of the man’s
proximity to the camera.
With the hallway gag Tati is doing two things. First, he is illustrating one
of the effects of the dry direct sound of the modern interior: without rever-
beration, the sense of distance becomes distorted. That Giffard’s footsteps
sound as loud at the far end of the hallway as at the near end suggests a
space in which it is hard to contextualize sound. Second, Tati illustrates
Hulot’s confusion when presented with this space. Without being able to
see the hallway, and with no consistent gradual increase in the volume or
decrease in reflection on the sound of the footsteps, Hulot must rely on his
instincts as to how close Giffard might be. Twice Hulot believes Giffard
should be almost in view, and twice he is wrong. These auditory fluctuations
demonstrate the confusion of human perception within the artificiality of
the modern soundscape. This is the first of three crucial gags that play on
auditory perception that, I argue, are key to understanding the perceptual
dimension of modernist space as it transforms over the course of the film.
The other two perceptual gags occur during the second and third acts and
will be discussed later.
Giffard then instructs Hulot to wait further, and the concierge leads him
to a waiting area consisting of a street-level glass enclosure, a quintessen-
tial glass box. Here the transparent walls separate interior space from the
street visible just outside. Their level of transparency ensures that we can
see right through the enclosure, while remaining aware of its presence. As
in the example with the construction worker asking for a light, this glass en-
closure develops tension between the framing of views and our awareness
of the frame. The broadening of the frame of the window, so that it becomes
a wall, creates a heightened illusion of unmediated transition between inte-
rior and exterior space. Yet once again, sound within this enclosure is cut off
from the street, an example of the disjunction at the heart of Schafer’s glazed
soundscape.
As Hulot waits within the glass box, he strolls about the enclosure poking
the furniture, slipping on the buffed floor, and greeting another man who
enters, sits down, dramatically signs some papers while waiting for his own
appointment, and then exits. As the scene progresses, the film again regularly
cuts between interior and exterior shots. As we have heard previously, we
find a marked distinction between the ambient sound of the exterior space
and the lack of access to this sound on the inside. Again, there is very little
distinction between the spaces on the level of the visual. What we also find
is that sounds within this enclosure are enhanced: the space is dominated by
the sound of electrical humming coming from the overhead lights. Within
this highly artificial soundscape Tati delivers moments of punctuation as the
cushions on the chairs squeak, hiss, and pop in an exaggerated manner, just
as the second man’s physical gestures while signing his papers also stand out
amidst the relative quiet. We hear nothing of these sounds while watching
Hulot from the exterior shots, and the dominating din of the city is reduced
to a low rumble for the interior shots. With the modernist soundscape rend-
ering everything clear, direct, and isolated from its surrounding context,
these sounds become prone to unusual exaggeration. It is as though the
contained nature of these sounds, and their lack of freedom of flow, creates a
hyperreality with a disconcerting nature that Tati uses for comic effect. They
may be hi-fi in their clarity and lack of obfuscation, as Iain Borden suggests
(2002, 222), but for Schafer the artificiality of this clarity would trump the
theoretical benefits of a high ratio of signal to noise. Were it not for a measure
of reflectivity and the need for support structures, the glass box would be an
invisible barrier between the waiting area and the street. This illustrates the
modernist tendency to push the framing of views to the point of total visual
immersion, where any virtuality offered by awareness of the frame as media-
tion between inside and outside disappears, leaving only the illusion of com-
munity between spaces that are actually kept separate.
A while later, as Hulot continues to chase down his appointment with
Giffard, the film plays with the disconcerting effect that glass’s reflectivity
can create within a situation where the glass itself is meant to be invisible.
Hulot approaches an exit to the office building with glass walls and door
through which he can see a similar space directly across the street. The shot is
framed from the interior of the first building looking in deep space through
to the second. Hulot catches a glimpse of Giffard seemingly across the street,
when he is actually standing directly behind Hulot; the glass wall of the ad-
jacent building is catching Giffard’s reflection. The upshot of this routine is
that when glass is viewed as transparent, its reflectivity poses disorienting
problems of perspective.
This gag depends upon the simultaneous transparency and reflectivity

of glass, a distinction that Friedberg discusses in terms of reflective mirror
surfaces that create a virtual plane of representation, and transparent plate
glass window surfaces creating “an unmediated (yet still framed) view of
the world” (2006, 109). Friedberg cites Frederick Kiesler’s observation that
along with the use of glass walls came a kind of superimposition where, for
the first time, glass “expresses surface and space at the same time,” where
the interior and exterior are visible simultaneously (119). Multiple glass
surfaces visible together create not only a framed view from a single per-
spective, but also a cubist view where multiple spatial planes are seen at
once (119). Here Friedberg differentiates between two functions of trans-
parency: “the window as a literal architectural aperture and as a phenom-
enal space of viewing” (122). The particularly modern qualities of the use
of glass are thus two-fold. First, the framed view of the window as archi-
tectural aperture separates the viewer and the subject. Second, looking
through multiple framed views at the same time creates the possibility for
perspectival ruptures where space is broken up into differing planes. In the
above gag, Hulot suffers from the disorienting effect of looking through a
window without knowing which elements of the visual plane are virtual
and which are real. It is his lack of awareness of the medial quality of glass
that creates the confusion.
Each of these three examples illustrates the basic premise of the film’s first
hour: that modernist use of glass windows, doors, and walls creates spaces
that are contained and isolated from their surrounding context, while at the
same time appearing open and transparent. Tati’s various comedic strategies
explore a range of different possibilities for the conflict between containment
and community, always with an emphasis on how this disjuncture is a func-
tion of a character’s lack of awareness around the mediality of glass. With all
its variety, the film’s first hour is absolutely rigorous in the basic auditory dis-
tinction it draws between interior and exterior space while exploring the visual
variability of glass. The effect of these spaces on Mr. Hulot is clear: however hu-
morous his various confusions are to watch, he is consistently unable to take his
meeting with Mr. Giffard. The spaces that Hulot has to navigate in his quest for
Mr. Giffard are deceptively divisive, and this quality belies their visual beauty.
Designed to be isolationist according to new modern ideals, these spaces prove
ineffectual for Mr. Hulot, who seems to have arrived in the new Paris from the
old-world suburbs of Tati’s previous film Mon Oncle (1958).
Transformations
Given the strict treatment Tati gives the enclosed spaces during Playtime’s
first hour, how is it that the film arrives at such a dramatic reversal in its
closing few minutes? The answer: through a good old-fashioned party. The
film’s centerpiece is the restaurant sequence at the Royal Garden that lasts
over forty-five minutes. Here people gather in a communal spirit that moves
in a slow progression from civilized eating to frenzied dancing. Along with
the progression in activity comes a gradual breakdown in the divisions be-
tween people and a return to communal behavior that has been seemingly
banished by the architectural tendencies of the modernist environment in
which these people spend their days. The space of the restaurant is treated as
a kind of intermediary between the two poles that we find at the beginning
and the end of the film.
As with the kinds of glass enclosures found early in the film, the restaurant
features a glass door that, with the help of a doorman (Tony Andal), controls
the flow of both sound and human traffic between the street and the recep-
tion area. The interior space of the restaurant is dominated by a large open
dining hall lined with glass windows and a door that opens out onto a terrace
used by the waiting staff as a place to pause amidst their duties, providing the
opportunity for Tati to develop various gags over the course of the sequence.
Interestingly, the glass that separates the terrace from the dining floor does
not impede the flow of sound to any significant degree. As the action in the
restaurant takes place, we regularly cut between shots from within the main
dining hall and the terrace with no change in the sound of the restaurant
environment populated by people talking, dishes clinking, and a jazz band
playing. The glass door to the terrace opens and closes, again with no ap-
preciable change to the soundtrack. At one point, a trumpet player arrives
on stage and begins a lively jazz number. Shot from the terrace through the
glass, the force of the trumpet player’s opening note blasts open a window, yet
again there is no corresponding adjustment made on the soundtrack. Given
that the restaurant’s front door remains an effective sonic barrier while the
glass doors and enclosures within the restaurant do not, the space of the res-
taurant is established as being governed by the communal nature of its in-
tended function regardless of the architectural imperatives set forth in the
beginning of the film.
As the party progresses, any lingering divisions between people, and
between interior and exterior space, start to break down through the
physical collapse of the restaurant. This begins, appropriately, with the

front door shattering as Mr. Hulot wrestles with the doorman over his
right to enter. This is a key event, as it is the unrestricted flow of people
and sound between the inside and outside following the door’s destruc-
tion that aids in the communal environment unfolding within the restau-
rant. The doorman tries to maintain control by miming his duties with the
use of the door handle, thus playing on the invisibility of glass to comic
effect. Here Tati develops the second of three important audiovisual gags
based on the role of perception in the relationship between sound, image,
and space: in an exterior shot of customers arriving at the restaurant’s
entrance, the sound of the band playing within is raised on the sound-
track while the doorman mimes the opening of the door; the music is then
lowered again as the doorman mimes the door closing once the people
have passed through. The gag works because the film has developed glass
as a transparent material that divides space invisibly, and it indicates the
importance of perception as a function of how Tati’s characters operate
within architectural space. This is a key moment in identifying the role of
perception in the experience of architectural space: if people can be made
to believe that a barrier exists where there is none, then the reverse might
also be possible. This idea lies at the heart of how the film reverses the
properties of glass as building material, and it is within the communal en-
vironment of the restaurant that perceptual shifts by the city’s inhabitants
begin to take effect.
Ultimately the doorman’s attempts to control the flow of traffic after the
collapse of the door are to no avail, and other aspects of the restaurant’s
physical construction start to come undone. As Hulot attempts to reach
for an ornament caught in some baffling near the stage, he inadvertently
pulls the baffling down with it, then causing part of the ceiling to cave in as
well. The band stops for a moment, then carries on until a couple more of
these incidents convince them to pack it in. As the band leaves, a boisterous
American customer takes it upon himself to ask if there is a piano player
amidst the diners who might be willing to keep the music going. Barbara
volunteers, climbing up onto the stage where she begins to play, transforming
herself from member of the audience to performer. This gesture of crossing
the divide between the spaces of performance and spectatorship removes
boundaries separating people from one another, and is symbolic of the phys-
ical destruction of the restaurant’s front door. Finally, it is through this absent
door that, in the early hours of the morning, the partying crowd will stumble
out onto the streets, bringing with them the feeling of community fostered by
the events of the evening.
With this feeling of communal sensibility still fresh in their beings they
find the streets of Paris bathed in morning sunlight and transformed into
a festive atmosphere. Here Tati builds a series of gags here that position
characters and their vehicles as carnival rides. In this atmosphere there is
always music in the air and something as mundane as traffic gridlock on a
roundabout takes on the aesthetics of a carousel. This carnival atmosphere
provides the environment in which the final shots of the window cleaner and
the tourist bus play out, demonstrating that the permeability of glass found
inside the restaurant has now become an architectural fact in the world out-
side, a world that was once governed by more divisive principles.
In these final moments we find the third important gag that revolves
around perceived divisions between spaces represented in the film. At one
point the carnival-style music now permeating the environment stops dead,
along with the circular motion of the traffic emulating a carousel. Then a man
comes along to plug a parking meter, and both the music and traffic start up
again. This gag illustrates the artificiality of the distinctions commonly made
between diegetic and non-diegetic music in film sound theory. Breaking
down this distinction is yet another way in which Tati explores the idea that a
communion of spaces is made possible by the flow of sound. This time, how-
ever, the gag plays upon the perception of the audience who, by exposure to
convention, is likely to initially perceive this music as being non-diegetic. If
so, we can then chuckle as we learn that the music might really be emanating
from a citywide jukebox controlled by the parking meters.
The invisible divide between the inside and the outside of the diegesis is
crossed, as was the divide between the stage and the audience in the restau-
rant, and the two sides of the glass pane in the window cleaner sequence.
The boundary line across the inside and the outside of the diegesis is the
cinema’s version of the tyranny of glass, an invisible barrier through which
no sound should pass—but often does. In the parking meter gag music joins
these spaces together, just as music joined people together in dance at the
restaurant, music that also joined the spaces of performance and spectator
together. So the film’s final section is clearly geared toward a very different
audiovisual representation of space than we find in the first hour. Yet the
question remains: what should we make of the film’s conclusion? Is it neces-
sarily intended as a positive spin in answer to the critique of modernist archi-
tecture earlier in the film?
Is Modernism the Enemy?
In an essay provocatively titled “Modernism as Enemy,” Edwin Heathcote

cites the films of Jacques Tati among several examples of films from the 1950s
that cast modernist architecture in a negative light, and in so doing he adopts
the prevailing opinion on Tati’s interest in the cinematic representation of
urban spaces (2000, 20–25). Iain Borden agrees that Tati’s previous film Mon
Oncle presents a decidedly favorable view of old-world urban settings, “a
fast-disappearing France replete with market, mischievous boys, chattering
residents, cafés and horse-drawn carts,” as opposed to the new modern
suburb and its enclosed private spaces (2002, 217). Yet Borden disagrees that
Playtime offers a similar view transposed into the heart of the modern city.
Borden cites an oft-quoted interview in which Tati asserts that he does not
find modern architecture itself to be a problem, but rather the consumerist
society for which it is built (218). Indeed, Tati’s love of certain strains of mod-
ernist architecture prompted him to make such spaces the central aspect of
the film, devoting much time and energy to the creation of the grand Tativille
set. For David Bellos, the film “is not fundamentally or essentially a satire of
high-rise architecture: it is more a celebration of the beauty of large edifices,
and an expression of wonderment at humankind’s ability to create” (1999,
250). Borden argues that Tati’s love for modernist aesthetics shines through
the film, and that his comic routines involving the spatial disruptions within
this architecture are “overtly positive attempts to reassert the poetic aspects of
modern life that are latent within Modernist urbanism” (2002, 218). As such
Borden equates Tati’s poetics with the Situationist goal of “reasserting the ir-
rational, passionate, performed and contested elements of city life” (218).
Borden’s appreciation of the celebratory aspect of Tati’s work is essential,
but he misses the critique upon which the celebration is based by neglecting
to differentiate between the film’s beginning and end in his exegesis of Tati’s
playfulness with urban space. As Brian R. Jacobson puts it, “to negate or
smooth over the critique [of modern architecture in the film] as Borden does
here is, in a sense, to miss the joke by skipping straight to the punch line”
(2005, 32). In so doing, he also misses a key point in tying Tati’s work to that
of the Situationists, based profoundly on critique as the foundation for the
transformation of urban space.
In “Jacques Tati’s Playtime as New Babylon” (2001), Laurent Marie charts
the narrative progression through the film and asserts that the conclusion
be read as an illustration of Constant’s New Babylon, an elaborate series of
creative renderings of the ideal Situationist city governed by the principles of

Unitary Urbanism. Here people roam nomadically free through spaces that
are made habitable by social reorganization (262–263). For Marie, this New
Babylonian situation is achieved by way of the transformative environment
of the Royal Garden, for it is here that the people’s “behavior is no longer
controlled by their environment, where they are no longer separated from
it, but take hold of the place,” embracing “their ability to act on the world, to
transform it, to re-create it” (262).
Central to Unitary Urbanism is the idea of free flow between the spaces of
society. As Guy Debord writes in 1959, “Unitary Urbanism acknowledges no
boundaries; it aims to form an integrated human milieu in which separations
such as work/leisure or public/private will finally be dissolved” (2006d, 69,
para. 5). Unitary Urbanism does have a goal of physical transformation of
architecture “to accord with the whole development of society” (para. 4).
However, the Situationists acknowledge that this physical transformation to
dissolve all forms of boundaries can come only as the result of changing be-
havior, “to extend the terrain of play to all desirable constructions” (para.
5). And before behavior is changed, people must change the way they
think about behaving within the spaces they inhabit. This relationship be-
tween behavior and its psychology is what the Situationists have dubbed
psychogeography: “the study of the precise laws and specific effects of the ge-
ographical environment, consciously organized or not, on the emotions and
behavior of individuals” (Debord 2006a, 8). So there is a tripartite approach
to the reorganization of modern social life: psychogeography pays attention
to the effects of the environment on the way people behave within it, and
forms the basis for raising awareness about how they think and feel when
making use of the environment in which they live; once this relationship is
understood, people can begin to behave differently within existing spaces,
repurposing its existing forms; finally, new spaces can be constructed based
on the new forms of use developed out of the previous two stages. So it is not
hard to imagine how readings of Playtime that emphasize the film’s positive
representation of the modern city can be tied to Situationist thought about
how to reclaim the city for the people.
Before the ideal Situationist city can be created, citizens must learn to
perceive their city with freshly attuned senses. Two key methods for this
attunement are the ideas of dérive (or “drift”) and détournement. Guy Debord
describes “drifting” through the city as, in part, engaging in “playful and con-
structive behavior” that allows oneself to be “drawn by the attractions of the
terrain and the encounters they find there” (2006b, 62), observing new po-
tential for existing structures that could then be subject to détournement,
the repurposing of these structures along new principles of use (2006c, 67).
For David Bellos, the first half of Playtime is an enactment of the Situationist
notion of dérive while the restaurant sequence acts as détournement (1999,
270). Here, however, we need to distinguish between Jacques Tati’s role as
filmmaker constructing the audiovisual spaces of the film and his role as Mr.
Hulot being made subject to these spaces. It is useful to think of filmmaker
Tati’s creative play with these spaces through the above-described set pieces
as a kind of derive, allowing the audience to appreciate the playfulness of
these spaces anew, as Borden highlights in his analyses. But it is quite another
to consider the position of Mr. Hulot, trying desperately to carry out a simple
task and being frustrated by the prescribed usage of these spaces by the so-
ciety that built them. Mr. Hulot is not drifting through these spaces; he does
not make creative play out of his navigation of Tativille in the first half of the
film. As such Tati the filmmaker is illustrating the constrictive nature of es-
tablished urban form in modernizing Paris, and in doing so he is offering a
critique of this form.
It is also essential to recognize that détournement is not redesign or re-
construction; it is repurposing. There is no doubt that the diners at the Royal
Garden restaurant repurpose that space over the course of the evening. But
the streets of Paris onto which they emerge is not yet the ideal Situationist
city. The rest of Paris has not followed the restaurant’s collapse. Instead,
détournement continues in the repurposing of established forms of ar-
chitecture. Laurent Marie jumps the gun in labeling this New Babylon, al-
though this repurposing is a major step along the way. As Simon Sadler puts
it: “Psychogeography was merely a preparation, a reconnaissance for the day
when the city would be seized for real” (1999, 81). In the end, Playtime is
about the psychological aspect of reimagining the city, not about revolu-
tionary redesign.
The key point that most critics miss is that the architecture hasn’t changed
at the end of the film. Rather, its use has become carnivalized. Is this
carnivalization good in and of itself? We could imagine an alternative reading
that argues for the negative qualities of this new carnivalized space, contin-
uing to trap its citizens in a set of rules for use, containing them while pro-
viding illusions of amusement. I argue, however, that we don’t need to settle
the issue of whether or not the film is ultimately positive or negative. What
we need to do is recognize the audiovisual shift as a reflexive move inviting
us to rethink our relationship to the spaces we navigate every day. Tati makes
this shift through the détournement of the window, once functioning as a
visually transparent barrier to sonic flow, now sonically transparent with
new emphasis on visual reflectivity. Tati situates the audience as though a
drifter in Paris who has been given a map of London to navigate the city,
experiencing its forms according to a different set of instructions (an exper-
iment performed by the Situationists). This is where thinking of Tati’s shift
through Schafer’s thought can allow us to hear what Tati is doing in ways that
have not been acknowledged, and then use this as a way of rethinking the
role that Schafer’s flawed but evocative language can play in making acoustic
ecology work for media studies.
Schaferian Acoustic Design as Psychogeography
R. Murray Schafer’s call for acoustic design shares much in common with
the Situationist idea of Unitary Urbanism as an interdisciplinary approach
to the reorganization of space. Schafer calls for architects and urban planners
to collaborate with musicians, composers, and other people involved with
the art of sound, so that the spaces in which we live might be more soni-
cally habitable (1977, 205). The beginnings of acoustic design come with
increased awareness of the sonic environment fostered by the practice of
soundwalking: attentive listening to one’s environment with the goal of un-
derstanding the soundscape as a “composition” consisting of component
parts. Rearranging these component parts in the mind through the act of
attentive listening is the first step toward thinking through the ways in which
aspects of the soundscape might be reorganized to render the world more
sonically habitable (see Westerkamp 1974). As a listening practice geared to-
ward understanding the effects of the soundscape on those that live within it,
soundwalking is the acoustic ecologist’s version of psychogeography.
The crucial point of connection between Schafer’s project of acoustic de-
sign and the goals of Unitary Urbanism lies in the psychogeographical basis
of each. Neither acoustic design nor Unitary Urbanism resulted in large
scale rethinking of urban planning; Constant’s New Babylon remained a set
of creative propositions, much like Schafer’s own musings about ideal sonic
environments. Yet within Unitary Urbanism there lies hope for the fate of ex-
isting space through changing the way it is used without necessarily changing
its design, and we can find this potential in Schafer’s call for acoustic design
as well, ultimately starting with “ear cleaning” exercises that he first published
the year Playtime was finished (Schafer 1967). As outlined in the third news-
letter put out by Internationale Situationniste, Unitary Urbanism “is not ide-
ally separated from the current terrain of cities. UU is developed out of the
experience of this terrain and based on existing constructions” (1959, para.
8). So for the Situationists, “it is just as important that we exploit the ex-
isting decors” in attempts to reappropriate modernist urban space “as it is
that we construct completely unknown ones” (para. 8). As the practice of
soundwalking illustrates, there may be hope for the idea of acoustic design
along the lines of reclaiming urban unity. I suggest that the conclusion of
Playtime is all about changing thought and use, not about changing the ar-
chitecture itself. This is akin to the practice of the soundwalk as the first step
toward acoustic design: through shifting attention, the soundwalker enacts a
change in space through changed use that does not require a change in brick
and mortar. Each program begins with an approach to shifting perspec-
tive on existing spaces that has, over the decades, proliferated—particularly
through the arts.
It is important to understand that the only way to fully account for the
change in the treatment of sound in space at the end of the film is to acknowl-
edge the role of the change in attitude experienced by the partygoers who
find themselves on the street in the morning. The material properties of glass
have not changed here: what has changed is the perspective of the people
experiencing spaces dominated by glass. Playtime presents an architectural
impossibility using the cinema’s powers of illusion, but this impossibility is
best understood as a metaphor for the psychogeographical shift that allows
for previously divisive spaces to become sites of communal activity despite
their architectural intent. As such, the film offers a way to draw a relation-
ship between acoustic ecology’s emphasis on acoustic design and Situationist
articulations of psychogeography: where we are interested in how architec-
ture affects human psychology, we might also be interested in how psychology
affects architectural space. To shift one’s awareness of space is as powerful
as shifting the space itself, and I believe this is the message of Playtime. It
is here that the three gags on perception described above are most impor-
tant. First, the fluctuating volume of Giffard’s footsteps in the long corridor
reflects Hulot’s confusion about his proximity as a function of the unnatural
qualities of the modern space. Second, the volume of the music fluctuating
as the doorman at the Royal Garden mimes the opening and closing of the
shattered door reflects the expectations people have of modern architecture
even after it has been physically destroyed. Finally, the sound of the music in
the air transcending the divide between the inside and outside of the diegesis
is a reflexive move that suggests the permeable boundary between different
levels of the soundtrack as a reflection on audience expectations.
These gags get increasingly reflexive. As an audience, we are in on the first
two gags, able to see what the characters experiencing the fluctuations in
volume do not. The third gag, however, is on us. When the parking meter
doubles as the coin-box for a musical carnival ride, the film reveals that the
division between sound and image is as much about the artifice of cinema as
it is about the nature of modernist architecture. Just as the window cleaner
sequence demonstrates that the flow of sound between compartmentalized
spaces is a function of cinematic representation, so too does the parking
meter gag reveal the artifice of the divide between the inside and outside of
the diegesis. While the spatial qualities of the carnival music haven’t changed,
our understanding of its position within the diegesis has. The closing gags
demonstrate the power of shifting perceptual awareness to create a different
understanding of space, and this is the lesson revealed by careful attention to
the film’s formal approach to spatial representation, to hear the transparency
depicted on screen.
Mediality is on display in each of these perceptual gags: they call atten-
tion to Tati’s construction of audiovisual space in order that we might re-
flect upon our own perceptual processes in making sense of this space and,
by extension, the other architectural spaces in which we live out our lives.
There’s a reason to keep the rhetoric of hi-fi stereo culture in mind when
addressing Schafer’s writing: latent in this rhetoric is the fact that we learn
to hear according to a set of ideals. Change the ideals, and we hear differ-
ently. So we can come to a new understanding of acoustic ecology—one that
eschews Schaferian biases that Tati could have maintained throughout the
film, and instead invites new ways of positively understanding urban space,
in line with Situationist remapping of existing urban forms through practices
of psychogeography.
The Moral of the Story
The proposed utopia that concludes Playtime has its problems. The presence
of music in the air, a fixture of the diegesis, is one of Tati’s trademark symbols
of space that is able to support human community. Like the old-world Paris
in Mon Oncle in which there is always music in the air, the final moments of
Playtime suggest that this modern urban center has been rendered a space
where the free flow of music is emblematic of its reclamation by the people.
Interestingly, this idea is inherent to R. Murray Schafer’s project of acoustic
design, the basis of which is to think of the world’s soundscapes as a musical
composition (1977, 5) thus ensuring that there is always music in the air. The
piped-in music of Tati’s Paris serves as a marker of the dissolution of borders
between spaces once kept separate. Yet this music in the air speaks to one
of Emily Thompson’s key points about the soundscape of modernity: that
the new dry spaces of contained enclosures are completed by the addition of
piped-in ambience, the epitome of Schafer’s concept of schizophonia. Sound
now moves freely across barriers and music is ever in the air, suggesting an
atmosphere of freedom and community. As such, in a way, the entire city has
now become homogenized, essentially creating a single space washed in a
single soundscape. Is this really the solution to the problems of isolationist
containment? The idea of free-flow between all spaces is not necessarily an
ideal to be sought at all costs. Indeed, this idealization of homogeneity is one
of the key critiques of Schafer’s approach to analysis and prescription as well,
as I will demonstrate in more detail in Chapter 5.
In the end, I argue that Tati’s transformation of the formal treatment of
architectural space is best understood as a cinematic metaphor for a dif-
ferent way of thinking about this space, leading in turn to a different way
of using it. The real reclamation of the space illustrated by the film’s final
section is neither in the destruction of modernist architecture nor the mag-
ical transformation of its material properties. Rather, reclamation lies in a
psychogeographical shift where the distance between individuals inherent
in modern society is recognized as a necessary function of any commu-
nity. This psychogeographical shift is given its punctuation point in the
final sequence in which Mr. Hulot gives Barbara the flower statuette. This
sequence closes the film by offering us the key to establishing a mindset
of community: the gesture of giving, an act in opposition to the capitalist
ideology that gave rise to the modernist urban spaces that Tati explores
throughout the film.
Mr. Hulot spies the gift in a crowded shop, but finds himself caught at the
checkout as he sees Barbara getting back onto her tour bus across the street.
Just as the architecture of Paris has not physically changed the morning
after the Royal Garden, so too is it still mired in the processes of consumer
society—the main target of Tati’s criticisms. Yet here Hulot finds a solution: he
enlists the help of a stranger on the other side of the check-out who runs with
the gift box over to Barbara and gives it to her on behalf of Hulot. This is the
key marker of the film’s engagement with Unitary Urbanism: the structures
of consumer space can be reclaimed through altered use. With the creation
of this relay, Hulot takes a consumerist principle—shopping—and turns it
into an act of profitless giving. To do this, he establishes a link of commu-
nity between his position within the shop and Barbara’s position on the bus
by way of a stranger’s help. Without destroying the infrastructure that has
Hulot trapped, he charts a path of community within this infrastructure. In
short, Hulot renders previously constrictive aspects of modernist architec-
tural form truly transparent.
Barbara accepts the gift happily, and as she rides the bus into the dusk, she
opens the box and holds the flower in her hand with delight. In looking at
her gift, she finds a parallel between its shape and that of the streetlamps just
outside her window. As already noted, this moment takes place in an envi-
ronment where glass barriers no longer impede the flow of sound, bringing
this new architectural fact into alignment with the gesture of giving. Herein
lies the film’s most overt alignment with Unitary Urbanism. The Situationists
argue that while the modern city is a “lamentable spectacle, a supplement
to the museums for tourists driven around in glass-in buses, UU envisages
the urban environment as the terrain of participatory games” (Internationale
Situationniste 3, para. 7). Hulot’s gift to Barbara is made possible by the relay
between two elements of consumerist society, the shop and the bus. This relay
becomes a participatory game that is reflected by the lack of auditory barrier
posed by the glass that once would have kept the tourists on the bus sepa-
rate from the environment that they came to see. The gift suggests the simple
power of drawing associations between things that are usually thought to
be separate, of breaking down the barrier between people in the symbol of
passing an item from one person to another. Tati takes this gesture and uses
it to create the film’s final play on the dissolution of the divisive barriers to
community that modern architecture posed in the first half of the film. In so
doing, Playtime offers the potential to read its formal shifts in the audiovisual
representation of modernist architecture as a function of a new communal
mindset on the part of those that live within its divisive spaces. This gesture,
in turn, emblemizes the film’s mediality in the form of audible transparency,
as the final sonic barriers between interior spaces vanish, conspicuously,
once and for all.
References
Bellos, David. 1999. Jacques Tati: His Life and Art. London: The Harvill Press.
Borden, Iain. 2002. “Playtime: ‘Tativille’ and Paris.” In The Hieroglyphics of Space:
Reading and Experiencing the Modern Metropolis, edited by Neil Leach, 217–235.
Breitsameter, Sabine. 2013. “Ways of Listening; Figures of Thought.” In Ways of
Listening; Figures of Thought: A Festschrift for R. Murray Schafer on the Occasion
of his 80th Birthday, edited by Sabine Breitsameter and Eric Leonardson, 17–36.
Darmstadt: Hochschule Darmstadt.
Burch, Noël. 1973. Theory of Film Practice. Translated by Helen R. Lane. New York: Praeger
Publishers.
Debord, Guy. 2006a. “Introduction to a Critique of Urban Geography.” In Situationist
International Anthology, revised and expanded edition, edited and translated by Ken
Knabb, 8–12. Berkeley: Bureau of Public Secrets.
Debord, Guy. 2006b. “Theory of the Dérive.” In Situationist International Anthology, revised
and expanded edition, edited and translated by Ken Knabb, 62– 66. Berkeley:
Bureau of Public Secrets.
Debord, Guy. 2006c. “Détournement as Negation and Prelude.” In Situationist
International Anthology, revised and expanded edition, edited and translated by Ken
Knabb, 67–68. Berkeley: Bureau of Public Secrets.
Debord, Guy. 2006d. “Situationist Theses on Traffic.” In Situationist International
Anthology, revised and expanded edition, edited and translated by Ken Knabb, 69–70.
Berkeley: Bureau of Public Secrets.
Debord, Guy. 1967/1983. Society of the Spectacle. Detroit: Black and Red.
Friedberg, Anne. 2006. The Virtual Window: From Alberti to Microsoft. Cambridge,
MA: MIT Press.
Heathcote, Edwin. 2000. “Modernism as Enemy: Film and the Portrayal of Modern
Architecture.” Architectural Design 70, no. 1 (January): 20–25.
Internationale Situationniste. 1959. “Unitary Urbanism at the End of the 1950s.”
Translated by Paul Hammond. Internationale Situationiste, no. 3 (December). Archived
online, http://www.cddc.vt.edu/sionline/si/unitary.html
Jacobson, Brian R. 2005. Constructions of Cinematic Space: Spatial Practice at the
Intersection of Film and Theory. MA thesis. MIT.
Jameson, Frederic. 1991. Postmodernism, or, The Cultural Logic of Late Capitalism.
University Press.
Marie, Laurent. 2001. “Jacques Tati’s Playtime as New Babylon.” In Cinema and the
City: Film and Urban Societies in a Global Context, edited by Mark Shiel and Tony
Fitzmaurice, 257–269. Oxford: Blackwell Publishers.
McCartney, Andra. 2002. “Sharing Experiences Towards the Possibility of an
Electroacoustic Ecology.” Soundscape: The Journal of Acoustic Ecology 3, no. 1: 22.
Sadler, Simon. 1999. The Situationist City. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
Schafer, R. Murray. 1967. Ear Cleaning. Reprinted in The Thinking Ear: Complete Writings
on Music Education, 46–92. Toronto: Arcana Editions, 1986.
Schafer, R. Murray. 1968. The New Soundscape. Reprinted in The Thinking Ear: Complete
Writings on Music Education, 93–169. Toronto: Arcana Editions, 1986.
Schafer, R. Murray. 1993. Voices of Tyranny, Temples of Silence. Indian River: Arcana
Editions.
Sterne, Jonathan. 2015. “Space within Space: Artificial Reverb and the Detachable Echo.”
Grey Room 60 (Summer): 110–131.
Thompson, Emily. 2002. The Soundscape of Modernity: Architectural Acoustics and the
Culture of Listening in North America, 1900–1933. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
Truax, Barry, ed. 1978. Handbook for Acoustic Ecology. Vancouver: A.R.C. Publications/
World Soundscape Project.
Truax, Barry. 2008. “Soundscape Composition as Global Music: Electroacoustic Music as
Soundscape.” Organised Sound 13, no. 2: 103–109.
Westerkamp, Hildegard. 1974. “Soundwalking.” Sound Heritage 3, no. 4: 18–27.
2
Immersive Reflexivity
Documenting the Inaudible in Peter Mettler’s
Picture of Light
In Picture of Light (1994), filmmaker Peter Mettler (serving here as di-

rector, cinematographer, editor, and sound designer) travels with his crew to
Churchill, Manitoba, in an attempt to capture the aurora borealis on film. On
the surface, the subject matter of the film consists of the problems inherent
in translating the aurora borealis into cinematic visual representation. But
Mettler frames this quest with broader questions about the role of recording
technologies in mediating our experience of the world, and about the rela-
tionship between civilization, the wilderness, and the modern human sub-
ject. The film explores these questions through a highly reflexive strategy that
emphasizes not only the filmmaker’s presence in the process of constructing
the film, but also the fundamental division between the cinema’s two main
channels of transmission: sound and image. This is the line of demarcation
that forms this chapter’s investigation of acoustic profile: the extent to which
image can be heard in the soundtrack and vice versa.
Picture of Light is as much about what we hear as it is about what we
see, and the film’s ecological theme of human engagement with nature by
way of modern technology is positioned within this reflexive approach to
audiovisuality. Yet these techniques are not used simply to foreground the
distance between subject, film, and audience, as is common for the reflexive
documentary film. Rather, the film suggests the possibility of providing the
audience with an authentic experience of the aurora borealis based on points
of intersection between the external manifestation of the lights and our in-
ternal experience of them as mediated by the technology of film.
In this chapter I will demonstrate how Picture of Light can be read as an
attempt to move past critiques of documentary veracity toward a transcend-
ence of the boundary between subject, film, and audience. I employ the term
immersive reflexivity to refer to the use of medial strategies to bring the au-
dience closer to the film’s subject matter rather than cultivating distanced
DOI: 10.1093/oso/9780190226077.003.0003
contemplation. My analysis will situate Picture of Light within the discourse

of reflexive documentary practice, tying the film’s mode of address to the
concept of the performative documentary theorized (slightly differently) by
Bill Nichols and Stella Bruzzi. Though Mettler’s film shares much in common
with these approaches to the documentary film, I argue that the film’s reflex-
ivity is not premised upon an irrefutable skepticism about the connection
between film and the pro-filmic world that often informs performativity in
documentary film. Instead, Picture of Light demonstrates how calling atten-
tion to cinematic mediation of reality is a way of finding something within
this mediation that can instill an experience equivalent to seeing the aurora
borealis in person.
Mettler’s approach provides an ideal example of how to address a major
issue in play with the work of the World Soundscape Project (WSP) and
acoustic ecology at large: the use of sound recording technology to provide
accurate documentation of the environments that they set out to analyze, ap-
preciate, and critique. Much criticism has been levied against the early WSP
and related work because of their apparently naïve assumption that their
recordings could tell accurate stories about the world. Such thinking has long
been jettisoned from documentary film sound theory, yet I don’t think that
the baby should be thrown out with the bath water. I will demonstrate how
the idea of immersive reflexivity provides a way to reclaim the value of re-
cording as a means toward accessing and experiencing the world in front of
the cameras and microphones, particularly with respect to engaging partic-
ular geographic locales. The problems with the early WSP’s interest in re-
cording technology as a tool for accessing and preserving the world’s sonic
environments was not in their belief in the possibility of such access and
preservation, but in their attempts to hide their role in shaping the mate-
rial, their concealment of the mediality inherent to their project. Through
my analysis of Mettler’s film I demonstrate that immersive reflexivity is a way
around the problem of thinking about technological mediation as neces-
sarily distanciating, an approach to image and soundmaking that can operate
outside of the skepticism that so often governs the reflexive instinct.
Picture of Light happens to have been made right around the time that the
second wave of acoustic ecology was coming together under the aegis of the
World Forum for Acoustic Ecology at their first meeting in Banff in 1993 and
subsequent 1996 release of the follow-up CD to the original 1973 Vancouver
Soundscape (which will guide my case study of the Vancouver soundscape on
film in the last chapter of this book). This was a moment when documentary
Immersive Reflexivity 63
filmmakers and soundscape composers alike began to embrace the role that
their interventions played in the environments they sought to document and
engage with. As I will discuss in the next chapter, the WSP discovered the
value of reflexivity for promoting audience engagement for themselves with
their development of the art of soundscape composition and its forthright
acknowledgment of the role of the sound recordist and composer in shaping
the material. My purpose in this chapter is to offer a path to the discovery of
reflexivity’s immersive power as it is illustrated in Peter Mettler’s film, which
sets out to expose the processes by which mediality brings audiences closer
to the material being documented.
Mettler’s deployment of immersive reflexivity depends upon the
filmmaker’s approach to illustrating the problem of how to document the in-
audibility of the aurora borealis, and how this problem is embedded within
his exploration of the capacity for sound and image to play off each other to
reveal the line that separates them while moving to dissolve it once and for all.
The key to this dissolution lies in what Michel Chion terms the transsensorial
qualities of the cinema, the potential for something seen on the image track
to be experienced as sound, and vice versa (1994, 137). Mettler addresses the
idea of transsensoriality by suggesting that the aurora borealis move “like
thoughts,” an external manifestation of an internal experience, a guiding
concept for the film that is eventually tied to a later question about whether
or not the lights can be heard. Mettler’s answer to this question inevitably
comes by way of the power of the lights to evoke transsensorial awareness of
sound in the absence of anything tangibly audible. This connection between
the “movement” of thought and the transsensorial potential of the aurora is
suggested by Peter Weber in his description of the film:
Mettler lets people living under the skies of the aurora borealis tell their
story about them by simply letting their hands speak. They seem to be
conducting mysterious music. We learn that whoever observes the aurora
borealis for a long time loses the sense of distance—suddenly one has this
feeling that the play of lights is happening in one’s own head. Like thoughts
(quoted in McSorley 1995, 112)
The idea that the hand gestures of interviewees link the motion of the au-
rora to the conducting of music points to the transsensorial potential of the
lights as a function of gestural movement, negating the distance between
the lights as external phenomenon and one’s internal experience of them.
Transsensoriality is the basis for reading Picture of Light as an attempt to

transcend the second-order nature of the cinema, an attempt to provide the
audience with a more direct experience of the aurora than the simple record
of their filmed representation can offer on its own.
To excavate Mettler’s approach to handling the line that separates sound
from image, I will situate his aesthetic strategies in the context of opposing
ideologies about audiovisual synchronization that emerged as filmmakers
transitioned from the silent era to the technological reality of synchroni-
zation. In particular, I will compare the visual music movement with the
Soviet Montage school’s call for asynchronicity (or counterpoint), the former
aiming for cinematic expressions of the inseparability of sound and image,
the latter founded upon the belief that they can only ever be separate and
attempt to conceal this fact is to deny cinema’s true power to engage the
audience with its subject matter. I will demonstrate how Mettler positions
his allusions to transsensoriality within decidedly contrapuntal strategies,
joining disparate thinking about sound’s relationship to the image through
the suggestion that the movement of the aurora borealis is akin to the move-
ment of thought. In turn, this analogy can be productively read through
avant-garde filmmaker Stan Brakhage’s quest to create the cinematic equiva-
lent of moving visual thinking, silent films that explore the “musical” qualities
of visual movement as a way of illustrating the transsensoriality at the base
of all experience. While Picture of Light doesn’t look like one of Brakhage’s
works of visual music, Mettler’s film is geared toward very similar ideas about
the potential for cinema to challenge the line that separates the film from its
audience. So in this chapter I ask, what is the acoustic profile of the lights?
How far can they extend past the diving line between sound and image, and
what can tracking this profile tell us about the problems of field recording for
documentary veracity? In answering these questions, I dive into the heart of
Mettler’s interest in exploring the dividing line between sound and image,
which can be felt most keenly as he plays the inaudibility of the lights into the
potential for hearing to be made a function of seeing, dissolving the technical
separation between the two. This is his main medial move, and the heart of
his immersive reflexivity. The experience of the northern lights in this film,
while at an aesthetic remove from the real thing, can trigger the mind in a
way that is no different from being there in person. This mental triggering
is an attempt to transcend the negative qualities of schizophonia and reveal
the positive potential in the subjective experience of external mediation.
Ultimately, Picture of Light offers an answer to the aging problem of fidelity
in the use of recording technology to provide access to particular places and

events.
Performing Documentary Convention
Picture of Light makes use of dramatic shifts in approaches to documentary

representation, creating a profound connection between the film’s immer-
sive power and its reflexive design. There are times when the boundaries
between sound and image are ill-defined, creating a wash where abstract
electroacoustic music by Jim O’Rourke blends seamlessly with location
sound and images that are at once fantastical and grounded in realism. This
mixture allows us to question where one element of the soundtrack stops
and the other begins, and where the image and soundtrack touch through
conventions of realism, asynchronicity, or transsensoriality. Other times
the distinction between these various elements is very well defined indeed,
creating abrupt moments of disjunction, or shifts between modes of audio-
visual synchronization, that provide a more direct example of reflexivity.
An early example of how the film shifts between different strategies of
reflexivity comes as a series of traveling shots follow a snowmobile convoy
through the tundra in the black of night, lit only by their headlights. As we
watch the snow passing quickly by in a POV shot from on board one of the
vehicles, Mettler’s voiceover explains the nuances that the Inuit language has
for describing snow. As is usually the case, the narration is mixed with Jim
O’Rourke’s electroacoustic music, creating an ethereal quality to the sequence
that suits the hypnotic effect of the images. Jerry White finds these stylistic
details to be a mark of reflexivity in and of themselves (2006, 26). Yet Mettler
ups the ante significantly as this sequence ends abruptly with a cut to a sound
recordist next to a stand of trees with microphone in hand. He taps the mi-
crophone, and as soon as the hand makes contact we hear the corresponding
thump bringing a sudden end to the music track, tearing us dramatically
out of the ambient drones that permeated the snowmobile ride. In this way
the film cuts from dreamlike floating to the crisp and harsh reality of direct
sound. We then watch from a fixed vantage point as crewmember Gerald
Packer marches through ever deepening snow, and Mettler tells him from
behind the camera that the rest of the crew cannot follow. The sounds of the
crunching snow are so prominent as to seem exaggerated, the direct sound
recording yielding a stark contrast of reality to the preceding sequence’s
soundscape treatments. Though the sequence ends with a powerful example

of synchronization through direct sound, the transition between the snow-
mobile ride and the deep snow walking reminds us that even realism through
synchronization is only a convention that can start and stop at any given mo-
ment. With this transition between modes Mettler is contrasting an obser-
vational approach with a highly participatory one, illustrating two extremes
that often involve heavily defended philosophies about what constitutes an
ethical approach to documentary filmmaking.
This example encapsulates the spirit of Picture of Light as first and fore-
most a meditation on the relationship between the world, its experience by
human beings, and the role of technologies of audiovisual representation
in mediating this experience. Every step of the way Mettler inserts himself,
his team and their equipment into the film, prompting Nathan Clarkson to
dub the film’s recording devices as “actors” in and of themselves, with their
own idiosyncrasies on display (2013, 79). In this way, Picture of Light is as
much about the making of the film as it is about its stated goal: to capture
moving images of the aurora. Yet as with all of Mettler’s work, he has a poet-
icism that prompts Bruce McDonald, Martin Schaub, and Tom McSorely to
compare him to esteemed Russian aestheticist Andrei Tarkovsky (Pitschen
and Schönholzer 1995, 18, 52, 104). The film’s simultaneous lyricism and re-
flexivity works against the usual role that performativity plays in contempo-
rary documentary theory: in Picture of Light, the self-conscious disruption
of cinematic illusionism takes nothing away from its powers of immersion.
As Jerry White argues, “Mettler exists between the conventional and the ex-
perimental, never entirely at home in either and yet fully engaged with each”
(2006, 2). Traveling the continuum between convention and experimenta-
tion allows for the film to point toward the permeable boundaries between
immersion and reflexivity as well, creating the immersive reflexivity that
is the fundamental driving force behind the film. This immersive reflex-
ivity is structured around the film’s approach to sound/image synchroniza-
tion: conventions of sonic realism are contrasted with moments of lyricism
and asynchronicity that keep us aware of the artificiality of audiovisual
relationships while pointing toward their inextricable links within the to-
tality of the film.
Mettler’s interest in blending documentary and experimental modes of
address is tied to his interest in providing his audience with access to the
world that exists in front of his camera and microphones, while simultane-
ously emphasizing that the audience’s experience of this world is necessarily
a product of cinematic mediation. Tom McSorley stresses that Mettler’s

films constitute “a cinema which constantly investigates its own images, its
own ways of representing what it sees” (1995, 90) in which “the conflict be-
tween the ‘way you see and what you see’ is exposed and explored” (94). In
McSorley’s description, the “what” that we see is connected to documentary
and the “way” that we see to the avant-garde, thereby suggesting that the es-
sence of Mettler’s hybrid style lies in the investigation of the world itself and
its mediation by both our senses as well as the technology of cinema.
Mettler’s sustained revelation of the filmmaking process on screen makes
Picture of Light a perfect candidate for use as an example of the now well-
entrenched notion of performativity in documentary film theory. Stella
Bruzzi sees the “performative” documentary as one that “uses perfor-
mance within a non-fiction context to draw attention to the impossibilities
of authentic documentary representation,” a feature that is “an alienating,
distancing device, not one which actively promotes identification and a
straightforward response to a film’s content” (2006, 185–186). She contrasts
this definition with that of the “performative mode” identified by Bill Nichols
as consisting of films that “stress subjective aspects of a classically objective
discourse” (Nichols 1994, 95). For Bruzzi, the idea of performance, “Whether
built around the intrusive presence of the filmmaker or self-conscious
performances by its subjects—is the enactment of the notion that a docu-
mentary only comes into being as it is performed” (2006, 186). In essence
Bruzzi is discussing reflexivity in a positive light as it breaks with the canon-
ical association between documentary filmmaking and the idea of the “real.”
However, Mettler’s performativity does not hinge on his skepticism about
film’s ability to document and communicate the world before his cameras
and microphones, but rather the opposite.
Importantly, Bruzzi discusses performativity not only in terms of overt re-
flexivity, as when filmmakers are present as subjects of the film, but also in
terms of stylistic qualities associated with auteurism. She points to the films
of major figures like Errol Morris in which “the slipperiness and indeter-
minacy of ‘the truth’ is principally signaled by how this overwrought visual
style becomes linked to a skepticism concerning the capability of the docu-
mentary to represent such a truth” (2006, 195). She refutes claims that the
idea of the auteur has no place in documentary, “for one of the corollaries
of accepting that documentary cannot but perform the interaction between
reality and its representation is the acknowledgement that documentary, like
fiction, is authored” (197). Bruzzi doesn’t discuss Mettler’s work, but much
of what she might identify as performative in these films would be tied to his
highly idiosyncratic audiovisual style that allows for comparisons to other
acknowledged auteurs like Tarkovsky.
Jerry White agrees with the connection made between some aspects of
Mettler’s style and European art cinema, but he wants to move Mettler past
this narrow definition and toward a more global perspective, recognizing
that his films are “engaged in a truly global search for the particulars
(lights, dance, rhythm) that provide us with a sense of wonder” (2006, 34).
This sense of “wonder” is the slippery nexus point around which Mettler
equates technological mediation with that of the human sensorium. At the
heart of White’s assessment is the idea that Mettler’s “pursuit of wonder” is
grounded in skepticism about the medium of film’s role in this pursuit, but
that he achieves the goal of sharing wonder with the audience in spite of
technology’s limitations. So White finds it appropriate that “the sequence
where the aurora borealis are finally put front and center is also the most
detailed about the technology of the camera,” suggesting that “one can only
capture the purity of vision through an intense, highly-prepared manip-
ulation” (30). In McSorley’s words, “The trick of physics and the ‘lies’ of
the camera that have made the images possible create wonder and awe: the
paradox is complete, and the conflict between the way we see and what we
see is revealed in all its rich possibility” (1995, 112, 118). It is within this
apparent conflict that Mettler finds the most productive way to transcend
the barrier between audience and subject: “This is how technology can help
us get closer to understanding the truth of our world—so long as we ac-
knowledge the limits of our senses and those of technology itself ” (White
2006, 31). The technology of the cinema and the “technology” of our senses
both have limits, revealing the fact that all our experience is mediated. So
Mettler’s desire to explore the relationships between internal experience
and the external world is tied to his keen awareness of mediality as a neces-
sary part of how we engage the world.
For Catherine Russell, “The failure of realism to present evidence of the real
is the radical possibility of experimental ethnography” (1999, 25), a quality
that she would later attribute to Mettler as a filmmaker working within this
conflation of genres. Russell praises Mettler’s work for its recognition that
the cinema necessarily entails a second-degree form of access to reality, of-
fering “valuable clues to the potential of cinematic practice in a fallen world”
(2006, para. 17). Russell argues that a film like Gambling, Gods and LSD
(2002), which is his closest work to Picture of Light, is about “a quest for an
experience that is ultimately incommunicable,” a state of being “somewhere

the camera cannot follow” (paras. 4, 12). Just as the camera cannot follow
through to the subjective experience of trance states in Gambling, it cannot
follow to the experience of the aurora borealis in Picture of Light. Russell
emphasizes Mettler’s interest in maintaining a distance from the subject
matter in order to call attention to the limitations of the technology, limita-
tions that she ties to the “fall from experience” inherent in Walter Benjamin’s
account of the cinema whose “illusory nature is that of the second-degree”
(1968, 233), a way of being in the world “which is first and foremost, a mode
of being among images, in the second nature of the cinema” (Russell 2006,
paras. 13, 17).
Indeed, the preoccupations of Mettler’s voiceover in Picture of Light
corroborates Russell’s account to a large extent, musing as he does over
the nature of experience as mediated by the photographic image while we
watch him and his crew fiddling with their equipment. I argue, however, that
Mettler’s reflexive approach is not solely in the service of acknowledging the
“second nature of the cinema” as a way to break from traditions of documen-
tary grounded in photography’s indexical potential. Rather, in the film he
tries to move past the idea of the world of reproduction as “fallen” and get at
something deeper. Here, the camera as extension of the body has different
implications—not the surrogate “pleasure machine” that Russell describes
as the object of cinephelia (2006, para. 13), but neither the analog for con-
sciousness, the “metaphor for vision” that Russell acknowledges in the work
of experimental filmmakers like Stan Brakhage (1999, 15). Rather, I argue
that there is profound desire in Mettler’s films to create a cinema that offers
a true experiential equivalent to the world that existed before his camera,
what Jerry White identifies as “the way that interior or mental complexity
can echo the complexities of the physical world,” (2006, 24). For Mettler, the
cinematic equivalent of the pro-filmic world does not lie in realist notions of
documentary’s indexical relationship to the world, or in trying to simulate
internal experience through cinematic special effects. Rather, Mettler is in-
terested in how calling attention to cinema’s mediation of the world can help
alert us to the way that all of our experience is mediated by the senses, thereby
creating a cinema that invites the audience to become immersed by way of
reflexive strategies. Returning to Jonathan Sterne’s description of mediality
discussed in the introduction to this book, “communication technologies
are a fundamental part of what it means to speak, to hear, or to do anything
with sound [or image]. Mediality simply points to a collectively embodied
process of cross-reference,” without assuming that one form of experiencing

the world is automatically less mediated than another (2012, 10).
Though Mettler’s style in general might seem the pitch-perfect embodi-
ment of the performative documentary style that Bruzzi describes, I argue
that the performative reflexivity in Picture of Light is not about skepticism
and distrust of the medium. Instead I would describe Mettler’s reflexivity as
post-skeptical, seeking to move past a filmmaking strategy that emphasizes
the distance between subject, film, and audience, and move toward an ap-
proach that uses performative strategies to expose the profound connection
that our experience of a film can have to our experience to the world outside
the walls of the cinema. In other words, in Picture of Light Mettler performs
mediality. By cuing the audience into the processes of cinematic mediation,
Mettler wants us also to understand how the experience of the aurora them-
selves is mediated by our subjectivity, a mediation that can be transcended by
his approach to navigating the line that separates sound from image. Let us
now consider one of his key strategies for conducting this navigation: a very
particular approach to voiceover narration that defies convention in search
of immersive reflexivity.
Mettler’s Voice
The relationship between voice and environment is established from the

film’s very first shots of various crew members testing some customized
camera equipment in a cold chamber. From behind the camera Mettler
asks the film’s producer Andreas Züst to explain what they’re doing, and
Züst answers loudly, competing with the harsh ambience of the cooling
system. Mettler then interviews Charles Bagnall, the camera technician
in charge of winterizing the equipment and designing the time lapse elec-
tronics that they’ll use to attempt recording of the aurora borealis. In this
segment, the sound recordist is fully in frame, pointing the shotgun mi-
crophone back and forth between Mettler and Bagnall as they converse.
The voices fluctuate in volume depending on their position in relation to
the microphone, indicating the precarious nature of dialogue recording in
noisy environments. We watch this visualization of sound documentation
as the filmmakers explain the camera technology, establishing the film’s
dedication to conspicuous exploration of sound/image relationships from
the very start.
Finally, after almost two minutes with the relentless environmental sound
competing with speech intelligibility, the film cuts to absolute silence as we
watch a series of panning shots over macro-photographed images of ice
crystals that resemble aerial shots of the barren tundra. An ambient drone
emerges on the soundtrack, and the film’s titles appear. Then we cut to the
film’s first shots of the night sky with a glimmer of movement resembling
clouds glowing with the last of the setting sun, moving in time lapse and
echoing the images of the aurora we see later on. Here Mettler’s voiceover
narration begins, telling us of the origins of the journey:
In the ether one swims and meets complements. I met a man at a dinner who
loves to watch the sky. He’d spent as much time watching the sky as I had
trying to point cameras and microphones out into the world. It seemed that
both of us were trying to find an answer to a question we didn’t yet know. As
the night closed we agreed to share a path we had in common: the pursuit
of wonder.
With this opening volley of narration Mettler suggests one of the key issues
raised by the film: the common experience that can arise from nature—
looking at the sky—and its technological mediation—pointing cameras
and microphones out into the world. For Mettler, both of these activities
are in search of an answer to a common question, a path of common pur-
suit: wonder. This opening narration comes amidst an ethereal sound com-
position created by Jim O’Rourke that has been sharply contrasted with
the film’s opening sequence of direct sound in the meat locker. As the film
progresses it becomes evident that it will alternate regularly between the
brash qualities of direct sound, usually associated with the appearance of the
filmmakers on camera, and the lyrical passages that mingle O’Rourke’s work
with Mettler’s sound design, as with the example of the microphone tapping
discussed at the start of this chapter. Both strategies are reflexive, either by
calling attention to the filmmaking process itself or by highlighting Mettler’s
personal audiovisual approach to this process. Importantly, Mettler’s
voiceover narration is invariably set within the context of the latter strategy,
situating his questioning voice as part of the most direct assertions of the id-
iosyncratic style he developed in his earlier and more experimental works.
As the voiceover narration is a major part of the film’s soundtrack, let us
consider its implications for the argument I am making about Mettler’s de-
sire for the film to use reflexivity as a strategy for bringing the audience closer
to its subject. From the opening lines of narration quoted above, Mettler
demonstrates his interest in blurring the lines between poetry, prose, and the
basic delivery of information. The content of Mettler’s narration, along with
his tone of delivery, are far from the conventional voice of authority associ-
ated with what Bill Nichols calls the “expository mode” (1991, 32). Rather
than providing a steady stream of factual information (though there is cer-
tainly some of that), Mettler is more interested in posing questions about the
nature of experience and its relationship to the medium of cinema. He speaks
in a gentle, hypnotic manner that, with the help of Jim O’Rourke’s sound
compositions, creates a dreamlike quality rather than an atmosphere of ob-
jective mastery over the film’s subject matter. Overtly reflexive in content, the
voice also envelops the listeners, hoping to draw us in and keep us immersed.
The voiceover, then, is one of the principal ways that Mettler achieves im-
mersive reflexivity.
Jerry White identifies Mettler’s use of voiceover narration as a key com-
ponent of his reflexive style: “Mettler lays his cards on the table through his
deeply subjective voiceover; by doing this he makes it clear that he is not
hiding an attempt to master the landscape behind faux-neutral observation”
(2006, 30). This style of voiceover is part of what White and others argue
is Mettler’s skepticism about film’s ability to connect with reality; Mettler’s
voiceover eschews the direct connection between the voice of authority that
asserts control over the image, opting instead for a looser connection, a voice
that hovers in the ether, an equal player with the other elements of a highly
nuanced soundtrack that frequently slips free of any realist connection to the
image. With this style, Mettler demonstrates his stated belief that all elements
of a film’s soundtrack should work together as a musical composition (1992,
41). Frequent collaborator Fred Frith says that this respect for the equality
of the different components of the soundtrack is something that Mettler
demonstrates more than any other filmmaker he has worked with (quoted in
Schaub 1995, 42). Indeed, Mettler’s approach to voiceover narration can be
read as a direct response to criticisms of other forms of narration that seek to
dominate both the sound and image tracks.
Stella Bruzzi situates debates about the use of voiceover in documen-
tary within more general debates about sound/image synchronization in
film. Bruzzi tells us that “the negative portrayal of voiceover is largely the
result of the development of a theoretical orthodoxy that condemns it for
being inevitably and inherently didactic” (2006, 47). Bruzzi critiques the
way that histories of documentary have created the voiceover as what she
calls an “unnecessary evil” in their constant emphasis on documentary films

as “an endless pursuit of the most effective way of representing the ‘purity’
of the real,” a purity of visual representation that is displaced, and there-
fore threatened, by the “voice-of-God” style authority of the voiceover that
dominates our understanding of the image (47–48).
Bruzzi situates the negative connotations of documentary voiceover in
the context of general concerns over the coming of synchronized sound to
film in the 1920s. In particular was the concern over this idea of the “pu-
rity” of the image being somehow damaged by an attached and invariable
soundtrack. Here she cites Nichols’ assertion that synchronized sound
aids in establishing the realism of the image—the very fear of the Soviet
Montagists who argued for contrapuntal strategies in the pairing of sound
and image—whereas voiceover narration “is an intrusion which interferes
with this automatic prioritization of the image” (2006, 49). Bruzzi also notes
how later sound theorists like Kaja Silverman have contributed to the nega-
tive connotations of voiceover by tying it to hegemonic practices of classical
Hollywood cinema (58) (which I discuss in more detail in Chapter 4).
These critiques of voiceover are all premised upon the problem of voiceover
dominating other sound design elements, just as many commentators feared
that through voiceover narration sound could dominate the image in an
unwelcome reversal of the primacy of the image established prior to the
coming of synchronized sound. Because of these critiques, Bruzzi notes the
increasing popularity of the ironic voiceover in performative documentaries
used as the narration equivalent of asynchronous sound that deliberately sets
itself apart from the image. Many documentary filmmakers have also opted
to eschew the use of voiceover altogether, as Mettler himself did in a later
film, Petropolis (2009), believing that its presence “obscured the perceptual
force of the film’s images” (Browne 2020, 132). Yet this approach, too, has
been criticized. Addressing Mary Ann Doane’s argument that the “silencing”
of the voice of authority “promotes . . . an illusion that reality speaks and is not
spoken, that the film is not a constructed discourse,” Britta Sjogren laments
that, “One can only feel somewhat sympathetic toward documentarists, who
apparently just cannot win, one way or the other” (2006, 222).
Picture of Light aims to win by presenting neither the voice of authority nor
its silencing. Mettler’s voiceover doesn’t adopt an ironic tone, either. Rather,
it is a voice that speaks to the problems of narration by emphasizing its own
position in meditating the content of the film while forming an equal part-
nership with the other elements within the audiovisual totality of the film. As
I will demonstrate now, Mettler’s use of voiceover is profoundly connected to

the film’s goal of using reflexivity to transcend the acknowledged limitations
of media technologies and bring the audience closer to the reality of the au-
rora borealis than skeptics would think possible.
A Surrogate for Real Experience?
Following the film’s opening title, we watch and listen as Mettler and his crew
make the journey north by train. As the train pulls out of the station we get a
shot from the back of the caboose, watching the terminal recede into a night
filled with thick steam and mist. The sound of the train is front and center,
and at one point we see the sound recordist with his microphone hanging out
the window. As the sequence continues, O’Rourke’s ambient soundscapes
rise in the mix, and the sound of the train becomes part of a more fantas-
tical sound environment. Here Mettler’s voiceover continues, establishing
the philosophical tension that exists between the wilderness he’s interested
in capturing on film, and the technology that will allow this capturing to take
place, a process of commodification he describes as the extraction of “busi-
ness and numbers out of life force and wonder.” As these words are being
spoken, a view of the passing landscape from the moving train zooms jerkily
back to reveal the window that frames the view, emphasizing the window’s
mediating role in the experience, one layer of glass among many in the
process of making a film. There is a cut to a shot of the cameraman, Mettler
himself, caught in the bathroom mirror, a reflective pane of representation
that also emphasizes the mediated nature of this enterprise. The narration
continues:
Maybe this wacky process of harnessing money and technology is just an

extension of thinking, of trying to understand. These images and sounds
are articulations of experience. We look at them, and try to decipher the re-
ality that gave birth to them. It may well be that the northern lights cannot
be filmed, that nature cannot be filmed, that film or media is in conflict with
nature. Is it just a surrogate for the real thing? Is film a surrogate for real
experience?
Here Mettler positions cinematic mediation of the pro-filmic world as

an “extension of thinking,” then questions the extent to which film allows
access to that which it represents. As these final words are spoken, we are
presented with a shot through the window in shallow focus. Andreas Züst is
revealed screen right looking out the window through his glasses, and what
we see through these glasses is in sharper focus than the window itself. Here
Mettler places further emphasis on how the framing of views and the lenses
we put between the world outside and the world inside are examples of the
mediating agents that we experience on a daily basis. But to what extent do
these mediators impede the flow across the division between internal con-
sciousness and the external world?
This question can be answered, in part, by the way that Mettler chooses
to describe his own previous experiences of the aurora borealis. “I’d seen
the lights before a few times in my life, and I remember mostly how they
move: like thoughts.” In equating the movement of the aurora borealis with
the movement of thoughts Mettler is associating the phenomena of the lights
outside in the world and his experience of them inside his mind. It is telling
that he situates this equation within his musings on the relationship between
the pro-filmic event and its representation. Later in the film, as we see the
filmmakers examining some 35mm footage by hand, Mettler connects these
ideas more concretely:
We live in a time where things do not seem to exist if they are not contained
as an image. But if you look into this darkness you may see the lights of your
own retina. Not unlike the northern lights, not unlike the movements of
thought. Like a shapeless accumulation of everything we have ever seen.
Before science explained, the lights were interpreted as visions, prophecies,
spirits, a trigger for the imagination. Images provided by nature, framed by
no less than the universe itself.
With the final sentence in this narration Mettler suggests an equivalency be-
tween experiencing images on film, framed by the dictates of the lens and
screen, and experiencing images in the sky, framed by the peripheries of
our vision and the boundaries of the horizon. Experience of the world is al-
ways mediated by framing of some kind, whether imposed by technologies
of representation or by the limitations of vision and our perspectival posi-
tion with respect to what we’re looking at. Even more importantly, Mettler is
suggesting a kinship between the way the aurora borealis look, and the way
we experience the process of our own thinking. Mettler is moving toward the
idea that there is a profound kinship possible between his experience of the
lights in Churchill and our experience of the lights on film. Toward the end
of the film, Mettler puts this articulation into a single sentence: “And we tell
ourselves that seeing it on TV just isn’t the same as being there,” as though
this were an idea that humans came up with to keep the boundary between
reality and representation perfectly clear. But the boundary is not clear, and
it never has been. We may tell ourselves that there is a difference between
the external world and its mediation by way of recording technologies, but
Mettler is suggesting otherwise.
The idea of the lights being a trigger for the imagination is key here, be-
cause it speaks directly to Mettler’s questions about whether or not film is a
surrogate for experience, or if there is a deeper connection between the two.
At one point in the film, as we watch the camera gently moving across barren
frozen landscapes, Mettler recounts the legend of the Lumière brothers
screening Arrival of a Train at La Ciotat (1896) for a public audience in which
people were said to have run screaming for the exits for fear of being run over
by the train. Mettler then asks: “Are you cold yet?” Though he presents these
events as though a matter of fact, his question could be construed as a cyn-
ical jab at a story that most contemporary historians see as apocryphal. Even
audiences of the late nineteenth century were media-savvy enough to under-
stand the difference between reality and representation in film, but modern
commentators need a primitive antithesis to mystify the experiential trans-
parency of film (see Vaughan 1999, 1).
In Mettler’s version of the Lumière story, the fear of being run over did not
stem from believing the train was real, but rather from feeling the same in
the face of the representation as one would in the face of reality. If we were to
feel cold while watching images of a frozen landscape, it is not because film
steps in as surrogate for reality, but that it triggers the imagination, sets our
thoughts moving in a particular direction that yields genuine experience of
the cold based on whatever past experiences we’ve had with it. When Mettler
refers to the northern lights as images provided by nature and framed by the
universe, he’s drawing a connection between the kinds of mental triggering
that film can effect upon us, and the lights themselves that are no less images
that we watch within a kind of frame. Each situation is mediated, and each
has the capacity to set our minds moving in the same way. Thus the lights
can transcend any thought of experiential surrogacy and speak to us directly,
even through their mediation by way of film.
The very particular use of voiceover, hovering between authoritative mas-
tery and its absence, is used to frame Mettler’s questions about how the lights
occupy that space between the night sky and the internal consciousness of
those who look at them. The presence of his voice acts as a conduit through
which the other sounds and images in the film can be understood, a line of
mediation that calls attention to the very act of mediation itself. Further,
both the content of his words and the presentation style of his voice perform
mediality itself, demonstrating not simply how the film and sound recording
alters or stands in the way of our experience of the natural world but how it
is only ever through mediation that we access this world anyway. As such,
Mettler’s brand of performativity both aligns with and deviates from Bruzzi’s
figuration of performativity in documentary filmmaking. Mettler’s emphasis
on reflexive approaches to representing Churchill demonstrates that the
world he’s attempting to document comes into being as a function of being
recorded. The world he shows us is the world in the process of being filmed.
At the same time, Mettler breaks from the attachment of this performativity
to an emphasis on technology’s distanciating effect. For Mettler, there is no
other way to experience the world than by way of mediality, so to lay that
mediality plain is to offer the audience the same access to the aurora borealis
that he and his crew had, bringing us closer to that world rather than keeping
us at arm’s length from it.
Image, Sound, Synchronization
I will now demonstrate how Mettler’s version of performativity plays

out by way of his simultaneous engagement with two historically op-
posite approaches to sound on film: the Soviet Montage school’s call for
non-redundancy across the sound and image tracks, and the visual music
movement that strives for sound and image to be experienced as inseparable.
Mettler folds these ways of thinking onto one another through his evocation
of the potential audibility of the aurora borealis and the association of their
motion with the “movement of thoughts.” These associations can be fruitfully
explored through the work of experimental filmmaker Stan Brakhage, whose
interest in documenting deeply interior experiences of vision without the
eyes can help us to understand similarities across Soviet Montage approaches
to sound/image synchronization and the goals of visual music.
Mettler’s interest in the movement of the aurora borealis and its kinship to
the movement of thoughts is positioned within a discussion of phenomena
that evoke the transsensorial potential of the lights, their ability to enter the
human sensorium through the visual channel but be experienced by the

mind as sound. Toward the end of Picture of Light, Mettler considers the pos-
sibility of hearing the lights:
Ed says you can hear them, but Bill says all you could theoretically hear is
static discharge as though your head being the highest point around this flat
terrain acted like some kind of conductor to the currents of the night sky.
Or maybe it’s our breath freezing into tiny ice crystals and falling upon our
nylon parkas.
The sequence ends with O’Rourke’s ambient treatments fading out as the
visuals fade to white. The sound of breathing emerges, floating for a moment
over the blank screen until we cut to a shot of Inuk elder Joseph Natakok. He
speaks in his native tongue as the camera cuts from him to panning shots of
the frozen tundra. Mettler delays offering translation for a minute and a half,
finally stating that, “The old Inuk said that most of all he likes to hunt,” just
as we watch local motel owner Steve Bosnjak setting up his video camera on
the land during a heavy wind. “Perhaps we are modern-day hunters,” Mettler
continues. Perhaps what they hear while filming the lights is the sound of
their own breath in the act of hunting the lights down, the material result of
their attempts to use film as a way of accessing the connection between the
lights and the movement of thoughts.
With Mettler’s attempts to film the lights comes the question of what is
heard while so doing. Can the lights themselves be heard? Or only the en-
vironment in which the viewing takes place? Perhaps the sound one might
hear is just the minutiae of the environment. Perhaps the lights are a trigger
for the imagination, putting one in tune with the smallest details of the sur-
roundings, just as Mettler’s cameras and microphones do. If Mettler was
interested only in the possibility that attention to the lights calls similar at-
tention to the nuances of the environment in which they are viewed, then one
could imagine an approach to sound design that emphasizes direct location
recording above all else, providing us with access to the auditory minutia of
Churchill, Manitoba. Yet as is clear by now, Mettler is far from approaching
sound design with strict realist or observational principles in mind. Mettler’s
sound design is geared much more toward the idea of the lights as trigger for
the imagination, of setting the mind moving.
It is significant that Mettler positions the idea of setting the mind moving
within references to the potential for the inaudible lights to be heard. This
connection aligns Mettler’s thinking with the discourse of visual music,

which, in turn, he explores in the context of various approaches to the au-
diovisual asynchronicity espoused by the Soviet Montage school in the late
1920s. At first thought it may seem that these two movements offered incom-
patible responses to the question of sound’s role in cinema with the coming
of synchronization. As I will demonstrate now, however, Mettler threads
each through the other on his quest to understand how film can access the
world, and this approach is essential to understanding how immersive reflex-
ivity works as a response to contemporary skepticism about documentary
veracity.
As Judith Zilczer explains, the idea of visual music began with
painting: “No longer content simply to reproduce the visible world,
painters instead sought to endow their canvases with the emotional inten-
sity, structural integrity, and aesthetic purity that they attributed to music”
(2005, 25). From cinema’s very beginning, there have been many strains
of visual music filmmaking. Some attempted to visualize existing pieces
of music by way of literal transpositions of musical elements like pitch,
timbre, and rhythm into corresponding visual patterns. Others explored
the ways in which image might create sound and vice versa, as in Norman
McLaren’s Synchromy (1971) in which he used images laid into the optical
soundtrack portion of 35mm film stock to physically generate the sounds
we hear while watching them on the image track. In the digital age there
are countless strategies for extending this basic principle to create sound
from visual material or generate both from the same computational foun-
dation. At the heart of these approaches to visual music is the idea that
sound and image are conceived as being of a piece, inseparable, not a func-
tion of deliberate synchronization but rather each an organic manifesta-
tion of the other.
The most literal approach to a visual form of music comes with a renewed
interest in making silent films in the age of synchronized sound, a prac-
tice that often attempts to get at those transsensorial qualities of the image
that can transcend the lines of division between sensory modalities. Michel
Chion describes transsensorial experience this way: “In the transsensorial
model . . . there is no sensory given that is demarcated and isolated from
the outset. Rather, the senses are channels, highways more than territories
or domains” (1994, 137). He is careful to explain that transsensoriality is not
the same as synaesthesia with the latter’s direct correspondences between
the senses. Rather, he’s interested in how certain categories of perceptual
phenomena are not specific to any one sense. Chion gives rhythm as an ex-
ample of an element found in cinema that is neither specifically auditory nor
visual:
When a rhythmic phenomenon reaches us via a given sensory path, this

path, eye or ear, is perhaps nothing more than the channel through which
rhythm reaches us. Once it has entered the ear or eye, the phenomenon
strikes us in some region of the brain connected to the motor functions,
and it is solely at this level that it is decoded as rhythm. (1994, 136)
Whether or not Chion’s description is fully accurate from a neurophysiolog-

ical standpoint, the upshot of this transsensorial model for understanding
cinematic experience suggests that there are more fundamental levels of the
cinema than simply sight and sound, levels that do not differentiate between
the auditory and the visual but that cut through both to a deeper and more
holistic understanding of experience.
Gesture is another key concept that transcends specific sensory
demarcations, tying the general category of movement to qualities of both
images and sounds that are embedded within each other. Rolfe Inge Godøy
argues that works of abstract sound composition, like the acousmatic music
of Pierre Schaeffer (a tradition from which O’Rourke’s own music emerged),
cannot be experienced as entirely removed from the realm of imagery.
Godøy describes this relationship between acousmatic sound and visuality
as being linked to “embodied cognition, meaning that virtually all domains
of human perception and thinking, even seemingly abstract domains, are re-
lated to images of movement” in the mind (2006, 150).
Godøy’s conclusions here extend from a field of inquiry into the idea
of musical imagery. Music theorists have long been interested in how the
idea of the “image” plays into the creation and reception of music. As
Rosemary Mountain illustrates in her discussion of musical imagery in the
compositional process, the concept of image has various connotations in
this field. Of particular interest here are kinesthetic images—our visual un-
derstanding of motion—that our minds often turn to when hearing sound
alone. Mountain’s survey of the concept of musical imagery demonstrates
that composers often compose music with a visual intent, the desire to
create “effective illusions of imaginary sonic objects moving through time”
(2001, 286).
On the other end of the spectrum of thought concerning film as a form

of “music” is the contrapuntal approach to audiovisual synchronization
espoused by the Soviet Montage filmmakers of the late 1920s through
their “Statement” concerning the sound film first published in 1928. Sergei
Eisenstein and a few of his contemporaries wanted the cinema to continue
developing along the lines of montage, and considered sound as another po-
tential layer of meaning construction. Creating meaning through montage
requires a measure of juxtaposition that, for these filmmakers, is impossible
if sound is used naturalistically. So they called for a film sound practice based
on “nonsynchronization with the visual images” as the key to developing
the cinematic equivalent of “orchestral counterpoint” (84). Not long after,
Alexander Pudovkin would write, “The role which sound is to play in film is
much more significant than a slavish imitation of naturalism” in which, for
example, the sound of a car is added to the image of a car (1929, 86). As René
Clair put it that same year, “We do not need to hear the sound of clapping if
we can see the clapping hands,” (1929, 94), a sentiment later echoed by Robert
Bresson in his famous “Notes on Sound” (1977): “What is for the eye must
not duplicate what is for the ear” (149). For Bresson, “Image and sound must
not support each other, but must work each in turn through a sort of relay”
(149), an idea that Clair also expressed: “It is the alternate, not the simulta-
neous, use of the visual subject and of the sound produced by it that creates
the best effects” (1929, 94).
It is for this reason that the Soviet Montagists, notably Eisenstein and
Pudovkin, argued for a different kind of musicality in the approach to sound/
image synchronization: counterpoint. A term borrowed from Western music
theory, counterpoint for the Soviet Montage school suggests that sound
operates as another element of juxtaposition within the dialectic approach
to montage so espoused by Eisenstein. This ideology resulted in a variety
of approaches to the formal implementation of audiovisual counterpoint
(Thompson, 1980). Importantly, counterpoint for the Soviets was not nec-
essarily a question of asynchronicity, but rather an approach to synchro-
nization that eschewed conventions of realism. Because of this, Chion has
elucidated the confusion surrounding the correct meaning of counterpoint
since the days of Eisenstein, insisting that the use of this term to refer to jar-
ring juxtaposition has not done justice to its musical origins. Chion notes
that the term dissonance is much better suited to describe the kinds of au-
diovisual clashes that are often referred to as counterpoint. In music, the
term counterpoint describes relationships between elements in sequence

(horizontal) rather than simultaneous (vertical). Chion uses the term free
counterpoint for instances where the sound and image tracks operate free of
precise cause/effect relationships governed by vertical synchronization, but
with a relationship of simultaneity that creates a new layer of meaning that
wouldn’t exist if the sound and image tracks were presented separately (36–
37). Counterpoint, then, treats the sound and image tracks of film as part of
a coherent system that needn’t be governed by precise points of audiovisual
synchronization. What is necessary for counterpoint is the simultaneous jux-
taposition of sound and image that results in a new layer of meaning through
their combination.
Whether advocating for synthesis through counterpoint, or simply hoping
to avoid informational redundancy, calls for asynchronicity have one thing
in common: the desire to expose the artifice of audiovisual pairing in order
to promote audience engagement as they navigate the line that separates
sound and image on film. The technology of the synchronized sound film
ensures that sound and image will always be locked together, so eschewing
naturalism and redundancy allows for this fixed simultaneity to be used to
keep the audience aware that sound and image are separate entities, brought
together for specific reasons. In other words, you can’t spell asynchronous
without synchronous; as a concept, the former is bound up within the latter.
The term counterpoint operates the same way, building the idea of juxtaposi-
tion into the term itself. Counterpoint is one way of acknowledging the sep-
arate nature of sound and image, but this acknowledgment is only possible
through the fact of audiovisual simultaneity. The task of those opposed to
the premise of the talking picture was to think of ways to use synchronized
sound that would keep the technical reality of the apparatus exposed: sound
and image are separate first, and then brought together. Visual music, on the
other hand, approaches audiovisuality from the other end: sound and image
are one and the same, and this inseparability must be expressed through the
separate sound and image tracks of film.
Although Eisenstein’s interest in film sound is generally tied to the
“Statement,” he was also interested in the transsensorial potential of images
alone. In Nonindifferent Nature (1987) he speaks of “plastic music,” that
music which is contained and expressed by the visual aspects of cinema,
particularly in the silent era. He says that the idea of expressing music vis-
ually fell mostly to images of landscape, “and a similar emotional landscape,
functioning as a musical component, is what I call ‘nonindifferent na-

ture’ ” (216). Interestingly, as David Bordwell has noted, Eisenstein moved
away from the asynchronous sound manifesto as well as any interest in si-
lent evocations of music to embrace musical score as a powerful element
within his filmmaking. In later films like Ivan the Terrible (1944) the images
are designed in correlation to the music, an “organic” approach that aligns
with much visual music rather than the “dialectical” one he insisted upon
at the dawn of synchronization (Bordwell 1980, 147). So Eisenstein has run
the gamut of possibility for the relationships between sound and image, and
ended somewhat far from where he began.1 Yet his path illustrates an often
neglected ideological connection between these different ways of conceiving
of film as music, from the “musical” qualities inherent in images, through
contrapuntal approaches to audiovisual synchronization, and on into
explorations of how sound and image can be thought of as inseparable facets
of each other.
What is most at odds between these varying approaches to synchroniza-
tion is the question of whether or not film should be made reflexive about
its two channels of transmission: sound and image. For K. J. Donnelly,
sound/image synchronization in film is, by its very nature, an “occult” situ-
ation, in the sense that its processes and aesthetics are largely “unapparent,”
obfuscated from the consciousness of viewers (2014, 70). We can see in
the trajectory of theoretical approaches to synchronization that there are
conflicting desires in whether or not to bring occult synchronization out
of the shadows and into the light of the projection on screen. Contrapuntal
practice says yes, while visual music says no. However, these apparently
opposing ideologies can be understood as part of the same underlying de-
sire to immerse the audience in the world represented by the film through
aesthetic strategies that call attention to the mediality involved in this
process. In Picture of Light, Mettler explores all points along the continuum
from the musicality of silent images (the lights themselves), across both
the realist and contrapuntal potential of synchronization, and through to
evocations of inseparable audiovisuality. In so doing, Mettler might be
termed an anti-occultist, exposing the affinities between these approaches
to thinking about sound’s role in the cinema, to render visible that which
has been inaudible. As I will discuss now, what binds these various audi-
ovisual modalities together is the idea that film can emulate the “move-
ment of thoughts,” which I will elucidate through the work of avant-garde
filmmaker Stan Brakhage and the various ways in which his work aligns
with Mettler’s interests in Picture of Light.
The Movement of Thought
Stan Brakhage has expressed his own interest in exploring the cinematic
equivalent of the movement of thought through the “musical” quality of
moving images alone.2 Jerry White connects Mettler’s interest in exposing
the materiality of film with a similar interest shown by Brakhage. White
suggests that sequences like those that present the lights in time-lapse pho-
tography “recall the rough, turbulent work of Stan Brakhage” who “thought
carefully” about “the lengths to which you had to take the image, the kinds of
abuse you had to inflict on the celluloid in order to make it speak” (2006, 32).
Yet what interests me here goes beyond the mutual concern Brakhage and
Mettler show for rendering the surface of celluloid apparent to the audience.
Even more important are the ideological underpinnings of their shared de-
sire to find a way to get at the transsensorial potential of the cinema that can
result in immersive reflexivity.
Though he isn’t usually discussed as a visual music filmmaker, Stan
Brakhage has explored the realm perhaps more fully than any. His 1990s
hand-painted films like Stellar (1993) and Black Ice (1994) often end with a
credit stating that they are to be understood as pieces of visual music wherein
Brakhage is the “composer” and the person operating the optical printer
is the “visual musician.” But he has a long history preceding this overt ref-
erence to visual music suggesting a powerful interest in exploring hearing
without the ear, and indeed seeing without the eye, through the notion of
the movement of thought. For Brakhage, getting at the movement of thought
involved some very particular ideas about sound/image synchronization in
the cinema and how these ideas led him to the extreme end of visual music
in his pursuit of prompting auditory experience through the presentation of
images alone.
During his 2001 retrospective at the Cinémathèque Québequoise in
Montreal, Brakhage exclaimed, “you sync something and it is sunk, as far as
I’m concerned!” (2003, para. 5). He was referring to the banality of treating
sound/image relations in mainstream film as elements to be unified through
representational cause/effect synchronization, and in so doing aligns him-
self, at least a little, with the Soviet Montage school. In a letter to Ronna Page
on the subject of music, he speaks of his intense dissatisfaction with “conven-

tional uses of music for ‘mood’ and so-called ‘realistic sounds’ as mere refer-
endum to image in movies” (1978, 134), echoing the concerns of Eisenstein
et al. in their “Statement.” So, he studied with John Cage and Edgar Varèse,
“at first with the idea of searching out a new relationship between image and
sound and of, thus, creating a new dimension for the sound track” (134). He
continues:
The more informed I became with aesthetics of sound, the less I began to feel
any need for an audio accompaniment to the visuals I was making. . . . The
more silently oriented my creative philosophies have become, the more
inspired-by-music have my photographic aesthetics and my actual editing
orders become, both engendering a coming-into-being of the physiological
relationship between seeing and hearing in the making of a work of art in
film. (135)
Here, as Fred Camper notes, Brakhage is interested in appealing to what he

calls the “sound sense,” sounds that can be evoked by movement and editing
patterns (1985, 373) without the need for an actual soundtrack. With this
kind of approach, Brakhage was moving in the direction of exploring the
highly soluble boundaries between our demarcations of sound and image to
show that a work perceived with the eyes does not mean that we experience
it solely as visual information. To this end, Brakhage says he wanted to “get
deeper into my concept of music as sound equivalent of the mind’s moving”
(1978, 135). Here Brakhage associates music with sound, but by tying it to
the idea of the “mind’s moving,” music can transcend the strict delineation of
auditory perception and become a marker of holistic perception. This is the
realm of “moving visual thinking,” which Brakhage describes as “a streaming
of shapes that are not nameable—a vast visual ‘song’ of the cells expressing
their internal life” (quoted in Ganguly 1993, 21).
When Brakhage refers to music as the “sound equivalent of the mind’s
moving” he suggests that the way the mind processes the world is best un-
derstood as the movement of thought rather than as a collection of specific
sensory phenomena. This movement is not confined to isolated channels of
hearing or seeing, but can be represented and expressed by both sight and
sound equally well (not to mention the rest of our senses). This is exemplified
by the idea that Brakhage’s films need no soundtrack for their musical qual-
ities to come through: the brain understands the music even if the ears do
not hear it. The transsensorial qualities of experience reflect what Brakhage
calls the “totality of thought” (Wees 1992, 77), the post-sensory experience
of the world that pays no heed to whether sensory information comes in
through the eyes or the ears. It is simply the totality of experience that cannot
be broken down the way our technologies of representation make us believe
they can. This idea of the totality of thought exists as a kind of movement that
Brakhage attempts to get at through his cinematic explorations of moving
visual thinking.
Picture of Light, and Mettler’s work in general, is aligned with the goals
of visual music and the work of Stan Brakhage on several levels. Mettler has
stated his personal commitment to the idea that film is a form of music. In his
essay “Music in Film: Film as Music,” he says,
Film has the same potential immediacy as music. What I mean by this is
that film has many aspects in common with music, especially in its ability
to tap into an unconscious or subconscious mode of experience, and in
its ability to create meaning through rhythms and emotional colours and
tones. (1992, 35)
With this description of film Mettler points toward the potential of the
cinema to create an immediacy of experience in the audience that he equates
with the idea of music. His description also evokes the transsensorial poten-
tial of the cinema in establishing rhythm as a grounding element, a point he
emphasizes further when he suggests that, “like music, it could be that the es-
sential element of a film is its rhythm” (36). Here Mettler engages with a long
history of filmmaking concerned with the cinematic exploration of rhythm.
As I have discussed, rhythm is part of the larger category of movement that
lies at the heart of transsensorial experience.
Mettler’s question about whether or not the aurora borealis can be heard
is a question about the transsensorial quality of the lights that might bind
their external manifestation to our internal experience of them through an
equivalency of movement. Of course, Picture of Light is not a silent film, so
Mettler’s interest in the lights as a manifestation of what Brakhage would
call moving visual thinking is not explored through the same strategies as
Brakhage’s silent hand-painted abstractions. Rather, Mettler sets the time-
lapse images of the lights to amorphous auditory treatments, so that we can
experience the movement of the lights in their own right with minimal influ-
ence from externally imposed rhythmic and gestural structures. At the same
time, however, Picture of Light is committed to the aesthetics of free coun-

terpoint, emphasizing the audiovisual nature of sound cinema by exploring
the line that separates sound and image in order to arrive at unconventional
ways of establishing connections between these two modes of transmission.
Mettler explores this transsensorial potential of images alone through an ap-
proach to audiovisual synchronization that, at times, aligns perfectly with
both the dissonance and free counterpoint that Chion identifies as core aes-
thetic strategies of the Soviets’ call for asynchronicity. By calling attention
to the technical separation of sound and image as part of the film’s reflexive
strategy, Mettler also reveals the distance between his audience and the lights
that he filmed in Churchill. Yet by asking whether or not we might be able
to hear the lights, he is suggesting their transsensorial potential to enable
a common level of experience of the lights between the audience and the
filmmakers. So it is essential that we understand Mettler’s reflexive approach
not as one borne of total skepticism, but rather an optimism for the poten-
tial of cinema not only to teach us about life amidst images—a second-order
reality—but the cinema as a conduit for experience that extends from the
screen through physical space to our interior consciousness. The remaining
analyses will focus on the film’s deliberate disruption of conventions of audi-
ovisual synchronization in order to demonstrate how these disruptions func-
tion as agents of the transsensorial potential of the aurora borealis and their
cinematic representation.
Conducting Mysterious Music
One sequence in Picture of Light draws all these threads around synchroni-
zation together, aligning Brakhage and Eisenstein to invite the audience to
partake fully in the wonder that the lights inspired in Mettler and his crew
on location. In an interview segment Brian Ladoon, a local dog-team trainer,
explains the concept of “blood bathing” wherein a hunter becomes unscru-
pulous about what prey to shoot and indulges blood lust to an extreme degree.
As we listen to him speak, the film shows us images of other dog handlers
feeding a team outside in a blustery wind, axing chunks of meat off large
frozen blocks and throwing it to the animals amidst blowing snow. The sound
remains grounded within the interior space of the interview with just a little
bit of external ambient sound leaking through: axe thuds, wind blowing, and
dogs barking in the distance to underscore the Ladoon’s commentary. The
interview continues as we watch one of Mettler’s crew setting up a camera

in the deep snow. Again, direct sound from the exterior space is layered
with the sound of the interview as the dog trainer contemplates the respon-
sibility of the hunter to respect the value of all life. The image track, how-
ever, never returns to the dog trainer. Once the interview ends, an offscreen
Mettler begins a conversation with the onscreen cameraperson. They discuss
the settings for the time-lapse electronics being used to try and capture the
lights on film. Once the equipment is set we hear the sound of the camera
going off once every few seconds, along with the steady breathing of the cam-
eraperson, providing a rhythmic base to an emerging soundscape featuring
O’Rourke’s music once again. Mettler’s narration begins anew, explaining
that after much time spent waiting out bad weather, the skies are finally clear
and they can turn the camera upward. As we watch the film’s first signifi-
cant sequence of the aurora in time-lapse, the location sound of the camera
and breathing fade out while the sounds of barking dogs fade in, the ambient
drone continuing all the while.
This time-lapse sequence of the lights illustrates Mettler’s signature ap-
proach to auditory accompaniment of the visual phenomena. The lights are
a visual phenomenon, and the technique of time-lapse is a particularly silent
form of filmmaking. Time-lapse sequences are rarely accompanied by their
auditory equivalent: the sound of the pro-filmic environment sped up dra-
matically. Instead of such a literal approach to the sound of the time-lapse
environment, Mettler emphasizes the sound of the mechanism responsible
for creating the time-lapse imagery. The sound of the camera and breathing,
presented in real-time, are incongruous with the temporal compression
visible on the screen, yet their connection has been made clear. This is an
example of how an overtly reflexive disruption in conventions of realist syn-
chronization can nevertheless evoke a profound connection between sound
and image grounded in the reality of place.
Then, when the camera sound is replaced by the sound of barking dogs,
the dog trainer’s story about the relationship between hunter and prey is
evoked. We have already heard Mettler explain that the lights are often
interpreted as spirits by the Indigenous population; here the sounds of the
dogs, earlier associated with the spirit of the hunted animals coming out in
their last breath, are now associated with the lights as visual representation
of the spirit world. Mettler thus takes direct sound recording from one se-
quence of the film and uses it to create a rich and meaningful moment of
free counterpoint for another sequence. The abstract visual phenomena of
the lights are thus contextualized within a reflexive strategy laced with an
ecological message. Mettler’s style is impressive, in part, because of its bal-
ance between all these elements to create a reflexive meditation on the act
of filming the lights while engaging deeply with the cultural environment in
which this filming takes place.
Relationships of audiovisual counterpoint are at their peak during a series
of interviews with local residents about their experience of the northern
lights. As people talk, they are first presented using the convention of lip-
synchronization, the standard for the interview format. Then, however,
images begin to slip away from the talking heads whose voices we hear, and
instead we are presented with images of other interviewees in the process
of talking. While it is common for documentaries to insert related imagery
while listening to interviewees talk on the soundtrack—as in the images of
the dogs over Brian Ladoon’s bathing story—it is almost unheard of to layer
the sound of one person talking over the image of another speaker whose
voice is absent. This strategy serves as a definitive break from the norms of
the talking head documentary, and indeed of talking cinema in general. Yet as
we are disrupted from the lack of lip synchronization, new synchronizations
emerge. As we watch people talk, they gesture with their hands, and these
gestures are presented as reflections of the descriptions of the aurora being
spoken in voiceover. These are the images of citizens “conducting mysterious
music” that Peter Weber describes (see above), and his analogy could not be
more apt for this discussion of how the film’s reflexive approach to sound/
image relationships ties into the theme of film as visual music.
The nexus point of the whole film comes at the end of this sequence when
we see Andreas Züst gesturing while we hear the dog trainer describing sea-
sonal differences in the lights that are detectable through the levels of defini-
tion around their edges. Züst makes an inverted V shape with his hands just
as we hear the dog trainer mention “defined edges.” However, at this point
in the film, viewers realize that this shot of Züst is from an earlier interview
in which he describes not the lights, but the artificially defined edges of a
snowdrift that he shaped in his hotel room as an experiment inspired by the
boredom inherent in waiting out the weather in Churchill.
While confined to their motel rooms, the crew and some local residents
decide to pass the time by shooting a hole in the wall of the hotel room to
allow a stream of snow to enter and, hopefully, create a natural drift across
the room. This is one of many moments in the film where the boundary
between nature and human-made artificiality is brought up. The results of
the experiment leave something to be desired, prompting Züst to shape a

nicer looking drift than the one created by the experiment itself. His disap-
pointment about the lack of grandeur of the interior drift stems partly from
their lack of attention to the other side of the wall, their failure to see how the
weather was behaving in relation to the hole they punched to let the outside
in. This is one of the constant references in the film to a permeable boundary
between inside and outside while questioning what differences there are, if
any, between interior and exterior manifestations of the same thing. In this
case it’s a snowdrift, but this applies also to Mettler’s question about media as
surrogate for real experience, and his equation of the interior machinations
of consciousness with the exterior manifestation of the lights.
The snowdrift sequence ends with a close-up of the drift partially covering
the room’s television set, making a direct connection once again between the
natural and the artificial, the artificial snow drift playing at natural forms
while it partially obscures the television’s attempt at the same. This connec-
tion is brought home when we see Züst gesturing about the edges of a snow-
drift while we hear Brian Ladoon describe the levels of definition visible on
the edges of the lights at different times of the year. Here we find a conver-
gence of the landscape of the earth—the snowdrift—and the form of the au-
rora, both of which have been subject to mediation by human hands. We have
heard Mettler describe the aurora as moving like thoughts, evoking a con-
nection between the lights in the sky and the “lights” of consciousness. We
have read about Brakhage and Eisenstein’s interest in visual representations
of landscape as “musical” in nature, something Brakhage also equates with
the moving mind. With this simple juxtaposition between Züst’s hand ges-
ture and Ladoon’s description of the lights, the film zeros in on the triangular
relationship between psychological space, geographical space, and their con-
nection by way of cinema.
In this interview sequence Mettler uses images from one interviewee
as harmonic counterpoint to the sound from another. It is important that
the disjunction in this interview sequence takes place on the point of hand
gestures. Like rhythm, gesture transcends sensory modalities—physical
movement that can be experienced in the absence of both sound and image.
The idea of gesture as being tied to moving visual thinking is connected to
what Rolf Inge Godøy refers to as embodied cognition, images of move-
ment within the mind, that tie all processing of even the most abstract sound
into gestural sensibilities within the brain. The break in lip-sync disrupts
the convention of sound/image relationships, yet the gesturing brings these
images back into alignment with the sound offering new potentials for
making meaning. Here the film ties one of the most basic ideas we have about
gesture—hand movements acting as a visual aid while speaking—to the
disruption of conventional approaches to sound/image synchronization in
order to demonstrate other modes of connecting sound with image. Gesture
is the concept that threads these sound/image disjunctions together, just as
the gesturing motion of the aurora borealis threads representation with re-
ality, interior consciousness with exterior space. The “mysterious music”
being conducted in these shots of gestural hand movements is the “music” of
the silent aurora, a transsensorial gesture by Mettler to suggest the potential
of cinema to engender a common experience of the northern lights with the
people we see and hear on the screen.
In the end it’s not that Mettler wants us to feel as though we’re actually
standing with him in Churchill beneath the northern lights. Rather, the
film demonstrates that through exposing the audience to the filmmaking
process, while drawing explicit relationships between this process and the
machinations of our individual consciousnesses, we can get closer to the
experience of the aurora than many would think possible when mediated
through the technology of film. “And we tell ourselves that seeing it on TV
just isn’t the same as being there . . .”
Manufacturing the Pill
The greatest strength of Picture of Light is its quality of immersive reflexivity,

to expose the processes of its own construction in order to engage the audi-
ence as participants in performing the world that the film brings into being.
The result of this immersion is not that the film becomes a realist window out
into the world, bringing the audience to Churchill. Rather, it is an immer-
sion in the machinations by which the aurora are captured and brought to
the audience, emphasizing mediality as a fundamental mode of engagement
with place.
The issue of what is represented in the film is key. Just as the film does
not try to limit its representation of pro-filmic reality to realist convention,
neither does it try to represent experience itself through the creation of an
analog of consciousness. Rather, the film articulates how our experience of
the world, whether on film or not, is a function of the technologies through
which we engage with the world. Mettler’s film is about the difficulties in
achieving the technical aspects of filming something in the world under ad-
verse conditions, and questioning the relationship between the world and its
representation. Picture of Light suggests that the medium of film allows for
a transcendence of its own mediation to draw the spheres of interior con-
sciousness and exterior space together.
Here, Mettler might be said to take a cue from filmmaker Alejandro
Jodorowsky, who once proclaimed:
I ask of film what most North Americans ask of psychedelic drugs. The dif-
ference being that when one creates a psychedelic film, he need not create a
film that shows the visions of a person who has taken a pill; rather he needs
to manufacture the pill. (Jodorowsky in Samuels 1983, 33)
Mettler’s film seeks to dissolve the boundary between audience and subject in
embodying the paradox of allowing the mediator to vanish by foregrounding
the process of mediation. Though film provides second-order access onto the
world, the connection of the northern lights with the movement of thought
has the power to dissolve this second order, to make the mediator vanish. But
as mediation can never vanish, the film positions its own mediation of reality
front and center so that we can be made aware of the fact that all experience
is mediated in one form or another. When we realize that, we can move past
the problems of indexicality, or reproduction, and focus on those aspects of
experience that are common between our experience of film and our experi-
ence of the world outside of film.
The conundrum of vanishing mediation in Picture of Light is brought
home during the above-described interview segment, where local residents
discuss their experience of the lights. The local priest, Kees Verspeek, talks
about the difficulties in assessing distance when viewing the lights. Mettler
talks about the possibility of hearing the lights. These two issues are raised
again in the film when Inuit resident Alex Ouskun describes his own expe-
rience with the lights. As a child he was told by his grandfather not to look
at the lights or else he would hear a wind and the lights would swoop down
on him. His experience of the lights is that when turning attention toward
them they seem to come closer, and to create a sound. Again Peter Weber’s
evocation of “conducting mysterious music” (see above) is apt in suggesting
that the negation of distance between the lights and their viewers might re-
veal something audible. To look at the lights is to bring them close, so close
that we experience them as internal sound, as the movement of our own
thoughts. And this, in the end, is an experience that can transcend cinematic
mediation—not through strict representation, but through the immersive
reflexivity that Mettler builds through his approach to the formal treatment
of sound/image relationships.
The silent image’s potential to evoke sound, and indeed to instill the
experience of sound within the mind of the viewer, suggests the impos-
sibility of sound ever really being separate from the image. In exposing
the technical line between sound and image in his filmmaking, Mettler is
moving toward their unification. This is a move from the skeptical to the
hopeful, from resistance to wonder. He is following the path of many that
have come before, and is offering a way out of the endless debates about
cinema’s power to authentically represent the experience of place. Mettler’s
performativity is not about acknowledging that the world he films only
comes into being as a result of his filming. Rather, he is showing us the ways
in which technologies of mediation help us perform in the world and to un-
derstand it, performing the theoretical connection between two separate
poles in film sound theory between the goals of pure visual music and the
principles of asynchronism. In the end, both were in search of promoting
audience engagement rather than distanciation, and Mettler wants to get
out of the culture of skepticism that pervades performative documentary
and open new avenues to wonder.
Acoustic ecologists ask how attention to sound can help us understand
relationships between human beings and their environments. Picture of Light
offers a way of thinking about the separation of human beings and the nat-
ural world through technologies of mediation, the core issues that gave rise to
Schafer’s concept of schizophonia discussed at length in the previous chapter.
Mettler’s film illustrates how technological mediation need not be an agent
of separation between human beings and their environment. If handled a
certain way—as in Mettler’s immersive reflexivity—we can situate mediated
experience as an important part of the ecological balance between human
beings and nature in the modern world. By creating awareness of the split
between sound and image, bringing the “occult” nature of synchronization
into the light, Mettler demonstrates how a line can extend across this split to
create new relationships between these separate entities. This is the acoustic
profile I have charted in this chapter, the extension of light into sound, and
vice versa, mirroring extensions from the profilmic world into media repre-
sentation and between external reality and interior consciousness. Mettler
emphasizes these boundary lines in order to reveal how these separations
can be overcome through transsensorial awareness, a way of thinking about

one sense modality that can speak to the totality of human thought and ex-
perience. Mettler’s performance of mediality emphasizes the fact that this
mediality is simply a fact of existence, and can be documented in its own
right. In so doing he reclaims technologies of sound and image recording for
the purpose of providing access to the world. The lesson we can take away
from his work is that the problem with observational approaches like those
of the early World Soundscape Project is in their denial of mediality. Put the
mediality on display, and the world is there to be revealed along with it.
Mettler’s style allows us simultaneous access to the wonders of its sub-
ject and the means through which this subject is turned into the film itself.
Mettler shows us that reflexivity does not have to jolt the audience out of rap-
ture. Science does not have to negate magic. The occult can exist in plain sight
of day. They are each part of the other, as inseparable as the multiple levels
upon which the film explores its themes of transcending the line between
interior experience and exterior space. When the lights trigger our minds
moving in the film’s environment of immersive reflexivity, we can hear them
loud and clear—even though their sound does not reach our ears. As I will
demonstrate in the next chapter, this is the lesson that members of the World
Soundscape Project would bring forward from their initial work in the 1970s
into the development of soundscape composition as a way of studying the
sonic environment through acts of reflexive recomposition. The second wave
of acoustic ecology embraced reflexive sound composition as one of its key
modes of communicating what it means to engage with geographic specificity
through sound, part of a general movement that Mettler also contributed to
that found enormous potential in the technologies of recording and trans-
mission to engage the world just as theorists of documentary and film sound
were growing increasingly skeptical about this possibility.
References
Benjamin, Walter. 1968. “The Work of Art in the Age of Mechanical Reproduction.”
In Illuminations, edited by Hannah Arendt, translated by Harry Zohn, 217–252.
New York: Schocken Books.
Bordwell, David. 1980. “The Musical Analogy.” In “Cinema/Sound,” edited by Rick
Altman. Special issue, Yale French Studies, no. 60: 141–156.
Brakhage, Stan. 1978. “Letter to Ronna Page (On Music).” In The Avant-Garde Film: A
Reader of Theory and Criticism, edited by P. Adams Sitney, 134–138. New York: New York
University Press.
Brakhage, Stan. 2003. “Stan Brakhage: Death is a Meaningless Word (Part 1).” Offscreen 7,
no. 2 (February), http://offscreen.com/view/stan_brakhage
Bresson, Robert. 1977. “Notes on Sound.” Reprinted in Film Sound: Theory and Practice,
edited by John Belton and Elizabeth Weis, 149. New York: Columbia University Press.
Browne, Dan. 2020. Mediated Landscapes: Technology and Environment in Recent
Canadian Cinema. PhD dissertation, Joint Program of Communication and Culture,
Ryerson University and York University.
Bruzzi, Stella. 2006. New Documentary. 2nd edition. New York: Routledge.
Camper, Fred. 1985. “Sound and Silence in Narrative and Nonnarrative Cinema.” In
Film Sound: Theory and Practice, edited by Elizabeth Weis and John Belton, 369–381.
Claire, René. 1929. “The Art of Sound.” Translated by Vera Traill. Reprinted in Film
Sound: Theory and Practice, edited by Elizabeth Weis and John Belton, 92– 95.
New York: Columbia University Press, 1985.
Clarkson, Nathan. 2013. “Aura, Aurora and Aurality: The Narrative of Place in Picture of
Light.” Brno Studies in English 39, no. 2: 71–88.
Donnelly, K. J. 2014. Occult Aesthetics: Synchronization in Sound and Film. New York:
Oxford University Press.
Eisenstein, S., V. I. Pudovkin, and G. V. Alexandrov. 1929. “A Statement.” Reprinted in
Film Sound: Theory and Practice, edited by Elizabeth Weis and John Belton, 83–85.
New York: Columbia University Press, 1985.
Eisenstein, Sergei. 1987. Nonindifferent Nature. Translated by Herbert Marshall.
Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Ganguly, Suranjan. 1993. “All That is Light: Brakhage at 60.” Sight and Sound 3,
no. 10: 20–23.
Schaub, Marin. 1995. “Music and Travel: Sensing the World.” In Peter Mettler: Making the
Invisible Visible, edited by Salome Pitschen and Annette Schönholzer, 42. Zurich: Reihe
Andreas Züst/Verlag Ricco Bilger.
Godøy, Rolf Inge. 2006. “Gestural-Sonorous Objects: Embodied Extensions of Schaeffer’s
Conceptual Apparatus.” Organised Sound 11, no. 2: 149–157.
Jordan, Randolph. 2003. “Brakhage’s Silent Legacy for Sound Cinema.” Offscreen 7, no. 2
(February), http://www.horschamp.qc.ca/new_off screen/silent_legacy.html
McSorley, Tom. 1995. “Pilgrimage to Vision: The Cinema of Peter Mettler.” In Peter
Mettler: Making the Invisible Visible, edited by Salome Pitschen and Annette
Schönholzer, 88–121. Zurich: Reihe Andreas Züst/Verlag Ricco Bilger.
Mettler, Peter. 1992. “Music in Film: Film as Music.” In Cinémas 3, no. 1: 35–42.
Mountain, Rosemary. 2001. “Composers and Imagery: Myths and Realities.” In Musical
Imagery, edited by Rolfe Inge Godøy and Harald Jørgensen, 271–288. Lisse: Swets and
Zeitlinger.
Nichols, Bill. 1991. Representing Reality: Issues and Concepts in Documentary.
Nichols, Bill. 1994. Blurred Boundaries: Questions of Meaning in Contemporary Culture.
Pitschen, Salome, and Annette Schönholzer. 1995. Peter Mettler: Making the Invisible
Visible, edited by Salome Pitschen and Annette Schönholzer. Zurich: Reihe Andreas
Züst/Verlag Ricco Bilger.
Pudovkin, Alexander. 1929. “Asynchronism as a Principle of Sound Film,” translated by
Marie Seton and Ivor Montagu. Reprinted in Film Sound: Theory and Practice, edited
by Elizabeth Weis and John Belton, 86–91. New York: Columbia University Press, 1985.
Robertson, Robert. 2009. Eisenstein on the Audiovisual: The Montage of Music, Image and
Sound in Cinema. London: Taurus Academic Studies.
Russell, Catherine. 1999. Experimental Ethnography: The Work of Film in the Age of Video.
Russell, Catherine. 2006. “Gambling, Gods and LSD: Cinephilia and the Travel Film.”
Jump Cut, no. 46, http://www.ejumpcut.org/archive/jc48.2006/GodsLSD/index.html
Samuels, Stuart. 1983. Midnight Movies. New York: Collier Books.
Sjogren, Britta. 2006. Into the Vortex: Female Voice and Paradox in Film. Chicago: University
of Illinois Press.
Sterne, Jonathan. 2012. MP3: The Meaning of a Format. Durham, NC: Duke University
Press.
Thompson, Kristin. 1980. “Early Sound Counterpoint.” In “Cinema/Sound,” edited by
Rick Altman. Special issue, Yale French Studies, no. 60: 115–140.
Vaughan, Dai. 1999. For Documentary: Twelve Essays. Berkeley: University of
California Press.
Wees, William C. 1992. Light Moving in Time: Studies in the Visual Aesthetics of Avant-
Garde Film. Berkeley: University of California Press.
White, Jerry. 2006. Of This Place and Elsewhere: The Films and Photography of Peter
Mettler. Toronto: Toronto International Film Festival Group.
Zilczer, Judith. 2005. “Music for the Eyes: Abstract Painting and Light Art.” In Visual
Music: Synaesthesia in Art and Music Since 1900, edited by K. Brougher, J. Strick, A.
Wiseman, and J. Zilczer, 24–87. New York: Thames and Hudson.
3
Reflective Empathy
Soundscape Composition and the Spatialization of
Music in Gus Van Sant’s Last Days
Gus Van Sant’s film Last Days (2005) imagines the final retreat of rock super-
star Blake (Michael Pitt), loosely based on Kurt Cobain, at his dilapidating
estate in the Pacific Northwest region of the United States. The last time
we see Blake alive he is shown walking up his lengthy driveway at twilight,
approaching and then entering the rear greenhouse in which he will be
found dead the next morning, apparently by his own hand. He mumbles in-
coherently as he treads the gravel path—a nearly constant state of expres-
sion throughout the entire film—while we hear the sounds of his footfalls,
trickling water, chimes, doors banging, classical symphonic music, someone
whistling, and other reverberant footfalls on a hard interior surface. It is an
odd assortment of sounds that encompasses nearly the entire range of pos-
sible categorization in the current state film sound theory. Most of what we
hear comes from Hildegard Westerkamp’s soundscape composition “Türen
der Wahrnehmung (Doors of Perception)” produced for the 1989 Ars
Electronica festival in Linz, Austria. Using field recordings made in Linz
as well as Westerkamp’s adopted home of Vancouver, BC, the composition
sounds incongruous with the image of Blake walking in the leafy suburban
environment pictured on screen.1 Although perhaps not immediately recog-
nizable as sounds that come from an existing piece of recorded music, it seems
clear that the bulk of these sounds are meant to extend from somewhere
else—whether elements of score, sound effects to signal Blake’s subjective
consciousness, or otherwise. Yet just before entering the greenhouse he sud-
denly turns to look over his shoulder as though reacting to something heard
from behind—precisely at the moment that we hear a lone whistler com-
plete a phrase begun by a full orchestra just prior. Does Blake hear the whis-
tler? The question isn’t answerable, and as such it points to a way of thinking
about the relationship between sound and image in the film that necessitates
breaking free of established models for the analysis of music and sound in
DOI: 10.1093/oso/9780190226077.003.0004
film and opening up to interdisciplinary and intertextual approaches. In this

case, to properly contextualize the sound/image relationships here we need
to draw on the discourse of soundscape composition as a facet of acoustic
ecology to address how the presence of Westerkamp’s piece in the film invites
us to rethink the relationship between music and sound effects, and between
sound and image more generally, to situate the deployment of music as a spa-
tial device.
Let us think, for a moment, of the serial killer in Fritz Lang’s M (1931),
whose haunting whistle— a precursor to each murder— that Daniel
Goldmark et al. have described as a limit case for assessing the position of
music in film (2007, 1). Concerning one instance of the whistling’s disem-
bodiment from the murderer, the authors ask: “Just what is the source of
this music? Who is whistling it? Does it actually occur within the story at
all? Or has it become a framing device, imposing itself from outside?” (1).
These are all questions put in the service of assessing the limits of contem-
porary theorizing about film music, and to chart areas for expanded inves-
tigation. The whistler in Westerkamp’s piece, as presented in Gus Van Sant’s
film, does the same. But since Westerkamp’s whistler is from a pre-existing
composition, the usage here in Last Days invites us to rethink theories of the
compilation soundtrack and the modes of engagement it can engender with
the audience. Along with most of the other sounds from her composition
that the filmmakers map onto their film, Westerkamp’s work in Last Days
opens up an ecological dimension to Blake’s last days and the relationships
he has with his entourage: the ecology of human relationships as defined by
architectural space. After we hear the whistler, Blake makes his way into the
greenhouse, the sound of his pull on the door handle and entrance into the
space timed precisely with corresponding door sounds and a shift to a dif-
ferent spatial register within “Doors of Perception.” This is a clearly inten-
tional synchronization of sound elements to position Westerkamp’s piece as
a guide to Blake’s navigation of the architectural space in which he lives his
final moments. At points like these, Westerkamp’s sounds frustrate conven-
tional understandings of the boundaries between the industrial division of
the soundtrack into voice, music, and sound effects. Yet her sounds push be-
yond questions about the permeability of these boundaries and ask us to con-
sider how the genre of soundscape composition, the main artistic offshoot of
acoustic ecology, can inform the way we understand Van Sant’s interest in the
cinema as a form of audiovisual cartography, mapping the main character’s
Reflective Empathy 99
journey through the architectural space of his estate and the emotional space
of his relationships.
In this chapter I argue that assessing the role of “Doors of Perception” in
Last Days by way of Westerkamp’s practice, as informed by acoustic ecology,
reveals the film’s highly methodical exploration of the nuances of spatial rep-
resentation in the cinema that has been largely missed by the film’s critics.
I will demonstrate how Westerkamp’s piece activates awareness of the ways in
which other music in the film is deployed spatially, offering an alternative ap-
proach to considering the function of the compilation soundtrack. Goldmark
et al. argue that film music can work as an active agent with the ability to
“move or ‘transport’ the audience into recognitions, subject-positions, and
reflective understanding that could be accessed in no other way” (2007, 7). In
Last Days, the presence of soundscape composition as an element that hovers
between conventional understanding of compilation music and sound effects
prompts the need to situate each within the other in order to access the film’s
broader goal: to position the theme of empathy, absent between Blake and
the people around him, as a function of spatial relationships between these
characters within the spaces they occupy in the film.
At the heart of Last Days, as in most of Van Sant’s oeuvre, lies the theme
of friendship. Blake is surrounded by people who consider themselves to be
close to him, yet the film portrays their relationships as fundamentally one-
sided. The film positions this one-sidedness as an effect of superstardom on
a single individual, the paradox of being known by everyone while knowing
very few in return. Blake seems neither able nor willing to communicate ef-
fectively with any of the people around him; he retreats further into himself
until he is finally found dead under mysterious circumstances. The film is
about the basic problem of empathy in human relationships: the limits on
the access that any of us have to the emotional and psychological space of
others. The film uses the framing device of the doorway to illustrate these
limits of interpersonal access, traceable through how the characters interact
with the spaces of the house by way of the doorways through which they all
must pass. Westerkamp’s piece intersects with this framing device through its
own structured use of the sounds of doors to mediate spaces at once separate
and conflated.
To bring Westerkamp’s piece into dialogue with Van Sant’s film, I use the
term reflective empathy to examine the theme of friendship and its develop-
ment through sound design. My formulation of reflective empathy follows
Katharine Norman’s notion of reflective listening (mentioned in the introduc-

tion to this book and further developed later in this chapter). For Norman,
reflectivity in soundscape composition is when the field recordings used as
the building blocks for composition are referential to the world in front of the
microphones while also reflecting how they have been shaped by the com-
poser (1996, 5). In other words, reflective listening is a form of mediality that
charts acoustic profiles back and forth along the line of mediation, to hear
how external sounds extend into compositional strategies, and how these
strategies shape our perception of the external world in the process. In human
relationships, reflective empathy indicates the mediality between people who
can extend their engagements with each other across the line that divides
their status as individuals, shaping their experiences of each other as a result.
The problem of empathy, here, is the same as that of sound fidelity discussed
in the previous chapters: the limited capacity for people to share empathetic
space without losing their status as individuals completely, just as mediation
can never vanish in the face of sound technology. Reflective empathy is like a
window that can just as easily allow light to pass as bounce it back toward the
viewer, providing illusions of transparency while maintaining its isolationist
properties.
After opening this book with two chapters in which I apply acoustic
ecology’s ideas to film analysis, Last Days now offers a rare instance in which
the worlds of film sound design and acoustic ecology intersect directly
through the use of Hildegard Westerkamp’s work, continuing Van Sant’s
practice from his previous film Elephant (2003). Understanding the role that
these pieces play in these films requires a hybrid analytical model that extends
the study of soundscape composition into the realm of film sound design,
one that can approach the formal strategies employed by Van Sant through
a framework established by the study of Westerkamp’s own creative practice.
Last Days is a master class in running through the established conventions
for positioning film sound, and the role of Westerkamp’s work is to break
down some of these divisions, get us listening a different way, and then apply
this listening across the film as a whole. It is all the more appropriate that Last
Days is a film about a musician featuring several potent evocations of compi-
lation soundtrack material, along with two live performances recorded with
direct sound, integrated unusually tightly into the narrative fabric of the film.
Understanding the film itself as an extension of soundscape composition
allows us to map questions about the effectiveness of soundscape composi-
tion in engaging audiences with real-world spaces, and whether or not films
can do the same. Westerkamp’s piece teaches us how to think of the film as an
exploration of ecological issues of engagement with place, to think of music
spatially, and to consider how the characters engage with their spaces—both
architectural and emotional—through the use of sound technologies and
music. Acoustic ecology has asked us to think about how environmental
sound can be thought of musically; film’s positioning of compositions devel-
oped from acoustic ecology teaches us how to think about music spatially. In
Last Days, this means addressing the spatialization of music as a function of
how space delineates the relationships between the characters in the film, and
how they use music—and its technologies of production and reproduction—
as tools for engagement and/or alienation. Mediality in this film is a direct
function of how Westerkamp’s piece teaches us to hear the acoustic profiles
charted by acts of playing and listening to music between people whose lines
of communication have become opaque.
Running the Gamut
The use of sound in Last Days is structured upon a systemic deployment of

the various modes that film music can embody as it investigates the spatial
and emotional relationships between Blake and his entourage. We can chart
a rather tidy bell curve through the different possibilities for musical reg-
ister in film: it begins with a clear distinction between music positioned as
score and environmental sound effects positioned as source; these registers
are then conflated through the mingling of Westerkamp’s piece with location
sound recording for the film; then a series of musical performances within
the diegesis, some prerecorded and played through media technologies by
the characters, some performed by Blake on his instruments in the house;
then a return of Westerkamp’s piece co-mingling with location recording
and other source effects; and ending with the same clear separation between
the inside and outside of the diegesis as at the film’s beginning. As such the
film can be used as a textbook case for well entrenched conventions and
their dissolution through decidedly avant-garde experimentation. I argue
that in drawing the line through these various auditory deployments, Last
Days opens up new ways of thinking about music in film by way of the role of
Westerkamp’s piece within the sound design. In this section I will delineate
the broad outlines of the film’s sonic structure before moving in for closer
analysis of its various elements.
The film opens and closes with the same piece of pre-existing music,
Clement Janequin’s popular renaissance chanson “La Guerre” as sung by the
King’s Singers. The song’s position on the level of score is as clear as can be,
beginning over a black screen as the HBO logo comes up, carrying over into
the first shots of Blake stumbling and mumbling through the forest without
changing the sonic particularities of its studio production. There is no
mistaking the music here for part of the environmental sound; it is recorded
with attention toward minimizing what Michel Chion calls materializing
sound indices: sonic indicators of the objects producing the sounds we hear
and the space in which these sounds are produced (1994, 114). This can be
tied to the notion of “pure” voice idealized in the pre-and post-Romantic
periods, times when, as Sherry Simon explains, “voice was marvelous for its
own sake, when its role was to unfold in a display of pure surface,” allowing
for a “break with naturalism” which “frees the listener to hear the voice as
separate from the body” (Simon, 110). So it is significant that this music
returns over images of Blake’s dead body at the end of the film. Also signifi-
cant is how the film goes on to explore a variety of other sonic registers that
stand in various states of contrast to this disembodied vocal track that opens
and closes the film.
As “La Guerre” continues, environmental sound effects cut in directly
as the first shot of the forest appears, an editing strategy that suggests
that source sound and image are locked together while music on the level
of score can float across. “La Guerre” then ends, and we are left with the
sounds of Blake’s mumbling, the birds, and the crunching of leaves and
twigs below Blake’s feet. At the end of the film the situation is reversed,
“La Guerre” re-entering after a period of environmental sound as we watch
the police investigation unfold around Blake’s body in the greenhouse, the
King’s Singers continuing over a cut to black as the image and environ-
mental sound disappear entirely. The two instances of “La Guerre,” leading
into and out of environmental sound, creates a perfect pair of auditory
bookends to the film.
Once the choral music stops the film spends its first section developing
a strong formal synchronicity between sound and image, both grounded
in location recording to create a rigorously realist aesthetic as Blake passes
through various different environments. He goes for a swim in the river,
and later camps next to a fire where he sings loud into the night, his voice
reverberating through the wooded environment and prompting a response
from a dog in the distance. Blake is able to engage with the space by using
his voice to activate its echoic qualities and connect with other beings in the
distance. The dog also provides the first evidence of Blake’s proximity to civi-
lization, which increases when a train passes as he makes his way back home.
Importantly, the train is heard well before it is seen, an audible presence that
begins without visual motivation. Not long after this we hear the first strains
of Westerkamp’s “Doors of Perception” as Blake approaches the house. Here
the piece includes incongruous sounds of public transportation bells, motors,
and doors opening and closing. These elements blend with the sounds of the
wind, footsteps, and Blake’s ever-present mumbling as produced for the film.
The passing train in the previous example sets up Blake’s environment as
one in which offscreen sound might become visualized. So the presence of
these sounds from Westerkamp’s piece operate as what Chion calls active
offscreen sounds: they prompt us to wonder where they come from and if we
will see their implied sources on screen (1994, 85). This is one of the ways
that soundscape composition in the film gets us to reflect upon spatial rep-
resentation and the line between realist and expressionist techniques. When
sources are not revealed and remain somewhat inexplicable, we begin to un-
derstand their presence as a function of music rather than environmental
sound along with associated connotations of compositional intent rather
than the random capturing of field recording.
Westerkamp’s piece continues to mingle with various location sounds
from inside the house, functioning sometimes as diegetic sound effects,
other times like subjective internal diegetic sound, and still other times like
score. The most complex interaction comes when it plays along with another
piece of pre-existing music, “On Bended Knee” by Boyz II Men, and then
disappears from the film for a while as we move through an emphasis on
pre-existing music performed within the diegesis, either as recording with
the Velvet Underground’s “Venus in Furs” or live performance as with Blake’s
electric improvisation and final acoustic performance of “Death to Birth.”
As I will argue in the pages to follow, the earlier use of Westerkamp’s com-
position invites new ways of hearing these pieces of source music not simply
as music but also markers of spatial orientation. Then we return to “Doors
of Perception” for the sequence described at the beginning of this chapter,
hearing it with new ears after the film’s spatial deployment of the earlier
songs. Finally, the film ends with a long stretch of environmental sound fol-
lowing Blake’s death, capped with a return to “La Guerre” for the closing
credits. And so we find a neat curve tracking a clear distinction between the
simplistic demarcation between the inside and outside of the diegesis, then
deliberate complications of this distinction and through to a firm abandon-

ment of any elements of score, back through new complications, and then
outward once again to where we started.
Mapping Personal Noise
Chris Chang identifies the importance of the underlying principles behind

Westerkamp’s compositions for understanding the thread that runs through
Van Sant’s work in the mid-2000s. He quotes the “Soundwalking” article,
addressed in my introduction to this book, in which Westerkamp lays the
foundations for beginning the process of soundscape awareness:
Start by listening to the sounds of your body while moving. They are closest
to you and establish the first dialogue between you and the environment.
If you can hear the quietest of these sounds you are moving through an en-
vironment that is scaled to human proportions. In other words, with your
voice or your footsteps you are “talking” to your environment, which in turn
responds by giving your sounds a specific acoustic quality. (Westerkamp in
Chang 2005, 16)
Westerkamp is interested in the relationship between distinct individuals

and their environments, and understands environmental engagement as a
reciprocal process defined by the relationship between a sound’s origin and
its propagation through space. Chang suggests that “the idea of a symbiotic
play between personal noise and the contextual ambience of location is a type
of interaction—I would argue it is the defining component—experienced in
Van Sant’s trilogy” (16).2
I agree with Chang that the interaction between the self and the environ-
ment is the defining component of these films. However, despite his attention
to the spirit of Westerkamp’s work, Chang ultimately relegates the status of
Westerkamp’s sounds to the realm of the psychological in Last Days, marking
Blake’s subjective experience of his environment filtered through the mental
stress that leads him toward death. Chang suggests that the presence of
Westerkamp’s work is “a visceral enhancement to uneasy states of mind,”
and describes the kinds of odd and out of place sounds heard in the film as
“aspects of a constantly invasive sound environment” that Blake is trying to
escape from (2005, 16).
Ascribing Westerkamp’s work to the role of subjective sound in Van Sant’s

films is a common response among critics, whether they recognize the
source material or not. Speaking of Last Days, Amy Taubin goes so far as
to say that “Leslie Shatz’s sound design is at least an equal partner to [cin-
ematographer Harry] Savides’s haunting images. It’s primarily the sound
design that conveys Blake’s blurring of inside and out—of the sound in his
head with the sound around him” (2005, 19). Of course, a good portion of
the sound design makes use of Westerkamp’s work, which Stephen Dalton
describes as adding “a subtle air of dislocation to the rustic wandering of
Pitt’s hero, Blake” (2005, 65), acknowledging how the soundtrack can help us
understand the character’s feelings of alienation. Similarly, Danijela Kulezic-
Wilson examines the use of Frances White’s work in Elephant and Paranoid
Park (2007), where she finds significance in the fact that scenes were designed
with this pre-existing soundscape composition in mind, again tying the sug-
gestive qualities of the sound to psychological space (2008, 129).
One of the reasons why the use of Westerkamp’s work has been associated
with Blake’s subjective experience is because of certain moments in which
“Doors of Perception” (the title itself evoking altered states of consciousness
by way of reference to Aldous Huxley and William Blake) functions bril-
liantly well as a marker of interiority in the film (Falsetto 2015, 101). The
most obvious example of such a moment comes just after Blake (appar-
ently) digs up a box in the back yard containing heroin and prepares him-
self a fix. I say “apparently” because the film skirts around the particulars,
showing us simply a montage that reverses the usual function of such a se-
quence. Instead of showing us all the action, the sequence shows us the in-
between moments: we see Blake with a shovel but not what he digs up; we
see him walking into the kitchen with a box wrapped in a plastic bag, but not
opening the box to reveal its contents; we hear Blake talking to himself about
the need for a spoon, but this could just as easily be for the breakfast cereal
he is preparing as for cooking up a fix. After this montage, however, sound
steps in to suggest Blake’s drug-addled mind: as he climbs the stairs to his
bedroom, we hear the sounds of a chiming clock offscreen.3 This could easily
be a standard source sound, for this kind of clock would certainly fit within
this environment, and it bears the spatial signature of a location recording
in a mildly reverberant space rather than the dry quality of a studio fabrica-
tion. For these reasons the sound of the clock is not likely to be perceived as
out of place and thus pointing to its origin in a work composed separately
from the film. However, as Blake slows his gate and falls backward onto the
bed, the sounds of the clock begin to distort, multiplying in different pitches
and displaying other obvious technological manipulations that give it a hal-
lucinatory quality. These manipulations are at once signs of Westerkamp’s
interest in exposing the technological mediation through which her compo-
sitional process is filtered, while also working perfectly to add a psycholog-
ical sound dimension to the observational quality of the images.
Tempting though it is to default to the subjectivity thesis, I argue that there
is a much more rewarding way in which to understand how Chang’s notion
of “personal noise” figures into Westerkamp’s work within the context of
Last Days. To begin with, the equation of “personal” with “subjective” isn’t
quite in the spirit of acoustic ecology’s interest in the relationship between
an individual’s soundamaking and the contextual environment. Nor does
ascribing an expressionistic tendency to Van Sant’s representation of Blake
do justice to the importance of his starkly realist approach across much of the
film. Both Westerkamp and Van Sant are interested in how we navigate phys-
ical space, and what role sound can play in our understanding of our spatial
environments. It is on this front that these two artists’ work intersect most
productively. To understand this intersection, we need a better account of
what personal noise might mean in this context.
Westerkamp’s prescription for soundwalking is premised upon a sense of
ecological balance, when one can hear the sounds they are making interact
with the acoustic properties of the environment through which they pass,
an awareness of one’s own role in mediating space that she also argues is the
key to understanding soundscape composition as a form of acoustic ecology
(see Westerkakmp 2002). This notion is intimately bound up with acoustic
ecology’s construction of “human scale” (1977, 207). As discussed in the in-
troduction to this book, critics like Jonathan Sterne take issue with “human
scale” as being premised upon “the spatiality of the unamplified voice” (2003,
342). The idea here, a guiding tenet in early acoustic ecology, is that sound
environments are ecologically balanced when they do not interfere with un-
assisted verbal communication. This is a reflection of R. Murray Schafer’s pre-
industrial biases, and has been critiqued for its failure to account for all the
ways in which technologies of sound recording and transmission function at
the level of human engagement. Later developments in acoustic ecology have
moved away from this bent, with composers like Westerkamp demonstrating
their commitment to medial presentations in her compositions that allow a
more nuanced approach to human scale that includes technology as part of
its range, and Westerkamp acknowledges architectural space as part of this
mediality (as is clear from the premise of “Doors of Perception”). So if we ac-

knowledge that personal noise is about human engagement with place, while
accepting that human scale can extend into the realm of technological ex-
pansion beyond unamplified acoustics, then we have arrived at the basis for
the soundscape compositions of Hildegard Westerkamp, whose approach to
making sound work is frequently reflexive about the technology she uses to
heighten engagement with our sonic environments.
In the analyses that follow I will consider the implications for the
concepts of personal noise and human scale as they relate to the position of
Westerkamp’s soundscape composition within the overall sound design of
the film. In so doing I will demonstrate the importance of understanding
how Blake’s isolation and alienation functions within the physical spaces he
occupies, to reveal the material conditions of his last days alive and reflect
upon the role of music as the guiding force in this life about to end. Personal
noise becomes a way of conceptualizing human scale around relationships of
communication rather than their technological means, and the relationships
of interaction between characters that define the friendships and distances
here. It is tempting to make a schizophonic reading of the film that posits
Blake’s success, enabled by technologies of sound reproduction and trans-
mission, as the key factor in putting him beyond human scale and causing
his downfall. But it’s not about schizophonic technology here, as the break-
down in community that Blake experiences is happening in close quarters
well within the means of human scale, the spatiality of the unamplified voice.
Westerkamp’s work shifts our attention away from the idea of technology as
the enemy, and toward a nuanced understanding of how music, when under-
stood spatially, can reveal the problem of empathy in human communication.
I will concentrate on a key stylistic similarity between the structure of Last
Days and “Doors of Perception”: the use of doors as mediating agents, calling
attention to how people move between separate spaces, drawing them to-
gether while also keeping them apart. “Doors of Perception” is the principal
soundscape composition used in Last Days, and is patterned around the use
of door sounds to mediate transitions between spaces that would not ordi-
narily coexist. Tracing how this composition is mapped onto the film can tell
us much about how space is used to express the fundamental issues of their
narratives: the processes of empathy in human friendship, expressed through
the varying levels of extension that music is granted between spaces separated
by doors. We hear the sounds of doors opening and closing to bring spaces
together that would ordinarily be incompatible, creating an overtly reflexive
journey through impossibly overlapping spaces that call attention to the role
of technology in constructing our understanding of these spaces in the first
place. Sometimes the doors draw a rigid line between soundscapes, a lim-
ited acoustic profile with no bridges across the sound of a door opening or
closing. This is what we hear as Blake approaches the house at the beginning
of the film. As the piece progresses, things become increasingly fluid and ab-
stract, the sounds of doors mingling with extended ambiences rather than
keeping them separate, sections that Van Sant uses later in the film to compli-
cate spatial representation in the film. Doors in the real world mediate sonic
spaces, keeping them separate when closed and bringing them together
when open. So it is also with the sounds of Westerkamp’s doors opening and
closing here, bringing spaces together and then breaking them apart. Van
Sant and his sound designer Leslie Shatz import this formal strategy into the
film, exploring how the divided spaces of Blake’s house function as registers
of the emotional spaces between him and his friends.
Delayed Coverage: Spatial Coherence through

Non-Linear Narrative
As many critics have noted, Last Days tends to eschew elaborate character
development for an approach to narrative that emphasizes dead time, most
notably through sequences dominated by a long take aesthetic in which
characters are filmed from behind as they walk between spaces, usually
separated by doorways, repeated at different points in the film from different
perspectives in a non-linear approach to narrative progression. Speaking of
Elephant, which employs very similar strategies to Last Days, Amy Taubin
observes that this non-linearity is positioned within a dialectic between
“documentary-style immediacy and formalist distance” (2005, 18). The
“documentary-style immediacy” comes, in part, from a highly realist ap-
proach to visual representation combined with an unusual emphasis on lo-
cation sound recording, the latter going against the grain of contemporary
mainstream American filmmaking. A key element of the “formalist distance”
that most critics latch onto is the looping narrative the continually revisits
scenes presented earlier to either complete them or present them from a dif-
ferent perspective. A striking feature of Elephant as well, Taubin ties this non-
linearity to the way the films position themselves in relation to the real-world
events upon which they are based:
The effect is to transform what seems like “real” time into recorded time and
the time of memory, which is the mode in which the “reality” of Columbine
now exists. The reversals also suggest a longing to stop time, to prevent the
inevitable tragedy from ever taking place. (2005, 18)
One could make the same point about Last Days, in which Taubin suggests
that this feeling of looping time is also tied to the drug-addled subjectivity
of Blake who appears to be a heroin addict on relapse. “The disconnections
in the narrative, such as it is, reinforce the feeling of emotional disconnec-
tion among the characters” (2005, 19), a feature of Elephant that prompted
Kent Jones to refer to Van Sant as “the prince of calculated disaffection,”
(2003, 28). As I will show, however, the disconnection and disaffection at
work in the structural non-linearity ultimately serve to demonstrate how
music in the film is deployed spatially around the function of doors within
the mansion. Yes, the narrative disconnections emphasize the distance be-
tween characters, but they break up around specific instances of architectural
separation of spaces, emphasized by how music operates in relation to these
separated spaces. As such, the narrative structure is tied to the way in which
music functions as an aspect of space, allowing Blake’s space to be considered
ecologically around questions of human scale and the processes of empathy
between he and his people.
The film’s three most pronounced structural loops revolve around the pres-
ence of songs being played in the house: first is “On Bended Knee” (1994) by
Boyz II Men, presented as a music video on a TV in the den; second is “Venus
in Furs” (1967) by The Velvet Underground, presented as an LP played on the
turntable in the living room; and third is “Death to Birth” (2005) written by
Michael Pitt and performed by him as Blake on solo guitar and voice in the
studio corner of the living room. Each of these songs is presented twice as the
scenes in which they first appear are revisited from a different perspective as
the film progresses. And each song bears a different relationship to the use of
“Doors of Perception” throughout the film. In this section I will analyze the
scenes involving “On Bended Knee” and then demonstrate the song’s value
in offering ways to think about the rest of the film’s use of pre-existing music.
The first strains of “On Bended Knee” by Boyz II Men comes a short while
after Blake’s aforementioned collapse on the bed upstairs to the sound of
distorting clocks. He awakes and moves downstairs where he deals with two
intrusions from the outside: first a phone call from his bandmates to see if he
will make their upcoming tour, to which he responds simply by hanging up;
then, an in-person discussion with a representative from the Yellow Pages

who shows up at the front door and takes Blake for the proprietor of a lo-
comotive parts shop. Blake plays along with the mistaken identity, a narra-
tive detail emphasizing that his interactions with others tend to be based on
who they want him to be rather than who he really is inside. Each of these
sequences is marked by location recording in which the mildly reverberant
nature of the mansion’s hardwood interior is evident, an auditory strategy
that continues as he then moves into the den and closes the door.
From here the film cuts to a shot of Asia (Asia Argento) walking down
the stairs and stopping in the hallway, “On Bended Knee” quietly audible as
though coming from the other room. Asia walks over to the den and opens
the door. Blake is passed out on the other side, and falls over as the door
opens, blocking the entryway. The volume of “On Bended Knee” is raised
in conjunction with the door opening, suggesting its source from inside the
room but without much change in spatial signature. We cut to Asia walking
back upstairs, only to be interrupted by another doorbell. She calls Scott
(Scott Patrick Green) down to go and answer it, and he finds the Friberg
twins (Adam and Andy Friberg) here to provide information about the
Church of Jesus Christ and the Latter Day Saints. Scott invites them in, and
their proceeding discussion is intercut with shots of Blake in the den, shots
that are soon revealed to be from a prior point in the narrative when Blake
passes out against the door where Asia later finds him.
In these shots of Blake in the den, he turns on the TV and finds a Boyz
II Men video of “On Bended Knee.” We cut to the Fribergs discussing their
ability to communicate directly with God, and then cut back to Blake. Along
with this cut back to Blake comes the sudden emergence of an excerpt from
“Doors of Perception” consisting of a steady drone of processed bell and choir
recordings punctuated with the sounds of doors and woody thumping with
a similar timbral quality to the location sounds we’ve heard throughout the
house.4 The refrain from the television reiterates, “Can’t somebody tell me
how to get things back the way they used to be?” This is a sentiment easily re-
latable to the sadness of Blake’s current situation. While we hear these lyrics,
Blake stoops forward and drops to his knees in a protracted moment of self-
imposed slow-motion, the Boyz II Men song fading out and leaving only the
ethereal qualities of Westerkamp’s piece along with some light ambience from
location recording. Eventually Blake ends up on all fours, his fist hitting the
floor with a sound that could easily have come from “Doors of Perception,”
and crawls toward the door. As Blake crawls, the Boyz II Men track returns,
while the sounds of doors and creaking wood from Westerkamp’s piece con-
tinue to emphasize the sound of the door against which he finally passes out.
Aside from light room tone and the sound of Blake’s fist hitting the floor,
the rest of the soundscape is provided by “Doors of Perception” and “On
Bended Knee.” Here the door sounds from Westerkamp’s piece echo the
sounds of the doors we heard Blake opening and closing earlier, similar
in timbre, texture and spatial signature creating a synchronicity between
her piece and the space represented on screen. Meanwhile her additional
treatments point to a space entirely outside this realm, reverberant bells and
choral sounds creating an otherworldly ambience.
If hearing “On Bended Knee” suggests that this scene is a revisitation of
the earlier iteration of the song, the loop is confirmed as Asia suddenly opens
the door and finds Blake in front of it, an event that was first presented prior
to the arrival of the Fribergs. The sound of the door opening is timed with a
major shift in the tone of Westerkamp’s piece featuring a lower register drone
punctuated by distant foghorns and processed bird calls, the least referential
section of the piece. Here Van Sant and Leslie Shatz adopt Westerkamp’s own
strategy: the sound of a door opening recorded for the film provides a formal
opening for a new soundscape to emerge, just as Westerkamp’s own shifts
in soundscape are mediated by the sounds of doors opening and closing.
Timing this shift in “Doors of Perception” to the sound of a door from the
film suggests that the new soundscape of foghorns and birds is meant to re-
flect a vaster level of extension, the open door moving the soundtrack beyond
the space of the den. However, the kinds of sounds we hear are not commen-
surate with the space we see on screen, and a cut to the reverse angle from
outside the den reveals no corresponding cut on the soundtrack to suggest
its grounding in the diegesis. The open door has opened us up to a register
of the soundtrack that simultaneously suggests Blake’s altered state of con-
sciousness and the artificiality of the film’s constructed diegesis. Asia then
steps over Blake to enter the room, props him up against the wall, and exits,
closing the door behind her. Cutting back into the room, the excerpt from
“Doors of Perception” is gone and the camera lingers on the TV as the rest of
the Boyz II Men song plays out.
Like the film’s opening presentation of “La Guerre” by the King’s Singers,
the sound of “On Bended Knee” is presented close to an ideal state as a studio
recording, not bearing any materializing sound indices that ground it within
the space represented on screen, in this case the markers of its supposed em-
anation from the small speakers of the TV set or the spatial signature of the
room in which it is being played. Importantly, “Doors of Perception” provides

the bulk of the “environmental” sound heard in conjunction with the music
track. The correspondence of “Doors of Perception” with the class of film
sounds usually associated with sound effects is enhanced by its co-presence
with “On Bended Knee.” Indeed, this is a rare instance of two distinct pieces
of music being played simultaneously in a film, and it is made possible by
the extreme difference between the two tracks—and that the audience is un-
likely to recognize one even as “music,” much less bring awareness of it from
prior exposure (although this segment’s inclusion in the prior film Elephant
enhances this possibility). This opens up a similar tension to that embodied
by the presence of “Doors of Perception”: sounds that seem like they could be
part of the environment are revealed not to be, where the music from the TV
sounds like it comes from outside the diegesis while being grounded within
by way of the visible source of the sound.
This is a complex sequence. The interaction between Blake and Asia is a
classic example of how people relate to Blake in the film: the doors of com-
munication are blocked, making empathy almost impossible. The non-linear
cross-cutting, combined with the structural loop, serves the distanciation
and disjunctive experience of time associated with Blake’s subjectivity, while
also emphasizing the distance between characters: the first angle on the scene
gives us Asia’s perspective while the second situates us with Blake—and never
the two shall meet. But the non-linear strategies also build important the-
matic associations between different elements of the sequence. We hear Boyz
II Men singing about praying “on bended knee” for a way back to the past,
intercut with the Fribergs relating a story about how the founder of their reli-
gion came to find Christ, and the impact this event has on their present prac-
tice of prayer. Both threads deal with spiritual issues and questions of faith,
supported by the sounds of bells and choir in “Doors of Perception” that, as
noted earlier, come back in the final shot of Blake alive.
Significantly, “On Bended Knee” was a number one hit in the United States
in 1994, the year that Kurt Cobain died. As such the song also foreshadows
Blake’s death when read as an intertextual marker of Cobain’s real-life story,
adding another layer of complexity to the identifications this song engenders
for the audience of the film. Further, the studio quality presentation of the
song here, abstracted from the spatial signature of the den, highlights how
different this style of pop music is from the “dirtier” sounds of the grunge
that Cobain popularized and which Blake is associated with in the film. This
song literally comes from a different world of popular representation than
Cobain’s grunge scene, and yet Cobain was reluctantly but inevitably moving
toward this glossy world with his increasing popularity, another factor in the
disillusionment we can attribute to both Cobain and Blake. This music is not
of Blake’s community space, but its thematic call to “get things back the way
they used to be” speaks to Blake’s dissatisfaction as his increasing popularity
moves him closer to the world of pop, and he reacts by retreating further
from it. So the plays on varying extension present in the scene become loaded
with questions of Blake’s distance from those he shares his environment with,
both within the house and the larger world of the music industry.
This scene, as spread across two nonconsecutive sequences, marks a high
point of intersection between different spatial registers in the film’s sound de-
sign: the on-the-air sound from the TV is at once visually grounded within
the space we see on screen, while its sound points to a dimension only re-
alizable in the recording studio. This duality reflects the tension implicit in
Blake’s retreat from his own music production. The location sound recording
grounds him firmly within the space of the den, while Westerkamp’s piece
teases that grounding outward into abstraction, alluding simultaneously
to a vast extension into the distance and a full retreat into Blake’s psycho-
logical space. The scene is thus infused with the ecological implications of
schizophonia. A Schaferian reading of the scene would surely suggest that
Blake’s distress is a direct result of his schizophonic profession. It is as though
the representation of the televised music here reflects the ability of recording
technology to bring us to another plane of experience, a schizophonic poten-
tial that threatens to disrupt the here-and now-for the there-and-then. Yet
the way that Westerkamp’s piece interacts with different registers of music
and location recording provides the audience with the opportunity to reflect
upon this space as a highly mediated environment despite its grounding in
representational material. Importantly, the reflection inspired by sound-
scape composition here can also be carried into other moments that do not
involve such complex interactions between varying sound elements.
The key here is how Westerkamp’s composition serves to spatialize the
other, more conventionally defined music in this scene, a function that
depends in part on attending to its aesthetic deployment while situating that
deployment within the context of the music’s origin outside the text. This
is standard practice in scholarly assessments of the compilation film sound-
track, but I argue that accounting for the role of soundscape composition
as compilation soundtrack material requires some modification to existing
models. I turn now to some suggestions for a new model of the compilation
soundtrack that I will then apply to two other prominent instances of pre-
existing music in the film, informed by soundscape composition while, in
these cases, presented separately from Westerkamp’s work.
Musical Identification and the Space of Empathy
While it is quite rare for an entire film to be designed around an existing mu-
sical work, the use of existing music in film soundtracks is ubiquitous. When
treated with a mind toward audiovisual integration, a compilation sound-
track has the power to make the existing pieces of music seem as though they
were made specifically for the film. Yet as Anahid Kassabian explores in her
book Hearing Film: Tracking Identifications in Contemporary Hollywood Film
Music (2001), audience members who recognize an existing piece of music
in a film can’t help but bring very specific identifications to it, regardless of
how integrated the music becomes. She suggests that this process of identi-
fication with a film’s soundtrack is different from what we experience with a
commissioned score that an audience hears for the first time in conjunction
with the movie.
For Kassabian, what is most important is that the filmmaker’s intention for
a piece of music is the realm of assimilation: with no prior experience with
the film’s music, the film is free to create a set of identifications with the au-
dience from scratch (2). This “assimilating identification” takes on another
dimension when affiliation comes into play, the domain of the compilation
soundtrack containing pieces of music that spectators may recognize from
contexts other than their situation within the film (3). With this distinction
Kassabian is expressing the tension inherent in intertextual relationships,
where a given film text cannot function as a closed system because it points
outward to the existence of other texts. This prompts the question: what
happens when a film makes use of existing music that uses field recordings
rather than instruments as the basis for composition, thereby resembling the
traditional category of “sound effects” more closely than “music”? In other
words, how does the distinction between assimilating identifications and
affiliating identifications work in the realm of sound effects?
Here the proximity between film sound designers and soundscape
composers becomes especially important to consider. Take the example of
any given door sound from Westerkamp’s “Doors of Perception”: it is in-
stantly recognizable as a door sound, something we recognize from our
experience outside the world of the film, and we bring affiliations to that
sound based on that experience. This is a kind of affiliation that is central to
all representational work, and is one facet of Katharine Norman’s concept
of reflective listening: we recognize a sound as having a source in the world,
while also recognizing how it has been organized within the form of the
composition (1996, 5). This is the source of the “context-based” approach to
soundscape composition described by Truax (2008). Yet if we recognize that
particular door sound as coming from Westerkamp’s piece, the kind of affil-
iation that Kassabian describes also comes into effect. This dual-affiliation
makes the process of identification with the domain of sound effects more
complex than usual with pieces of pre-existing music more conventionally
defined. The use of soundscape composition as part of a film’s sound design,
then, adds layers of dimension to Kassabian’s models of identification.
For Kassabian, the status of music as either coming from an implied source
in the story world or from somewhere outside has to do with increases in
volume, appropriateness of kind, and a temporal continuity over cuts that
indicate a temporal ellipsis on the image track (43–44, 57, 77, 92). This model
works well when addressing an example like “La Guerre” during the opening
moments of Last Days: this is a well-known piece of music that is under-
stood as non-diegetic because its volume level remains stable as it starts in
conjunction with a black screen and the absence of any other sound, then
continues unabated as we cut to the shot of Blake walking through the forest,
complete with attendant location sound recording. Similarly, we assign it
the category of non-diegetic sound because it is not the kind of music we
would expect to hear in this forest environment. Yet, as discussed, it is also
an important marker of the limits of such clear distinction between the in-
side and the outside of the diegesis, a distinction troubled by the emergence
of “Doors of Perception” shortly thereafter. Using Kassabian’s model, “Doors
of Perception” has to occupy contradictory registers simultaneously, some
sounds fitting expectations for diegetic source while others do not; some
sounds functioning empathetically while others do not. This is one reason
that Kassabian limits her examples to particular kinds of music, easily recog-
nizable as such.
On the plus side, Kassabian’s distinction between assimilation and affilia-
tion offers a useful critique of the way that film sound theorists tend to situate
music by using the labels diegetic and non-diegetic, too simplistic when trying
to account for the way that film music is always implicated within the nar-
rative. Here Kassabian separates the uses to which a filmmaker puts a piece
of music, and the “uses” that an audience member brings to the music: “the
more identifiably within the narrative the music is produced, the less liable
it is to take its cues from the events of the narrative” (2001, 49). The basic
point here is that if sound is thought to be diegetic, it is less likely to act as
support for the narrative than if the music is understood to have been added
by the filmmaker for just such purposes. This is a problem that dates back to
the origins of song use in sound films. As Katherine Spring points out, in the
early sound era, conspicuous diegetic musical interludes in “non-musical”
films posed a “threat to narrative plausibility” if the song being performed in
the film spoke too closely to narrative details (2013, 95), an example of how
distinctions between diegetic and non-diegetic affected audience percep-
tion right from the beginning. For Michel Chion, this theoretical problem
stems from the conventions of practitioners. He uses the terms empathetic
and anempathetic sound to identify the idea that diegetic sound should be
perceived as somehow less contrived than non-diegetic sound: empathetic
sound “can directly express its participation in the feeling of the scene, by
taking on the scene’s rhythm, tone, and phrasing” (1994, 8); anempathetic
sound exhibits a “conspicuous indifference to the situation, by progressing
in a steady, undaunted, and ineluctable manner” (8). Chion notes that
anempathetic sound is much more likely to be diegetic, just as sounds in the
real world don’t usually follow the pacing or emotional tone of any given in-
dividual on the street. Meanwhile Robyn Stillwell adapts Claudia Gorbman’s
term metadiegetic to refer to music or sound that opens up a space “beyond
empathy” in which a character’s subjectivity becomes the locus of audience
identification, bridging the gap between audience and diegesis (2007, 196).
And here the functions of assimilation and affiliation can take on particular
importance when addressing the nebulous position of a piece like “Doors
of Perception” as soundtrack material. Rather than simply operating as em-
pathetic or anempathetic to Blake’s psychology, Westerkamp’s sounds bind
together the various registers on the continuum between the inside and out-
side of the diegesis, which, as Mario Falsetto suggests, can “force the viewer
to enter into a different kind of relationship with the material on the screen”
(2015, 101). This “different kind of relationship” aligns with the “different
psychology of cinema” that James Batcho attributes to the workings of “sen-
sory empathy,” in which creative approaches to audiovisual relationships in
film can prompt audience participation in the construction of their identi-
fication, evoking “a harmonious relation of feeling what resides within the
reality of the film’s fiction” (2022, 27).
Thinking of Westerkamp’s work in Last Days as reaching for alternative

understandings of cinematic empathy can help us undo the problems in-
herent to the terminological impasse of the diegetic/non-diegetic distinction,
while also correcting the problem of failing to attend to the spatial dimension
of film music when addressing compilation soundtrack material. The key
here is to add a new dimension to Kassabian’s affiliating mode that accounts
for processes of extratextual identification that don’t necessarily depend on
recognition of a pre-existing piece of music. I argue that the affiliating mode
of listening can be extended through situations like Westerkamp’s work in
Van Sant’s film by reading this mode through Katharine Norman’s concept
of reflective listening. Norman refers the kinds of soundscape composition
at issue here as real-world music: compositions that blend a documentary ap-
proach in their use of field recordings with the compositional sense found in
more traditional models for music. In her words, “real-world music leaves
a door ajar on the reality in which we are situated” while seeking a “journey
which takes us away from our preconceptions,” ultimately offering us a new
appreciation of reality as a result (1996, 19). Reflective listening is a mode
of identification in which understanding the source of a sound (i.e., a door,
bird or running water) is positioned in the context of the use of this sound
within the piece (i.e., the conflation of incompatible spaces in “Doors of
Perception”). This negotiation on the part of the listener creates a constant
interplay between reality and its creative manipulation, and is the substance
of the reflective space opened up by real-world music. The incorporation
of this kind of music into a cinematic context adds further levels of nego-
tiation which create an even greater potential for reflection. I contend that
Norman’s discussion of real-world music establishes a category for potential
compilation soundtrack material that requires new ways of thinking about
the relationship between film sound and musical composition, extending
Kassabian’s definition of the affiliating mode into new areas. Westerkamp’s
work asks us to apply this affiliating mode of musical experience to more
conventional compilation materials across the rest of the film.
Westerkamp’s work in Last Days invites us to understand empathy as a
structural process for designing audiovisual relationships on film, and to
read the processes of empathy as fundamentally ecological in nature. To
help illustrate, I turn briefly to Mikhail Bakhtin’s formulation of empathy.
In Toward a Philosophy of the Act (1993), Bakhtin refers to the impossibility
of a “pure empathy” in which one person’s subjectivity is subsumed by an-
other. He says: “After looking at ourselves through the eyes of another, we
always return—in life—into ourselves again” (17). This return into ourselves
is at the heart of what makes empathy possible, for we must be within our-
selves in order to experience something as ourselves. If we were to lose our-
selves completely into our experience of the other, then there would be no
room left for the empathetic act of feeling someone else through our own
experience—we would simply become the experience of the other. This
is one aspect of his concept of dialogic relationships where the life of a so-
ciety lies in the interactions between individuals, acknowledging that these
interactions are only possible because they exist between separate entities.5
Dialogism can be understood as another form of mediality, calling attention
to the way that two entities work together to enact an engagement, rather
than one mediating—and thus standing in the way of—the other. In turn, we
might refer to sound/image relationships themselves as an articulation of di-
alogic space, separate tracks with a limited capacity to extend into each other.
The acoustic profile of the soundtrack stands at varying degrees of extension
into the image track, and vice versa.
Bakhtin’s formulation adds nuance to the idea of reflective empathy, a si-
multaneous entering into and bouncing off of a surface that allows entrance
while marking a distinction between inside and out. Bakhtin’s formulation of
empathy allows us to move past questions of identification with characters on
the part of the audience, and any need we might have to pin down whether or
not a particular sound is diegetic or otherwise. Instead, we can address how
the film as a whole is structured around the very idea of empathy, and how
our affiliating identification with the sounds of doors can map onto the way in
which the filmmakers assimilate the functioning of these door sounds within
the film. In Last Days, Blake’s acoustic profile is charted in terms of both ar-
chitectural and emotional processes of empathy that emphasize this dual
quality of assimilation and distance, particularly through the framing device
of the door, a conceptual tool and architectural feature that allows spaces to
enter into each other while also demarcating their separation. The sounds of
doors in Westerkamp’s piece offer the affiliating quality of those sounds that
allows for the assimilation of the listener into differing environments. The
same is true in Van Sant’s film, here operating around doorways that separate
the listener’s understanding of the space of Blake’s house and his relationship
with his friends. The conflation of spaces made possible by an open door is
analogous to the empathetic relationships between people.
Last Days uses Westerkamp’s work as a guide around separate spaces
mediated by doorways, the setting in which the film explores the processes
of empathy, and lack thereof, between Blake and his entourage. Hearing
Westerkamp’s work in the film as an expression of the problem of empathy,
both human and architectural, trains us to engage with other instances of
music differently by way of attending to their deployment in space. I turn
now to two particular cases: a playback on the Velvet Underground’s “Venus
in Furs,” and Blake’s performance of “Death to Birth,” an original song written
for the film. While one is heavily loaded with affiliating potential and the
other necessarily assimilative, both function identically in how they illustrate
the spatial and emotional disconnection between Blake and his entourage
within the space of the house and the non-linearity of the film’s narrative.
The Song Loops
One of the film’s most prominent song-based set-pieces revolves around a

party scene in which Asia, Luke (Lukas Haas), Nicole (Nicole Vicius), and
Scott stumble intoxicated into the house one evening and cue up the Velvet
Underground’s “Venus in Furs” on the living room turntable. Westerkamp’s
piece is not present here, and there is no ambiguity about the sources of the
sounds we hear: the entire scene is presented in direct sound, the song par-
tially garbled by the spatial signature of the living room, and by Scott singing
along with the recorded voice of Lou Reed. In the middle of the song, Scott
gets up and walks out of the room into the kitchen through the open hallway
that separates the two, the camera panning to keep him in frame but stopping
short of following him through the doorway, thus remaining fixed within the
boundaries of the living room walls. We see Scott through the doorway from
the back talking to someone in the kitchen who we later learn is Blake. Then
Scott returns to his spot in the living room and resumes singing along. The
scene ends just after the lyric “on bended knee,” drawing an explicit parallel
between this song and the Boyz II Men track heard earlier.
Later in the film we find Blake making macaroni in the kitchen. “Venus in
Furs” begins to play offscreen, bearing the spatial signature one would ex-
pect from a song played on the stereo in another room, indicating that we
have looped back to a previous point in the narrative. This time we stay in the
kitchen with Blake until Scott enters through the doorway, and here we learn
that their conversation consisted of Scott’s attempt to borrow some cash for
apples (he’s hungry), a jet heater (he’s cold), and a ticket to Utah (he needs to
get out of town). When the conversation ends we cut to a shot from the living
room as Scott re-enters, the sound of the music cutting to a closer perspective
in conjunction, marked by an increase in volume and decrease in the ratio of
direct to reflected sound, thus emphasizing the distance between the living
room and the kitchen.
The simple treatment of the sound in these sequences works well to es-
tablish the spatial qualities of the living room and kitchen, as well as
emphasizing their separation from each other. Hearing “Venus in Furs” from
the kitchen is an example of how two spaces can meld while remaining dis-
tant, a function of an open doorway rather than a closed one. While highly
realist in convention, this is also a metaphorical use of sound to underscore
the communication between Blake and Scott: each has only partial access
to the other, an ultimately superficial relationship where Scott is positioned
essentially as a mooch and not a real friend with whom a greater degree of
spatial conflation—empathy—would be possible. Blake is essentially alone in
the house, even as he is surrounded by people he knows.
Aside from the spatial qualities of the song’s presentation, the choice of
“Venus in Furs” also involves complex affiliations both within the narrative
and by audience members listening to the film. The Velvet Underground, of
course, is iconic of a particular scene in the late ’60s wrapped up in the emer-
gence of new forms of rock music and social rebellion helmed by Lou Reed
whom Patti Smith, upon his death, referred to as her generation’s New York
poet, “championing its misfits as Whitman had championed its working class
and Lorca its persecuted” (2013). The Velvet Underground is also wrapped
up in the hype surrounding Andy Warhol’s factory where they performed
in their earliest days, notorious for being simultaneously subversive and su-
perficial, famously characteristic of Warhol’s own social maladjustments. As
such the band acted as a major influence on the grunge scene in the 90s for
which Kurt Cobain stood as reluctant representative. Scott’s identification
with the song by singing along indicates both an engagement with the music
while illustrating the impossibility of really being part of a scene long gone
and associated with the opposite side of the country.
The connection between Lou Reed singing the line “on bended knee” and
the Boyz II Men song of that name can be read through the idea of longing for
the past, of getting things “back the way they used to be.” But that’s an impos-
sibility, and Blake’s distance from this schizophonic engagement with the past
is telling: he is too young to have been part of the original Velvet scene, nor is
he a part of its attempted recapture by Scott and his posse. Hearing this song
as a record played within a listening space becomes loaded in emphasizing
its status as recorded object as opposed to the studio perfection of the Boyz
II Men track with its absence of materializing sound indices. Blake might
live on through the recordings he has made throughout his career, but the
interactions this engenders with his audience run the risk of being as empty
as the one we witness here between Scott and the Velvet Underground. They
also promise to be as loaded for generations to come.
Blake’s distance from the people around him is made most clear immedi-
ately following the first iteration of the “Venus in Furs” scene. Just after we
hear the lyric “on bended knee,” we cut to a shot of Blake seated at a drum
kit listening to Luke discuss a song he is working on. Luke says he’s having
trouble with the bridge section, and would like Blake’s creative input. Scott
enters and interrupts, whispering in Luke’s ear: “Why don’t you leave him
the fuck alone and come upstairs with me?” Luke complies, apologizing to
Blake for talking his ear off. We cut to a shot of Scott and Luke on the stair-
well as the former tries to convince the latter that Blake doesn’t really want
to have anything to do with them. As this conversation takes place, we hear
Blake begin to sing and play guitar offscreen, performing “Death to Birth,” a
song positioned as a Blake original in the story and, in fact, written by actor
Michael Pitt for the film. Like “Venus in Furs,” this song is presented in a re-
alist fashion that emphasizes the sound of the space that separates the music
room from the stairwell. We follow Luke and Scott as they go up to the bed-
room and remove their clothes, Luke stating that he doesn’t believe Scott’s
claim that Blake isn’t really their friend. So we find a desire on Luke’s part
to engage meaningfully with Blake, while Scott’s selfish sexual interests in
Luke stand in the way. All the while Blake is heard singing alone downstairs,
prevented from the one kind of communication he might actually enjoy: a
discussion about music to which he is clearly still committed.
The second iteration of “Death to Birth” comes just after the second itera-
tion of “Venus in Furs.” This time we enter the conversation between Luke and
Blake earlier, and learn that the song Luke wants help with was inspired by a
situation in which the best sex Luke ever had was with a woman that he didn’t
want to follow up with afterward, resulting in a cognitive dissonance that
bothers him to this day. In giving us this back-story, Luke is demonstrating
his own problems of communication in the world, problems that lead him
to try and express the feeling of isolation through song, ultimately seeking
to communicate meaningfully with Blake in the process. After Scott enters
and takes Luke out of the room, this time we stay with Blake as he picks up
his guitar and performs “Death to Birth” in its entirety, the refrain “It’s a long,
lonely journey from death to birth” emphasizing his position in the world
while foreshadowing his death. As such, this song takes on some of the char-
acteristics of a theme song, dating back to the transitional era when distinct
musical performance sequences in films outside the musical genre could take
on narrative justification when integrated well into the overall aesthetics and
structure of the film (Spring 2013, 97–99). Here, in its second iteration, the
onscreen performance of “Death to Birth” reveals depths of Blake’s character
that have been slowly layering up to this moment, largely through the prior
instances of musical integration discussed across this chapter. Presented in
direct sound with its attendant spatial signature, the song projects out into
the space where we know from the earlier iteration that Luke and Scott can
hear it as they go upstairs. Again, the treatment of sound here emphasizes the
fact that Blake is there, in the house, his music interacting concretely with
the space, while those who share the house with him choose not to interact
with him. It is significant that Scott would rather interact with a recording of
a band long gone than with Blake performing live right in front of him, and
this could be interpreted as one of the dangers of schizophonic experience
in Schafer’s original sense of the term: technologies of recording and trans-
mission disrupt our sense of engagement with the here-and-now, and Blake
suffers from this as a recording artist whose representation has become sep-
arate from his in-person identity. Here, however, Blake plays acoustically, on
a traditionally human scale that operates according to the spatiality of the
unamplified voice, and he is alone and ignored.
As Luke and Scott share a moment of intimacy, Blake is left alone down-
stairs where his singing grows from the kind of incoherent mumbling we’ve
heard throughout the film to a decidedly articulate and assured chorus with
the words, “It’s a long, lonely journey from death to birth,” briefly reaching
a volume that activates the house’s latent reverberant qualities. Like the
sound of Blake singing beside the campfire, the sound of his voice here is
grounded within the space of his immediate surroundings, speaking back to
him through spatial signature in a feedback process that Westerkamp would
describe as “speaking from inside the soundscape” (2001), an essential part
of how we can engage actively with our auditory environments. Such feed-
back is not present in his human relationships, and so it is essential that this
moment of clarity come when he is alone. The earlier presence of soundscape
composition in the film invites the audience to become active in assessing the
spatial qualities of what we hear, and to reflect upon the significance of small
nuances of spatial detail like the sound of Blake’s voice here. In another film
this final example might seem banal in its direct-sound approach to realism,
but here it is much more interesting when situated within the film’s overall
strategy of using soundscape composition to reflect on the spatial qualities of
music as a key factor in understanding its thematic content.
To render a bit of room reverberation significant with the weight of the
empathetic imbalance that the film explores is something that Westerkamp’s
soundscape composition can bring to an overall hearing of Last Days. Sound
theory has taught us that such a seemingly innocuous handling of audio-
visual relationships is deceptively realist. Even though presenting a long
static take recording a performance in real-time, this synchronization is
heavily mediated to present this very particular organization of space that
speaks powerfully to Blake’s position within it. As such this scene is no less
composed than the previous example of the song’s iteration. If the audience
walks away from the film with a heightened sensitivity to the potential social,
political, and industrial significance of something as simple as the sound of
a room’s reflective qualities, then the work of Hildegard Westerkamp in Last
Days is done, and what we learn from Van Sant’s appropriation of sound-
scape composition here can help us to hear all films differently when in the
mindset of acoustic ecology’s media practice.
Through a Closed Door
After the level of subtlety achieved in the scene of Blake’s final musical per-
formance, Westerkamp’s piece returns for the final walk up the driveway,
described at the beginning of this chapter. The audience is now sensitized to
the minutiae of the sound environment and the role of music in revealing its
spatial details, and Blake is seemingly sensitized also as he looks back after
the whistler blows, and the sounds of the doors from Westerkamp’s piece are
synchronized to his entry into the greenhouse, and his stare into the distance
timed with the sound of distant bells.
A short while later Blake is shown one last time, with one final use of a
door as mediating device. In the climactic shot—significantly the only super-
imposition found in the film—his transparent naked body is seen rising from
his corpse. The shot involves a complex mise-en-scène in which the camera
peers through the glass door at the front of the greenhouse, across Blake’s
dead body, with another French door at the back. In the foreground the
groundskeeper stands just outside the door, blocking a portion of the front
door’s window grid and leaving the shape of a cross in what remains. The grid
of the windowpanes on the back door provides the illusion of a ladder rising
from the floor to a point beyond the top of the frame. As Blake rises from his
corpse, he latches onto the ladder-like grid and proceeds to climb up it and
out of the frame, viewed across the shape of the cross in the foreground. The
religious symbolism is not subtle, but not at all forced given the film’s recur-
ring themes of spirituality discussed throughout my analysis here.
In this shot Blake is at once transcendent and grounded, a fact reflected
by his existence on two planes of the film’s surface being presented as one,
their separation distinguishable only due to his ghostly translucence while
rising from the body on the floor. Interestingly, the ghostliness of this trans-
lucence is offset by the reflective surface of the window through which we
are seeing him; his transparency could just as easily be the result of the play
of reflections off the glass as it could be an indicator of the supernatural. The
presence of a door once again acts as the marker of mediality, this time be-
tween the world of the living and the world of the dead, perhaps the world
of the diegesis and the world that lies outside. Blake’s translucence mediated
by the reflective door mirrors Westerkamp’s auditory equivalent: sounds that
merge with Van Sant’s environments, at once seeming a part of these worlds
while remaining quite distinct, and the attenuation her work brings to our
experience of reflections like the reverberation on Blake’s voice as he sings his
final song. It is as though Westerkamp’s sounds are housed within the spaces
we see on screen, while continually offering a ladder out of the frame to lands
that lie beyond.
This final shot of Blake thus presents a visual analogy for the way in which
Westerkamp’s work charts spaces of empathy in the film: two distinct planes
have been positioned in the same space forging a connection between two
worlds that seem simultaneously incongruous and at peace with one an-
other. Our experience of the journey to this moment is, among other things,
a soundwalk through shifting planes of attention guided by Hildegard
Westerkamp. Her soundscape compositions help us enact the changing
awareness necessary to enabling an engagement with the film, a process of
engagement that has been well respected by Van Sant and Shatz in their ap-
propriation of her work here. They create an audiovisual enactment of the
state of film reception they hope to engender, in which the audience is aware
of the mediated nature of the world they experience onscreen rather than
continually engaging in a state of suspended disbelief. This awareness is the
goal of reflective listening in soundscape composition, and here it becomes a
function of reflective empathy when we consider how soundscape composi-

tion functions within the ecology of Last Days.
The use of soundscape composition as part of the sound design of the film
creates the opportunity for the audience to negotiate the spaces between
their points of audiovisual synchronization and engage with the material in a
way that would be otherwise impossible. It is this opportunity that allows for
access to the deeper levels of each film’s engagement with its subject matter
without recourse to complex character psychology or overt cause/effect nar-
rative structure. In the end, the position of Westerkamp’s work in Last Days
is an enactment of the movement from the documentary impulse to sound-
scape composition within acoustic ecology itself, implying the argument that
the compositional process, from recording to mixing, can be a productive
mode of engagement with place, and that much of the goal of soundscape
composition is to sensitize listeners to the role of hearing space in under-
standing our environments. Westerkamp’s work, tied to the relevant theme
of human empathy and the formal strategy of spatial mediation by way of
the door, brings us to a point in the film where human scale as tradition-
ally defined can be understood as potentially equivalent to the scale of elec-
tronic reproduction. Blake ends up just as lonely in his acoustic performance
of “Death to Birth” within a small space as he does in his widely distributed
material. The lesson here is an inversion of Schafer’s original formulation of
human scale but also an acknowledgment of the shift in dynamics within
acoustic ecology to account for the positive role of technology in engagement
with place.
References
Bakhtin, Mikhail. 1981. The Dialogic Imagination. Edited by Michael Holquist. Translated
by Caryl Emerson and Michael Holquist. Austin: University of Texas Press.
Bakhtin, Mikhail. 1984. Problems of Dostoevsky’s Poetics. Edited and translated by Caryl
Emerson. Manchester: Manchester University Press.
Bakhtin, Mikhail. 1993. Toward a Philosophy of the Act. Edited by Michael Holquist and
Vadim Liapunov. Translated by Vadim Liapunov. Austin: Texas University Press.
Batcho, James. 2022. “Living Time: Re-Evaluating Cinematic Empathy through Li Zehou.”
Cinema: Journal of Philosophy and the Moving Image 14: 26–40.
Chang, Chris. 2005. “Guided by Voices.” Film Comment 41, no. 4 (July/August): 16.
Dalton, Stephen. 2005. “Last Days.” Sight and Sound 15, no. 9: 65–66.
Falsetto, Mario. 2015. Conversations with Gus Van Sant. London: Rowan and Littlefield.
Goldmark, Daniel, Lawrence Kramer, and Richard Leppert, eds. 2007. Beyond the
Soundtrack. Berkeley: University of California Press.
Jones, Kent. 2003. “Corridors of Powerlessness.” Film Comment 39, no. 5: 28.
Kassabian, Anahid. 2001. Hearing Film: Tracking Identifications in Contemporary
Hollywood Film Music. New York: Routledge.
Kulezic-Wilson, Danijela. 2008. “Sound Design is the New Score.” Music, Sound and the
Moving Image 2, no. 2 (Autumn): 127–131.
Norman, Katharine. 1996. “Real-World Music as Composed Listening.” Contemporary
Music Review 15, nos. 1–2: 1–27.
Simon, Sherry. 2004. “Accidental Voices: The Return of the Countertenor.” In Aural
Cultures, edited by Jim Drobnick, 111–119. Toronto: YYZ Press/Walter Phillips Gallery
Editions.
Smith, Patty. 2013. “Lou Reed.” New Yorker (November 11). https://www.newyorker.com/
magazine/2013/11/11/lou-reed
Spring, Katherine. 2013. Saying It with Songs: Popular Music and the Coming of Sound to
Hollywood Cinema. New York: Oxford University Press.
Stillwell, Robyn. 2007. “The Fantastical Gap Between Diegetic and Nondiegetic.” In
Beyond the Soundtrack, edited by Daniel Goldmark, Lawrence Kramer, and Richard
Leppert, 184–202. Berkeley: University of California Press.
Taubin, Amy. 2005. “Blurred Exit.” Sight and Sound 15, no. 9: 16–19.
Truax, Barry. 2008. “Soundscape Composition as Global Music.” Organised Sound 13,
no. 2: 103–109.
Westerkamp, Hildegard. 2001. “Speaking from Inside the Soundscape.” The Book of Music
and Nature, edited by David Rothenberg and Marta Ulvaeus, 143–152. Middletown,
CT: Wesleyan University Press.
Organised Sound 7, no. 1: 52–56.
4
The Schizophonographic Imagination
Visualizing the Myth of Sonic Fidelity in
David Lynch’s Twin Peaks
It is inevitable that a discussion of sound in Twin Peaks Season 3 (2017) begins

with the first new footage presented at the opening of Part 1, following a flash-
back to events that closed the original series in 1991.1 The first of any Twin
Peaks material to be presented in black and white, we find Special Agent Dale
Cooper of the FBI (Kyle MacLachlan) seated opposite the entity once known
as The Giant (Carel Struycken), to be rebranded as The Fireman later in this
season. The Fireman’s first words have become ground zero for academics
and fan communities engaging with the acoustic qualities of the Twin Peaks
universe: “Agent Cooper, listen to the sounds.”2 Cooper obeys, turning his
head toward what appears to be a gramophone, and we cut to a shot pushing
in on the horn as we hear some rather indescribable acoustic events. After
delivering a few more cryptic messages, which was The Giant’s function in
the original series as well, he finishes by telling Cooper, “You are far away.”
Cooper then vanishes from his seat with a distinctive visual effect, suddenly
appearing as though printed on paper and cut into several pieces, each of
them flashing on and off independently for a moment until they all disappear
into thin air, like a two-dimensional collage now digitally deconstructing.
The sonic counterpart to this deconstruction is a light electrical crackling
such as you can hear beneath high tension power lines, one of a wide variety
of electrical sound effects that permeate the series, largely constructed by
Lynch’s long-time sonic collaborator Dean Hurley. End Scene One.
The original series opened with a compelling mystery in 1990: the first
scene in the pilot episode reveals the body of a small-town high school senior
wrapped in plastic and washed up on the beach, leading to the question that
would hang off the lips of viewers for the next year: who killed Laura Palmer
(Sheryl Lee)? This is the question that brought Agent Cooper out to the back-
water berg of Twin Peaks in Washington State. Twenty-seven years later,
Season 3 might be criticized for the lack of an equivalent central question to
DOI: 10.1093/oso/9780190226077.003.0005
drive the narrative forward. But I’d like to suggest that here, in the opening
scene, we have more than meets the ear. The questions aren’t stated explicitly,
but of course we must know: what are these sounds that Cooper is asked to
listen to, and where did he go after hearing them?
Instinct dictates that listeners approach the first question causally: what
auditory event in the world might have been recorded to produce these
sounds? It wasn’t long before one Redditor attempted to ease this dissonance,
noticing that the repeating rhythm of the sounds matched up with the sound
of slot machine levers that Cooper pulls repeatedly in Part 3 upon his ar-
rival in Las Vegas (see Getman 2021), his first stop in the human world after
passing through various fantastical transitional stages following his disap-
pearance from The Fireman’s refuge. Even more compelling is a YouTube
video that compared the gramophone sounds to a brief clip of Laura Palmer
unlocking her diary in a deleted scene from the feature film prequel to the
original series, Twin Peaks: Fire Walk with Me (1992).3 As Getman concludes,
this kind of sleuthing is good fun and offers the fan community a deepened
capacity for engagement with the material in the digital age (42–43), while
opening interesting formal questions about why the show might draw
parallels between the sounds from The Fireman’s gramophone, the sounds
of the slot machine lever, and/or the sounds of the lock on Laura’s diary. It
is certainly provocative that the mystery of the gramophone sound is laid
parallel to the mysteries contained within Laura Palmer’s most personal doc-
ument, some missing pages of which are important clues within the narra-
tive arcs of both the original series and Season 3 (and also the substance of
some narrative discontinuity across these two iterations of the series). Even
if this connection was deliberate on the part of the filmmakers, I agree with
Getman that there are limits to the understanding that can be produced by
revealing direct causal connections between these instances of a particular
sound effect (43).
In this chapter, I frame the mystery of the gramophone sounds differ-
ently: why might it be important that the source of these sounds is never
revealed? The most significant detail here is that there is no phonographic
disc visible in the machine. Lynch has a long and storied history of visualizing
record players (along with a wide variety of other sound technologies) within
the diegetic spaces of his films. This is the very first time in that long history
that we don’t see a record on one of Lynch’s players. And along with this visual
absence there is a sonic absence, too: no evidence of materializing sound in-
dices (Chion 1994, 99) to indicate a record as the medium for these sounds.
The Schizophonographic Imagination 129
This is also something new for Lynch, who has long stressed the material
quality of the records that play in his films. We could thus shift the question
about the source of these sounds to a question about the medium through
which they are transmitted. In that spirit my principal question is this: why is
the record absent? To put it another way: why has the media vanished? To an-
swer this question I will assess the recurring role of phonography in the Twin
Peaks universe, allowing for us to chart a shift between Lynch’s pre-digital
and digital eras to better examine a particular problem of fidelity that has
dominated discussions in the critical reception to Season 3: the faithfulness
of the new Twin Peaks material to the old, and the relationship of all this ma-
terial to Lynch’s broader body of work in general.
I will demonstrate how the mystery of the missing record offers a parallel
line of inquiry to the original series’ question about the murder of Laura
Palmer, two threads that are explicitly related in Season 3. The question of the
missing media in The Fireman’s gramophone provides a way of assessing how
Season 3 reshapes the image of Laura Palmer as an increasingly embodied
figure, just as the series itself engages with the increasingly disembodied
characteristics of the cloud-based streaming dissemination of our present
moment. With this comes the need to engage in the debates around the ma-
teriality of digital technologies, and how they extend and/or break from the
non-digital media that dominated moving images and sound recording,
reproduction, and transmission for one hundred years. In turn, questions
of the shifting status of medium-specific materiality in Lynch’s work open
up pathways to rethinking the issue of sonic fidelity, challenged in various
ways in the previous chapters of this book, and central to understanding
how mediality functions through the portrayal of sound technologies across
Lynch’s body of work. To what extent does the third season of Twin Peaks
illustrate the conundrums of media convergence? For Henry Jenkins, fo-
cusing on the black boxes that deliver content is a fallacy; content itself is
media, and what is important is how it flows through its networks, not the
apparatuses that make the flow possible (2006). Jenkins’ black box fallacy is
the antithesis of the medium-specificity that once dominated discussions of
media and their effects, and certainly works against any preciousness that we
vinyl enthusiasts hold for our preferred playback format. Does The Fireman’s
gramophone comment on the new status of Twin Peaks as digitally produced
streaming content, breaking free from its roots in broadcast television and
theatrical film? What might this freedom tell us about the role of one specific
technology, the phonograph, in Lynch’s work?
The answers to these questions lie in the changing status of the figure of
Laura Palmer herself. In the original series, Laura was all media. Found
dead in the opening scene of the pilot, she appeared throughout the show
in her iconic photographic portrait as homecoming queen, on audiocas-
sette tapes she recorded for her psychiatrist, on a videocassette of a picnic
with friends, and in the crime scene photograph of her lifeless visage
enshrouded by plastic. In the opening credit sequence to Fire Walk with Me
a TV set is smashed to pieces, which many critics read as a clear statement
that the film will break with expectations and “explode past the limits of the
series” (Nochimson 1997, 192). The prequel film certainly did break from
expectations, presenting a living Laura Palmer at the center of the narrative
as we watched her last seven days play out, displaying a stark reality that was
continually obfuscated in the series: that she was repeatedly raped by her
father for years before he finally killed her. And so the film “revealed both
the physical and spiritual trauma of childhood sexual abuse” with a “re-
alism that continues to resonate with many, including survivors” (Stallings
2020, 8). The smashed TV could also be read as a gesture to set Laura free
of her containment within specific media objects and allow her to live as
a fully embodied human being, a gesture that continues into Season 3 by
removing the determination of the original narrative arc and setting Laura
on an entirely new path. At the end of Season 3, Agent Cooper is inserted
into a scene from Fire Walk with Me to intervene into its narrative certainty,
preventing Laura from engaging in the activities that led to her death on
the night of February 23, 1989. Shortly after, we discover that a woman
named Carrie Page, who looks almost exactly like Laura Palmer, has been
living in Odessa, Texas. When Cooper finds her there he believes she is
Laura and attempts to bring her home to Twin Peaks. This trajectory for
Laura Palmer’s corporealization is the medial move that reveals the myth
of vanishing mediation at the heart of the discourse of fidelity. As I will
demonstrate, in the original series the materiality of the record player at
the Palmer residence was explicitly linked with the activities of her mur-
derer. In Season 3, the missing disc in The Fireman’s gramophone replaces
the missing person premise of the original series, just as Laura Palmer
herself disappears from the story and re-materializes as Carrie Page. The
vanishing of the media thus underscores the return of Laura as Carrie,
challenging the very status of the original as source for the series’ return. As
such, Season 3 mobilizes the disembodied sound of The Fireman’s gramo-
phone to thematize the problems inherent in tracking its origin.
To ground my discussion of how Twin Peaks Season 3 mobilizes questions

about the materiality of the digital realm through the figure of Laura Palmer,
I will harness the troubling implications of R. Murray Schafer’s notion of
schizophonia, discussed at length across this book, in the form of a mod-
ification: schizophonographics, a term that I have defined as “evocations of
the schizophonic condition through the graphic representation of materials
and/or processes pertaining to phonography” (2012). Schizophonographics
call attention to the relationships between the “split” between sound and
source, the potential for psychological disturbance that guided Schafer’s
original use of the term, and how films mobilize the onscreen presence of
phonographic technology. For Isabella van Elferen, the cognitive disso-
nance created by “the obfuscation of causal relationships between source,
sound, and signification,” is a key marker of Lynch’s sonic style, which she
positions as explicitly schizophonic (2012, 180). In this spirit I situate the
missing phonographic disc in The Fireman’s gramophone within Lynch’s his-
tory of schizophonographics, discuss how this history engages with anxieties
around the digital turn in the technologies of moving images and sound,
and demonstrate how rewriting Laura Palmer’s canonical history provides
a grounded solution to the problems embodied by the term schizophonia
itself. I connect anxieties around the digital shift to core anxieties around the
divide between sound and image at the heart of the cinema, best embodied
by Michel Chion’s theorization of the acousmêtre. I will demonstrate how
the potential visualization of this classically invisible character type, who
draws its supernatural power from the disembodied voice, is central to Laura
Palmer’s own embodiment as answer to the question of the missing media in
The Fireman’s phonograph. Laura’s shifting corporeality suggests the pres-
ence defined by the absence of the missing disc, offering a new perspective
on the role of phonographic media across Twin Peaks and Lynch’s work more
broadly.
The acoustic profile under consideration here, then, is the very range
of extension from the original series, subsequent film, and return of Twin
Peaks charted by the vanishing media of The Fireman’s gramophone. Season
3 renders earlier Twin Peaks material malleable and unreliable, questioning
its status as original to challenge the thesis that posits the problem of fidelity
as the relationship between source and copy. Season 3 narrativizes this chal-
lenge to the source/copy dichotomy by changing Laura Palmer’s path, and
this change in path is rooted in the anxieties that have surrounded sound
media across all its material iterations.
Phonographic Bodies
The void opened up by The Fireman’s missing phonographic disc is filled

by the renewed embodiment of Laura Palmer at the end of the series. The
connection between the two is made explicit in Part 17, when the gramo-
phone sounds return for the first time since Part 1, a good sixteen hours
into the running time for Season 3. In a surprising turn of events, Cooper
materializes inside a scene from Fire Walk with Me with the same col-
lage flickering and electrical crackling effects with which he disappeared
from The Fireman’s place in Part 1. Also connecting the opening scene of
Season 3 and this return to the 1992 film is the fact that the Fire Walk with
Me footage is rendered in black and white instead of the original color,
establishing a continuum between The Fireman’s refuge and the narrative
of the original series while hinting that the past is not what it once was.
Here we catch up with Laura as she sneaks out of the house to go on a mo-
torcycle ride with her boyfriend James (James Marshall), whom she will
abandon for another group of friends who will set the conditions for her
murder later that night. Cooper watches from the woods across the street
as Laura and James stop on the side of the road to talk in lines familiar to
fans. The conversation draws to a close as she tells James that, “your Laura
disappeared; it’s just me now,” a repurposing of original dialogue to suggest
her coming shift in identity to Carrie Page. Soon after, James speeds off
into the night as Laura disappears into the woods. Cooper finds her there,
and Laura recognizes him from a dream (portrayed earlier in Fire Walk
with Me and the original series). Cooper takes her hand and tells her he
is going to bring her home, thereby shifting the direction of her story. The
change in plan is underscored by a shot of her friends on the other side of
the woods, waiting for her to join them. Now she never will, as we cut to a
familiar shot from the pilot episode with her body washed up on the shore,
wrapped in plastic, which now disappears in the same collage fizzle that
brought Cooper into the scene. But Cooper’s plan is also thwarted. As they
walk through the woods, all environmental sound disappears and the dis-
tinctive sounds of The Fireman’s gramophone re-emerge. Cooper turns to
look behind him, and Laura is gone. The gramophone sounds, still without
concrete source of transmission, act as the score for this disappearance,
now doubling the layers of missing bodies: no record in the player, no dead
body on the shore, and no Laura Palmer in Twin Peaks at all. The Fireman’s
gramophone sounds, free of any visible media, now evoke Laura’s own
disappearance, who began the series as a media object herself, then became
flesh and blood, and is now gone altogether.
The de-emphasis on phonographic corporeality, here, is something of a
change for Lynch, whose record players have long tied their specific mate-
rial qualities to the portals that open up for their listeners. Although Lynch
demonstrates a fascination for sound technologies of all kinds, record players
have a special place within his oeuvre. While Danijela Kulezic-Wilson notes
the myriad instances in which music itself, regardless of source, serves as the
conduit across Lynch’s frequent spatiotemporal slippages (2015, 110), I will
emphasize the ways in which Lynch focuses on the medium rather than its
content as a frequent conduit for rendering multiple realities. In Eraserhead
(1977), for example, Henry’s (Jack Nance) turntable— a model already
decades old for the 1970s, one factor in the indeterminate time period in
which the film takes place—serves on the surface as a tool through which
he can enjoy his Fats Waller music after a long day at the printing factory.
But the film’s slippage between worlds comes at the record’s end, when the
crackling loop of the end-groove takes over, joining the mechanical chorus
of repeating industrial sounds in Henry’s apartment to which Henry “cannot
help but attune himself ” (Batcho 2018, 96). It is in this sonic environment
that he gazes into the radiator where he finds a stage, not unlike that in the
Roadhouse bar of Twin Peaks, where a singer (Laurel Near) assures him that,
“In heaven, everything is fine” (see Janisse 2017). Ultimately the vinyl’s re-
peating end-groove forms one thread of an acoustic fabric in which Henry
finally gives in to the maddening taunts of his strange infant child’s cackling
in the dark. He cuts the bandages in which it is swaddled, allowing its organs
to splay across the room as the electricity goes wild, setting Henry free to join
the Lady in the Radiator in a blast of triumphant light sucked straight out of
the wiring of his building, which promptly goes dark. From Lynch’s very first
feature film, then, violence to the body is scored by the material sounds of
phonography and its electrical sustenance, allowing passage to an alternate
plane of existence.
In later years, amidst the digital turn, Lynch’s phonograph turntables ex-
tend their original function but are presented in a different way. Since the
arrival of CDs and then web streaming there has been a general tendency in
American films to differentiate vinyl playback as an “other” to the new digital
norms, with this “otherness” defined by its sonic particularities (Garwood
2016, 247–248) and its visuality (Anderson 2008). This new prominence
given to medium-specific materiality has shifted the record player to the
status of a fetish object for nostalgia, a highly visible and audible format in
a time when digital musical media take up less visual space and whose sonic
particularities are not so easily identifiable. This use of record players in the
digital age can be likened to a form of “remediation” as “the formal logic by
which new media refashion prior media forms” (Bolter and Grusin 1999,
273). Lynch’s early turntables were not set in a period context, though Henry
in Eraserhead and (as we’ll soon see, the Palmers in Twin Peaks) owned
units that were much older than the settings of the films. Record players
disappeared from Lynch’s films after the original Twin Peaks series until he
entered his own digital filmmaking phase with Inland Empire (2006), the
first of his feature films to be shot on a format other than film. Then they be-
came regular again, and in each successive turntable appearance, from Lady
Blue Shanghai (2010) to the latest iteration of Twin Peaks, Lynch’s turntables
have been connected to a more specific period context. This is new for Lynch,
whose previous films regularly evoked styles from decades past, an aesthetic
often regarded as postmodern simulacrum (Jameson 1991, 294–297), but
were never explicitly framed as period pieces (with 1980’s The Elephant Man
being the notable exception). In Lynch’s later films, record players evoke
time periods more explicitly. In Lady Blue Shanghai, for example, Marion
Cotillard’s unnamed character arrives at her present-day Shanghai hotel
room to find a vintage 78rpm turntable inexplicably blasting music from the
1920s. She rips the needle out of its groove, an action that opens up a vision
of the past where she experiences the memory of a lost lover from before
her time.
Inland Empire amplifies Lynch’s treatment of spatiotemporal slippage con-
siderably. The film opens with a close-up of a gramophone needle dragging
across a spinning disc. Lit with stroboscopic effects, this is Lynch’s most
elaborate visual treatment of a turntable to date, recalling the pyrotechnic
dance of spinning records in Germaine Dulac’s gorgeous Disque 957 (1928).
Through the crackle a voice emerges to announce “the longest running radio
play in history,” which serves as set-up for a scene introducing us to a “lost
girl” (Karolina Gruszka) trapped in cycles of physical violence within a
Polish prostitution enterprise. Later, when actress Nikki Grace (Laura Dern)
gets lost in her own Hollywood film set, she exits into the Poland of an earlier
time. The transition is mediated by a return of the gramophone shots seen at
the film’s opening, now with Nikki’s face superimposed over the black shellac
disc as she listens to the “lost girl” explain the secret to seeing through the
void. “You need to burn a hole through the silk with the cigarette, and look
through the hole,” she says, just as the cigarette and the gramophone needle
are superimposed on the image track in a graphic match. Here the con-
nection between the turntable technology and the portal to another world
is made visually specific in an evocation of what Murray Leeder calls “co-
registration, the depiction of different spatialities and temporalities simul-
taneously, seemingly collapsed onto a single plane” through the cinematic
process of superimposition (2017, 97). Co-registration was a common visual
strategy in early cinema to indicate the overlap of spirit worlds with everyday
reality, drawing on the role of spirit photography and X-ray technology in
the popular imagination of the late nineteenth century. Lynch’s representa-
tion of phonography adds a sonic dimension by using phonographic surface
noise as a co-registrant that signifies the emerging presence of another di-
mension, evoking spiritualist beliefs about the nature of communication that
“straddled the line between physical transmissions . . . and spiritual ones”
(Peters 199, 100).
The relationship between old-world Europe and the violence inherent
in its colonization of North America is manifested through Nikki’s experi-
ence of the incongruity of living across different histories, a spatiotemporal
loop that leads to her own cycles of violent death and shining rebirth. As
Liz Greene points out, this narrative simultaneity of differing periods and
settings is matched by a conflation of old-school technological presence like
the gramophone and the new aesthetic qualities of Lynch’s experimenta-
tion with digital image capture (2012, 102). Caught between worlds, both
narrative and aesthetic, Nikki Grace suffers no small psychological distress,
and ultimately ends up being stabbed by the jilted wife of her Hollywood
scene-partner and bleeding out on the street among the street dwellers of
Hollywood boulevard. Nikki serves as yet another of Lynch’s characters to
suffer bodily transgression connected directly to a slippage between spaces
mediated by phonograph technology. Here Lynch ties this violence directly
to a critique—both in content and production context—of the Hollywood
system through which he struggled for so long and from which Inland
Empire marked his triumphant escape—for all time, we thought, until the
unlikely return of Twin Peaks eleven years later.
With the distinction between Lynch’s pre-digital and digital eras in mind,
it is instructive to see how Twin Peaks has passed through both and shifted its
own relationship to the presentation of phonography on screen. As Kathryn
Kalinak put it following the original series, “is there another fictional town on
television with as many record players as this one?” (1995, 86). In the time of
the original series, the CD era was yet very new, and the lingering predomi-
nance of vinyl as the main mode of home music listening is not clearly distin-
guished as an “other” to new digital norms. Instead, it functions very much
like Henry’s turntable in Eraserhead, a film made well before the dawn of the
digital music era: a medium whose material particularities are exploited in
their own right, as mysterious in the present moment of those narratives as
they were at the time of their invention around the turn of the century. It is
through phonography that on-the-air sound opens up to the parallel worlds
that intersect with the town of Twin Peaks, perhaps most explicitly referenced
in Episode 5 of the original series. Here Cooper finds the cabin in the woods
where Laura Palmer spent time on the night of her death, and inside a record
player with an automatic repeat function has apparently been playing Julee
Cruise’s “Into the Night” on a continuous loop ever since. Cooper lifts the
needle up and repeats a line that the Little Man from Another Place (Michael
J. Anderson) told him in a dream from Episode 2, “And there is always music
in the air.” With this connection of Cooper’s dream space with the reality of
the town through the machinations of phonography, the series displays the
mediality at the heart of its mystery. I will now elaborate on how this phono-
graphic mediality plays out most substantially on the Palmers’ turntable in
Episodes 2 and 14.
In Episode 2, Leland Palmer (Ray Wise) finds himself desperate for a dance
partner. Since the death of his daughter Laura he has become obsessed with
the idea of dancing and frequently puts on old records to get him moving.
Here he plays the Glenn Miller Orchestra’s “Pennsylvania 6-5000” and begins
dancing as though with a ghost. Looking around for something to reach out
to, he picks up Laura’s homecoming queen portrait from an end table, holds
it out in front of him, and begins to spin around in circles. Lynch intercuts
point-of-view shots wherein the room appears to spin around as though
the viewer is holding Laura’s picture while dancing. His wife, Sarah Palmer
(Grace Zabriskie), then rushes into the room and wrestles with Leland over
the photo, causing the glass frame to break. Sarah runs over to the turntable
and violently whacks the needle off the record, an action accompanied by the
expected scratching sound. Leland, having cut his hand on the broken glass,
now caresses the photo directly, smearing Laura’s image with his own blood
in the process.
Several key issues are raised by this sequence. Firstly, it is significant that
Leland’s need for dance is accompanied by his desire for music on vinyl. The
use of the body as a kind of mediation between the production and reception
of music can be seen as a function of the physical nature of music as the prop-
agation of soundwaves through space. Just as sound moves through the air,
so too do bodies in the act of perceiving it. Dancing is a way of becoming
the music that suggests a kinship between musical and human corporeality.
Secondly, the lyrics on the record refer to the act of making contact between
human beings through telecommunications technology. Here the turntable
joins with the telephone as the technological presences involved in Leland’s
struggle to fill the hole left in his life by the absence of another human being.
For Alistair Mactaggart, this absence is made uncannily present through the
“strangeness of overproximity” in the close-up on the surface of the record
that begins this scene (2010, 129). This close-up also reveals that the record
player itself is not of the same vintage as the floor-standing cabinet that
houses it; it is a modern turntable housed in a much older casing, an inter-
esting confluence of differing eras of music reproduction in the pre-digital
age (a point to which I will return at the end of this chapter). Thirdly, Leland’s
dancing needs are a factor of his having lost someone close to him, causing
him to seek a partner. His engagement with Laura’s photograph emphasizes
her status as a media object along with the record on the turntable. Lastly,
Lynch emphasizes Leland’s emotional desperation by filming his dancing
movements in ways that mimic the movements of the technology playing
the music. It is as though Leland wants to become the technology that fuels
his nostalgia in order to travel back to a happier time, bridging the gap be-
tween past and present through human/machine interaction. In short, he
wants these media to vanish and leave the originals in their place. Here the
joining of sound and image through technologies of representation is fur-
ther emphasized by the violence of the scratching sound, as Sarah drags the
needle off the disc, in conjunction with Leland’s hand being cut by the broken
glass. The materiality of sound, image, and human flesh intersect with psy-
chological distress here in a lavish display of schizophonographic mediality.
The second example, this one from Episode 14, also involves the turntable
in the Palmer living room, and again concerns the act of Leland dancing to a
vinyl record with a facsimile of his daughter: Maddy Ferguson (also played
by Sheryl Lee), the cousin and spitting image of the deceased Laura. Having
once been very close with the family, Maddy visits the Palmers in their time
of grief. A foreshadowing scene finds Maddy sitting on the couch between
the Palmers whereupon she tells them that she’ll be driving back home the
next day. Louis Armstrong is heard singing “What a Wonderful World,” car-
rying with it the distinctive sound of aging vinyl. The scene is comprised of
one long take that begins with a close-up of a side table with photos of Laura
and the family, then pans rightward to reveal the couch in the background
just as Maddy sits down between the Palmers. As they converse, the camera
tracks to the right, passing behind the floor-standing turntable cabinet and
coming to rest with the spinning record it plays squarely in the foreground
beyond which lies the centrally composed trio on the couch. Here the stage
is set for Maddy’s murder at the end of the episode, occurring in the same
room, with an ambient soundtrack provided by the sound a record on that
turntable looping in the end-groove.
The presence of the turntable thus provides the center around which
the murder takes place. Materiality is again a primary concern here, along
with the idea of repetition as a function of mechanical looping. Just prior to
the murder scene, we find Agent Cooper witnessing the appearance of The
Giant on stage at the Roadhouse bar; he advises the detective that, “it is hap-
pening again,” followed by a dissolve that merges The Giant and the Palmer
turntable as we transition from the Roadhouse bar to the Palmer residence
(prefiguring the relationship between The Fireman and the gramophone in
Season 3). Beginning with The Giant’s warning setting up the idea of repeti-
tion, followed by the manifestation of such repetition through the turntable’s
looping action, the murder sequence unfolds in a formal pattern of alter-
nation through which the theme of repetition runs. The idea that Laura
Palmer’s murderer is still on the loose, and that the act of murder will be
repeated, has set up the anticipation of the return of Killer Bob (Frank Silva),
another denizen of worlds beyond introduced by way of Cooper’s dream in
Episode 2. Bob’s reappearance in Episode 14 begins with his face looking
back at Leland as the latter’s reflection in a hallway mirror, revealing for the
first time that Leland himself is the killer while playing host to the possessing
spirit. The reflection is itself an embodiment of repetition—the repetition of
light rays as they bounce off the reflective surface, the visual equivalent of
an echo. Maddy then enters the room and sees Bob standing in the hallway.
Maddy is also a kind of reflection in so far as she is nearly identical to Laura
Palmer. So, one reflection looks at another, and the violence begins.
During the attack sequence, the fact that Bob and Leland both inhabit the
same flesh is suggested through a system of technical devices resulting in
alternate appearances of the two. Once Maddy has been partially subdued,
Leland begins to dance with her in a circular motion echoing his dance with
Laura’s picture in Episode 2. During the dance, Lynch uses quick dissolves
to make Bob appear in Leland’s place. When Bob is dancing with Maddy,
the film runs in slow-motion with complementing slow-motion sound, and

the lighting changes to a bright spotlight on the subjects contrasted against a
darkening of the rest of the room. When Leland pops back into the picture,
the regular speed is resumed, as is the more normative lighting style. This
alternation between Bob and Leland happens several times before Maddy is
finally killed.
One of the most important things to note about this scene is that, while
most of the soundtrack slows down to complement the slow-motion imagery
when Bob is present, the sound of the looping record remains unchanged
throughout. The material texture of vinyl, with its powers of evoking the
past, acts as a kind of timeless grounding to the scene unaffected by the
other scene’s other formal fluctuations in the flow of time. The sound of the
looping record is like a conduit between worlds, charting an acoustic profile
that extends between the territory of Leland’s world and that of Bob. It also
suggests the early days of phonography, laden with the anxiety of separating
the senses from each other, and the body, that lay at the heart of cinema (see
Gunning 2001). Bob might be a manifestation of the anxiety of being caught
between separated worlds; in this scene he exerts his most powerful efforts
yet to force his way into the material world through the medium of Leland
Palmer.
The fact that it is the sound of vinyl that Lynch uses to “score” this scene
alludes to a time when spiritualism was alive and well, with many people
believing that the spirit world could be contacted by way of sound repro-
duction technology (see Sconce 2000). The idea of a medium, or material,
through which such contact takes place is crucial here. Lynch not only
foregrounds the materiality of the phonograph, but also of cinema through
his co-registrations of image and sound speeds along with the lighting styles.
Lynch puts the intersection between worlds on material display as an ex-
tended loop of the repeating vinyl texture opening up a new space where
Leland and Bob exist simultaneously. The brief moments of superimposi-
tion that formally indicate the coexistence of Bob and Leland visualize the
layering of worlds. The cinematic expression of this flow between worlds is
a function of Lynch’s exploration of cinema’s materiality, a materiality ulti-
mately equated with that of the human body through the scene’s startling
violence. The theme of mediumship here, in Bob’s possession of Leland, is
another expression of the mediality at the heart of Twin Peaks.
Bodily transgression through the material qualities of phonography are
on display once again in Part 8 of the third season of Twin Peaks. Part 8 is
now legendary for its dramatic break from the style of the rest of the series,
presented mostly in black and white, going back in time to the first nuclear
test at White Sands, New Mexico, and offering up a series of highly exper-
imental sequences exploring the material qualities of a nuclear explosion
and the role of The Fireman in attenuating the effects of this new energy
unleashed upon the world. Within the cloud of the nuclear blast, we witness
what appears to be the birth of Killer Bob in a bubble belched forth from an
unidentified entity. This is paralleled later by the appearance of Laura in a dif-
ferent bubble, this one summoned by The Fireman and handled by Señorita
Dido (Joy Nash), who is shown in The Fireman’s refuge sitting next to the
very gramophone we saw in the series’ opening moments. We hear a Lynch/
Hurley collaboration entitled “Slow 30s Room,” a composition that is rife
with the kind of surface noise expected from a 1930s 78 rpm disc, patterned
on a looping structure that recalls the sound of a record skipping. And yet,
once again, there is no disc visible in the gramophone itself. This scene stands
as the center point to the series as a whole, as an alarm goes off and The
Fireman enters to address the concern through a series of ambiguous actions
that result in the emergence and dispersal of the Laura orb. There is a clue
here about the emergence of two bodies—Bob and Laura—that will engage
in violent confrontation over the right to inhabit a single corporeal space.
“He says he wants to be me or he’ll kill me,” Laura tells a confidant in Fire
Walk with Me about her encounters with Bob. In their spherical forms here
they are presented as material media on their way to corporealization, where
one will try to become the other. The missing media in The Fireman’s gramo-
phone now suggests his role as producer, sending media objects out into the
world via the film screen upon which he keeps the world under surveillance.
Later in Part 8 we do catch a glimpse of the only phonographic disc to ap-
pear in Season 3. The period jumps to 1956, and we arrive at the KPJK radio
station where the DJ is spinning “My Prayer” by the Platters. The station is
infiltrated by the Woodsman (Robert Broski), descended through the air
from parts unknown. His arrival is marked by a particular sound of electrical
interference (another of sound designer Dean Hurley’s many contributions
to the soundtrack, which the closed captioning on the Crave TV stream la-
beled as “brooding atmospheric music” with “ominous scratching noise”).
The “scratching noise” is what sets this treatment of electrical sound apart
from the myriad others across the series, later echoed by the sound of crack-
ling vinyl when the Woodsman commandeers the DJ booth, sending the
needle skidding across the spinning record—recalling Sarah Palmer’s gesture
in Episode 2 of the original series—that blends with radio static as we watch

confused listeners across town reacting to the interruption of the musical
broadcast. After penetrating the DJ’s skull with his bare hands, another it-
eration of corporeal violence underscored by phonographic materiality, the
Woodsman then takes to the airwaves with a poetic recitation: “This is the
water, and this is the well. Drink full and descend. The horse is the white of
the eyes, and dark within.” Across several repetitions of this verse we watch
as various townspeople drop unconscious in their tracks at the sound of the
Woodsman’s voice on their radios. One of these is a teenage girl (Tikaeni
Faircrest) who, in her forced slumber, opens her mouth to become host to a
winged reptilian creature that hatched from an egg in the desert, apparently
another spawn (along with Bob) of the monstrous figure during the fallout
of the Trinity nuclear blast. This is a violation of her body, a trespass upon
corporeal grounds, perfectly in keeping with the themes of rape, incest, and
murder that lay at the core of the Twin Peaks mythology. And the electrical
interference cue that marked the Woodsman’s appearance returns over an
image of the girl lying asleep, now possessed, as the end credits roll.
There seems little that can be done about the repetitive insistence of violence
associated with Bob, for which the turntable’s materiality—the interruption
of recorded musical content to reveal the sound of the medium itself—acts as
both metaphor and gateway. What is most remarkable in these instances of
turntable presence in Twin Peaks is how the otherworldly quality of the me-
dium is tied specifically to its materiality. This is an intriguing inversion of hi-fi
culture’s emphasis on the notion of sonic transparency that invites listeners to
transcend the space of their living rooms into the performance venues in which
the recordings were made. For Lynch, it is the revelation of sound technology’s
material qualities—those that hi-fi culture attempts to banish from conscious-
ness, the surface noise on vinyl and electrical buzzing from its amplification—
that allows passage between worlds, folding spaces onto each other like the
Guild Navigators in Dune (1984). For Lynch, it is when the medium reveals
itself that the barrier between spaces becomes transparent, at least until the
media vanishes in the opening to Twin Peaks Season 3.
Digital Anxieties
The missing media object in The Fireman’s gramophone seems tailor-made

as a visualization of the myth of vanishing mediation upon which cultures of
fidelity rest. As discussed throughout this book, the discourse of fidelity in

hi-fi stereo culture imagines a transparent technology that leaves no trace of
itself in its presentation of content, so that playing a recording of a symphony
might make the listener feel as though they are right there in the symphony
hall where it was recorded. For R. Murray Schafer, the potential confusion
over live and recorded sound is a problem, but it’s largely an imaginary one
invented by the hi-fi industry to sell product. It depends upon what Jonathan
Sterne calls “audile technique,” ear training that allows listeners to “differ-
entiate between sounds ‘of ’ and sounds ‘by’ the network, casting the former
as ‘exterior’ and the latter as ‘interior’ to the process of reproduction” (2003,
283). The trick, then, is to design machines that can minimize the “exterior”
effects and maximize the signal to noise ratio (the “hi” in the “fi”). But these
exterior effects are always present. As Hillel Schwartz puts it, “Noise is what
makes perfect repeatability humanly impossible” (2011, 25). And when you
add Rick Altman’s argument that there can be no real “original” sound to
repeat in the first place, given the role of positionality in receiving any given
sound event (1992), the whole foundation for fidelity as perfect equation of
source and copy simply crumbles. Schafer deliberately invoked the language
of mid-century hi-fi culture to frame his approach to listening to the world,
and suggested that the proliferation of electroacoustic sound transmission
in modern environments came with the potential for sound technology to
confuse the listener about where—and when—we are. Yet Schafer doesn’t ad-
dress the fact that such confusion posits a naïve listener, one lacking in audile
technique, unable to hear the technology behind the transmission. In short,
his rhetoric buys into the myth of transparency in audio playback designed
as a marketing tool by the recording industry. Lynch, on the other hand,
seems to work in opposition: it is precisely the material qualities of media-
tion that invite otherworldly transcendence. It is in hearing the surface noise
of the record that Nikki Grace learns to see through the portal to the other
side. And Henry’s turntable must yield to the surface noise of the disc before
he slips into the radiator. Lynch seems bent on training his listeners in the art
of audile technique so as to better hear the sounds of the network and under-
stand their role in the paths his characters chart.
The primacy that Lynch accords phonographic materiality aligns with
what Jay David Bolter and Richard Grusin term hypermediacy, an artistic
style that foregrounds the medium of the work in question, the opposite
of transparent immediacy in which the artist attempts to erase all traces of
the medium (1999, 272–273). Here we can also distinguish between the
transparency that once governed classical approaches to film scoring, the

“unheard melodies” that Claudia Gorbman identifies in the use of film music
as nearly subliminal underscore (1987), and a new “cinema of the senses”
marked by a stylistic excess that “wants to be heard” (Kulezic-Wilson 2021,
368). For Lynch’s phonography, however, the sensual score lies in the textures
of the musical medium rather than its recorded content. Understanding the
significance of what we might call Lynch’s sensual hypermediacy, particularly
as it transitions from the pre-digital to digital domains, requires a deeper in-
vestigation into the logics of transparency itself.
In sound, the idea of transparency works best as a marketing meta-
phor when referencing acoustic performances bound by the spatiality of
the unamplified instrument and voice, like Blake’s performance of “From
Death to Birth” in Last Days discussed in the previous chapter. The minute
any studio manipulation is brought in, the very foundation of transparency
ceases to make sense: there can only be transparency to an original perfor-
mance if there is an original performance to begin with, so anything short of
a live-to-tape capture fails to satisfy the very conditions required for the idea
of an original sound event. Transparent immediacy can be attempted as an
artistic style, but in the reality of material sound reproduction the idea is dif-
ficult to comprehend: equipment of mediation is a necessary link in the chain
between performance and listener, since the listener is listening to the per-
formance through that equipment. Yet it is this equipment that the listener
hopes will disappear, leaving only the performance in its wake. As is par-
ticularly the case with vinyl fetishists, it is precisely the indexical link made
possible by the material processes of phonography that are said to allow
these material processes to render themselves inaudible. Transcendence of
the equipment, in other words, is dependent upon its material embodiment.
Apparent absence of the equipment is made possible by its presence, and the
presence of the original performance event is made possible in turn by the
equipment’s absence.
The insistence on indexicality is a crucial point in understanding the
way pre-digital media technologies are said to connect source to audience
in ways that digital media cannot. In “Defining Phonography” (1997), Eric
Rothenbuhler and John Durham Peters pose a thought experiment based on
the common argument that there is an indexical link between source and
reproduction inherent in the technology of the phonograph that is absent
in its digital counterparts. The argument is that transcendence of the media
is made possible only through the “unbroken chain” of indexicality “from
the sound in the living room to the original sound as recorded” (252). If the
medium can actually erase itself and place the listener in the moment of orig-
inal performance, it is precisely because the medium is physically attached
to this original performance (253). The equipment can bring the presence of
the performer into the space of the home listener. This erasure through phys-
ical tracing, the authors say, is absent in the digital realm, where the transla-
tion to binary code breaks the indexical link and therefore severs the material
connection that makes the vanishing mediation possible. In digital media
it is the connection that vanishes through the media, rather than the media
vanishing through the connection.
The argument against digital indexicality is a clear example of what might
be called the gentrification process for anxieties induced by twentieth cen-
tury technologies of reproduction: early distress over the phonograph’s
powers of disembodiment is cleaned up through an argument for the
medium’s grounding in the embodiment offered by indexicality, only to push
the original distress into the digital quarter of the media world by arguing
that digital media is, by definition, purely symbolic in its reproduction of
reality. Rothenbuhler and Peters thus examine a position that has accepted
phonography as “natural” in its indexical functioning where earlier audiences
found it to be decidedly “unnatural” in its apparent propensity toward disem-
bodiment. Yet this position exhibits an anxiety toward digital technology that
is remarkably similar to the anxiety expressed by an earlier public unaware
of phonography’s foundations in indexicality. They argue that digital media’s
reproduction of reality involves a gap between original and copy, a sentiment
familiar to early phonograph culture. As such, “Defining Phonography”
presents a view of digital media couched in the simultaneity of presence and
absence that has been the foundation for anxieties surrounding all manner of
new sound reproduction technologies throughout the twentieth century, not
the least of which being phonography itself.
The case made by Rothebuhler and Peters is the culmination of the con-
suming public coming to identify with the dreams of the phonograph’s
creators. Thomas Edison once boasted about the phonograph’s ability “to
reproduce sound waves ‘with all their original characteristics’ ” but this was
not necessarily understood by the public as being a function of a recording’s
indexical relationship to its source (Rothenbuhler and Peters, 245). As the
authors readily admit, phonography was once received with some feelings
of distress concerning “its ability to capture voices and sounds no longer
tied to the human body or to the organic cycle of birth and death” (245). So
it indicates a big step forward that vinyl enthusiasts can now describe the
virtues of phonography in terms of the transcendent qualities of its powers of
embodiment, when once it was understood as being transcendent precisely
because of its powers of disembodiment. If there is now an accepted my-
thology that phonography is material in ways that the digital is not, then dig-
ital media is to the late twentieth century what phonography was to the late
nineteenth century, a reproduction technology that involves a mysterious
gap between source and copy. So, Rothebuhler and Peters haven’t dispelled
anxieties about the mysterious processes of sound recording in general.
They’ve simply displaced these anxieties to a new medium more fitting for
the present moment. As Peters would later put it, “Every new medium is a
machine for the production of ghosts” (1999, 139).
This displacement of anxiety is interesting to consider in light of its dif-
ference from anxieties expressed in the nineteenth century. For example,
Lisa Gitelman discusses the emergence of the idea of “language machines”
in the late 1800s, machines that would improve the speed and accuracy
with which the spoken word could be turned into text. She states that “per-
sistent proposals for new, improved means of reproducing, inscribing,
and communicating suggest [that] representation was the site of anxiety”
(1999, 82). Again, this anxiety is a function of the need to bring source and
copy closer together, to heighten the indexical relationship between the
represented and its representation. Essentially, what Gitelman describes is
a desire to bring acts of representation to the state of reproduction in which
a transcription is no longer considered a mediated version of that which has
been transcribed: a desire for the equipment to become transparent.
What we can observe between the era that Gitelman describes and the
argument against the very validity of the “original” itself (Altman 1992 and
Lastra 2000) is a historical arc indicative of changing attitudes toward expec-
tations of fidelity. On the one hand, early anxiety surrounding lack of fidelity
in representation is addressed by a desire to create technologies of reproduc-
tion. So the dream of the phonograph is to shift the distant copy of textual
transcription into the closer copy of the indexically linked recording. On the
other hand, anxieties emerge around these reproductions being too close
to their originals, apparent disembodiments of the human subject. Hillel
Schwartz notes that it was commonplace for early consumers of new sound
technologies like the phonograph to be impressed by the verisimilitude
their transmissions offered in spite of an abundance of system noise (2011,
333). Interestingly, as fidelity grew the skeptics would take over, arguing that
technologies of recording and transmission can never reproduce, regardless

of how well they minimize system noise, removing expectations for fidelity
altogether. Finally, along comes the digital and, all of a sudden, its appear-
ance of immateriality, owing largely to a lack of frictional surface noise in its
transmissions, reinscribes the pre-digital with an authenticity now said to be
lacking in binary code transcriptions. All these shifts in perception, however,
are indexically linked in an unbroken chain of anxieties about the relation-
ship between flesh and machine that simply move onward into the future,
link by link by link.
There is something provocative in the possibility that The Fireman’s
missing disc thematizes vanishing mediation just as Twin Peaks went dig-
ital for the first time on all levels: the narrative emphasis on current digital
technologies, the digital image capture on the production, and the digital
dissemination through streaming platforms. To flesh out the significance of
The Fireman’s missing disc in the context of the digital turn, I will now elab-
orate on how the aforementioned examples of turntable presence in Lynch’s
films mesh with the anxieties around sound reproduction discussed in the
present section, coalescing into schizophonography that taps deeper into
cultural fears surrounding the relationship between bodies and machines,
the postmodern threat of disappearing context from our experience of daily
life, and the cinema’s propensity toward the presentation of disembodied
voices. I will argue for thinking of The Fireman’s gramophone sound as an
articulation of what Michel Chion calls the acousmêtre, and demonstrate
how this figure, too, has shifted status in the digital era. In theorizing the
connection between the myth of vanishing mediation and the privileged
positions granted to invisibly speaking bodies, I will demonstrate how film
sound theory’s concern with embodiment in relation to cinematic voices is
the final link that connects The Fireman’s missing media with Laura Palmer.
The Fireman’s disc, like the acousmêtre, exposes the artificiality of embodi-
ment through synchronization of sound and image, the mediality that allows
for Laura Palmer’s fate to be changed, challenging the indexical link between
the source material of the original series and its new digital iteration.
Visualizing the (Gendered) Acousmêtre
In “Doing for the Eye what the Phonograph Did for the Ear” (2001), Tom
Gunning pins Thomas Edison’s titular goal for the kinetoscope on two
concerns in early twentieth century life: the separation of the senses pop-
ular for studies of perception, and “a desire to heal the breach” resulting from
anxiety surrounding this separation (16). Gunning holds that, in the con-
text of the spiritualist traditions alive and well at the time, the technolog-
ical separation of the human voice from the body was often considered to
be unnatural and demanded a restitching of the isolated elements. In this
narrative, Edison’s stated desire to reunite sound with image by building the
phonograph’s visual corollary was, in part, a response to early schizophonic
separation anxiety. Healing the breach between sound and image was also
the goal of a variety of film conventions that sought to minimize attention
to the technologies that made the illusion of sound/image synchronization
possible. One such convention is what Michel Chion calls the acousmêtre,
a character consisting of a voice that is not attached to a visible body, a con-
dition that depends as much on image as it does sound, rendering the cine-
matic acousmêtre distinct from disembodied voices found in other media.4
The acousmêtre is accorded a position of privilege, often imbued with su-
pernatural powers, because of its ability to roam free of physical attachment,
like a deity or ghost. As Brian Kane puts it, “the acousmêtre depends on the
paradox of the effect without a cause” (2014, 39), a situation that aligns with
R. Murray Schafer’s “affirmative claim for sonic uniqueness” of embodied
source over transmitted copy (142). These powers disappear once the cause
is revealed, attaching the voice to a visible body through the convention of
lip-synchronization, as when the Wizard in Oz is revealed to be an ordinary
man concealed behind a curtain, his technological apparatus laid bare as the
source of his mysterious disembodiment (Chion 1999, 28–29). The powers
associated with the acousmêtre are required to provide a narrative veil to the
underlying apparatus, concealing the fact that “it is an inherent consequence
of the material organization of cinema that the voice and body are at odds”
(127). In other words, the breach between sound and image that so con-
cerned Edison was imperfectly healed by matching image technologies with
sound technologies, and bodiless voices threaten to expose this imperfection
unless they are given supernatural justification for their mysterious powers.5
Enter David Lynch playing FBI Chief Gordon Cole in the opening scene of
Fire Walk with Me, the partially deaf director of the Blue Rose cases to which
the mystery of Laura Palmer’s murder belongs. Hearing aids armed and ready,
Cole hollers at his secretary who stands not three feet away: “Get me Agent
Chester Desmond out in Fargo, North Dakota!” Then, having secured Agent
Desmond (Chris Isaak) on the phone, Cole identifies himself by screaming
into his receiver, causing Desmond to pull the hand-piece away from his ear
as Cole’s voice audibly distorts through the tiny speaker. This scene recalls
descriptions of Edison hollering into the bell of his phonographic cylinder
recorder, both because this early microphone was unamplified and because
he was hard of hearing (Kittler 1999, 22). It is almost as if Lynch, through
Cole, is positing himself as a reincarnation of Edison, placed in charge of
investigating the otherworldly by-products of so many electrical devices
that populate his films. Just as Friedrich Kittler notes that Edison’s recording
device was born out of human impairment, Lynch foregrounds Cole’s de-
pendence on hearing aids and the telephone distortion resultant from his
compensation for this dependence. Here Lynch also conflates what James
Lastra has called the telephonic and phonographic modes of sound repre-
sentation in film, emphasizing speech intelligibility and perceptual fidelity
respectively (2000, 138–139). The joke is that Cole’s diminished capacity to
experience the sound environment in its totality (perceptual fidelity) also
leads to his diminished capacity to communicate through speech (intel-
ligibility). The tools for assisting both are failing, and Cole’s disembodied
voice on the other end of the telephone emphasizes the material conditions
required for separating voice from body. Cole thus highlights the inherent
flaws in the system, and by extension, the inherent gap between voice and
body in the cinema. Cole fails the test of the classic acousmêtre because his
attempts at projecting his voice are thwarted by the imperfect mesh of flawed
flesh and flawed equipment. But in opening the film this way, Lynch sets
the conditions for how access to alternate planes of reality can be opened
through this very same mesh.
Cole’s role in Season 3 finds him listening through to the depths of the
other worlds that intersect with the town of Twin Peaks, largely under the
influence of an amorphous entity known as “Judy,” first mentioned in passing
in Fire Walk with Me but referenced more substantially in Season 3 as the
foundation for the evils that have beset the small town from earliest days.
Steven Wilson (2021) makes a compelling argument for the status of Judy as
acousmêtre, tracking a variety of sound design treatments, largely from Dean
Hurley, as acousmetric expressions of her “voice” whose articulations func-
tion like musical motifs that connect narratively with key sequences in the
series. Wilson’s exegesis offers an example of how the integrated soundtrack,
that treats sound design as score, requires attention to all sonic material in
order to understand relationships between the traditional functions of film
music and the very separate functions of voice, bound together through the
art of sound design. For my purposes, it is useful to consider how the mate-
riality expressed by sound effects associated with things like phonography
and electricity serve as the material conduits for the more classically de-
fined acousmêtre: the speaking voice without a visible body. As I’ll demon-
strate, Lynch’s interest in the figure of the acousmêtre lies in its potential to
retain the powers associated with disembodiment even as the technological
foundations for this disembodiment are laid bare, just as Lynch’s version of
vanishing mediation depends on the visibly mediate.
The acousmêtre is cast as an invisible character in a visible world. Yet more
recent thinking about the acousmêtre suggest possibilities for its own visi-
bility. In his updated epilogue to the 1999 edition of The Voice in Cinema,
Chion has identified characters who behave as acousmêtres through only
partial visual concealment: a mask that obscures the mouth as the site of full
embodiment for the voice (1999, 166–167). Chion has also recognized how
improvements to the resolution of cinematic sound can allow for voices to
be coded as separate from bodies through greater capacities for spatializa-
tion around distinct sonic tracks (167–168). The age of discrete digital sur-
round sound formats has the potential to push the acousmêtre outside of
the boundaries of the screen, and to situate this figure within a heightened
diegetic realism that might free it from its threat to the boundary between
sound and image. As Mark Kerins has explored in detail in Beyond Dolby
(Stereo) (2011), enhancements to surround technology have brought even
more visible acousmêtres, able to be seen onscreen but maintain their
powers by extending the voice into an array of discrete channels offscreen.
Yet Kerins concludes that the enhanced spatialization made possible by dis-
crete channels can’t ultimately solve the problem of the fundamental separa-
tion of voice and body that Chion suggests is inherent to the sound cinema
(2011, 276). True, amidst the increasingly complex spatialization made pos-
sible by digital surround sound there is more potential for the powers of
the acousmêtre to be exploited through enhanced auditory localization. For
Kerins, a main consequence of this new digital reality is that we must at least
add the category of spatial-synchronization to that of temporal sync when
conducting our analyses of how acousmetric figures play out in a digital
sound film (262). Yet along with providing a more three-dimensional model
for the cinematic representation of space, multi-channel sound also brings
with it even greater potential for the seams holding this space together to
come undone. The acousmêtre in this scenario has to work harder to function
as deflection away from the gap between sound and source.
So it would seem that the figure of the acousmêtre, whether presented in

monophonic or digital surround sound, visible or invisible, is fundamentally
doomed to remain an agent of potential threat to the exposure of the cine-
matic apparatus. Chion’s own discussion of the Wizard of Oz as a quintes-
sential acousmêtre is a case in point: this figure is not merely a disembodied
voice, but also a disembodied head floating in space. Chion refers to this
head as a mask that functionally conceals the true speaking face of the man
behind the curtain (1999, 28). Clearly, under Chion’s rubric it is possible for
these partially visible figures to exist in the monophonic environment just as
the Wizard does. The thrust of this revelation is as follows: what is so impor-
tant about the Wizard of Oz is not simply that his powers disappear when his
visibly speaking body is revealed; rather, it is essential that along with the rev-
elation of his body comes the revelation of the technological apparatus that
allowed for his acousmetric status. This points to the crux of the acousmêtre
as a cinematic figure: it exists to offer plausibility to a situation that should
expose the cinematic apparatus, but does not.
The Lynchian acousmêtre flips this script. The Woodsman from Part 8 of
Season 3 is perhaps the clearest example, a figure whose power stems from
the disembodied voice, but with heightened attention to the technology that
makes this disembodiment possible. The Woodsman has the ability to render
all who hear his voice unconscious, an act that exerts his power over an en-
tire town. Yet he is far from invisible, or even masked, and the technology he
uses to make his voice heard across a broad geographical area is plain to see.
If the Woodsman were the Wizard of Oz, the revelation of his use of the radio
broadcast system to cast his spell would have dissolved his power. Instead, it
is precisely this technology that enables his power to be realized. It should be
noted that this is also a highly gendered expression: a male figure commands
technology to impose his will on others. But Lynch also flips this script on
occasion by opening spaces for women to embody the powers of the visible
acousmêtre.
Lynch’s Mulholland Drive (2001) provides an explicit demonstration of
how the revelation of the apparatus is what is most important in under-
standing the power and limits of the acousmêtre, featuring a woman at the
controls. In the Club Silencio sequence, house magician (Richard Green)
lectures the audience (including us) on the illusory nature of live sound,
powerfully illustrated by Rebekah Del Rio as she collapses in the middle
of a captivating Spanish rendition of Roy Orbison’s “Crying.” The sound
of her voice continues as she’s dragged apparently lifeless off the stage, a
scene that sends protagonist Betty (Naomi Watts) into a fit of convulsions
as she listens, prefiguring the dramatic reconfiguration of the narrative in
the film’s final act. It is as though the illusion offered by lip-syncing is so
powerful that when its mechanics are laid bare it disrupts the very fabrics
of space, time, and identity. In this moment, Del Rio reveals that she has
always been an acousmêtre, that any expectation of natural voice/body
relationships in the cinema are flawed. Importantly, Lynch grants Del Rio’s
voice its supernatural powers along inverse lines to Chion’s theorization: it
is at the moment that the illusory power of the apparatus is revealed that
the voice breaks free of the body, rather than the other way around. And
although we have just been given an explicit demonstration of how sound
technology can fool us into mistaking the recorded for the real, Schafer’s
perfect schizophonic situation, we remain bewildered. It must also be
noted that this voice/body split is visualized through Del Rio’s onscreen
death, her lifeless body a precondition for the mystery of her living voice
floating free upon the air.
Rebekah Del Rio returned as a performer in the Roadhouse in Part 10
of Season 3 to sing a beautiful version of her collaboration with Lynch and
Badalamenti entitled “No Stars.” The online fan communities immedi-
ately flared up with expressions of disappointment over her apparent use
of Autotune, the pitch correction software that many producers employ
as much for its aesthetic side-effects as for attempts to smooth over vocal
imperfections.6 Many couldn’t hear the use of Autotune in this case, while
others said it was so prominent that they couldn’t stand to listen to the song.
Thus the debate hung off of differences in audile technique, and this skill was
inevitably used as a tool for attempting to diminish our assessment of Del
Rio’s vocal skills. In a bizarre twist, some actually pointed to Del Rio’s perfor-
mance in Mulholland Drive as an example of how wonderfully she can sing
without technological enhancement, and that the production choices on her
appearance in Season 3 were a betrayal of her natural talent. Of course there
seems to be a missed point in this line of argumentation somewhere. More to
the point, critiques of her use of Autotune here reinforce gender stereotypes
around the technologized voice that have been grounded in the figure of the
acousmêtre all along. With this revelation of technological illusion, Rebekah
Del Rio has been killed twice over: once on screen in Mulholland Drive, and
once on the subreddit forums for Twin Peaks. But for Lynch, these technolog-
ical revelations are not meant to illustrate disempowerment; to the contrary,
it is the power of Del Rio’s voice carrying on after her death that thrusts open
the portal to the alternate dimension that Betty will inhabit for the rest of the
film. And her return in Twin Peaks evokes the angelic presences that have
populated the universe throughout.
The gendered nature of the discourse around disembodied voices in film
finds its quintessential expression in Kaja Silverman’s The Acoustic Mirror
(1988). Her chief interest in the book is the representation of sexual differ-
ence through approaches to the relationship between voice and body in a
specific range of classical Hollywood films. Drawing examples from Chion’s
The Voice in Cinema, Silverman critiques the general premise that underlies
the concept of the acousmêtre: that attachment of voice to body is most
complete in the context of lip-synchronization, and ultimately that “to em-
body a voice is to feminize it” (Silverman, 50). Silverman argues that disem-
bodied voices in classical Hollywood cinema have tended to be coded male
until the point of visual revelation. Here she develops a methodology that
uses Chion’s writings as an example of the creation of a negative fantasy of
female corporealization that she suggests is the same fantasy used by clas-
sical Hollywood to contain women’s voices within the inferior position of the
body. For Silverman, and the psychoanalytic film theory that she works with,
the body marks an absence that is distinctly feminine.
Almost two decades later, Britta Sjogren’s Into the Vortex (2006) challenges
Silverman’s argument to suggest that a position of disembodiment is not
necessarily a position of privilege, and that the corporeal body is not nec-
essarily an inferior place from which to enunciate. Speaking of Silverman’s
map of the classical Hollywood approach to difference, she says, “the body
can be nothing else in this system—always codified as the weighted signifier
of lack” (45). Her way out? “Space, I shall argue, constitutes a way to figure,
relative to the voice-off, a place of subjectivity not contingent on the body
and its visual restrictions” (36). This idea of the body as a space that exists in-
dependent of visualization is the critical point at which Sjogren departs from
her predecessors whose approach to film sound, she argues, has been too de-
pendent upon reference to the visual. By shifting the idea of the body from
the visual to the spatial, Sjogren wants to reclaim certain aspects of classical
Hollywood for positive female subjectivity. She critiques Silverman for map-
ping Chion’s postulations about negative feminine corporeality onto classical
Hollywood cinema, and in so doing ends up leaving Chion by the wayside
(44). For Sjogren, Chion’s work does not share with classical Hollywood
cinema an inherent positivity toward feminine subjectivity worth trying to
excavate.
The crux of Sjogren’s argument lies in her engagement with the work of
Mary Anne Doane. In addressing what she finds most valuable in Doane’s
work on the voice Sjogren focuses on the former’s notion of how “voice-
off ” can work to “deepen” the diegesis beyond the visual realm (38).
Sjogren draws this idea of a deepened diegesis from a seemingly innocuous
observation by Doane: that a potentially embodied voice, heard from a po-
sition within diegetic space but not pictured on the screen, serves to help
demarcate space beyond fixation upon the visual. Sjogren acknowledges
the original function of Doane’s claim as an observation about one of the
most common functions of offscreen sound, yet finds in it the potential for
something more radical: recovering a space that is heterogeneous to the
image, a “lost dimension” that, in fact, cannot be visualized (38–39). This
is a “deepening” of the diegesis to create a space beyond the visual realm
rather than simply extending the possibly visible through offscreen sound.
For Sjogren, the lost dimension is that of the body as space rather than as a
visually corporeal object.
Despite Sjogren’s dismissal of Chion’s theorization of the bodiless voice,
her reading of Doane actually points to an agreement with Chion on one
essential point: that sound and image on film is always a forced marriage
that covers a gap that is little explored in its own right. She calls attention
to Doane’s assertion that asynchronous sound, and the voice in particular,
runs the risk of exposing the cinema’s dual nature because of its lack of syn-
chronization (Sjogren 2006, 61). Yet the very idea of synchronized sound
is somewhat arbitrary, “for one ‘syncs up’ ‘non-sync’ sounds with as much
diligence as ‘sync’ sounds in film production practice” (6). This position is
fundamentally connected to Chion’s view of the duality of sound and image
in the cinema that informs his early work on the voice, and his later conclu-
sion that, because of this duality, all speaking voices in the cinema are neces-
sarily disembodied. “If the voice, even strictly synchronized with an image,
always suggests someone speaking behind the visible source, it is because the
human voice has no organ” (Chion 2003, 300, my translation). Drawing on
the fact that human speech derives from a multitude of transferable body
parts, he concludes that these parts are not the true source of the voice, a
source that is ultimately not subject to visualization. Like puppets, many
of the forced synchronizations have repackaged the acousmêtre to a state
of visibility that ultimately suggests one thing: that any visible body in the
cinema is but a mask concealing the true nature of the speaking body, one
without visible organs—a space unto its own (300–301). And so for Sjogren,
“Thinking about sync as also ‘other’ and ‘off ’ helps one keep in mind the mul-
tiple significations generated by any voice (or sound) during a film viewing”
(2006, 6). Any sound in a film can be understood as separate from its syn-
chronous image, a space that constitutes an unseeable body. This, in the end,
offers a corrective to the negative fantasy of the feminine body as a site of
absence, offering new ways of understanding the unbounded positions from
which bodies speak.
The lesson in the debates around the acousmêtre and the power of the dis-
embodied voice is in its challenge to prevailing ideas about the nature of the
“source” of voices that hold powers associated with disembodiment, whether
these powers be those of male privilege or something more supernatural.
Questioning the idea of vocal source also speaks to the more fundamental
critique of the source/copy binary that underlies Schafer’s schizophonia and
the myth of vanishing mediation more broadly. The Fireman’s gramophone
stands as an anomaly in Lynch’s work, the only record player without a vis-
ible disc. The question about the source of the sounds that the gramophone
emits is usually handled on the level of originary sound event, yet could just
as easily be asked in terms of the medium of transmission. Does the void ap-
parent in the gramophone’s cabinet suggest a portal through to the originary
sound event, a literalization of vanishing mediation? Or does the missing
disc ask us to think about the nature of the medium of transmission here, the
displaced materiality? The answer lies in the notion that space itself can con-
stitute a form of corporeality, and that the materiality of this space is the body
of the media that we don’t see here. And this interpretation opens the door
to reassessing the role of Laura Palmer in the Twin Peaks universe, herself
having been presented across a variety of mediated and embodied forms that
continually shift until the final seconds of the Season 3 finale.
Following Sjogren, we must acknowledge that source does not need to be
visual in the cinema, that the inevitability of “de-acousmatization” through
visualization is a variation on the myth of vanishing mediation. The uniting
of visual body with audible voice only serves this myth, and maintaining
the distinctiveness of the voice without a body reveals this myth. Cinematic
convention has taken the primacy given to origins in the likes of Schafer’s
thinking and attached this to the primacy of the visual in its representational
strategy. The missing disc in The Fireman’s gramophone suggests that we
don’t need to visualize the source of these sounds, just as we don’t need to
know what that source is. Rather, it’s important that they point backward into
a deep end of the diegesis where bodies can live without being seen.
Laura Palmer’s Schizophonographic Identity
Let’s go back to the beginning, to Laura Palmer, who is the beginning. Her
absence as living character in the original series necessitated emphasis on
the police procedural that grew from her death, placing Agent Cooper as
the central character. In Fire Walk with Me, on the other hand, “the mo-
mentum . . . moves from the hero that much of the audience learned to
love toward his origins, that is, to the enigmatic Laura, the secret-bearer”
(Nochimson 1997, 173). Nochimson’s reading of Laura Palmer as origin is
compelling in the context of the debates around the source/copy and voice/
body binaries that I have been charting here, and is essential to understanding
Laura’s relationship to Cooper in Season 3. For Nochimson, Fire Walk with
Me establishes a simultaneous distance and connection between Laura and
Cooper, embodied in the film’s final image of the two together in the Red
Room, she seated and he standing with his arm on her shoulder, an angel
floating nearby (196). This distanced connection, or connective distance,
combines the seeker (detective) with the secret (victim) into a unified whole,
linking the rational mind with its subconscious (196–197). I will modify this
psychoanalytical reading to suggest that the distanced connection on display
here is between the secret as origin and the seeker as copy whose success is
defined by the level of connection it is able to establish with the source. As
with Nochimson’s description of the final image of Cooper and Laura in Fire
Walk with Me, the tension between source and copy in sound theory is one of
distance versus connection.
The secret in this case, like the very notion of an original sound event, is
unattainable. In the first Red Room sequence of Cooper’s dream in Episode
2, Laura Palmer (or someone who looks “almost exactly like Laura Palmer”)
whispers in Cooper’s ear. Upon waking, Cooper explains that Laura’s whisper
revealed the identity of her killer—which he then promptly forgets. This se-
cret, of course, drives the original series forward. This whisper is also a var-
iation on the acousmêtre: here we have a speaking body with a voice audible
only to a single character, and then only momentarily. This absent voice holds
a power associated with the secret to the mystery, embedded within the alter-
nate reality of the Red Room where things move backward and forward at the
same time. In the Red Room, the actors’ speech and movements are enacted
in reverse while being filmed in reverse so that the effect on playback is an
uncanny blend of correct linear progression with an impossibly backward ar-
ticulation. The Red Room is a timeless place of waiting that both Cooper and
Laura visit in their dreams, a place that lays its mediality bare in the overt ev-
idence of technical manipulation that defines the way the space functions. In
this environment, Laura’s inaudibly disembodied voice, trapped in the oth-
erworldly stasis of the Red Room, is the origin of the Twin Peaks saga. Laura
and Cooper are connected through this space, but their distance remains.
The voice floats free of its source but is altered beyond recognition in its rep-
lication in Cooper’s memory.
Just before Laura imparted her secret to Cooper, she told him she would
see him again in twenty-five years, a now prophetic pronouncement that
was clearly a major motivating factor for Lynch and writer Mark Frost to re-
visit the show around twenty-five years after the original series conclusion.
This motivation is acknowledged when the very first thing we see in Part 1
of Season 3 is a flashback to the original instance of Laura speaking that very
line of dialogue from the original series. The reference then expands in
Part 2 when Cooper, apparently still trapped in the Red Room after his
doppelganger escaped in the original series finale, meets Laura Palmer again,
both now visibly aged. She approaches Cooper once more to whisper in his
ear, and again the audience is not privy to the message. This time, however,
the contents of the secret cause Cooper to show visible distress. Upon com-
pletion of the whisper, Laura gets swept up in some kind of interdimensional
warp, the image of her face distorting in superimposition with violently
undulating curtains, another spectral co-registration that precludes her dis-
appearance. Combined with a sound of tumultuous wind and the flapping
of heavy fabric, Laura lets out a terrific scream and flies out of the top of the
frame. Cooper looks up to watch, and it is not long before he is also violently
ejected from the Red Room, beginning the journey that we follow for the
remainder of the series. However, we don’t see or hear an embodied Laura
again until Part 17, when Cooper beams into the scene from Fire Walk with
Me and stops her from meeting up with her friends in the woods, thereby
interrupting the inevitability of her murder later that night.
As described earlier in this chapter, Laura disappears as Cooper attempts
to lead her out of the forest, marked by a return of the sounds of The
Fireman’s gramophone. These sounds are followed immediately by another
return: that of the aforementioned scream with wind and fabric rustling that
marked Laura’s disappearance from the Red Room. In Part 17, this series of
events is followed by flashbacks to footage from the pilot episode in which
Laura’s body disappears from the beach on which it was discovered in the
opening moments of the show. The function, here, is to show how Cooper’s
intervention has altered the past. In Part 18, we find out how this interven-
tion has altered the future. Laura’s disappearance from the woods at Cooper’s
hand is repeated at the beginning of this final installment for Season 3, along
with the same sequence of sounds. Then, there is a sudden cut to Cooper
seated in the Red Room next to the One-Armed Man (Al Strobel), who asks,
appropriately: “Is it future, or is it past?” Shortly after, Laura is shown once
again approaching Cooper to whisper in his ear, followed by her ejection
from the space, rendered identically to how the scene plays out in Part 2.
Formally, this reiteration serves to remind the audience of the source of that
scream, wind, and fabric rustling sound that was presented acousmatically in
the woods just prior. In turn, setting Laura’s disappearance from the woods
to these sounds, as well as those of The Fireman’s gramophone, connects eve-
rything back to the opening scene of Season 3, The Fireman’s command for
Cooper, and the rest of us, to “Listen to the sounds.” The disembodiment of
the sounds from the gramophone are now tied explicitly to the removal of
Laura’s own body from the scene, and of her dead body from the shore the
next morning. The conjunction of these two sound events, both calling atten-
tion to the absence of their associated bodies, is the climax of the show’s turn
around the question of The Fireman’s missing disc. These missing bodies,
permeating the space with their disembodied sounds, point toward Britta
Sjogren’s deep end of the diegesis: that space which can’t be visualized, but
where materiality lives nevertheless. It is into this deep end of the diegesis
that Cooper ventures in search of Laura.
In Part 18 Cooper is finally able to exit the Red Room of his own accord,
where he begins the final journey to discover Carrie Page in Odessa, Texas.
When Page answers her door, Cooper addresses her by the name Laura.
While Page says she has no memory of that name, she consents to Cooper’s
invitation to drive her up to the Palmer home in Twin Peaks, clearly in
a bit of trouble and needing to escape from Odessa as quickly as possible
(emphasized by the dead man seated on her living room couch). Page is
hardly living her best life, and is far from fulfilling a dream of freedom from
Laura’s own fate. It seems both are doomed to cycles of violence at the hands
of men.
After a long drive, Cooper and Page arrive at the Palmer house. Cooper
expects Sarah Palmer to answer, but finds one Alice Tremond instead (played
by Mary Reber, the current real-life owner of the property), who claims
that she has never heard of any Palmers in the recent history of the house.
Disappointment turns to disorientation as Cooper and Page walk back down
the front steps and Cooper asks: “What year is this?” Sarah Palmer’s voice
is then heard, hollering, “Laura!” from somewhere deep in the diegesis,
recalling the early moments of the Twin Peaks pilot as she races through the
house frantically looking for her missing daughter the morning after her
murder. Here the voice is distorted, as it is in the re-iterations of similar au-
ditory samples later in the series and prequel film where they are used over
ominous shots of the infamous ceiling fan associated with the transgression
of Laura’s body within the pretended safety of domestic space. In this way
the closing scene of Season 3 loops back to the genesis of the show through
the repetition of a sound cue. But nobody can go home again, no matter how
much time has passed (or in which direction). Page screams and the house
lights go dark, her voice extending out into the disembodied space of the
acousmêtre, the possibility of her true identity as Laura Palmer tied to the
ambiguity of her voice itself in a final schizophonographic disruption of time
and space. In the dark, the show lands in the deep end of the diegesis, where
Laura continues to live, invisible, like the missing disc in The Fireman’s gram-
ophone that signals her disappearance in Season 3.
In 1992, Lynch ended the Twin Peaks saga by giving Laura Palmer the space
to speak for herself as a living human being in all her complexity. This was the
culmination of her gradual shift from media object to embodied person. She
began the original series as a figure locked to media forms like the iconic
high school portrait as homecoming queen, the cassette tapes she recorded
for her psychiatrist, and the videocassette recording of her picnic with best
friend Donna (Lara Flynn Boyle). These media were all presented as dis-
tinctly single-channel: she is seen in photographs and video, but not heard;
she is heard on the cassette tapes, but not seen. Her voice and her image are
kept separate, a narrative device that threatens to expose the fundamental
disjunction between the two at the basis of the cinematic apparatus. In true
Lynchian fashion, these representations of Laura also emphasize the mate-
rial specificity of the media through which they appear. In these ways Laura
functions something like a ghost, her absence creating a strong presence that
structured the series (Stalling 2020, 5), emphasized by the material objects
that call attention to the fact that she isn’t there. Laura is acousmetric both in
her disembodied voice and images, her corporeality now dispersed through
the myriad townspeople who hold a part of her in their lives, pieces of the
mystery that Cooper was sent to assemble. In Fire Walk with Me, Laura is
freed of her sound and image portraits and allowed to live within the die-
gesis. For Martha Nochimson, this allows the film to be “liberated from the
limitations of the would-be rescuers” (1997, 174); knowing that her fate is
inevitable, we are free of any question surrounding the film’s ending and can,
instead, focus on the details of Laura’s life and the complexities of her person-
ality. But in Season 3, the stability that came with the certainty around Laura’s
status is disrupted again as her death at the hands of her father shifts to an un-
certain fate as Carrie Page, a fate that is still bound to violence. Page emerges
just as Laura disappears again, reinstating her ghostly status as absent pres-
ence, now signaled by the invisibility of the medium in The Fireman’s gramo-
phone. What are we to make of this process of shifting Laura’s status as media
object across the saga as a whole?
Laura Palmer has been all things to all people, and this multiplicity has
been embedded within a long history of Twin Peaks criticism bound up in
the discourse of postmodern style (see, for example, Reeves et al. 1992 and
Richardson 2004). For Linnie Blake, Laura Palmer is emblematic of a general
patterning to characters in the original Twin Peaks series for which “there is
no integrity to the self ” (2016, 237). Citing the language of Fredric Jameson
on the postmodern condition, Blake argues that “Lynch’s depiction reveals
her as little more than a disparate collection of parts, a code that needs to be
broken, or a repository for the secrets of others,” rendering her “the putative
subject of postmodernity” (237). There is a brutal critique here of the broader
moment of American neo-liberalism in which “postmodern ethics provides
justification both for the peddling of raped and murdered women as a prime-
time entertainment and for the adoption of economic policies that benefit
only a tiny minority” (237). From her vantage point writing twenty-five
years after the original series ended, but before the airing of Season 3, Blake
sees the show’s “postmodern innovations” in the light of a quarter century
of neoliberal effects on the world at large, questioning the role of the series’
references to the supernatural in all this: an allusion to the need to uncover
the “unspoken truths of our culture,” or participation in “flattening history”
through its co-registration of multiple times and spaces that render so effec-
tively the play of surfaces without depth that Jameson warns against (243)?
On the surface, Season 3 certainly doesn’t do much to assuage these kinds
of critiques. The show is arguably more postmodern than ever, identities
even more fragmented than they were before, violence proliferating on all
levels. For Ryan Diduck, there are simply no positive female characters here
either, all the more problematic in light of cultural shifts around movements
like #metoo and the rise of Trumpism that erupted co-temporaneously with
our return to Twin Peaks. With fake news permeating our media feeds and
political divisions entrenching, Diduck argues that “beholding ourselves

in this fun-house mirror only reflects how distorted and terrifyingly near
everything has become—that we are now wedged in a time when it is more
comfortable to be lost in illusion that resolved in certainty” (2017). In this
critique, Diduck mirrors the earlier worries over the rise of postmodernism
and its simulacra, as well as critiques of the instability around the Laura
Palmer character.
Fredric Jameson himself was a critic of Lynch’s work as part of his develop-
ment of a more general condemnation of postmodern society. In The Cultural
Logic of Late Capitalism (1991), Jameson argues that the fragmentation, iso-
lation, and surface reassemblage of experience characteristic of postmod-
ernism amounts to a loss of historical context, a breakdown in the signifying
chain of memory that schizophrenics exhibit in the form of “a series of pure
and unrelated presents in time” (27). Jameson actually uses this negative as-
sociational formulation to critique Blue Velvet (1986) (294–296), a film very
close to the original Twin Peaks series in terms of Lynch’s approach to period
melange. Importantly, Jameson’s take also reflects (albeit less explicitly artic-
ulated) R. Murry Schafer’s own critiques of emerging postmodernism in his
use of the term schizophonia itself. In particular, Schafer’s concern over spa-
tiotemporal confusion, as well as his negative reference to neurodivergence
(like the condition of schizophrenia), is also well in line with the emergence
of critiques around postmodernity and its effects. Both Schafer and Jameson
privilege the idea that time is linear and should be considered on hierarchical
terms: anything experienced in the present is built upon a foundation of the
past and the two should never conflate. In short, they both exhibit a sort of
context worship dependent upon clear lines that connect times and spaces
together, not unlike the argument for indexicality in Durham and Peters’ ex-
planation of phonography’s advantage over digital technologies. It seems no
coincidence that the postmodern effects that Jameson critiques arose in the
age of the digital turn in music reproduction. I’ll wager that both Jameson
and Schafer, if forced to make a choice, would have preferred vinyl over dig-
ital formats for their music listening.
For others, however, Laura Palmer’s representation has been deeply
embedded in the cultures of the times, a necessary reflection of reality that
enables engagement beyond the superficiality of postmodern formalism.
Kate Rennebohm argues that while Lynch’s representational politics are often
questionable, he nevertheless has always had a strong sense of the cultural mo-
ment, as true with Season 3 as ever: “This shift toward the colder and crueller
aspects of Lynch’s universe is as much a matter of the current cultural climate

as it is the tempermental proclivities of the creator. . . . The earlier Twin Peaks
mined power from revealing the horror beneath ’80s fantasies of an idealized
postwar America, even as it venerated the Edenic vision; the new Twin Peaks
finds its horror in the fact that we can no longer conjure such visions of inno-
cence at all” (63). As for Lynch’s treatment of women, Rennebohm points out
that his often fetishistic approach “has in the past been accompanied (and,
some would argue, justified) by an overt thematizing of how men transform
women into ownable, consumable images; the depiction of Laura Palmer in
the original Twin Peaks, as an image subject to everyone’s interpretation but
her own, is the supreme example” (64). Here the emphasis on Laura’s status
as media object serves as a reflection on the process of objectification itself,
another aspect of how Lynch’s interest in media materiality draws a line to
deeper recesses of the worlds these media inhabit. To this I would add that
Laura’s objectification also reinforced the fact that she did have secrets of her
own that could never be revealed through her mediation, and that much of
what was revealed by this mediation revolved around the secrets of others
projected onto her. Fidelity between source and copy, you might say, is as
much about the listener as it is about the sound.
Laura Palmer’s objectification, too, shifted in Fire Walk with Me, a film
in which she finally had real agency, despite her fate being governed by the
patriarchal power that permeates her world (Janisse 2017). For Sara Swain,
“Laura’s suffering was never meaningless” and the feature film “gave her pain
both significance and scale” (2017). One might argue that the lack of integrity
of the self continues in the film with Laura’s famously erratic personality on
display, shifting dramatically between a variety of moods and modes of self-
expression (enabled by Sheryl Lee’s stunning performance), qualities that are
often associated with schizophrenic tendencies. But for many, this aspect of
Laura’s character was all too grounded in familiar reality. Courtenay Stallings
argues that Laura’s characterization in the film clearly depicts symptoms of
PTSD common to sexual abuse victims, particularly dissociation (2020, 11).
In her book Laura’s Ghost: Women Speak about Twin Peaks, Stallings chron-
icles female identification with Laura around her abuse, and the fact that she
rings true to reality on this point poses a serious challenge to critiques of her
character as the depthless object of postmodern superficiality. For Stallings,
the show’s supernatural trappings did not gloss over the horror of the re-
ality of incest (the way an acousmêtre glosses over the seam between the dual
apparatus of the cinema). Rather, the supernatural element made the real
horror all the more hard-hitting, because it was tied to Laura’s perspective.
She experienced horror, and so must we (9). For Sheryl Lee herself, Laura’s
legacy is that she puts the all-too-common reality of her situation on full dis-
play, an important step toward open dialogue about sexual abuse (12).
So what of Carrie Page and the disruption of the narrative line in Fire Walk
with Me? It is entirely understandable that many would find the conclusion
to Season 3 to be deeply unsatisfying. It offered neither the objectified Laura
of everyone’s personal interpretation, nor the humanized Laura in her own
voice with which so many have identified. We don’t know Carrie Page, and we
don’t know where Laura went when Page entered the picture, so the agency
that Laura exhibited in Fire Walk with Me is stripped in Season 3. While the
feature film required the inevitability of her death, a popular reading of the
conclusion is that, at the very least, her sacrifice thwarted the malevolent
spirit Bob from inhabiting her the way he did her father and, later, Agent
Cooper (one of the main threads of Season 3). Further, Carrie Page clearly
holds trauma, so she does not stand as evidence that Cooper’s intervention
allowed Laura to be free of that, either. Cooper as the seeker has failed. In
this, however, Laura’s power as bearer of her own secret is reinstated. We will
never know Carrie Page’s story, and that is Laura Palmer’s new secret, a re-
turn to the power of the original series’ mystery, now as conclusion rather
than introduction.
Laura persists, and it is on her image— and sound— that Season 3
concludes. “The original series—now in retrospect—was never just about
her devastating absence. It was about her persistent presence in the negative
space she left behind. . . . As the origin of and impetus for the series, then, it
makes sense that [Season 3] would entrust her with the last word” (Swain
2017). This last word, of course, is a scream, and its resonance carries over
from the terrifying close-up of Page’s face to the Palmer residence going dark
and finally to black screen, a final detachment of voice from body that recalls
Chion’s acousmêtre. Courtenay Stallings argues that Page’s final scream is her
way of acknowledging that Laura’s trauma, symbolized by the Palmer house
where so much of it originated, speaks to her own unknown trauma from
Odessa. Page’s story is that “of a lost and traumatized woman who is roused
by a dark memory when she hears her mother call out her name” (2020, 282).
Page and Palmer create a loop that simultaneously takes us back to the origins
of the Twin Peaks saga and points toward its endless extension. Page’s story is
at once unknowable and already known. Her presence challenges the sanc-
tity of the idea of the “original,” based as she is on a rewriting of the original
narrative arc for the series. At the same time, Page reinstates the mystery at
the heart of the original series as the substance of Season 3’s conclusion.
Carrie Page illustrates the conundrum of fidelity itself that has run
through the various threads I’ve have charted in this chapter (and across the
book as a whole). Fidelity implies a strong match between source and copy.
Schafer’s notion of schizophonia suggests the violation of the sanctity of
uniqueness in any originary sound event, a violation at the heart of critiques
of postmodernity’s proliferations of simulacra as well. If we follow Rick
Altman and James Lastra, however, there can be no such thing as an original
sound event because sound lives in space and space requires positionality.
Every sound carries with it the story of its propagation through space and
through technologies of transmission. Fidelity to an original sound event
cannot exist because the point of comparison between copy and source is
subject to the specifics of position, often impossible to pin down. However,
it is essential that we recognize that this does not doom representation to the
world of the simulacrum, the copy of a copy of a copy for which no original
ever existed. The simulacrum is the surface play of an entirely virtual reality
that pays no reference to the context of the real world, the critique of the
postmodern condition levied at Lynch in general and Twin Peaks in partic-
ular. What Carrie Page shows us, rather, is that the instability of origin need
not hinder a deep rooting in reality’s complex depth, just as the digital world’s
break from the indexical processes of pre-digital recording need not break it
entirely free from its capacity to reach back to that reality. The absence inside
The Fireman’s gramophone is an invitation to think past the idea that an orig-
inal is impossible and into the invisible space of the deep end of the diegesis,
where bodies live in all their grounded materiality, but in ways that demand
recognition of our own positionality in experiencing them.
The Fireman’s disc has disappeared, as the material surface of cellu-
loid has disappeared from Lynch’s work. But in this digital ether there lies
a deeper, less visible materiality, the depth of the diegesis into which Laura
Palmer’s voice reaches, activating the space, and revealing its surfaces. The
gramophone therefore functions as remediator: the void left by the appar-
ently missing media is shown to have a material dimension of its own in the
way that it opens up the alternate spaces for Laura’s story to play out. Laura’s
re-emergence as Carrie Page is another articulation of remediation, her life
becoming newly material again. At the same time, her voice carrying over
into the darkness to close the series insists that this materiality need not be
bound to a specific body in order to be recognized, that she can speak from
the position of the acousmêtre, a body that is not containable in its multi-
plicity. In this sense, Laura, through Carrie, offers the possibility of female
agency in the position of vocal disembodiment.
Laura’s schizophonographic identity lies in the way that her voice exceeds
the surface materiality that has governed Lynch’s record players across
Twin Peaks and his larger body of work. The absence of phonographic sur-
face, here, is the marker of how Laura speaks across the boundaries of co-
registrant times and spaces. Wrapped up in the idea of schizophonographics,
then, is that the absence of explicit depiction of phonography can serve as the
grounding that Laura’s absent presence, her ghostly status, brings to the Twin
Peaks universe. Laura has always articulated from this space, which depends
upon one’s position within it to interpret. This doesn’t mean the space has no
voice of its own, but that its voice cannot be pinned down and stabilized. This
is agency, Laura as acousmêtre, revealed by the void at the heart of the gram-
ophone. Laura is not the missing media in this equation; rather, the missing
media reveals what Laura has always been, regardless of mediation or em-
bodiment: present.
Coda: Immaterial Durability
An important and overlooked detail about the Palmer turntable in the orig-
inal series is that it is both vintage and modern. While CDs had taken root
in the late 1980s, LPs were still in mass production and many people did not
make the switch right away, particularly the older generations. The clearest
defining characteristic of the Palmer record player is its floor-standing and
top-loading cabinet from the early twentieth century. The record player in-
side the cabinet, however, is a contemporary 80s deck. This modern gear
housed in an older cabinet is similar to how today’s digital audio devices,
like Bluetooth streamers, are often wrapped in enclosures that recall older
media like tabletop radios. The Fireman’s gramophone could be seen the
same way: an old gramophone container, complete with horn, housing a dig-
ital transmission device that we cannot see. This remediation is crucial to
understanding the line that Season 3 draws back to the original series: old
realities in new spaces.
It is also important that we no longer see any sign of phonography in the
Palmer house in Season 3, the living room turntable replaced by a large flat
screen TV that occupies much of Sarah Palmer’s attention during the scenes
set inside the house. The function of the Palmer TV, however, is similar to the
record player that preceded it. It is a device prone to glitches that reveal its ma-
teriality, as when Sarah Palmer is shown watching a boxing match from the
1950s, a short segment of which is looping inexplicably and indefinitely. This
is one articulation of the way that digital technologies are shown to be im-
perfect and unreliable in Season 3, instabilities that Jeffrey Fallis and T. Kyle
King tie to the non-linearity of the digital realm that permeates the entire
production from the hypertextual quality of the narrative itself to the non-
linear editing process through which the show was constructed (new since
the last time any new Twin Peaks material was edited in 1992) (2021, 53–55).
But as we’ve seen, this kind of emphasis on technology’s material imperfec-
tion, opening up spaces of spatio-temporal uncertainty, runs throughout
the Twin Peaks saga and Lynch’s work as a whole. It was to the sound of the
Palmer turntable looping in the end groove that Leland, possessed by Bob,
was revealed as Laura’s killer as he murdered Maddy Ferguson in Episode
14. Further, it is perfectly logical that Lynch would continue his emphasis on
such materiality in the digital age, for the immateriality of digital technology
is a fiction perpetuated by metaphors like the “cloud” that mask the vastness
of the material infrastructure that underlies our wireless connectivity in the
twenty-first century. The images of Sarah Palmer engrossed in her endlessly
repeating television screen in Season 3 speak to the continuum across the
digital boundary line, which culminates in one final instance of looping in
the Palmer living room in Part 17, perhaps the series’ definitive articulation
of Laura Palmer’s own status as simultaneously amorphous and immutable.
Immediately following Laura’s disappearance from the woods and the
vanishing of her body from the shore, and before Cooper embarks on his
final journey to find Carrie Page and return to the Palmer home, we see
Sarah Palmer one last time. A wide shot of the living room rests for a long
take as we hear Sarah moaning offscreen. The TV is off and the famous high
school portrait of Laura is visible in the foreground, sitting next to a lamp on
a circular end table, possibly the very same table from which Leland picked
up the photo and danced with it in Episode 2 of the original series. After
what feels like an eternity, the source of Sarah’s distress unclear as her an-
guished vocalizations grow increasingly intense (and disarmingly similar to
those emitted by Leland while he danced), she finally enters the frame, picks
up the portrait, and walks toward the middle of the room. In a gesture that
recalls her swiping the needle off the record to try and get Leland to stop
his spinning all those years ago, she violently whacks some other photos off
another side table before dropping to her knees and placing the portrait on
the floor. Her swiping action cues an as yet unheard looping sound effect that
stems from a source unknown but echoes the end-groove looping that scored
Maddy’s murder in this very spot. Here Sarah will attempt to annihilate the
memory of her own daughter as she grabs a liquor bottle from the nearby
coffee table and begins smashing the photo with all her might. In this mo-
ment, two prior instances of phonographic materiality merge, both resulting
in the spilling of blood.
Laura may be gone from Twin Peaks, but Sarah can’t make her picture dis-
appear. No matter how hard she hits it, only the glass of the picture frame
shatters while the print remains intact, another callback to Episode 2 when
the frame’s glass broke as Leland and Sarah fought over it. Sarah’s agitated
smashing is augmented with glitchy jump cuts and reverse photography that
emphasize the looping of time itself, the glass continually reconstituting only
to be smashed again while Laura’s image remains stable underneath. The de-
struction of the frame that contains the image holds great symbolic power.
Her high school portrait was always presented as framed in glass in the orig-
inal series, but in the opening credits to Season 3 the image is already set free,
floating in the mist hanging in the trees above Twin Peaks. When we see the
portrait materialize within the diegesis, it is as an unframed print in a police
evidence locker, taped to a cardboard backing. These gestures of unframing
lead toward this final moment in which Sarah unbinds the image of her
daughter, set to a sound effect that evokes the phonography at the heart of
the tragedy in which the Palmer household is steeped. Phonographic mate-
riality haunts the living room as Sarah attempts to banish the likeness of her
daughter to the immaterial ether.
This scene marks the central tension of Season 3, its navigation of the
beloved memory of the original show and the very different media world
that we’re living in today. It is essential that this scene falls directly between
the end of Laura’s story and the introduction of Carrie Page. Laura in that
photo is both immutable and unknowable. That originary image can never
be destroyed, even as the show destroyed it, freeing it from the container of
the frame and setting Laura on new paths. But, for better or worse, nothing
can destroy the memory of what she was before and this memory persists
right through to the final frames of the series. The auditory callbacks of
both the looping turntable and Sarah’s blood curdling vocalizations suggest
both the violence of Sarah’s trauma over Laura’s death and that, as the wife
of her daughter’s killer, she was perhaps complicit all along. Or that she is
becoming complicit in the new reality shaped by Season 3, reshaping both
her daughter’s fate as well as her own. If we follow Mark Frost to his book
Twin Peaks: The Final Dossier (2017), Sarah is, in fact, the girl from Part 8
who played host to the winged reptilian spawn as the Woodsman broadcast
his hypnotic poem over the crackle of the KPJK turntable (136). As such,
she is not only positioned as a victim herself, but also as another instance
of Palmer possession by the forces responsible for unleashing Bob upon the
world. When Carrie Page screams to close the Season 3 finale, it functions
as a response to the sound of Sarah Palmer calling out the name “Laura”
from somewhere deep in the diegesis. Does Page’s scream express the horror
of recognizing her true identity as Laura Palmer triggered by the sound of
her mother’s voice? Or perhaps a deeper recognition of Sarah Palmer’s own
shifting plight, never before considered? Or the reaffirmation of her own
trauma as Carrie Page? All possibilities exist not only simultaneously as par-
allel tracks but are intricately connected through the narrative fabric woven
by Season 3. As Page’s final scream persists into the darkness, it loops back to
the opening moments of the original series just as it points outward toward
as-yet-uncharted territory. The darkness that closes the series is the darkness
inside the cabinet of The Fireman’s gramophone, a space no less material for
being invisible, the space from which Laura’s story has always been spoken,
and from which it will continue to speak on its own terms.
References
Anderson, Tim. 2008. “As if History was Merely a Record: The Pathology of Nostalgia and
the Figure of the Recording in Contemporary Popular Cinema.” Music, Sound and the
Moving Image 2, no. 1: 51–76.
Batcho, James. 2018. Malick’s Unseeing Cinema: Memory, Time and Audibility. New York:
Palgrave Macmillan.
Bolter, Jay David, and Richard Grusin. 1999. Remediation: Understanding New Media.
Cambridge: MIT Press.
Blake, Linne. 2016. “Trapped in the Hysterical Sublime: Twin Peaks, Postmodernism, and
the Neoliberal Now.” In Return to Twin Peaks: New Approaches to Materiality, Theory,
and Genre on Television, edited by Jeffrey Andrew Weinstock and Catherine Spooner,
Chion, Michel. 1994. AudioVision: Sound on Screen. Translated by Claudia Gorbman.
Chion, Michel. 1995. David Lynch. Translated by Robert Julian. London: British Film
Institute.
Chion, Michel. 1999. The Voice in Cinema. Translated by Claudia Gorbman. New York:
Columbia University Press.
Chion, Michel. 2003. Un art sonore, le cinéma: histoire, esthétique, poétique. Cahiers du
cinéma.
Diduck, Ryan. 2017. “Get Coffee, Get Naked, & Die; or, Why I Prefer Pawn Stars to Twin
Peaks: The Return.” Offscreen 21, nos. 11–12 (December). https://offscreen.com/view/
get-coff ee-get-naked-and-die
Doane, Mary Anne. 1985. “The Voice in Cinema: The Articulation of Body and Space.” In
Film Sound: Theory and Practice, edited by Elisabeth Weis and John Belton, 162–176.
Fallis, Jeffrey, and T. Kyle King. 2021. “Lucy Finally Understands How Cellphones
Work: Ambiguous Digital Technologies in Twin Peaks: The Return and its Fan
Communities.” In Critical Essays on Twin Peaks: The Return, edited by Antonio Sanna,
Frost, Mark. 2017. Twin Peaks: The Final Dossier. New York: Flatiron Books.
Garwood, Ian. 2016. “Vinyl Noise and Narrative in CD-Era Indiewood.” In The Palgrave
Handbook to Music and Sound Design in Screen Media: Integrated Soundtracks, edited
by Liz Greene and Danijela Kulezic-Wilson, 245–260. New York: Palgrave Macmillan.
Getman, Jessica. 2021. “Playing with Sound: Fan Engagement with the Soundtrack of
Twin Peaks: The Return (2017).” In Music in Twin Peaks: Listen to the Sounds, edited by
Reba A. Wissner and Katherine M. Reed, 34–47. New York: Routledge.
Gitelman, Lisa. 1999. Scripts, Grooves and Writing Machines: Representing Technology in
the Edison Era. Stanford: Stanford University Press.
Gorbman, Claudia. 1987. Unheard Melodies: Narrative Film Music. Bloomington: Indiana
University Press.
Greene, Liz. 2012. “Bringing Vinyl into the Digital Domain: Aesthetics in David Lynch’s
Inland Empire (2006).” The New Soundtrack 2, no. 2: 97–111.
Greene, Liz, and Danijela Kulezic-Wilson, eds. 2016. The Palgrave Handbook to Music and
Sound Design in Screen Media: Integrated Soundtracks. New York: Palgrave Macmillan.
Gunning, Tom. 2001. “Doing for the Eye What the Phonograph Does for the Ear.”
In The Sounds of Early Cinema, edited by Richard Abel and Rick Altman, 16–19.
Jameson, Fredric. 1991. Postmodernism: Or, the Cultural Logic of Late Capitalism. Indiana:
Duke University Press.
Janisse, Kier-La. 2017. “In Heaven Everything is Fine: Murder and Martyrdom in the
Lynchverse, from Peter Ivers to Laura Palmer.” Offscreen 21, nos. 11–12 (December).
https://offscreen.com/view/in-heaven-everything-is-fine
Jenkins, Henry F. 2006. Convergence Culture: Where Old and New Media Collide.
New York: New York University Press.
Jordan, Randolph. 2009. “The Visible Acousmêtre: Voice, Body and Space Across the Two
Versions of Donnie Darko.” Music, Sound and the Moving Image 3, no. 1 (Spring): 47–70.
Jordan, Randolph. 2012. “Schizophonographics: First Cut.” Of Sound Mind (October 26).
http://www.randolphjordan.com/schizophone/schizophonographics-first-cut-2/
Kalinak, Kathryn. 1995. “‘Disturbing the Guests with This Racket’: Music and Twin
Peaks.” In Full of Secrets: Critical Approaches to Twin Peaks, edited by David Lavery,
82–92. Detroit: Wayne State University Press.
Kane, Dean. 2014. Sound Unseen: Acousmatic Sound in Theory and Practice. New York:
Oxford University Press.
Kerins, Mark. 2011. Beyond Dolby (Stereo): Cinema in the Digital Sound Age.
Kittler, Friedrich A. 1999. Gramophone, Film, Typewriter. Translated by Geoffrey
Winthrop-Young and Michael Wutz. Stanford: Stanford University Press.
Kulezic-Wilson, Danijela. 2015. The Musicality of Narrative Film. New York: Palgrave
Macmillan.
Kulezic- Wilson, Danijela. 2021. “The Erotics of Cinematic Listening.” In The
Oxford Handbook of Cinematic Listening, edited by Carlo Cenciarelli, 368– 384.
New York: Oxford University Press.
University Press.
Leeder, Murray. 2017. The Modern Supernatural and the Beginnings of Cinema. New York:
Palgrave Macmillan.
Mactaggart, Allister. 2010. The Film Paintings of David Lynch: Challenging Film Theory.
Bristol: Intellect.
Nochimson, Martha. 1997. The Passion of David Lynch: Wild at Heart in Hollywood.
Austin: University of Texas Press.
Peters, John Durham. 1999. Speaking into the Air: A History of the Idea of Communication.
Chicago: Chicago University Press.
Reeves, Jimmie L., et al. 1995. “Postmodernism and Television: Speaking of Twin Peaks.”
In Full of Secrets: Critical Approaches to Twin Peaks, edited by David Lavery, 173–195.
Detroit: Wayne State University Press.
Rennebohm, Kate. 2017. “You Can’t Go Home Again: Twin Peaks: The Return.”
Cinemascope 71 (Summer): 62–64.
Richardson, John. 2004. “Laura and Twin Peaks: Postmodern Parody and the Musical
Reconstruction of the Absent Femme Fatale.” In The Cinema of David Lynch: American
Dreams, Nightmare Visions, edited by Erica Sheen and Annette Davison, 77–92.
London: Wallflower Press.
Rothenbuhler, Eric W., and John Durham Peters. 1997. “Defining Phonography: An
Experiment in Theory.” Musical Quarterly 81, no. 2 (Summer): 252.
Schwartz, Hillel. 2011. Making Noise: From Babel to the Big Band and Beyond. New York:
Zone Books.
Sconce, Jeffrey. 2000. Haunted Media: Electronic Presence from Telegraphy to Television.
Silverman, Kaja. 1988. The Acoustic Mirror: The Female Voice in Psychoanalysis and
Cinema. Bloomington: Indiana University Press.
Sjogren, Britta. 2006. Into the Vortex: Female Voice and Paradox in Film. Chicago: University
of Illinois Press.
Stallings, Courtenay. 2020. Laura’s Ghost: Women Speak About Twin Peaks. Columbus:
Fayetteville Mafia Press.
Swain, Sara. 2017. “Circling the Void: Twin Peaks Returns.” Offscreen 21, nos. 11–12
(December). https://offscreen.com/view/circling-the-void-twin-peaks-return
Van Elferen, Isabella. 2012. “Dream Timbre: Notes on Lynchian Sound Design.” In Music,
Sound and Filmmakers: Sonic Style in Cinema, edited by James Wierzbicki, 175–188.
Wilson, Steven. 2021. “David Lynch’s Metaphysical Sound Design: The Acousmatic
Personification of Judy.” In Music in Twin Peaks: Listen to the Sounds, edited by Reba A.
Wissner and Katherine M. Reed, 149–162. New York: Routledge.
Wissner, Reba A., and Katherine M. Reed, eds. 2021. Music in Twin Peaks: Listen to the
Sounds. New York: Routledge.
5
Unsettled Listening
Tracking Vancouver’s Contested Acoustic Profiles
across Media
A mother and son of First Nations ancestry sit in the waiting area of a meth-
adone clinic in the Downtown Eastside neighborhood of Vancouver, British
Columbia, Canada. Their attention is directed toward an offscreen TV. A car-
toon plays, featuring an instrumental version of “I’ve Been Working on the
Railroad” that mingles with the operating sounds of the clinic and ambience
from the street outside. The tune is punctuated by a metal clinking sound at
the beginning of each bar, calling to mind the sound of driving railway spikes
that once echoed just down the street, the City of Vancouver having been in-
corporated in 1886 as the western terminus of the Canadian Pacific Railway
(CPR), accelerating the cycle of state-sanctioned erasure of Indigenous title
to the land. The familiar voice of Bugs Bunny chimes in: “Uh, what’s all the
hubbub, bub?”1
As it happens, there is much hubbub indeed. The scene appears one third
of the way through Antoine Bourges’ film East Hastings Pharmacy (2012),
a quasi-documentary set entirely within this clinic, staging interactions be-
tween methadone patients (played by locals and informed by their real-life
experiences) and the resident pharmacist (played by actress Shauna Hansen).
Vancouver’s Downtown Eastside, notorious for its concentration of transients
and public drug use, is also home to the largest community of Indigenous
peoples within the city limits—a product of the long history of dispossession
in the surrounding areas that forced people from many First Nations, with no
place else to go, to concentrate in the heart of the inner city. The juxtaposition
of the auditory railway construction motif and the image of the Native couple
in the methadone clinic is profoundly unsettling. The fact that we are hearing
a location recording of this couple listening to a Hollywood fabrication of the
sounds that symbolize their loss of title to the Vancouver area is all too appro-
priate in a city that would come to be known as Hollywood North—more fa-
mous as a stand-in for myriad other parts of the world than for representing
DOI: 10.1093/oso/9780190226077.003.0006
itself—its regional specificity endlessly overwritten with narratives that hide

the city and its Indigenous presence from public awareness. The film’s status
as independent production amidst the environment of regular industrial
shooting in the area is marked by the intersection of studio-fabricated sound
effects and direct sound recording here, further complicated by the film’s own
hybrid of fiction and documentary modes. This hybridity speaks to the com-
plexity of overlapping filmmaking practices in Vancouver today, a situation
that mirrors the intersecting claims to land use and cultural propriety within
the streets of Vancouver’s Downtown Eastside. As such, this example stands
as a rich indicator of the ways in which listening can attune us to the complex
relationships between films and the places in which they are produced.
In this chapter I extend the premises of acoustic profiling, that have
governed all my analyses in this book, to function as a mode of listening to
soundtracks in an unsettling way so that we may better hear the integration of
film and place. Vancouver makes a particularly fruitful case study to explore
how this works. In her essay “Thoughts on Making Places: Hollywood North
and the Indigenous City,” filmmaker Kamala Todd stresses how media can as-
sist the process of re-inscribing local stories into Vancouver’s consciousness
(2013). East Hastings Pharmacy is one such example, lending some screen
time to urban Natives in the twenty-first century city. But Todd reminds us
that audiences also have a responsibility “to learn the stories of the land”
that have been actively erased in dominant media practices, and to bring
this knowledge to our experience of the city in all its incarnations (9). Todd’s
call resonates with a process that critical geographer Nicholas Blomley calls
“unsettling the city” in his book of the same name (2004). Blomley reveals
Vancouver as a site of continual contestation and mobility across generations
and cultural groups, and calls for an “unsettled” approach that can account
for the multiple overlapping patterns of use that are concealed by “settled”
concepts of bounded property. He advocates for ways of thinking about sites
in the city through histories that have been obscured, a way to “re-place”
them by revealing the places that they were and continue to be underneath
the veneer of settlement (145). While Blomley doesn’t address sound in his
book, Dylan Robinson offers a corollary listening practice extending from
Martin Daughtry’s concept of “contrapuntal perception (hearing simulta-
neous contextual layers),” reoriented as a “practice of oscillation (moving be-
tween layers of positionality)” in order to “find greater levels of relationships
between the strata of positionality” (2020, 60). In these spirits, I will use the
term unsettled listening (Jordan 2014b) to describe a process of experiencing
Unsettled Listening 173
the city’s contextual layers by way of the layers of positionality presented in

media objects. An intermedial analysis of the city invites continual move-
ment through a variety of listening positions framed by others so that we may
not only learn to hear from the ears of others, but also to understand our own
relationship to these alternate positions. Rick Altman taught us to hear any
given sound event as a narrative by listening for the auditory markers of its
propagation through physical space, and recording media, over time (1992).
Unsettled listening invites us to hear through these physical properties of
mediatic space to the resonating stories revealed by the overlapping and con-
tradictory histories and patterns of use to which these spaces are put, all too
often unacknowledged in the wake of settler colonialism.
The practice of acoustic profiling will now move into the domain of
assessing community representation in films that engage, in one way or an-
other, with real-world locations and the people that live there. Here I com-
bine acoustic ecology’s notion of the acoustic profile with a more general
definition of profiling as a means of extrapolating information about some-
thing based on its known characteristics. As discussed in the introduction
to this book, acoustic ecology has used the idea of acoustic profile to define
the spatial boundaries of acoustic communities (Truax 2001, 66), bound to-
gether by common experience of the same sounds, as in the way parishes of
old have been defined by the auditory limits of the church bell. Barry Truax
extends this idea of acoustic community to examine not only listening but
also communication by way of sound, offering a model for exploring the rich
interplay of sounds within the limits of the profile that defines the area in
which community exists. However, as I will discuss shortly, the geographical
bias of this approach frequently excludes attention to the diversity that might
exist within the community in question. When defining a community ac-
cording to sonic geography it is thus essential to consider the constituents of
that community and what it is that they are hearing when listening together
to a given sound. Therefore, my aim here is to plug the static object of the
acoustic profile into the active process of community profiling that attends to
the intersectional diversity within a given geography.
In the pages that follow, I elaborate on how acoustic profiling works to
unsettle listening through an intermedial analysis of Vancouver by way of
its representation across a variety of media, particularly the sound doc-
umentation of the World Soundscape Project (WSP), the foundational
project of the field of acoustic ecology that was born at Simon Fraser
University (SFU) in the early 1970s under the direction of composer
R. Murray Schafer. As exemplified in East Hastings Pharmacy, the sound

of trains is particularly loaded in Vancouver, and these sounds figured
prominently in the WSP’s construction of Vancouver’s sonic identity. Their
sound-based methodology yields valuable ways of thinking about urban
issues and their manifestation in the media. Yet their mythology reveals
a Eurocentric nostalgia for the days of settler colonialism, particularly
when listening to the sound of industrial transportation. I demonstrate
how listening to the sound of trains across the history of Vancouver’s film
production, informed by both the strengths and weaknesses of the WSP’s
methodology, yields an alternative history of the city’s soundscape on film
that reveals dimensions of local film practices and their intersection with
the city’s famous diversity unheard in the documentation of the WSP. By
bringing issues of auditory representation from film and media studies to
bear on the practices of the WSP, I unsettle their recordings to reveal the
richness of the city’s urban complexity and the ideologies governing their
practices of documentation. This intermedial approach opens a new set of
media documents to the WSP’s ongoing research into the soundscape of
Vancouver past and present, while offering film sound studies a new set of
tools to listen to films across a variety of research areas.
I begin this chapter by detailing the process of acoustic profiling more spe-
cifically around issues of community representation, and then considering
how one particularly loaded sound, that of the train, casts its profile across
Vancouver—and British Columbia at large—through a variety of media
representations. I start with an examination of how the WSP has staged
the presence of train sounds in their archival recordings, literature, phono-
graphic recordings, and radio broadcasts of the early 1970s to demonstrate
their single-minded approach to defining one branch of Canadian culture
around an imagined acoustic community defined by the shared experience
of this sound. I will then move to an examination of three sets of films that
make prominent use of trains to build an alternative history of their audi-
bility in the Vancouver soundscape to inform my running critique of the
WSP I’ll start with representations of early twentieth century train life in and
around Vancouver and the tendency toward whitewashing the relationship
between this transportation technology and the Indigenous, Chinese, and
Japanese laborers who laid the tracks and were then forgotten. Next I con-
sider films that engage with this period through to the 1960s with an em-
phasis on the shifting status of labor around trains, from booming resource
economy through Depression-era hardship and then the conflicting effects
of urbanization in a city that increasingly rewarded white collar labor while

pushing the resource industry well out of town, leaving a certain class of
people stranded in the process. We’ll then land back in the early 1970s to
consider films by David Rimmer and Sylvia Spring that engage with the lived
reality of downtown Vancouver in the same era that the WSP was making
their first wave of recordings to reveal a dramatically more heterogeneous
understanding of the city and its sociopolitical dynamics as they coalesced
around the presence of trains. Finally I conclude by considering how the dis-
appearance of train sounds from the Vancouver environment, lamented by
the WSP as a precursor to the loss of the community they imagined, actually
marks a return of Indigenous title to lands once taken away by the railway
itself.
Acoustic Profiling
In the previous chapters I have worked through various angles on the con-
cept of fidelity, shifting its hi-fi stereo culture emphasis on the notion of
media transparency through to the authenticity opened up by performa-
tive documentary practices, the faithfulness of empathetic friendship ar-
ticulated by sonic space, and the myth of vanishing mediation revealed by
schizophonography in the cinema. In this final chapter I’d like to propose
a new take, one that is tied specifically to a peculiar conflation of ideas in
Schafer’s evocation of the language of mid-century hi-fi stereo culture. Early
acoustic ecology held the idea of schizophonia as a negative consequence of
the electroacoustical transmission of sound, a position that has been roundly
critiqued for its failure to account for the medial nature of human engage-
ment with the world. Particularly interesting, however, is how schizophonia
is bound up with Schafer’s notion of the hi-fi soundscape, equating fidelity
not only with a strong signal-to-noise ratio but also with the ability of sounds
to travel a long way in an environment without being masked by density
(1977, 43). The greater the distance from which we can hear any given sound,
the greater the fidelity of the sound environment. This is an instructive con-
flation of fidelity and geographical range when considering the value of the
acoustic profile concept: fidelity, in this construction, can map community.
For my purposes here, this notion of fidelity can account for the way that
sound within a given acoustic profile can articulate the communities that
hear it.
Acoustic profiling formalizes the process of framing the issue of fidelity

around the goal of unsettling a given geographical region to reveal con-
tinually shifting and multiple listener groups within. When applied to the
analysis of sound media, the task is to hear how sound is used to establish
a location, and then assess how faithful the staging of sound within this lo-
cation might be to the communities that occupy the space. Tying the idea
of the acoustic profile to the notion of faithful representation of a listening
community offers a way of assessing fidelity on the basis of unsettling. As
such, acoustic profiling as a mode of listening in film involves a cluster
of activities. First, identify how a particular sound—or set of sounds—
articulates the boundaries of a geographical region through its acoustic ho-
rizon, and what communities occupy this space. Second, in any given film
or media produced in this region, listen for moments where auditory ex-
tension is used to define this acoustic profile. Third, identify how the spatial
signature helps define the geographic particularity of these sounds and the
point-of-audition from which these sounds are being presented. Fourth,
identify possible ideological listening positions that the presentation of the
sounds construct or refer to. Fifth, compare and contrast differing possible
perspectives through the analysis of other media materials that engage the
same profile region.
The result of the acoustic profiling exercise is to provide an alternative
way of thinking about what constitutes fidelity in the representation of
location in film when we have the goal of hearing the space with unset-
tled ears. In turn, unsettled listening provides a means of acknowledging
the specifics of settler positionality through listening practice, an essen-
tial factor in resisting the idea of the “settler” as a fixed identity that “risks
reifying a cohesive and essentialist form of subjectivity that does not take
into account subtle gradations of relationship, history, and experience”
(Robinson 2020, 39). For Dylan Robinson, the benefits of acknowledging
the particularities of one’s own settler positionality, and its differences from
other settler positions, is in making the work of unsettling into “a process
or state that fundamentally guides our actions and perception” (29). As we
listen to the sounds of trains through a variety of settler positions in this
chapter, we must also reflect on our own position within the deep layering
of overlapping experiences that are revealed through this intermedial anal-
ysis, and understand that this layering is a living entity, ever changing and
requiring sustained vigilance around our ongoing roles in the settling of
the lands we occupy.
Acoustic profiling reveals an informative tension between what I have pre-

viously called “space replacement” in film sound design (2007, 132) and the
notion of “re-placing” space as a mode of recovering lost histories of specific
locations that have been overwritten by colonial processes of property in-
scription (Jordan 2018). Imported film treatments of a place like Vancouver
follow the same principle, overwriting local specificity with its new script for
space. East Hastings Pharmacy employs this strategy when filling the space of
the Vancouver methadone clinic with sound produced in Hollywood decades
prior. This replacement becomes literal when we learn that Bourges added
the cartoon soundtrack in post-production, along with the ambient sound
meant to reflect the street life outside.2 Referring to this kind of overwriting
as space replacement serves as both critique of, and engagement with, critical
tensions in the World Soundscape Project’s relationship to recording tech-
nology. In recognizing the artificial construction of auditory space in such an
example, the opportunity to re-place this space opens up to the unsettled ear
that listens for how the constructed soundscape engages with particularities
of real-world place.
Space replacement in films shares an ideological goal of modernist ar-
chitectural design sought to compartmentalize space discussed at length
in Chapter 1 on Jacques Tati’s film Playtime, to create quiet and neutral
soundscapes that can be managed independently of the environment that
surrounds them. In practice, perfect sonic isolation of a real-world space, and
its infusion with a technologically imported soundscape, is possible under
only the most ideal circumstances (such as an anechoic chamber at an insti-
tutional research facility). Schafer’s notion of schizophonia imagines a kind
of dystopia where such conditions prevail in daily life and end up disorienting
people to the point of mental aberration. Space replacement describes the
logical conclusion of schizophonia, much maligned for its anti-technological
stance and proliferation of negative stereotypes of neurodivergence. Schafer’s
concept also points to a contradiction in his attitude toward technology,
given that he championed the use of sound recording as a mode of documen-
tation and analysis in the early days of the World Soundscape Project. He
wanted to have his cake and eat it too, prescribing sound recording as a mode
of objective documentation that functions unobtrusively in relation to the
spaces it occupies, while decrying the use of sound technology to reconstruct
these very same occupied spaces.
Of course neither extreme, of unmediated documentation or total re-
placement of a sonic environment, is truly possible. A sound recordist can
only pretend to remain at a distance from their gear and the location they oc-
cupy together. Sound technology does not “reproduce” that which it records
(Lastra 2000, 153), nor can media “vanish” from the process of representa-
tion (Sterne 2003, 218). Media, and its operators, always reveal their hand
when engaging with place. At the same time, however, media engagement
with place does not automatically constitute a distanciation from that place
either. The distance between a location and the way it sounds in a piece of
media is a function of the critical stance of the media-makers themselves; for
Westerkamp, acknowledging the relationship between a sound recordist and
their recording environment is the very basis of linking soundscape com-
position to acoustic ecology (2002). Importantly, the very idea of a partic-
ular location can be invented through the process of media engagement, as
Michel De Certeau asserts when he argues that we write place by occupying
space (1984, 93). To understand how media engages with place, we must not
fall back on simple comparison between some imagined objective reality and
the pieces of media that constitute an apparently impoverished reflection of
this reality. Rather, we need an intermedial approach that recognizes that it
is in the relationship between differing stories of place that we can critically
assess what constitutes that place to begin with. To do this, we need to under-
stand how all places are continually overwritten and replaced by competing
practices, uses, and representations.
In films, space replacement is not only possible, but standard practice.
The idea of space replacement is valuable as a way of describing an aes-
thetic strategy in film sound design, in which a given represented space can
be supplanted by a shift on the soundtrack. Charting space replacements
in work shot on location is one way to navigate how space is constructed in
any given film, and to understand the filmmakers’ approach to place when
representing real-world locations. Space replacement as a sound design
strategy becomes politicized in the case of cross-cultural treatments of a par-
ticular place, all the way from foreign productions to overlapping claims to
space by local groups on the ground. To hear these overlapping treatments of
place we need to rethink how the schizophonic replacement of a sound en-
vironment by way of film sound design offers a path to understanding how
the distance between where one is and how it sounds can actually proffer
a heightened critical engagement with these places. Space replacement as
a sound design strategy can unsettle a place and open it up to multiple lis-
tening positions, re-placing them with the histories that form the basis of
those positions in the first place.
Acoustic Profiling on Vancouver’s Downtown Eastside
Let us consider East Hastings Pharmacy here in more detail. The cartoon
that Bourges added to the sound environment of the methadone clinic is
Robert Clampett’s Falling Hare (1943), a good example of the noted his-
tory of cross-departmental production integration at the Warner Bros.’
cartoon studios. The scene in question comes around two minutes into the
film when a gremlin begins whacking the nose of a live bomb in time with
the instrumental “I’ve Been Working on the Railroad” in an attempt to do
away with enemy Bugs seated on top. With the image in play we under-
stand from the beginning that the clinking sound is an allusion to railway
construction from a different source depicted on screen, and in the pro-
duction context this sound is just as likely to have been produced by one of
music orchestrator Carl Stalling’s percussionists as by sound effects editor
Treg Brown. This integration can be heard in the way that the music’s un-
spoken reference to railway construction charges each clink with the con-
notation of hammer on spike. James Lastra would say (by way of Christian
Metz) that the clinking sound is “legible” as hammer on spike for the ease
with which the sound can be recognized as emanating from this implied
source (126). But this legibility is premised upon a lack of specificity that
also allows the sound to become interchangeable with something else, as is
the case in this cartoon. East Hastings Pharmacy capitalizes on this inter-
changeability by re-inscribing the clinking sound’s railway connotations,
first by stripping the original image and then by presenting this sound in
the context of the dire social realities of Vancouver’s Downtown Eastside
as the city’s sanctioned corral for the markers of urban poverty—and
indigeneity—that officials don’t want to spill out across the neighborhood’s
increasingly gentrified perimeter, which DTES residents have fought hard
to keep at bay to preserve their long-standing community (Shier 2002, 11).
As one of a string of Warner Bros. cartoons placed in the service of
WWII propaganda, the Falling Hare soundtrack also resonates with war-
time xenophobia and imperialist expansion, branches of the same pathos
that leads to the effacing of Indigenous culture from the consciousness
of colonizing peoples. In Vancouver, this has taken the form of what Jean
Barman (2007) calls “erasing Indigenous Indigeneity,” the process of
chasing the area’s original peoples off the land while importing Aboriginal
artifacts from elsewhere to maintain a Native chic deemed safe for im-
migrant consumption (as when the city paid “homage” to the vacated
Squamish residents of downtown Vancouver’s Stanley Park by erecting

Kwakiutl totem poles imported from 200km north on Vancouver Island)
(26). This is an interchangeability of cultural heritage premised upon a
lack of specificity, the same quality that allows “legible” sound effects to
become synchretic with a variety of implied sources. This process is not
unlike the interchangeability of urban spaces when shooting Vancouver
for Seattle, New York, or Frankfurt, emphasizing generic qualities of
globalized urbanization while suppressing recognizable soundmarks from
the mix (such as the persistent sound of float plane propellers that popu-
late Vancouver harbor, the grinding and screeching of trains in the down-
town railyards, or the regular horn blasts from the local ferry runs just
north of the city). As we’ll hear, such interchangeability has also proven
a viable strategy for local productions telling local stories, a tool for re-
placing space against the grain of bias toward location-derived recordings
as marker of authenticity (Ruoff, 27–29).
The high-concept legibility of Warner Bros.’ sound effects—used in Falling
Hare to play on listener’s expectations to comic effect—is further unsettled
by its presentation within the context of documentary sound conventions
in East Hastings Pharmacy. Bourges’ film commits to regional specificity in
part through the use of location sound recording. While Bourges stages the
action inside the clinic, the film features location recordings of the rich street
life audible and visible through the clinic’s windows that proceeds unaffected
by the cameras and microphones. This situation is all the more potent given
that the location-recorded cartoon soundtrack and ambient sound effects
were added in post-production, and so represent a highly conscious attempt
to channel the acoustic environment according to the conventions of “au-
thentic” sound in documentary film.
While the film uses location recording as a conscious stylistic choice to
evoke documentary convention, it does so to engage meaningfully with the
social situation in the Downtown Eastside, underlining Michel Chion’s point
that “rendered” film sound—fabricated in studio to evoke the qualities of a
particular space—is just as capable of engaging the world authentically (or
inauthentically) as “real” sound captured on location (95–98). By presenting
this Hollywood cartoon as an embedded element within the soundscape of
the clinic, using a provocative mix of location sound and studio fabrication,
East Hastings Pharmacy unsettles Hollywood’s usual practice of erasing local
specificity, inviting us to think of runaway projects in the context of their for-
eign spaces of production and the local media practices that sit next to them.
Finally, this intersection of sonic styles points to the complex relationships

that exist between the domains of independent and industrial production
around Vancouver. In his book Hollywood North (2002), Mike Gasher argues
for thinking about filmmaking in British Columbia as a resource industry,
pointing to how the provincial government has offered business incentives
for foreign film production similar to those in place for activities like logging
and fishing. Here we can consider how the local film industry might follow
the same unsustainable patterns of extraction as other resource industries,
all premised upon wilful ignorance of Indigenous uses of the land. Yet, as
David Spaner charts in Dreaming in the Rain (2003), the ability to make inde-
pendent films in Vancouver has become largely intertwined with the availa-
bility of Hollywood-oriented industrial resources in town. Just as Hollywood
didn’t erase the independent film, colonization didn’t erase Indigenous
presence.
East Hastings Pharmacy offers a powerful example of how we can prac-
tice unsettled listening on the staged sound of Falling Hare, devoid of local
context and connected to the railway only by inference, to reveal a rich in-
tegration with regional specificity as the cartoon’s auditory resonances ac-
cumulate within its new spaces of propagation. In this way we can hear local
media through its transnational network, including the First Nations, to
understand the overlaps between seemingly contradictory modes of being
within the city. In so doing, we can also hear through the misrepresentation
of the Downtown Eastside as “Canada’s worst neighborhood” (Sommers
and Blomley 2002, 19) to the strength of the community that has long
characterized the area for anyone who scratches the surface, an important
first step along the path to unsettling the city as a whole.
Staging Trains in the World Soundscape Project
It is useful here to consider space replacement in films as a form of

“staging,” following the work of Karin Bijsterveld and her colleagues in
their collaborative anthology Soundscapes of the Urban Past (2013). The
authors argue that hearing history through the media offers tremendous
and largely untapped potential to offer new depth to our understanding of
specific places across time. They draw on some of the tools developed by the
World Soundscape Project, such as their classification of sound into sig-
nals, keynotes, and soundmarks, to aid their analyses while also critiquing
the WSP’s pretensions toward objectivity in their documentation practices.

The key challenge the authors pose is to understand that sound in radio,
film, television, etc. is always staged for specific purposes, and that these
purposes are often specific to the medium for which the sound is produced.
The same holds true for the WSP’s own documents, no less staged in their
attempts at transparency. By bringing attention to the formal and aesthetic
qualities of staging, and situating these within the cultural and historical
contexts of production, rich comparisons can then be made across media
to flesh out the roles that such media play in establishing the dynamics of
particular places at any given historical moment. Thus re-placing a locale
by way of overwriting its cinematic soundscape can be understood as a
mode of staging, and in this way we can understand mediation as a form
of unsettled engagement. I will demonstrate how this works through an as-
sessment of the role of train sounds for the WSP and acoustic ecology more
generally before moving onto a history of trains in the Vancouver sound-
scape on film.
Let’s begin by traveling a bit south of Vancouver to Washington State,
home of Gordon Hempton, one of the world’s most active proponents of cer-
tain tenets of acoustic ecology. He makes his living recording the sounds of
the world and advocating for the preservation of quiet in places like his des-
ignated “one square inch of silence,” a spot in Washington’s Olympic National
Park that has the lowest ambient noise levels he has been able to find and
document within the United States (2009). He laments the fact that there is
scarcely a place on Earth where you can listen for longer than fifteen minutes
without hearing a passing aircraft (13). As it happens, however, he’s got a
weak spot for the sound of trains.
The documentary film Soundtracker (dir. Nick Sherman, 2010) follows
Hempton on a mission to record the singing of a meadowlark in conjunction
with the rush of a passing train. He gushes over the value he ascribes to the
train sound:
There’s a certain feeling I get when I hear a train. They put out a lot of
sound and then there’s an echo that comes back and it helps define the
space. You know, that’s what a loud diesel truck does, that’s what a jet does,
but it doesn’t really give you information about that space, it . . . almost
violates the space. There’s something about a train as it passes through
and the way the horn goes off that it just reveals and then you know where
you are.
Hempton has no official affiliation with acoustic ecology or the World

Soundscape Project, but the notion of sound’s capacity to reveal the places we
occupy is crucial to the field whose main research goals have been to under-
stand the auditory ecosystems of specific geographic locales. For Hempton
and the WSP alike, practice is based on recording the sounds of the environ-
ment for the purposes of documentation and analysis. For Hempton, the use
of recording as a tool to assist the revelation of place comes with a very strict
ideology governing his practices in the field. In his own words:
Some people might wonder, “Well if you want a bird and train in proper
balance, why don’t you get a train recording and a bird recording and mix
it in the studio?” And I look at that person and I think to myself, “What a
frickin’ idiot.” What would that person think if they were looking at a pho-
tograph that had the moon taken from one part of the world, and the forest
from another part of the world, and a mountain from another part of the
world, and made the perfect picture? Because it wouldn’t be any kind of a
perfect picture, it would be a stupid picture because it wouldn’t be about
where we are.
It’s instructive to note the connection between the single-take approach to

recording and making work that is “about where we are.” He calls his pieces
“sound portraits,” and he goes to great length and expense to find just the
right spots from which to create these portraits. Here he is very much in line
with the early media practices of the WSP, whose recordings for the purposes
of documentation and analysis became the first stages of the field’s main ar-
tistic offshoot known as soundscape composition. As I charted in the intro-
duction to this book, the WSP shifted from single-take recording practice
with no overt acknowledgment of their staging practices to highly reflexive
modes of sound composition using their single-take field recordings as the
building blocks for highly composited works. Hempton occupies an in-
triguing middle ground here, open about his conscious shaping of the bal-
ance between elements he records as “portraits” while adamant that this
balance be achieved in situ. We can find evidence of similar thinking in the
WSP on some of their recordings, such as a recording made from the CN Pier
on March 12, 1973, in which the catalog notes indicate an appreciation for
how this particular recording allows for a rich interplay of elements in mo-
tion from the train yards, rain, the blast of Vancouver’s nine o’clock gun, in
which “signal patterns of whistles and bells appear in continually changing
spatial perspective.”3 This is the kind of detail that film sound designers would
build in the mix for the same aesthetic effect, here captured in a single-take
location recording. It’s instructive that the aesthetic results are appreciated
in a compositional fashion while the production practices are rooted in the
ideology of location.
The sounds of trains figured prominently in the WSP’s Soundscapes of
Canada series produced for CBC Radio in 1974, positioning them as a set
of sounds that Canadians had in common, a traveling soundmark that ex-
tended an acoustic profile from coast to coast. In program three, “Signals,
Keynotes, and Soundmarks,” Schafer begins a discussion of the significance
behind the sounds of these vehicles by playing us a typical whistle blast and
asking how many Canadians would know exactly what this familiar sound
means. In this example he is addressing the function of whistle blasts as sig-
nals that send messages to listeners—in this case, the announcement of a level
crossing. Yet other levels of meaning are also important to the WSP team. In
particular, they often emphasize sound’s power to reveal the qualities of the
natural and built environments of a place. In one example Bruce Davis calls
our attention to how train whistles in Vancouver’s rail yard activate the city-
scape that surrounds it, asking listeners to “Notice the way the echoed sound
answers back with a different version of the original chord as it bounces off
the buildings around the yard.” Here they get specific to the Vancouver con-
text of the yard, which differs from other cities, and they frame the recording
to emphasize the ways in which the spatial signature of the place is revealed
by the sounds of the trains. This is very close to Gordon Hempton’s sentiment
concerning the power of the train’s whistle to let us know where we are.
While the previous example addresses the physical properties of geo-
graphical space and the built environment, the WSP was also interested in
a symbolic dimension to sound, tying the disappearance of certain sounds
to the degradation of culture. Indeed, Schafer and the WSP have made a big
deal out of changes to the design of signals like train whistles and foghorns
over the decades, and what this means for the cultures that held them dear. In
Schafer’s concluding words to “Signals, Keynotes, and Soundmarks” he says,
It takes time for a sound to take on rich, symbolic character—a lifetime per-
haps, or even centuries. This is why soundmarks should not be tampered
with carelessly. Change the soundmarks of a culture and you erase its his-
tory and mythology. Myths take many forms. Sounds have a mythology
too. Without a mythology a culture dies.
Yet in defining a certain branch of Canadian culture around soundmarks like

trains, the WSP necessarily exclude much else.
In fact, we could very easily flip the discussion to consider how the very
presence of these sounds marks the degradation of so many other cultural
streams present in Vancouver but unacknowledged by the WSP. As Mitchell
Akiyama puts it, “created at a time when Canada’s immigrant populations
were exploding, when Indigenous activists were making important strides
toward state recognition, Soundscapes of Canada was perhaps most notable
for whom and what it left out” (2019, 115). Akiyama presents a thorough
analysis of the Soundscapes of Canada radio program with an ear for its
strategies of exclusion to create one version of Canadian national identity,
which he ties to Benedict Anderson’s term unisonance as a mode of rallying
patriotism around common sounds (like national anthems) (119). Akiyama
argues that there is an interesting tension at work between the WSP’s com-
mitment to regional specificity through attention to local soundmarks,
supported by their emphasis on the content of recordings made on location,
and their desire to turn these into symbols of national unity through tools of
broadcasting. These tensions can be found operating in their regional work
as well, such as their Vancouver case-study in which they attempt to extrapo-
late a city-wide community from locally sourced sounds. I will consider this
Vancouver work more specifically now.
In the accompanying booklet to their LP release of The Vancouver
Soundscape (1973), a few pages of “earwitness” accounts of the quietude of
early settlement in the area are followed by E. Pauline Johnson recounting a
Native legend about the inevitable conquest by the “white man” and then a
dramatic announcement: “After the silence . . . the city was born,” illustrated
with a full-page picture of a logging train emerging from an old growth forest
towing a full load of lumber (World Soundscape Project 1973, 8–10). This
equation of the boundaries of the city being drawn through technologies of
industrial transportation inflects the sonic narrative they put together on
the record, and here we find a telling example of how the WSP have chosen
to represent Indigenous voices. The first of the two LPs in the original re-
lease constructs an acoustic narrative of Vancouver’s wilderness past and
its transformation into major urban center. It begins with several tracks of
ocean sounds, each fading in and out to suggest their status as fixed perspec-
tive single-take recordings rather than composition. This is the world as it
was, they seem to be saying. Then they fade in on the sounds of birds and a
trickling stream, and here the voice of Tsleil-Waututh elder Herbert George
emerges, speaking in his native tongue about the process of building canoes,
sprinkled with some English when referring to the “white man’s tools” used
in contemporary practice (1973). Midway through his monologue he is in-
terrupted by the sound of a passing seaplane, which momentarily drowns
out his voice, and those of the birds, after which the monologue continues
in its untarnished Edenic idyll—until a foghorn blast indicates a shift to the
fully built environment of the modern city. For the remainder of the side,
the sounds focus on the harbor through bustling commuter voices on a local
ferry that docks amidst crisscrossing sea planes and blasting boat horns. It
is notable that here, on this first side of the LP, the sounds of trains are not
included in their portraiture of the lo-fi density of an urban harbor. Instead,
they open the second side of the LP with the sound of children playing down
by the CN Railway yards, our entryway into the city proper, the train whistles
granted special attention as musical sounds that carry deeper significance,
a clear example of the WSP’s selectivity in deciding which urban sounds
should be admonished and which should be celebrated.
I believe that the WSP was well intentioned in attempting to give voice
to the ancestors of the land while also railing against one of their least fa-
vorite modern-Vancouver sounds, the seaplane, a staple of the harbor town.
Yet as I have pointed out elsewhere (Jordan 2015 and 2017), the choice to mix
the disruptive sound of the seaplane into George’s monologue contributes
to the general trend of imagining the erasure of contemporary Indigenous
presence in the face of urbanization. For Hildegard Westerkamp, this “de-
liberate sound design decision . . . highlighted the fragility of human lan-
guage, of quiet and silence, and how easily these sounds and soundscapes
can be masked or destroyed by such powerful sounds as aeroplane motors”
(Westerkamp 2019, 55). But in making this choice, motivated by the WSP’s
particular ideas around good versus bad sound, they end up overwriting
George’s story of the land with their own. In this construction of the shift
from primordial wilderness and Indigenous culture to the arrival of civ-
ilization and its noise pollution we lose the fact that George’s very story,
here, is a marker of contemporary Indigenous culture operating amidst
the settlers: a continuing tradition of Indigenous canoe-building with non-
Indigenous tools. Instead, George’s story functions as a nod to past practice
now rendered obsolete by the noisy modern modes of transportation that
prevent him from being heard.
To the WSP’s credit, they were very clear about their compositional
strategies, with detailed liner notes about the separate recording elements
used to make up specific sequences on the record. “I remember that we

prided ourselves at the time of the transparency we offered to the listener,”
says Westerkamp, “wanting to demystify the editing or mixing process, in
order to make a clear distinction between listening directly to the environ-
ment and listening to recordings of soundscapes” (2019, 55). This is an im-
portant early marker of the interest in a reflexive approach to soundscape
composition that WSP members like Westerkamp and Barry Truax would go
on to be known for. However, there is another layer of potential transparency
that is clouded by the Herbert George segment, which has to do with the rela-
tionship between composition and the archive.
On The Vancouver Soundscape LP, George is only heard for a couple of
minutes during the track entitled “Squamish Narrative.” Yet the original
interview in the WSP archive, conducted by Bruce Davis on June 5, 1973,
is over forty-five minutes long.4 The interview is structured around Davis
asking George for place names in his native dialect with a push to record a
longer story of some kind, which proves challenging as George has trouble
recalling the language. Around all this, George speaks in English, offering
rich details about the relationship between his people and the changing status
of the land over the centuries. For one, George clarifies that he is of the Tsleil-
Waututh tribe, not Squamish as indicated by the WSP in their liner notes. He
also recounts a story about a warrior of legend who battled a double-headed
snake at the northern end of Burrard Inlet, gateway to the area we now
call Vancouver. Later he indicates that, during his mother’s time, this story
was co-opted by a local Catholic priest to explain how the railway passed
through a difficult blockage in the mountains to facilitate the arrival of the
missionaries in town, a telling admission about the intersection of local myth
and its manipulation by Christian settlers as means to accessing the land.
Davis eventually coaxes the canoe-building story out of George, and here we
can see the single-mindedness of the WSP at work: their mission was to doc-
ument an Indigenous language before it disappears, an example of the “sal-
vage paradigm—a false ascription of the inevitable extinction of Indigenous
cultural practices and the resultant desire to save them” (Robinson 2020,
153). And the compositional use of the canoe-building story on the record
matches the salvage impulse behind the recording session. In so doing, the
WSP omit a much richer account of the relationship between the railway and
Indigenous entanglement with missionary settlers, a story that challenges
the WSP’s taste for train sounds at the expense of seaplanes and other forms
of traffic.
So while the WSP might have been clear about how they deliberately
mixed the George segment from separate recordings of birds and voice, this
missed opportunity to engage more deeply with the realities of place speaks
to a lack of transparency in their selection process when composing from
their own archive of collected materials. In turn, this opens the question of
what the best use of this interview would have been then, and what it should
be now that it has been recently made available for public streaming through
the SFU library. For Dylan Robinson, such use should proceed in the spirit of
“ethnographic redress” and “compositional responsibility” (2020, 149–189),
to free the Indigenous voice from its containment in the settler archive and
make use of the recording in ways that would benefit George’s community.
In their negative characterization of certain kinds of urban industrial
sound while romanticizing others, the WSP staged their own communal
sensibility around what sounds constituted the Vancouver acoustic com-
munity with which they identified, and what its threats were. What they
miss, of course, is how their version of this acoustic community isn’t shared
within the profile charted by these sounds, particularly among those for
whom relationships to early Vancouver soundmarks like trains and foghorns
marked their own dispossession to the land. I will now investigate how other
media representations, particularly film soundtracks, can reveal alternative
relationships to the sound of trains that challenge the WSP’s staging, re-
vealing how even overtly fictionalized accounts of the city can provide access
to truths obscured in the documentary practices of early acoustic ecology.
Tracking Terminal City
The sound of trains is particularly significant for downtown Vancouver, born

as a railway town with the presence of trains defining the city in transform-
ative ways over its subsequent first century. With this profile established we
can then seek out films that use the sounds of trains within this region to
ask: What signatures do these sounds reveal in these films? What perspectives
do these signatures establish? What meanings are constructed through con-
scious or unconscious staging of sounds? And how can we listen for other
perspectives across time and sources of media? In short, what do other people
hear when they listen to the sound of trains in the Vancouver soundscape, and
how do these perspectives enrich other media representations that emerge
from the same acoustic profile? I will proceed in three sections, dealing first
with Vancouver’s early days as represented in documentary films that make

use of archival footage of train travel and first-person testimonials. My focus
will be on the relationship between the railroad and Vancouver’s Chinese
and Japanese communities, while questioning the role of sonifying images
of trains from the silent era in these historical reconstructions. Secondly,
I will examine a set of films dealing with the relationship between trains and
British Columbia’s resource industry, with particular attention to how these
later films make use of location sound recordings in their examination of the
shifting status of trains and labor in the province and its biggest city. Thirdly,
I will consider a pair of films by David Rimmer and Sylvia Spring that bring
us back to the Downtown Eastside in the early 1970s to reveal an unusually
pithy examination of social realities on the ground around the same time that
the WSP was making their first wave of recordings around the city, providing
alternative perspectives on the use of media technology to document real-
world space and the relationship between urban sound and the communities
that live with it on a daily basis. I will then conclude with the question of how
trains might articulate Indigenous presence in the city today.
Like the WSP, Vancouver filmmakers have also long been fascinated by
trains. In my opening example from East Hastings Pharmacy, I made a point
about the disappearance of the sound of railway construction coinciding with
the onset of massive land appropriation by way of the government’s dealings
with companies like the Canadian Pacific Railway. Provocatively, these were
also the days when filmmaking first came to the city. Lynn Kirby has provided
beautiful examples of how the railway and the cinema proceeded on “parallel
tracks” across the world in their early days (1997). There is no better example
than British Columbia (BC) to illustrate such close connection between
these technologies, the CPR itself being responsible for commissioning some
of the first films ever to be shot in the province.
Film historian Colin Browne reminds us of the CPR’s role in BC’s film his-
tory in his documentary The Image Before Us (1986). It was made in the year
of Expo ’86, the World’s Fair that many credit with putting Vancouver on
the world stage, fast-tracking much of the gentrification that has been hotly
contested over the decades, and providing an environment that would lead to
Vancouver as permanent home for Hollywood North. The film highlights the
function of filmmaking in these early days as closely tied to the tourism in-
dustry, constructing images of Vancouver and its surrounding areas designed
specifically for this purpose (Browne 2000, 88–89). As Browne shows us a va-
riety of excerpts from the earliest days of filmmaking in the region, all tied to
trains in one way or another, the narrator explains, “Over the years, scenes
like this helped define the familiar image of the Canadian West. If you saw
enough movies, you’d begin to think you had a pretty good idea about what a
place was like. With the help of the movies, Vancouver came to be seen less as
a sort of genteel stopover and more as a destination in itself.” In the absence
of any major entertainment film industry in town until the 1970s, this meant
that the images that the rest of Canada and the world saw of BC for most
of the twentieth century were tourist propaganda pieces. This staging of the
region’s image for consumption abroad was inextricably linked to the dispos-
session of Indigenous peoples and non-European immigrants at the hands of
the railway company that claimed much of the land and commissioned the
films. So it is that Vancouver cinema was born to provide a particular image
of the city designed to benefit the corporation that essentially owned the
town and sought to profit from tourist dollars. This is an important begin-
ning for a provincial cinema that has long been handled by the government
as one of the region’s resource industries along with logging, fishing, mining,
and the like (Gasher 2002).
Browne’s film depends upon the perceived authenticity of the archival
images he presents, while making a point about how these images have been
staged for a corporate vision of Vancouver. Significantly, the fidelity of the
film’s engagement with Vancouver is revealed by the soundtrack. The reflexive
voiceover invites us to question the veracity of the images on the level of how
they were staged. In this context, the addition of train sounds to sonorize the
silent footage is loaded with questions that face all artists and researchers
attempting to reconstruct the soundscapes of the past, also a favorite activity
of the WSP. In The Vancouver Soundscape booklet, the WSP built a narrative
around the role of the train in establishing the city, and setting the sound-
scape of its earliest days as the baseline against which encroaching modernity
would instill an increasingly lo-fi environment, disrupting the soundmarks
whose acoustic profiles helped establish Vancouver as a community (World
Soundscape Project 1973). Without recordings of these early days, the WSP
was left with the same options as any filmmaker working on a period piece
to imagine what it sounded like. From the information they gleaned through
their own research, the WSP might well have criticized Browne’s choice of
train sounds as inauthentic to details of period machinery and location-
specific signatures. Yet like the cartoon sound in East Hastings Pharmacy
with which I began this chapter, the rather generic quality of Browne’s train
sounds assists the process of unsettling the images under critique in the film
to illustrate the reality that, from the very beginning, Vancouver has been
staged in the media to enhance certain aspects of its social and geographical
specificity while erasing others.
Browne’s concern is general to Vancouver’s position in the imagination of
Canada and North America, replacing silent soundtracks in order to re-place
the location about which the film is concerned. Filmmaker Karen Cho brings
cultural specificity to questioning the fidelity of re-imagining the recorded
past in her documentary In the Shadow of Gold Mountain (2004). Here she
explores the neglected history of the thousands of Chinese workers who built
the railroad (alongside Japanese and First Nations colleagues) imported as
cheap labor and left too broke to return home upon completion, only to be
ostracized by the Canadian government through state-sanctioned immigra-
tion and citizenship restrictions in an attempt to erase the history of their
contribution to shaping the country until well after World War II. It seems ap-
propriate that Vancouver’s Chinatown was established nearby the downtown
railyards, intersecting with the Downtown Eastside, parallel communities
founded upon dispossession. As we watch archival images of Canadian train
travel from the early twentieth century, we hear a recitation of F. R. Scott’s
1966 poem All Spikes but the Last: “Where are the thousands from China
who swung their picks with bare hands at forty below? Between the first and
the million other spikes they drove and the dressed-up act of Donald Smith,
who has sung their story?” Referring to the famous image of CPR co-founder
Donald Smith posing with hammer over the final spike in the transconti-
nental railway (an image that persists to this day as background image to
one page in the current Canadian passport, definitive arbiter of Canadian
identity), the poet critiques the whitewashing of the history of railroad con-
struction, the white male corporate class stepping in at the last minute for a
photo-op to claim the glory of the railway’s completion while erasing evi-
dence of the diversity that went into it.
To assist in her excavation of the realities of the railroad’s construction,
Karen Cho draws on a rich array of found footage that calls attention to
myriad different ways the Asian diaspora has been represented—or not—
over the decades. As in Browne’s film, her reconstruction of the soundscapes
of this troubled past raises loaded questions about the relationship between
memory and history, this time made specific to the Chinese community.
The clinking sounds we hear in this clip likely stem no more from location
recordings of railway construction than did the corollary sounds in the Bugs
Bunny cartoon heard in East Hastings Pharmacy. Yet they are loaded here
with an unsettling resonance up to the daunting task of Cho’s film. If the

sounds don’t sit quite right in their generic legibility, they reveal cracks in
the façade of these whitewashed images of the CPR at the turn of the century.
While Cho appeals to the gaps in the fidelity of collective memory within
the Chinese community and its representation by white authority, Michael
Fukushima takes a personal approach to memory in his animated short
Minoru: Memory of Exile (1992). Here he recounts his own experiences as a
child when his community of Japantown—once neighboring Chinatown and
also filled with many descendants of the railway workers—was destroyed in
1942 after the BC government rounded up all people of Japanese descent and
sent them, by train, to internment camps in the interior. The voiceover narra-
tion describes his vague recollection of boarding a train to New Denver as the
hand-drawn images show us a young boy at a train station filled with bustle
of rushing passengers, gushing steam, conductor whistles, and thundering
engines. The immediacy of these station sounds quickly gives way to the dis-
tant sound of a train whistle echoing through the mountains upon his arrival
in the camp. The image here shifts from the vibrant colors of the animated
rendering of the train voyage to the appearance of an aged-looking archival
photograph of New Denver, and here the lonesome train calls from afar si-
multaneously foreground the isolation of his new home at the time, and the
temporal distance from this moment in his recollection many decades later.
The trains that brought so many Chinese and Japanese to Vancouver now re-
enacted their role in the facilitation of exile, an association that any railway
company would want us all to forget. This angle did not figure into the WSP’s
accounts of the cultural importance of train sounds in Vancouver either,
one example of how their documentation of such sounds is not faithful to
the cultural memory of the place. The geographical particularities of BC
create a physically reverberant space, the kind of environment that yields the
sense of where you are that Hempton and the WSP so often emphasized. In
Minoru, this reverberant quality is staged to reflect physical and psycholog-
ical distance from home. The acoustic profile of the train reaches as far as
New Denver, but its function there insists upon the loss of a community once
located in downtown Vancouver.
As an example of how the legacy of Vancouver’s systemic anti-Asian bias
persists, Mina Shum’s Double Happiness (1994) explores the complexities
of growing up Chinese Canadian in a Vancouver with a darkly racist past.
Jade Li (Sandra Oh) is an aspiring actress who discovers she is most sought
after as an ethnic stereotype when casting agents at an audition ask her to
do an accent. After playfully asking what kind of accent they’d like while
showcasing some of her range, the stern visages starting back at her make
it clear that they’re not amused. Begrudgingly, in broken Chinese-inflected
English, she assures her potential employers: “Yes, a very good Chinese ac-
cent I can do for you.” Just as the agents smile at each other in approval, the
sound of a train whistle erupts on the soundtrack. The whistle bridges a cut
to Jade on the street outside jumping for joy in her belief that she has landed
the part, the train now seen rushing past her against the shipping docks in
the background. The sound of a passing train here is both celebratory and
an unsettling reminder of the price Jade pays for her success on the back of
her community, echoing through the city as an indicator of the intersections
between industry and dispossession that resonate throughout Vancouver’s
reverberant spaces, offering a rich meditation on how things have improved
in the city while, in other ways, staying very much the same. The film is re-
flexive about the media’s role in perpetuating sonic stereotypes while offering
a nuanced corrective. Her casting agents attempt to replace regional spec-
ificity with generic racial branding, as per the norm in Hollywood, which
Shum resists in her application of location-recorded train sound amidst this
narrative moment illustrating the complexity of resistance in Vancouver’s
Chinese community.5
Resource/Replace
In all but the final example discussed so far, the sounds of trains have been
sourced separately from the images provided, whether attached to the ar-
chival footage from silent films in The Image Before Us and In the Shadow
of Gold Mountain, the mixture of hand-drawn animation and archival
photographs in Minoru: Memory of Exile, or the location-shot live action in
East Hastings Pharmacy. Each of these soundtracks can be thought of as re-
sourcing its images, providing a new sound source independent of what was
shot. In so doing, the locations for these films are re-placed: sound is delib-
erately staged to comment upon the images they present in order to expose
nuances of place would be left obscured with only the images in play. Each
of these films deals with sounds that are gone, many of them extinct before
the possibility of location sound recording, and others lost to the vagaries of
history. This is one pathway to acoustic profiling. In this section I will dis-
cuss a set of films that play with the boundaries between such re-sourcing
of sound and location recorded material to yield a different relationship be-

tween film and place. And I will take this opportunity to play on the word
resource to construct this cluster around the relationship between trains and
the resource industry in the first half Vancouver’s twentieth century.
Philip Borsos’ film The Grey Fox (1982) offers a meticulous period recon-
struction of the early days of British Columbia, dramatizing the story of “gent-
leman bandit” Bill Miner, Canada’s first train robber active in the first few
years of the twentieth century. In the film, Miner gets the idea to move his op-
erations from stagecoaches to trains after a slightly anachronistic screening
of The Great Train Robbery (1903) at a local tavern. The technologies of trains
and the cinema were both new to Miner upon his release from a thirty-year
jail term in 1902, and the film makes a point of locking the two together as
symbols of the modernizing world that ends up doing Miner in as he retreats
to the interior of BC when Vancouver was just a fledgling town to the south.
The period reconstruction for The Grey Fox was aided by the fact that
BC maintains a heritage railway in Kamloops, site of Bill Miner’s eventual
capture after fleeing the United States. To this day they run regular tourist
rides on restored turn-of-the-century steam trains, and they include a rec-
reation of the famous robbery that led to Miner’s arrest.6 As in the earliest
days of train travel in BC, here the mode of transport is tied to the tourism in-
dustry, offering visitors a taste of the past through the maintenance of vintage
technology. This facilitates shoots like The Grey Fox which, in its own way,
functions as a promotional film for the region with its spectacular footage
of the BC interior and recreations of the exhilarating train-mounted film
footage that formed the staple of the early twentieth century travelogues.
The rich attention to train sound detail, thanks to new recordings of vintage
trains, helps to sound out British Columbia’s past that continues to resonate
in the present.
The WSP was always interested in tracking down examples of old
technologies at risk of obsolescence, including a 1993 recording of
Vancouver’s Royal Hudson steam train, serving at that time as a heritage ex-
cursion car much like the one further north in Kamloops. The interest in
recording as preservation is, of course, ideologically loaded. But the contin-
uing operation of technologies like steam trains allows for continuing in-
vestigation into the relationships between these sounds, the communities
in which they arose, and their shifting status today. As described above,
the train occupies a special place in the heart of the WSP, even as this tech-
nology might otherwise fit into the anti-modernization thrust of much of
their discussion on the effects of transportation sound on urban living. The

Grey Fox is heavily nostalgic in its romanticization of the train, but it is also
consciously critical of the era it depicts and the relationship it develops be-
tween new technologies, the industries they make possible, and Bill Miner’s
desire to profit from both while remaining outside the system. The film itself
also stands as a marker of the shifts in these relationships, part of an enter-
tainment industry made possible by government subsidy and whose work
of recreating the past depends upon the tourist industries in place on its
shooting locations. As I will demonstrate, the relationships are bound to-
gether by the role of sound in the film’s deployment of place.
A compelling moment early in the film draws parallels between three new
technologies: the film projector, the automobile, and the train, each made the
subject of Miner’s startled wonder at the new world he faces. At the end of the
screening of The Great Train Robbery, while the robbers on screen fire their
pistols up in the air, Miner nearly jumps out of his seat when a member of the
audience provides his own sound effect, firing a real pistol through the ceiling
of the tavern. This is an intriguing parallel to the film’s own approach to pro-
viding sound effects for the technologies we see depicted on screen, recorded
as much as possible from vintage sources as we hear immediately thereafter.
Cut to a direct frontal view of the projector resembling the front end of a
train with headlight blazing into the night as the rhythmic sound of the film
threading through the gate recalls the rolling of wheels over the tracks. Then
another direct cut to an automobile passing Miner outside, creating a sound
bridge into the early combustion engine whose chug-a-chugging is remark-
ably similar to the projector heard just prior, both of which call to mind the
sound of the trains that open the film and which follow here directly as we
cut again to Miner watching a train go by. It is the sound here more than an-
ything else that threads these three technologies together, each framed as an
element that catches Miner first off-guard and then in a state of marvel as he
contemplates his career move.
The role of film technology and its relationship to sound within the die-
gesis is important here. Film is new to Miner. Falling short of the apocryphal
story of audiences fleeing in terror upon their first sight of the Lumières’ train
in Arrival of a Train at La Ciotat (1896) a few years prior, Miner neverthe-
less puts faith in the real-world plausibility of what he sees on the screen and
seeks to emulate it outside. At the same time, the tavern patron firing his
gun into the air helps to solidify the connection between what Miner sees on
screen and hears in the environment around him, a process of sonification
that is similar to what Borsos does with the sound of the projector itself
across the bridge through to the car and the train. These old technologies
are supported by new real-world recordings, and the symbolic connection
between film and new transportation technologies carries Miner with it.
But he has trouble going with the flow. The film then leaves projectors and
automobiles behind, but goes on to stage dramatic renderings of train travel
through the mountainous region that intersects with Miner at key points in
the story. Here the sound of the trains is made visceral, the impact of the
footage brought to a level of intensity that would be unattainable through
image alone, and key to the drama that unfolds around Miner’s gradual un-
doing in this new technological environment.
Midway through the film, Miner is lying low in Kamloops as US detectives
are on his trail. Against his better judgment, he accepts an offer to rustle
horses for a colleague who threatens to blow his cover if he refuses. In an
audiovisually spectacular sequence, he and two henchmen run the horses
over the hills along a rail line. The sequence intercuts footage of Miner and
the horses in golden hour sunlight with shots from the top of an approaching
engine car presenting exhilarating views of high-speed travel along the
tracks. The cutting on the soundtrack is especially dramatic, shifting back
and forth between the galloping hooves and the all-encompassing steam
blasts and heavy metal rolling of the train. When the two finally come to-
gether, the pairing provides a startling meditation on the shift from organic
horses to iron horses. Miner attempts to outrun the train while remaining
on the tracks, but ultimately it is futile and several of the horses grow scared
enough to take off down a steep cliff, separating from Miner, one of them
breaking a leg in the process. The sound of the train fades into the distance,
and a gunshot provides final punctuation to the sequence as Miner puts
the injured horse down. This sequence stands as a clear dramatization of
our growing realization that Miner is unable to keep up with the times. He
thought he had planned around the train schedule on this line, but this train
turns out to have been a work train running logs, scheduled separately from
the regular commuter trains.
The logging train also marks a shift in the relationship between this mode of
transportation and the labor it enables. Later in the film, Miner accompanies
the town photographer, Kate Flynn (Jackie Burroughs), on a call out to doc-
ument the scene of a grisly crime: a man stabbed his wife and child to death
in their tent before running off and turning the knife on himself a short dis-
tance away. The corporal turns to Miner and says, “Damn Chinamen. You
can never understand what’s going on in their heads.” This is a revealing line,
alluding to Chinese presence in British Columbia following the end of their
work on the railroad, and the anti-Chinese sentiment that would steadily in-
crease in the years to follow. But Miner is sympathetic: “Well I wouldn’t be
too harsh on them. You know they’re a world away from home.” As an out-
sider himself, Miner recognizes the problem of integration and assimilation,
and here we are invited to imagine that this horrific scene arose from the
duress under which they were living, with no place to go and no means of
support. Miner’s eventual downfall is thus positioned in relation to his status
as a foreigner, unable to plug into the system that sustains those around him.
The difficulties faced by Indigenous peoples and the Asian community fol-
lowing their dispossession at the hands of the railway would become increas-
ingly widespread across the general population as the Depression era set in.
As labor became a buyer’s market, exploitation ran rampant across industries,
not the least of which being film. The 1930s were the era of the “quota quickie”
films made in the provincial capital city of Victoria by American producers
hiring British Nationals living in BC to sell to the British market. In an in-
teresting symmetry of art and life, some of these films, like Lucky Corrigan
(1936), tell decidedly local stories of Depression-era hardship. Here an un-
dercover law enforcement agent investigates corruption in logging camps on
Vancouver Island where workers are being dangerously exploited in the face
of dismal prospects at earning a living anywhere else, much less the urban
centers of Vancouver and Victoria. On his way north to the camps, the agent
hears a train in the distance, which he hops to catch a ride up to the camp.
The sound of the train is tied to the promise of industry as source of sus-
tenance as well as emphasizing the distance separating urban areas and
sources of income. As one of the first synchronized sound pictures produced
in Canada, the sound of the train also opens up questions about sound pro-
duction practices on Hollywood films produced in foreign countries, an area
for expanded investigation that could open such films up to serious con-
sideration in soundscape research into British Columbia’s past. The film is
especially provocative because of how its own narrative, in reflecting real
Depression-era issues, also foretells the effect its own producers would have
on BC’s overnight film industry that would vanish as fast as it came, leaving
film production crews stranded without work and forced to find new means
elsewhere (Morris 1978, 194–195). Indeed, the effect of departing industry
is a common theme in urban studies literature on BC and, in particular, the
Downtown Eastside neighborhood in Vancouver.
After the war, official accounts of Vancouver’s economic boom as a

modernizing city would be continually tempered by increasing awareness of
the downside to urban prosperity. This tension can be found in comparing
early postwar representations of Vancouver. Consider a city symphony–style
film like Stan Fox’s In the Daytime (1949), one of Canada’s earliest experi-
mental films featuring a sequence that casts the morning rush hour on com-
muter trains as a positive example of urban vitality, set to a rousing orchestral
score meant to evoke the romantic drama of train travel rather than location
recording of urban street sounds. While not long after, Allan King’s docu-
mentary Skidrow [sic] (1956) emphasized proximity to stationary train cars
down by the docks as a function of urban poverty as it followed the lives of
a few aging denizens of downtown. The film features early use of location
recording made possible by modifying a silent camera for sound (Browne
2000, 106), resulting in a grittier representation of the urban soundscape,
and laced with mournful music cues and narration to poetically underscore
the grim subject matter.
A few years later Larry Kent stepped into the relative void in narrative
filmmaking that opened up after the 1930s and began producing inde-
pendent works, beginning with a twenty-minute short called Hastings Street
(1962/2007). Filmed on location in the Downtown Eastside it was left unfin-
ished for forty-five years until a soundtrack was created by Marc Benoit and a
group of his students training for industry post-production audio at the Art
Institute of Vancouver in 2007. The soundtrack thus acts as a period piece,
fabricating a soundscape to accompany the vintage images and, in so doing,
raising questions about the authenticity of sounds like that of a passing train
as character Charlie (Alan Scarfe) is released from prison and goes in search
of legitimate employment in the resource industry.
As I have discussed at length elsewhere (Jordan 2014b), the film is espe-
cially interesting in how it pairs images from the early days of independent
film in Vancouver with sound produced in the context of the city’s twenty-
first century status as Hollywood North, tracing the increasing overlap be-
tween industrial and independent filmmaking in Vancouver today, and
providing an example of how filmmaking has marked a return of industry to
the downtown core from which other industries fled, as Charlie discovers in
the film and has to return to a life of crime in order to eat. The passing train
thus acts as initial promise of a clean life for Charlie outside of town while
also foreshadowing his inability to escape skid row.
Larry Kent would revisit the theme of urban poverty in his first feature,
The Bitter Ash (1963), chronicling the financially precarious lives of Colin
(Philip Brown), Laurie (Lynn Stewart) and their infant son as they live in a
low-rent house down by the railyard, the kind that were once built to house
railway workers. The location is introduced with lingering shots of trains in
the yard, complete with location sound recording,7 emphasizing the gritty
reality of the young couple’s plight while also symbolizing Colin’s yearning
to escape to a more vibrant metropolis to pursue his playwriting career. The
film ends on the front porch of this house as a fight breaks out between Colin
and Des (Alan Scarfe), a factory worker facing the obsolescence of his job
in the face of incoming automation. Kent brings in the sound of the trains
from the adjacent yard as punctuation for the violence spawned by these
circumstances, at once a clever solution to the budgetary lack of Foley effects
on the film as a whole, and a poignant symbol of the lot these characters are
made to endure. Here Kent provides an example of how location-sourced
sound can be inflected with dramatically different meaning from that given
to such sounds by the WSP. Taken on their own, the train recordings could
serve as valuable documentation of a moment in Vancouver’s history rarely
captured. All the more poignant, however, is the staging of the trains to artic-
ulate the violence of this situation, sounds that could just as easily have been
described as nostalgic markers of a time now lost to changing technologies
and neighborhood demographics.
The Bitter Ash provides a remarkable counterexample to Hastings Street
on the point of urban sound. While most of the soundtrack in The Bitter Ash
consists of dubbed dialogue and a musical score, the film’s train sounds, used
to bookend the film, are recorded on location and function similarly to the
train sounds in The Grey Fox in that they are documentary recordings of
real-world trains used for dramatic effect within the narrative. In the Bitter
Ash, however, the setting is the present, holding the location recorded train
sounds in a different status than in the period reconstruction of The Grey
Fox. Hastings Street thus provides an interesting middle ground, with gen-
uine 1962 imagery but a soundtrack that functions as a period piece, newly
recorded material, calling into question the role of perceived authenticity in
using vintage recordings rather than newly recorded material. Hastings Street
looks old but sounds new, thanks to the production quality on the sound-
track regardless of the authenticity of the sounds employed. In The Grey
Fox, on the other hand, the period detail is largely authentic, but both the
sound and the image are marked by the time in which the film was produced.
And so across these examples we run the gamut of possible spatial and tem-
poral relationships between sound and image. These varying relationships
yield different modes of understanding the status of the train in Vancouver,
and British Columbia at large, in relation to the resource industry. Taken
together, we find a history of the relationship between trains, the resource
industry, sound, and image on film that is endlessly slippery and reconfigur-
able, resisting the stable narrative that the WSP imagined possible through
the art of listening, unsettling the function of trains within this landscape
along the way.
Vancouver Is . . .
We arrive now back in the early 1970s, when the WSP was formalized and
began making their first wave of Vancouver recordings. I end this chapter by
discussing a set of films by David Rimmer and Sylvia Spring, working both
together and separately around this time, which pose a contemporaneous
challenge to the staging of Vancouver by Schafer and his colleagues at this his-
torical moment. Trains figure prominently in Rimmer’s two Canadian Pacific
experimental shorts (1974–75) and Spring’s feature fiction film Madeleine
Is. . . . (1971). Before these, however, the two collaborated on a short docu-
mentary for the CBC entitled Know Place (1968) about an alternative edu-
cation program for high-school-aged kids in Vancouver. Here they focused
on the self-directed nature of the learning environments, highlighting the
school’s emphasis on place-based learning and, in particular, one student’s
work with experimental soundmaking techniques using amplified house-
hold objects and tape machines. Her sounds run throughout most of the
film, using alternative listening practices to frame voiceover testimonials
from students about the value of their experience at the school. At this same
moment, R. Murray Schafer was designing pedagogical tools for bringing
listening into his Simon Fraser University classrooms with an emphasis on
environmental awareness. There was something in the air in Vancouver in
the late 1960s, and Know Place serves as a telling precursor to Rimmer and
Spring’s interest in place-based filmmaking and their respective attention to
sound, or lack thereof, in subsequent works about Vancouver.
David Rimmer’s pair of Canadian Pacific films (1974–75) are silent exper-
imental works that meditate on a classic Vancouver view over the downtown
railyard, across the water, and up to the North Shore mountains. Rimmer
filmed the view across the seasons and dissolves between different takes to
create a continually shifting view of the landscape through sun, rain, fog,
snow, and back again, all while maintaining awareness of the window through
which we are looking. Both films are punctuated by a final dissolve to a night
view in which the camera and the room’s interior are reflected back from a
window now darkened on its exterior side. Catherine Russell argues that this
reflexivity presents an “inhabited view,” an ecologically situated presence by
emphasizing the view’s construction by way of the mediating agents: both
the window and the camera (2006, 149). “Nature is not ‘out there,’ existing
independently of humans and technologies, but is intimately bound up with
them at their mercy and as their support” (149). As such Russell argues that
the film breaks free of the “garrison mentality” so often tracked in Canadian
art. Instead of presenting the view of a hostile exterior world from the van-
tage point of a safe bunker, Russell suggests that Rimmer’s studio acts as a
space that is open onto the external world, not a protective shelter but instead
a part of how we inhabit this landscape (155). Schafer wouldn’t agree, this
being a classic example of the glazed soundscape (as I discussed at length in
Chapter 1). By now, it should be clear that I would land on the side of Russell
in this case, as the running argument of this book has been about the role of
mediatic reflexivity in fostering heightened engagement with place, which
stands as a critique of early acoustic ecology’s shyness from acknowledging
the role of technological mediation in their staging of the Vancouver sound-
scape. However, Schafer’s notion of the glazed soundscape resonates with
critiques of what Lance Berelowitz calls “the view imperative” in Vancouver
real estate, the condo market taking over the landscape in the 1980s through
to the present day, providing views for those who can afford it while also
affording them the option of silence in which to enjoy it, a privileged remove
from the urban space of the city (2005, 25). In 1974–75, however, Rimmer’s
views were attached to low-rent artist lofts in the seedy part of town, and
would not have afforded the sound insulation usually reserved for pricier
real estate. He would have heard the trains through his window, and this has
implications for the socioeconomic class from which Rimmer’s film speaks.
So what would Rimmer have heard, and why does it matter?
Interestingly, filmmaker Richard Martin added the sound of trains
to images from Canadian Pacific in a segment from his documentary on
Vancouver’s experimental film scene entitled Backbone (2013), in which
Rimmer is interviewed about the work. In Martin’s quest to contextualize
this film within a specific region at a specific time, he drew on the archive
of the World Soundscape Project for the sound design, making use of the
recordings of this very rail yard made in 1973 discussed earlier in this
chapter. For those who value location shooting and recording as a marker
of authenticity in engagement with place, it’s a match made in heaven. Yet
it prompts a couple of important points: Rimmer intentionally left his film
silent as part of its effect, and the impulse to sonorize flies in the face of
the ardency with which a few experimental filmmakers hold their ability
to make silence a conscious choice for their films. But it also points to a
question we might have asked of Gordon Hempton discussed above: just
what, exactly, does the sound of a train reveal about space? Rimmer’s
images reveal by way of their mediality, which is clearly on display. The
silence offers one way of replacing the soundscape, allowing the image to
re-place the landscape through Rimmer’s cinematic articulations. What
about the World Soundscape Project’s train recordings heard in Martin’s
re-presentation? The pairing strikes an unsettling balance, given what we
now understand about the WSP’s lack of reflexivity and Rimmer’s own
overtly self-conscious framing of the view here. To unpack the implications
of this pairing, I conclude with a longer discussion of Sylvia Spring’s use of
footage from these same downtown Vancouver train yards in in her film
Vancouver Is. . . .8
Best known as the first narrative feature to be directed by a woman in
Canada, Sylvia Spring’s Madeleine Is . . . finds the titular Madeleine (Nicola
Lipman) recently transplanted from Quebec and eager to explore the so-
cial experiments for which the west coast metropolis had become famous.
Early in the film, Madeleine and her self-styled radical boyfriend Toro (John
Juliani) stand in her loft near the Downtown Eastside, looking out across
the Canadian Pacific Rail yard set against the waters of Burrard Inlet and
the North Shore mountains. The view is nearly identical to David Rimmer’s
in Canadian Pacific, and the couple is of the same marginal artist class that
Rimmer was when he shot his film. Toro is fascinated by the trains coupling
in the yard, watching them frequently, which later fuels his sexual desire for
Madeleine as he calls her attention to their sound just outside their bedroom
window. He mimics their sound as they lay in bed, prompting Madeleine to
attempt empathy for her boyfriend’s odd sexual interest in the trains. But she
prefers the scenic backdrop that lay behind the trains, and the implied quie-
tude therein. Here the sound of the trains marks a point of tension between
the couple that will play out along the lines of their ideological differences
around issues of social politics.
Toro is positioned in relation to heavy industry, and Madeleine with the
wonders of nature: two gender-stereotyped poles that are intertwined in uto-
pian accounts of Vancouver’s harmony between civilization and the wilder-
ness (Berelowitz 2005, 25). These positions are underscored by Madeleine’s
recurring dream in which she fantasizes about a young man who always
appears by the water without a hint of civilization anywhere to be seen.
When challenged by Toro on these escapist flights of fancy, she answers: “at
least my fantasies are innocent,” pointing to his sexual quirks as evidence of
corruption by the very system he wants to challenge. Ultimately these gen-
dered characterizations break down. Toro has been using Madeleine’s loft
as the base of operations for his plan to organize the transient members of
Vancouver’s young hippie community into a vehicle for systemic change,
ultimately seeking to leave the city and start fresh on one of the islands off
the coast.
Meanwhile Madeleine becomes increasingly entrenched in the street cul-
ture of an older generation who are homeless by dint of the city’s changing
relationship to industry rather than by privileged choice, the kind of people
documented in Allan King’s Skidrow and dramatized in Larry Kent’s Hastings
Street. Toro rejects these older social problems as unsalvageable. While he
seeks to escape, Madeleine engages with her new urban home, reversing the
relationship between their character psychologies and associated settings.
At the insistence of one of her homeless acquaintances, Madeleine begins
to paint portraits of the elderly street people of the Downtown Eastside,
an activity requiring active participation by her subjects and ultimately re-
flected back to the community through a showing at a local gallery. This
reciprocal approach to documentation positions art as a mode of commu-
nity activism, a facet of Hastings Street life that continues today. Although
the gentrification of surrounding areas concentrated social problems in the
Downtown Eastside, and some artist collectives have evacuated the area for
safer and more profitable neighborhoods since Madeleine Is . . ., artistic and
political activity remain (Shier 2002, 15). The recent redevelopment of the
Woodward’s block, once the thriving heart of the area’s commercial district
and then left abandoned upon the store’s closure in 1992, now incorporates
Simon Fraser University’s School for Contemporary Art and is set to in-
crease cultural activity: for some a remedy for the neighborhood’s decline;
for others the feared herald of further gentrification. In the Woodward’s

atrium hangs Stan Douglas’s large format photograph Abbott & Cordova, 7
August 1971, a critique of the violent police break-up of a hippie counter-
culture protest that occurred only months after Madeleine Is . . . was released.
The film foreshadows the dispersal of the hippie life that once challenged
city by-laws, to other neighborhoods and ultimately to the rural islands
and interior—following Toro’s proposed trajectory. In so doing, the film
also comments upon the distinction drawn between different communities
housed within this same space. As Jesse Proudfoot puts it, “The more iconic
figures of the Downtown Eastside were the working-class men living in the
neighbourhood’s residential hotels—those men who look on like detached
spectators from the peripheries of Douglas’s mural” (2012, 90), the men that
Madeleine was more interested in helping than the hippie newcomers that
Toro would put to his own use.
The film charts Madeleine’s shifting positions by way of strategic location
shooting and creative employment of sound. There is a wealth of sequences
shot downtown, treated with different stylistic approaches to capture a range
of tonal qualities including: the calm of a morning yoga session across from
the train yard; the bustle of a heavily trafficked commute to work; a free-jazz
sprint through the neon night following a fight with Toro; a psychedelic med-
itation on the city’s imposing architecture prior to a dream-therapy session;
and a melancholy tour of the street life in sepia-toned stills as Madeleine
begins her documentation project. As such the downtown core is presented
as a heterogeneous space resisting easy categorization when set against the
interstitial spaces of the beach or the remove of the Gulf Islands.
The sound of the railyards provides a particularly interesting case for
the shifting status of Madeleine’s physical and psychological geographies.
We see these trains several times throughout the film, but each time they
sound different. The first time the sound is presented naturalistically,
most likely location recordings of the yard as Toro watches through the
window and, shortly thereafter, listens from the bedroom. Following this
scene, Madeleine wakes up the next morning and performs some yoga on
the roof overlooking the yards. Here, however, there isn’t a hint of realistic
train sounds. Instead, we hear a mellow folk music track entitled “Morning
Sunlight,” written for the film by Ross Barrett and sung by Melinda Whitaker
to suit Madeleine’s meditative state. The sound environment bends to her
psychology while the images remain grounded in location-based realism.
Later in the film, as Madeleine is on her way to a group dream therapy ses-
sion to help her sort out her visions, the film presents a series of dramatic
shots of the cityscape from oblique and imposing angles as a foray into ex-
perimental electronic sound effects by Don Young runs on the soundtrack.
She peers over the railing of a plaza down on the train tracks and we get
her point-of-view shot of the trains once again, but this time rendered as
a strange and alienating part of the landscape into which she had earlier
seemed to fit. Her interest in therapy is part of her final push to break free
from Toro, and his association with the trains is now turning sour for her.
Her own narrative arc is here tracked by a gradual shift away from a real-
istic presentation of the rail yards through to two very different musical
treatments pushing toward the abstract. The views of the trains do not hold
stable in this film, and as Madeleine becomes more plugged into her new
city she also becomes increasingly distant from her romantic relationship
down by the tracks.
Madeleine’s personal unsettling comes to a peak with perhaps the most
significant location of the film: the West End condo high-rise occupied by
David (Wayne Specht), the corporate man that Madeleine befriends as a
manifestation of the boy from her fantasies. David is emblematic of the
rising professional class that would go on to claim the gentrified views of
Vancouver’s classic mountain backdrop in high-rises like these, increas-
ingly encroaching upon the scenery for all those removed from the wa-
terfront. Indeed, his building is filled with “moozak,” the “schizophonic
musical drool in public places” that so irritated the WSP (Truax 1978, 78).
From inside David’s apartment we hear nothing of the city outside. But
the film refuses essentialism, and it is David, not Toro, who recognizes
Madeleine’s talent for capturing the essence of downtown street life in her
painting. While Madeleine doesn’t end up choosing either man as partner,
the film is provocative in allowing for David to be a positive influence in
Madeleine’s life, keeping any strict lines from being drawn between the
various conflicting worlds that intersect in the film. In the end it is the
film’s willingness to acknowledge overlapping claims to the city’s spaces
that speak most to Madeleine’s character, its title leaving her self-definition
open to situation-specific fluctuation that could just as easily be applied to
the city itself. From David’s glazed soundscape, with its privileged view,
Madeleine discovers herself and her ability to engage ever more deeply
with her own neighborhood and break free of Toro’s toxic influence once
and for all, lending support for the ecological reading of David Rimmer’s
sonically isolated view in the Canadian Pacific films.
Coda—Unmarking Sound
As sensitive as Sylvia Spring is to the nuances of the Downtown Eastside of

the early 1970s, neither Madeleine Is . . ., nor any of the other films discussed
in this chapter since East Hastings Pharmacy, represent Indigenous peoples
even as they pass across a wide variety of social perspectives, styles, and his-
torical periods. Madeleine’s line in the sand between older working class and
newer hippy arrivals in the area points to systemic neglect for another cat-
egory, the lumpenproletariat class of “undeserving” poor that increased in
numbers as the “deserving” class of retired resource workers diminished over
the decades since Madeleine Is . . . was released (Proudfoot 2012, 92). Sadly, it
is in this category that we find the majority of the neighborhood’s Indigenous
people, like the mother and son in the east Hastings methadone clinic that
opened this chapter, overlooked by society to the point that dozens of women
can disappear from the region without any serious police investigation until
far too late, haunting the spaces of the Downtown Eastside with their in-
visibility (Oleksijczuk 2002, 98–99). This invisibility has been replicated by
media representations of the area as well.
Let us end this chapter by rethinking the WSP’s own narrative of
Indigenous erasure at the hands of modern urban transportation. If, as
Schafer suggests, the disappearance of soundmarks like train whistles can in-
dicate the dying of a culture that held these soundmarks dear, what might
that mean for communities that were less positively oriented around these
same soundmarks? While the downtown railyards are still in operation, the
network of rail lines that still crisscross the city have been decommissioned
over the years, ensuring that the sound of trains is no longer the daily oc-
currence for most Vancouverites that it once was. In the WSP’s quest to pre-
serve endangered sounds for the posterity of culture, they captured once
such train sound no longer heard in the city. On February 15, 1973, they
recorded a passing train that ran along the shoreline of False Creek under
Burrard Bridge, formerly on the land of Kitsilano Indian Reserve, established
as Indian Reserve No. 6 in 1877. The first land to be appropriated from the
reserve was for this rail line in 1899, running across the Kitsilano Trestle
Bridge until it was torn down in 1982. The original agreements regarding
appropriation of Native reserve lands for railway thoroughfares stipulated

their return to reserve status should the railroads be put out of use. After
twenty years in the courts, with competing claims by the Squamish, Tsleil-
Waututh and Musqueam Nations, redress has actually come to pass for a
small section of land surrounding the bridge corresponding to the original
railway right of passage, awarded to the Squamish Nation in 2002 (Barman
2007, 29).
The WSP listened to trains through nostalgia for settler colonialism, and it
is fitting that the disappearance of their soundmarks restored Indigenous title
to the land on this spot in False Creek. This opens the possibility for a newly
productive use of the WSP’s archive, not as evidence of the sounds of culture
now gone, but as pointers to how the disappearance of some of Vancouver’s
key settler sounds can map a revitalization of culture in the city. In her short
film Indigenous Plant Diva (2008), Kamala Todd emphasizes how Indigenous
culture can thrive in the modern city, tracking the herbal medicine practices
of Cease Wyss of the Squamish Nation as she walks Vancouver with her
daughter to pass on her knowledge of local plant life. For my purposes here,
the most telling image comes near the end of the film as she poses for a still
shot down on a decommissioned rail line now overgrown and ripe for har-
vest. This image also challenges the stereotype of urban Native culture as
necessarily of the lumpen class so easily ignored on the Downtown Eastside.
Sometimes it’s what we don’t hear that is most telling, and films can highlight
this absence of sound through their strategies for re-placing location shot
imagery on their soundtracks. Informed by alternative histories of the city’s
soundscape revealed through medial engagements with the acoustic profile
mapped by the sound of trains, the unsettled ear can hear the disappear-
ance of this sound as the return of culture to a space from which it had been
erased, and perhaps even the end of the whitewashing that has characterized
so much of twentieth century Vancouver. What the future holds in this re-
gard remains unheard.
For the early WSP it would have been inconceivable to think that they
could present their arguments about Vancouver’s sonic environment without
the aid of location recording as proof of engagement with place. This is
why they privileged this brand of documentation in providing evidence
for the elements of the environment that they found most worthy of dis-
cussion. Along with this privilege came a mode of presentation that, while
acknowledging their mediatic interventions into their recorded documents,
was largely un-reflexive about how their biases informed their construction
of the Vancouver soundscape. The WSP’s approach teaches us the impor-

tance of listening carefully to the ways in which sound interacts with geo-
graphical space to map the spaces in which acoustic communities emerge.
At the same time, examining the limitations of their methodology opens
questions about how best to modify their approach to pay greater attention
to the multiple overlapping histories of place presented in the alternative lis-
tening positions available across a variety of cinematic representations. This
is the job of acoustic profiling.
Treating film soundtracks as documents on par with the files of the WSP
offers an alternative history of the Vancouver soundscape that unsettles
the place to reveal rich and troubled histories that continually overlap.
This is particularly evident in the sound of trains, a sound that signaled the
birth of the city, carved out its paths of dispossession, and now marks new
avenues to reconciliation. For founder R. Murray Schafer, trains signified
a version of Canadian culture that ignored a great deal of Canadian expe-
rience. Using the tools of acoustic profiling to reveal alternative histories
of the city’s soundscape, and the varied settler positions that inform these
histories, the unsettled listener can hear the overlaps between different
filmmaking practices in the city, and between the city itself and the films
produced there. Acoustic profiling allows us to listen beyond the physical
attributes of geographical space to become immersed in the simultaneity
of multiple histories that, even if they can’t be picked up by a microphone
on location, reverberate loudly through the city’s environment at all times.
References
Akiyama, Mitchell. 2019. “Nothing Connects Us but Imagined Sound.” In Sound, Media,
Ecology, edited by Milena Droumeva and Randolph Jordan, 113–129. New York:
Palgrave Macmillan.
Barman, Jean. 2007. “Erasing Indigenous Indigeneity in Vancouver.” BC Studies 155
(Autumn): 3–30.
Berelowitz, Lance. 2005. Dream City: Vancouver and the Global Imagination. Vancouver:
Douglas and McIntyre.
Bijsterveld, Karin, et al. 2013. Soundscapes of the Urban Past: Staged Sound as Mediated
Cultural Heritage. Bielefeld: Transcript Verlag.
Blomley, Nicholas. 2004. Unsettling the City: Urban Land and the Politics of Property.
Browne, Colin. 2000. “Afterword: Fugitive Events.” In Cineworks 2000: Twenty Years of
Independent Filmmaking in British Columbia, edited by Justin MacGregor, 85–120.
Vancouver: Cineworks Independent Filmmakers Society.
De Certeau, Michel. 1984. The Practice of Everyday Life. Translated by Stephen Rendall.
Berkeley: University of California Press.
Gasher, Mike. 2002. Hollywood North: The Feature Film Industry in British Columbia.
Vancouver: University of British Columbia Press.
Hempton, Gordon, and John Grossman. 2009. One Square Inch of Silence: One Man’s
Search for Natural Quiet in a Noisy World. New York: Free Press.
Jordan, Randolph. 2007. “Film Sound, Acoustic Ecology, and Performance in
Electroacoustic Music.” In Music, Sound and Multi-Media, edited by Jamie Sexton,
121–141. Edinburgh: University of Edinburgh Press.
Jordan, Randolph. 2013. “Vancouver Is . . . ” In World Film Locations: Vancouver, edited by
Rachel Walls, 44–45. Bristol: Intellect Books.
Jordan, Randolph. 2014a. “Unsettled Listening: Integrating Film and Place.” Sounding
Out! Blog, August 14. Available from: http://soundstudiesblog.com/2014/08/14/unsett
led-listening-integrating-film-and-place/]
Jordan, Randolph. 2014b. “Seeing Then, Hearing Now: Audiovisual Counterpoint at
the Intersection of Dual Production Contexts in Larry Kent’s Hastings Street.” In
Cinephemera: Archives, Ephemeral Cinema, and New Screen Histories in Canada, edited
by Zoë Druick and Gerda Cammaer, 232–255. McGill-Queen’s University Press.
Jordan, Randolph. 2015. “Unsettling the World Soundscape Project: Bell Tower of False
Creek, Vancouver,” Sounding Out! Blog, September 3. http://soundstudiesblog.com/
2015/09/03/unsettling-the-world-soundscape-project-the-bell-tower-of-false-creek-
vancouver/]
Jordan, Randolph. 2017. “Unsettling the Soundtrack: Acoustic Profiling and the
Documentation of Community and Place.” In The Routledge Companion to Screen
Music and Sound, edited by Miguel Mera, Ron Sadoff, and Ben Winters, 590–602.
Jordan, Randolph. 2018. “Re-placing the Urban Soundscape: Performative Documentary
Research in Vancouver’s False Creek.” In Critical Distance in Documentary Media,
edited by Gerda Cammaer, Blake Fitzpatrick, and Bruno Lessard, 257– 278.
New York: Palgrave Macmillan.
Kirby, Lynne. 1997. Parallel Tracks: The Railroad and Silent Cinema. Durham, NC: Duke
University Press.
University Press.
Morris, Peter. 1978. Embattled Shadows: A History of Canadian Cinema 1895–1939.
Montreal: McGill-Queen’s University Press.
Oleksijauk, Denise Blake. 2002. “Haunted Spaces.” In Stan Douglas: Every Building
on 100 West Hastings, edited by Reid Shier, 96–116. Vancouver: Arsenal Pulp Press/
Contemporary Art Gallery.
Proudfoot, Jesse. 2012. “The Derelict, the Deserving Poor, and the Lumpen: A History
of the Politics of Representation on the Downtown Eastside.” In Stan Douglas: Abbott
and Cordova, 7 August 1971, edited by Stan Douglas, 88–107. Vancouver: Arsenal
Pulp Press.
Russell, Catherine. 2006. “The Inhabited View: Landscape in the Films of David Rimmer.”
In Landscape and Film, edited by Martin Lefebvre, 149–166. New York: Routledge.
Ruoff, Jeoffrey K. 1993. “Conventions of Sound in Documentary.” Cinema Journal 32, no.
3: 24–40.
Shier, Reid. 2002. “Introduction.” In Stan Douglas: Every Building on 100 West Hastings,
edited by Reid Shier, 10–17. Vancouver: Arsenal Pulp Press/Contemporary Art Gallery.
Sommers, Jeff, and Nick Blomley. 2002. “The Worst Block in Vancouver.” In Stan
Douglas: Every Building on 100 West Hastings, edited by Reid Shier, 18– 58.
Vancouver: Arsenal Pulp Press/Contemporary Art Gallery.
Spaner, David. 2003. Dreaming in the Rain: How Vancouver Became Hollywood North by
Northwest. Vancouver: Arsenal Pulp Press.
Todd, Kamala. 2013. “Thoughts on Making Places: Hollywood North and the Indigenous
City.” In World Film Locations: Vancouver, edited by Rachel Walls, 8–9. Bristol: Intellect.
Truax, Barry, ed. 1978. Handbook for Acoustic Ecology. Vancouver: ARC Publications.
Organised Sound 7, no. 1: 52–56.
Burnaby: Sonic Research Studio, Dept. of Communications, Simon Fraser.
Conclusion
A Position Piece
I last saw my father, Robert Christopher Jordan, on December 14, 2019. He

was eighty-six years old at the tail-end of a long and slow transition into de-
mentia, living in a senior care facility on campus at the University of British
Columbia, where he used to teach classical guitar in the music depart-
ment and where I completed my undergraduate studies in film and philos-
ophy. Having lived in Montreal for twenty years by that point, I was back in
Vancouver to make location-specific field recordings as part of my work as
sound designer on the Impostor Cities project, Canada’s official entry to (what
was supposed to be) the 2020 Venice Architecture Biennale.1 I had spent the
morning recording ocean and forest sounds on Tower Beach at the northern
edge of campus, so named because of two concrete structures that once held
powerful lights used to survey the harbor during WWII. I then popped in
to see Pop before heading to the other side of the city to make recordings
at Simon Fraser University, where he performed regularly in the 1960s and
where I landed for my postdoc in 2012. He did not recognize me but was
happy for the company. Then the world shut down, and a few months after
that he died of pneumonia, unrelated to COVID-19.
A year later, R. Murray Schafer also died. I mention this here because
there is overlap with my father’s story. Schafer and my father differed in age
by only four days, both born in late July of 1933. They were of the same era,
and thus shared some common position in their ideologies. When Schafer
was at Simon Fraser University (SFU) laying the groundwork for the World
Soundscape Project (WSP) in the late 1960s, my dad performed on campus
with soprano Phyllis Mailing, who was married to Schafer at the time, and
with whom my dad also cut a record produced by the Canadian Broadcasting
Corporation.2 It was my dad who taught me how to listen from the posi-
tion of a classical musician, with music lessons from a very early age and a
home rife with the stickling tension that surrounds the model listener in
the tradition of Western art music. Later I would also understand how this
DOI: 10.1093/oso/9780190226077.003.0007
Figure C.1 Robert Christopher Jordan.
listening position was very much connected to my dad’s status as British ex-
patriate who felt most at home in British Columbia amidst Canada’s largest
concentration of British nationals. He was a child in England during the war,
and came over to Canada in the early 1950s, a commonwealth country with
British royalty emblazoned on our currency. There was a sense that this land
was waiting for my dad with built-in community, easing his transition be-
tween worlds and assisting in the position that he was able to achieve here
over the years. And so I was born into a sense of entitlement over the land
based on my colonial heritage, and understanding this has been crucial when
coming to terms with Schafer’s work.
When I first encountered Schafer’s writing about environmental sound,
after leaving Vancouver for Montreal (as described in the introduction to
this book), my first impression was that this was a very different model for
listening that offered freedom from the tyranny of the constraints I had as-
sociated with the demands of classical music. Later I would come to under-
stand that Schafer’s own methodology essentially imposed the Western art
music model that I had grown up with onto everyday sounds, which perhaps
Conclusion 213
explains why I was so comfortable in changing the objects of my attention

while maintaining the same listener orientation. I would also come to under-
stand how Schafer’s own settler positionality informed this listening model,
now the subject of many critiques of Schaferian acoustic ecology (some of
which are detailed in this book). I don’t presume to speak for Schafer in this
regard, and certainly his status as Canadian born puts him in a different po-
sition than my father with respect to his own settler heritage. I don’t know if
Schafer and my father ever spoke, though I imagine they would have crossed
paths on many occasions. I wonder where their ideologies would have
overlapped around the relationship between music, sound, and culture, and
where they would have diverged. They certainly would have shared a disdain
for Muzak and traffic noise, the low hanging fruit of soundscape awareness.
But my dad sure loved his hi-fi stereo rig, an impulse that I have inherited,
and it is on my own rig that I now listen to The Vancouver Soundscape LP,
released in the year of my birth.
Thinking about the role that positionality plays in Schafer’s work has
helped me understand my own position by way of my dad, and this path to
self-reflection sits as a subtext to the progression of my analyses across this
book. The trajectory begins in France with Playtime, moves to Canada’s re-
mote north in Picture of Light, and then lands in the Pacific Northwest for
the last three chapters, starting in the US with Last Days and Twin Peaks,
and finally arriving in Vancouver on the Canadian side. With this geograph-
ical journey from western Europe to North America’s west coast, my critical
attention has also moved from specific interest in the composition of films
and sound works as recorded objects (the art model), to the way that these
objects engage with the specificities of place (the documentary model), and
finally to the role of listening practice in making sense of both (the activist
model).
Across the book’s trajectory of my own critical movement, one theme has
stood out above all else: the tension between mediation and the myth of its
potential to vanish. In all of my analyses, the goal has been to demonstrate a
form of mediality that exposes the fabrications that limit our capacity to un-
derstand how positionality constructs both the objects we pay attention to
and the way we pay attention to them. As a theoretical tool for recognizing
this mediality in play, I have used the term acoustic profiling to reveal how
filmmakers articulate the acoustic profiles of their narrative spaces and,
by extension, position their audiences within these spaces. Acoustic pro-
filing allows us to reframe the issue of fidelity, shifting away from its typical
orientation around the relationship between a recorded object and that

which it is said to record, and toward an immersive process that dissolves
the boundary line between the two. In short, the goal of my analyses has
been to make apparent the material conditions of spatial orientation that are
often concealed by formal convention in films and media and their guiding
ideologies; I want to reveal the mechanisms by which mediation is said to
vanish in the myth of vanishing mediation.
Each chapter proposes a specific term designed at once to address the
particularities of the film(s) in question within a specific chapter and the
generalities of vanishing mediation that traverse the book as a whole. Since
vanishing mediation is about drawing a line in the sand to demarcate distinct
spaces that are then said to fold onto each other, my analyses pay critical at-
tention to the way that films set up acoustic profiles across various thematic
demarcations of boundary. The question for all films is this: to what extent
do the spaces on either side of a given boundary line extend into each other,
and how can this extension be tracked with attention to sound? In some
examples, like Playtime and Last Days, these lines are diegetically physical.
I use the term audible transparency in reference to the architectural quality of
the simultaneously transparent and reflective windows of Playtime that de-
marcate the spaces of modernity and their hindrance to community engage-
ment. Modernist glass walls are meant to be invisible, but Jacques Tati makes
us hear them so that we can think critically about their role in shaping expe-
rience. The term reflective empathy suggests how the doorways of Last Days
modulate empathy between friends gathered in a single house, echoed by the
ways in which soundscape composition is integrated into the sound design,
challenging established ideas about how compilation soundtracks function
in film. Playtime and Last Days thus share an interest in putting the architec-
tural design of cinematic space on display, reflecting upon the perceptual and
emotional positions of the people that occupy them.
In other cases, as in Picture of Light and Twin Peaks, the boundary lines are
tied to media technologies and their capacity to foster audience engagement
with the worlds they represent. I use the term immersive reflexivity to explain
Peter Mettler’s explicit attention to the line between cinematic sound and
image in Picture of Light, exploring asynchronicity in attempting to render
audible the specifically visual phenomenon of the aurora borealis. Mettler
puts the technology of filmmaking on display to challenge the idea of film
as a window or doorway out onto the world before the cameras; instead, he
demonstrates how the technology itself is what shapes the world and our
Conclusion 215
experience of it. And the term schizophonographics illustrates how vanishing

mediation itself can be visualized to reveal the fraught nature of the fidelity
thesis, as when phonograph turntables in David Lynch’s Twin Peaks dissolve
spatiotemporal boundary lines to provide transparent access across times
and places, as well as charting shifts in listener orientation across the dividing
line between the pre-digital and digital eras. Picture of Light and Twin Peaks
therefore share an interest in the visualization of recording technologies
that are frequently meant to disappear when experiencing their records,
suggesting that mediation itself is what allows for deep engagement rather
than acting as distanciating barrier.
In the book’s final chapter on the films and media of Vancouver, British
Columbia, my attention is on the ways in which one listener position can
overwrite the multiple positions active within a particular region, the way
the biases of the WSP imagine the particularities of place in lieu of myriad
other possibilities. Here, unsettled listening refers to the process by which
we can employ attention to listener positionality across a range of films and
media to better understand the complexities of overlapping experience
within a specific place, offering the potential to rethink our own positionality
in turn. All of the films discussed in this book make their medial moves by
foregrounding the fabricated nature of vanishing mediation, putting on dis-
play the material qualities of the boundary lines we are otherwise supposed
to ignore. It is the fiction of vanishing mediation that is the true boundary
line under consideration here, which stays in place as long as it can remain
invisible. Listening to the way that sound articulates space in these films
makes this boundary line appear so that we may then acknowledge its limita-
tions en route to dissolving its power.
My process of asking continual questions around the mechanisms by
which boundary lines are meant to be rendered invisible has led to the con-
clusion that the myth of vanishing mediation itself is one expression of the
settler impulse to claim space with one particular definition of place. In
this respect, there is another possible line to draw through all of these films
to delineate their particular approaches to the construction of geographic
locales. The Paris of Playtime was constructed entirely on an elaborate set;
the Pacific Northwest of Last Days was shot in upstate New York; Twin
Peaks was shot (in part) on location in the Washington State setting of an
otherwise fictional town; and not until we arrive in Vancouver do we find
films that are dedicated to dealing with the true particularities of a real-
world environment.
I am struck here by another line of intersection through the work of the

WSP at the time of its formation: the arrival of Hollywood filmmakers in
1960s Vancouver, the start of an established presence that would eventu-
ally brand the city as “Hollywood North.” Just as my dad was establishing
his acoustic profile over the city, with the founding of the Guitar Centre,
Vancouver’s first space for the study of the classical guitar, and as Schafer
was introducing environmental sound into university music curricula,
Hollywood was introducing Canadian regional specificity to international
audiences, while almost invariably presenting these spaces as other places.
This is an extension of the settler mindset that I did not address in the final
chapter on BC film, but it is a pertinent angle to frame my concluding
thoughts on how acoustic profiling has informed my creative practice as
well as my scholarship. Like my imagined conversations between Schafer
and my dad, I wonder how the WSP members would have interacted with
Hollywood filmmakers around town.
In August of 1971, a Universal Studios production team set up shop on
campus at SFU for Groundstar Conspiracy (1972), a sci-fi thriller starring
George Peppard. It’s about a man named Welles, or perhaps Bellamy, who has
had his memory wiped clean after being used as a mercenary by a covert gov-
ernment operation housed at a top-secret military establishment, played by
the campus itself, designed by Arthur Erickson, with its distinctive elevated
Academic Quadrangle resembling the Pentagon. This film set some impor-
tant precedents as an early touchstone for Vancouver as Hollywood North
and the inevitable overwriting of the city that came along with it. SFU never
plays a university on film. A film like Groundstar offers ample points of iden-
tification for “insiders” who can see through the projected “placelessness” of
the narrative (Matheson 2005, 133) and view the film as a goldmine of doc-
umentary footage of a city on the cusp of the major changes that the WSP
would attempt to track. Yet this identification is challenged by the film’s con-
tinual aims to erase that veracity in favor of narrative demands, not unlike
the plight of the protagonist whose own memory has been wiped to service
a political narrative. “I still don’t know who I am,” he laments at the end of
the film surrounded by Erickson’s modernist concrete angles, a question that
could just as easily have been posed by the city itself as it set about defining its
own path in the wake of modernity’s onset in sister cities across the border.
What would WSP team members have said to the Groundstar production
team that summer as they roamed campus, learning the ropes on their newly
acquired sound recording equipment in preparation for the start of their
Conclusion 217
official documentation process the following year? Perhaps the WSP would
have been interested in the professionalism of the filmmakers’ recording
techniques, while disapproving of their continual attempts to reposition
their shooting locations as other places. Hypotheticals aside, there is indeed
a fascinating tension in play between the way the WSP went on to present
their home city and the way this city is presented in films like Groundstar.
The WSP was transparent in its distaste for the lo-fi masking sounds of the
modern city, like the ventilation systems that muddied the soundscapes of
Arthur Erickson’s visually impressive design. Of course this aspect of the
local soundscape is the first thing to get dumped by Hollywood filmmakers
in search of hi-fi soundtracks that allow for maximum speech intelligibility.
So when we listen to SFU campus in Groundstar, we hear no evidence of
the qualities that the WSP would critique. While this marks a difference in
staging across the WSP’s documentation of these lo-fi sounds and the hi-fi
fabrications in Hollywood films, there is an ideological commonality here: it’s
almost as if Schafer had modeled his notion of the hi-fi soundscape on the
speech intelligibility model of film soundtracks. In this way, film conventions
idealize these biases of the WSP.
Hollywood’s erasure of lo-fi masking sounds works as part of a generic
international convention that, in turn, services their genericization of
local specificity. Yet the reality is that the ventilation at SFU is a location-
specific sound. In Groundstar, this specificity is overwritten. For the WSP,
that ventilation, along with corollary sounds like ubiquitous traffic noise, are
markers of an increasingly generic global urban soundscape, with the rise
of car culture and modern architecture emerging quickly in many parts of
the world following WWII. The irony is that the WSP includes these sounds
in their presentation of the city to demonstrate the loss of regional speci-
ficity, while Hollywood erases these sounds to capitalize on this very same
loss. In both cases there is an impulse toward vanishing mediation. The
WSP wants that layer of noise to vanish, leaving their ideal soundscape un-
derneath. Hollywood makes those layers of noise vanish, leaving their own
ideal soundscape underneath. In both scenarios, neither party invites crit-
ical thinking about the biases that inform these idealizations of what places
should sound like.
The ideological commonalities and tensions between the WSP and main-
stream film convention became the basis for my work on the Impostor
Cities project. Helmed by David Theodore, Thomas Balaban, and Jennifer
Thorogood, the project is premised on the reality that, in films, Canada is most
often presented to the world in disguise. The multi-screen exhibition stages

excerpts shots of well-known Canadian architectural sites (like Erickson’s
SFU campus) and strings them together across a variety of film appearances
to highlight all the ways that these recognizable buildings are dressed up to
look like they live somewhere else. My task in designing the soundtrack for
the installation was to imagine how this “impostoring” process, as we call it,
can be reflected acoustically. So I took the above-described overlap in the
ideologies governing both acoustic ecology and Hollywood filmmaking
as the basis for my aesthetic approach, which involved blending location
recordings of these real-world sites with the soundscapes designed for them
in the films in which they appear.
When I stood on SFU campus that day in December 2019, the place was
barren and the ventilation shafts were blowing deep and loud. Yet in the
middle of the Academic Quadrangle, there was a reflective quality to the
sound that allowed it to blend with other environmental sounds, particu-
larly the calls of crows flying from tree to tree within the boundaries of the
structure, their voices echoing in their responses to each other as well as off
Figure C.2 Randolph Jordan with microphone on Simon Fraser University

campus.
Conclusion 219
the reflective surfaces created by the unique four-sided structure. The quad-
rangle thus functioned like a multichannel mixing console, gathering all
sounds in the environment, layering them over one another while assigning
trajectories of reverberant movement through the space. The Impostor Cities
installation begins with this recorded environment playing over images from
Groundstar Conspiracy, Battlestar Galactica (2004–2009), and Stargate SG-1
(1997–2007) all shot within the quadrangle, as I build in certain features of
these impostorized soundscapes to offset the location-specific realism, in-
cluding dialogue from Groundstar in which Bellamy speaks of his identity
crisis.
My location recordings were made with an ambisonic microphone
spreading nineteen recording capsules over a spherical surface to allow
sound capture in 360 degrees, which would then be mixed into the fifteen-
channel installation of the exhibition. In this way, something of the architec-
tural specificity of Erickson’s design would be made apparent to exhibition
listeners, with the idea that listener positionality would be literalized as
visitors to the Canadian pavilion move through the space and be continually
Figure C.3 Ambisonic microphone in the Academic Quadrangle on SFU

campus.
reoriented with respect to the locations presented in image and sound, each
screen and speaker reflecting and diverging from each other in an endless
array of possible configurations. In building Hollywood constructions into
the mix, my aim was to use the language of Hollywood’s sonic fabrication
to reveal the mediation in play in their spatial representations, exposing the
tension between exploiting a particular location for its existing qualities
while simultaneously advocating for their disappearance.
I attempted an even more direct address of the tensions found in the WSP’s
work in the film component of my Bell Tower of False Creek project (2017),
about which I have written at length elsewhere (see Jordan 2014–2015, 2015,
and 2022). This dates back to 2013 when, as part of my postdoctoral work at
SFU, I was revisiting recording locations used on the Vancouver Soundscape
LP on the fortieth anniversary of its original release. Under Vancouver’s
Burrard Bridge, spanning False Creek that separates the downtown core
from the rest of the city to the south, I encountered a loud metallic clanging
sound, which I traced to a pothole behind a metal divider on the bridge’s
surface that sounded every time a car passed across. I remembered a sec-
tion from the Vancouver Soundscape release in which the sound recordists
conversed with Schafer about their process, mentioning their frustration re-
garding bridge traffic noise obscuring their attempts at capturing the tinkling
masts of boats in the marina. This is a perfect example of how two sounds
representing modern realities of the city, a bridge for automobile traffic and a
marina for pleasure craft, are given opposite value designations. Both, how-
ever, are markers of the settler colonialism that installed these facilities on
unceded Indigenous lands, and this practice of preferential treatment be-
came the locus of my own attempt to represent this space on film.
Burrard Bridge sits within a stone’s throw of the Vancouver Academy of
Music where I took music lessons from the age of three and where my dad
was on faculty for many years. Vanier Park is the music school’s front yard,
and I have fond memories of playing out on the grass while my dad worked
and my siblings finished their lessons. I knew nothing of Indigenous land
claims as a child. But on one of my return visits to town after moving to
Montreal, a newly erected Sen̓áḵw welcome pole next to the bridge alerted
me to Indigenous presence on the land. Later I learned about the original
reserve status of the area, its piecemeal dissolution for projects like the
railway and the bridge, and the return of a portion of the land to reserve
status in 2002 (discussed in more detail at the end of Chapter 5). Walking
the edges of Vanier Park, it struck me that the sound of the clanging bridge
Conclusion 221
Figure C.4 Sen̓áḵw Welcome Pole next to Burrard Bridge carved by Darren
Yelton in 2006. Still from Bell Tower of False Creek by Randolph Jordan.
pothole was audible in a way that mapped out the general boundaries of
the original reserve, an acoustic profile the WSP would dismiss as ge-
neric modern city noise erasing local specificity, but that here serves as an
unsettling marker of the region’s history around Indigenous dispossession.
Further, I learned that the electronic billboard next to the bridge, erected
shortly after the totem pole, also marked Indigenous presence as a rev-
enue generating installation for the Squamish band made possible by the
newly reinstated reserve status of the land. In this way, the traffic on the
bridge, with all its noise pollution, was now servicing twenty-first century
Indigenous needs.
Taking some inspiration from Hildegard Westerkamp’s composition “Kits
Beach Soundwalk” (1989), wherein she plays with shifting relationships be-
tween the foreground sounds of the ocean and the cityscape in the back-
ground, my film aims to reframe the classic WSP opposition to traffic noise
around its positive connotations for reconciliation. To do this, I juxtaposed
the voices of WSP members talking about the problems of Burrard Bridge
traffic noise with my own recordings of the dramatic clanging sound from
a variety of locations around the space now marked out as reserve. On the
image track I presented the bridge from many different positions that also
chart the limits of the reserve, with a centerpiece section that foregrounded
the two poles that mark twenty-first century indigeneity on the land.
Figure C.5 Electronic billboard next to Burrard Bridge. Still from Bell Tower of
False Creek by Randolph Jordan.
In the middle section I included a segment of the WSP’s interview with

Tsleil-Waututh elder Herbert George. My intention here was to offer a cor-
rective to the usage of the interview in the “Squamish Narrative” track on
the Vancouver Soundscape LP that I critiqued in Chapter 5, where they
had presented George speaking in Squamish amidst the sounds of birds
and water to narrativize the obfuscation of Indigenous presence by way of
modern transportation noise, represented by a passing sea plane. In the
excerpts I used in my film, George speaks in English to recount a complex
story around the arrival of the railroad that illustrates the ways in which
settler colonialism intertwined with local mythology as part of the story
of modern transportation in the region. I included a bit where interviewer
Bruce Davis asks George to repeat himself when a passing car interferes with
the intelligibility of his speech, demonstrating the irony around aiming for
hi-fi clarity in their recordings so that they would have the building blocks
to dramatize lo-fi density in their presentation of the material. My aim in
the film was to liberate George’s voice from the constraints of the WSP’s
bias, to let him tell his story in the context of the film’s exploration of the
positive connotations of traffic noise for indigeneity in Vancouver. Yet in
so doing I, too, am guilty of trapping George’s voice within another media
construct that, for all my good intentions, is no less inflected with my own
settler positionality, the kind of typical settler encounter with Indigenous
Conclusion 223
soundmaking that Dylan Robinson critiques in his book Hungry Listening

(2020, chapter 4).
I had to make this work to understand my own settler hunger while lis-
tening on Indigenous land, revealing the legacy of my own colonial heritage
that comes with a sense of entitlement over this space that I had visited since
childhood but never really known. My process of self-reflection has been as-
sisted by the model for acoustic profiling laid out in this book. In the end, my
film aimed to chart the acoustic profile of the traffic noise in order to track
the problems inherent in the WSP’s presentation of Vancouver, and speak to
their complicity in extending the settler narrative around Indigenous era-
sure. I learned how to build acoustic profiling into a filmic presentation of
space from the films that I have analyzed through the framework of acoustic
Figure C.6 WWII ruins at Tower Beach on campus at University of British

Columbia. Polaroid by Randolph Jordan, December 14, 2019.
ecology. Now it is time to move this knowledge to the field of action, to ac-
count for my own complicity in the problems of hiding the mediation that
underwrites settler encounters with Indigenous space. That is to say, all space.
Back to UBC’s Tower Beach on the day that I last saw my dad, where
I listened to the harbor for sounds that would be useful to my work on
Impostor Cities. It was in the era of cemented colonization and globalizing ur-
banity that my dad arrived on BC’s west coast. In spite of the constrictions of
the listening practices that I was taught at an early age, the lessons of my dad’s
positionality now resonate in unexpected ways. Here, in 2019, well after the
completion of Bell Tower and much of the writing for this book, I heard more
than just material for an artistic composition. The interplay of the waves
on the shore with eagles flying overhead and the sound of the seaplanes
in the distance was an eerie echo of the “Squamish Narrative” segment on
the Vancouver Soundscape LP, the basis for suggesting the disappearance of
Indigenous voices. Listening this morning, however, I was in a better posi-
tion to hear the ways in which this land has been unsettled. The emptiness of
the concrete ruins from WWII worked like shells on the seashore, their im-
posing monumental status that once announced the cementing of settler co-
lonialism enabled by WWII was now belied by their hollowness, functioning
in a similar way to the echoic properties of the SFU quadrangle, ready to take
in whatever the land speaks and hold these layers of positionality in solution.
Directly above these towers, atop the cliffs that mark the edge of UBC
campus, sits the Arthur Erickson designed Museum of Anthropology and its
large collection of totem poles. In the short WWII propaganda film Gateway
to Asia (1945) produced by the National Film Board of Canada, a totem pole
appears on screen as the narrator expounds, “Mute witnesses of an earlier
culture watch the beginnings of a new era bring down their world around
them,” referring to the resource extraction industries that brought settlers to
the west coast, industries that would then be put in service of defense against
the threat to these settled lands from new enemies in the Pacific Rim. Now,
eighty years on, it is these concrete tower structures on the beach, built as part
of that defense strategy, that look silently on as reconciliation begins to ac-
knowledge the living indigeneity of this place. The Museum of Anthropology
was built on the foundation of the bunker that housed the guns that would
have used the light towers on the beach to set their sights. Looking out
through the wall-size glass panels, much like those featured in the Paris of
Jacques Tati’s Playtime, the museum’s totem poles are dramatically framed
against the backdrop of the fabulous harbor view. The transparency of the
Conclusion 225
glass provides the appearance of unbroken connection with the land; but
like the modern architecture that Tati plays with in his film, the containment
in the museum is painfully audible. Hildegard Westerkamp once critiqued
this museum as an “acoustic dump” for its combination of ventilation noise
trapped within its glazed interior, which contributes to silencing the voices of
the many First Nations objects housed therein, stripped of their context and
function within the communities from which they came (2019, 56–57). The
1976 article in which Westerkamp made these critiques went unpublished
after a draft caught the attention of both the museum director and the ar-
chitect himself. She recounts how her thinking was dismissed for its aura of
“suppressed hysteria” (57), likely tied to her status as a woman, one of the
many instances of sexism she experienced as the only female member of the
WSP—and an important reminder of how, even within the WSP, positions
were far from equal. But even if Erickson and the museum director had taken
Westerkamp’s critiques seriously, you can’t fix the problem of the voiceless
totem poles through changes to the acoustic design of their “graveyard,” as
Coast Salish artist Lawrence Paul Yuxweluptun once called the museum
(CBC 2007).
Decades later, in the summer of 2019, not long before my last visit, a Haida
mortuary pole held by the museum was returned to its people by request of
the band’s Repatriation Committee (Rowley 2020). This pole, at least, has had
its voice reinstated, its acoustic profile no longer inhibited by the museum’s
settler ideologies given architectural shape through the building’s modernist
design. This repatriation was enabled by recommendations put forth in the
2015 report by Canada’s Truth and Reconciliation Committee. To arrive at
points of action like these, voices need to speak up to expose instances of
harm, and people need to ready to listen. In Westerkamp’s critique we find
the potential for the kind of listening originally prescribed by the WSP to
move into a more action-oriented mode for the present day. Attention to the
acoustic profile of the museum reveals how the sonic by-products of a set-
tler architectural imperative are connected to the process of disenfranchising
Indigenous voices. The practice of acoustic profiling in this context could be
repositioned away from opening dialogue around “fixing” the museum’s aes-
thetics and toward productive action for redress to the communities harmed
by the museum’s foundational mandate. The museum itself might then one
day sit empty, like the light towers on the beach below, a monument to a
mode of settler positioning on the land that would now mark a distant past,
the voices it once silenced able to speak again. In this spirit, it is my wish that
the tools for acoustic profiling detailed in this book, premised on intersecting
the strengths and weaknesses of acoustic ecology and film sound studies,
can yield a mode of listening to film and media objects that reposition our
thinking around the relationship between sound, space, and culture, and put
us all in a better position for reconciliatory action.
References
Canadian Broadcasting Corporation (CBC). 2007. “The Ideas of Lawrence Paul

Yuxweluptun.” CBC Ideas (April 4).
Jordan, Randolph. 2014–15. “Bell Tower of False Creek.” Soundscape: The Journal of
Acoustic Ecology 14, no. 1 (Winter/Spring): 16–20.
Jordan, Randolph. 2015. “Unsettling the World Soundscape Project: Bell Tower of False
Creek, Vancouver,” Sounding Out! Blog, September 3. http://soundstudiesblog.com/
2015/09/03/unsettling-the-world-soundscape-project-the-bell-tower-of-false-creek-
vancouver/
Jordan, Randolph. 2022. “Pole Positions under Vancouver’s Burrard Bridge: Exposure and
Intersection on Indigenous Land in Bell Tower of False Creek.” In Place Matters: Critical
Topographies in Word and Image, edited by Jonathan Bordo and Blake Fitzpatrick,
colour section 2. Montreal and Kingston: McGill-Queen’s University Press.
Matheson, Sarah. 2005. “Projecting Placelessness: Industrial Television and the ‘Authentic’
Canadian City.” In Contracting Out Hollywood: Runaway Productions and Foreign
Location Shooting, edited by Greg Elmer and Mike Gasher, 117–39. Maryland: Rowman
and Littlefield.
Rowley, Susan. 2020. “Yahguudangang: A Haida Pole Returns Home.” Museum of
Anthropology (May 26). University of British Columbia. https://moa.ubc.ca/2020/05/
yahguudangang-a-haida-pole-returns-home/.
Burnaby: Sonic Research Studio, Dept. of Communications, Simon Fraser.
Notes
Introduction
1. This shot runs from 24:25 to 25:14 on the Region 1 DVD (ISBN #0-7831-2791-X).
2. This shot begins with Nathan (Nathan Tyson) and Carrie (Carrie Finn) running to seek
a hiding place at 1:14:31 and finishes with the beginning of the end credits at 1:17:46.
The excerpt of Frances White’s piece that runs for the duration of this shot begins at
approximately 4:40 on the track as presented on her CD Centre Bridge: Electroacoustic
Works (2007, Mode Records, mode184).
3. For excellent examples of medium-specific sound staging techniques in historical con-
text, see Neil Verma’s analysis of mid-twentieth century American radio drama style
in Theater of the Mind (2012), and Eric Dienstfrey’s reappraisal of the development of
early multichannel sound for the cinema in Making Stereo Fit (2023).
Chapter 1
1. The Tuning of the World was reprinted in 1993 by Destiny Books under the title The
Soundscape: Our Sonic Environment and the Tuning of the World. The text and pagina-
tion are identical across the two versions. Across this book I refer exclusively to the first
version in order to maintain grounding in the 1970s context of its original publication.
Chapter 2
1. For a thorough examination of all the permutations of Eisenstein’s interest in sound/

image synchronization, see Robert Robertson’s Eisenstein on the Audiovisual (2009).
2. Parts of this section have been adapted from my essay, “Brakhage’s Silent Legacy for
Sound Cinema” (2001) in which I conduct a longer discussion of Brakhage’s interest in
the “musical” quality of images alone.
Chapter 3
1. This excerpt from “Doors of Perception” begins at 9:06 in the release version that origi-
nally appeared on the compilation CD Radius #4: Transmissions from Broadcast Artists
228 Notes
(1995, What Next, WN0019), and re-released as part of the soundtrack album Last
Days: A Tribute to Mr. K. (2006, Avex Records, AVCF-22746).
2. The trilogy refers to Gerry, Elephant, and Last Days. Chang was writing before the
release of Paranoid Park, which some believe now constitutes the final entry in a
quadrilogy. Yet I have also seen the word trilogy used to describe Elephant, Last Days,
and Paranoid Park, leaving Gerry out of the equation. There are important relationships
between all four of these films, but my discussion in this chapter focuses on Last Days
because of its extensive use of the work of Hildegard Westerkamp.
3. This shot begins at 13:52 in the Region 1 DVD release of the film (2005, Alliance
Atlantis, ASIN #B000AYEL10). The excerpt from “Doors of Perception” heard here
starts at 5:50 in its CD release.
4. This sequence begins with Scott answering the door at 27:46 on the Region 1 DVD
release. Blake turns on the TV at 29:31, followed by a cut to the Friberg twins, and
then back to Blake at 30:30 at which point the sound of “Doors of Perception” cuts
in with the location sound and the Boyz II Men track. The excerpt from “Doors of
Perception” heard here begins at 14:10 in the CD release. As Blake begins his crawl
toward the door at 31:25 in the film, a lengthy cross-fade to another section of “Doors
of Perception” begins, bringing in an excerpt that begins at 19:00 in the CD release
layered with the previous excerpt. As Asia opens the door at 32:16 in the film, the first
segment of “Doors of Perception” ends and the second continues until Asia leaves the
room and closes the door.
5. The concept of dialogism is developed extensively in the essays that comprise Bakthin’s
The Dialogic Imagination (1981) and Problems of Dostoyesvky’s Poetics (1984).
Chapter 4
1. To identify specific episodes I will be following the generally accepted practice of

referring to Seasons 1 and 2 (1990–91) as “the original series” with individual episodes
numbered from 1 through 29. The pilot episode (1990) will be referred to simply as
“the pilot,” which precedes Episode 1. For the 2017 series, I will use the label “Season 3”
as opposed to “The Return,” the latter of which initially used by Showtime for promo-
tional purposes but has not carried through to official releases of the program. I refer to
each installment of Season 3 as “parts” numbered 1 through 18 rather than “episodes,”
following the filmmakers’ wishes that the full season be considered a single film rather
than an episodic series.
2. A case in point: Listen to the Sounds was adopted as the subtitle for Music in Twin Peaks
(2021), a collection of essays edited by Reba A. Wissner and Katherine M. Reed.
3. This scene is included in The Missing Pieces, a collection of deleted scenes from Fire
Walk with Me included in the Twin Peaks: The Entire Mystery Blu-ray box set released
in 2016. You can view the YouTube video here: Twin Peaks: The Gramophone Click
Revealed, https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Wp205_aLym4
Notes 229
4. This fact is a reflection of the way in which Chion has adapted the more general term
acousmatic from its earlier musical context developed by composer Pierre Schaeffer.
Borrowed from ancient origins, Schaeffer used it to describe the presentation of sound
abstracted from the idea of source, whether this source be visual or traceable within the
sound itself. Chion’s use of the term in the context of audiovisual media necessitates
that it becomes defined by its relationship to the image track, a transformation that
requires a measure of theoretical maneuvering. For a detailed discussion of Chion’s
adaptation of the term, see my essay: “Case Study: Film Sound, Acoustic Ecology, and
Performance in Electroacoustic Music” (2007).
5. Passages in this section dealing with the theorization of the acousmêtre have been re-
vised from my essay “The Visible Acousmêtre: Voice, Body and Space Across the Two
Versions of Donnie Darko” (2009).
6. See this Subreddit thread for examples of fan critique of Rebekah Del Rio’s perfor-
mance of “No Stars”: https://www.reddit.com/r/twinpeaks/comments/6o6kx6/s3e10_
did_anyone_else_rewatch_the_rebekah_del_rio/
Chapter 5
1. This chapter is heavily revised and expanded from two prior publications: a post on
the Sounding Out! blog entitled “Unsettled Listening: Integrating Film and Place”
(2014a); and a chapter in The Routledge Companion to Screen Music and Sound entitled
“Unsettling the Soundtrack: Acoustic Profiling and the Documentation of Community
and Place” (2017).
2. Details about the sound production for East Hastings Pharmacy were discussed during
a Q&A period and private conversation with Bourges after a screening of the film at
Anthology Film Archives in New York City, October 2012.
3. https://digital.lib.sfu.ca/soundscapes-1837/soundscape-cn-pier-main-street-trains-
900-van55a1
4. The Herbert George interview is accessible in three parts, labeled as reels Van113a1,
Van113a2, and Van114a1, publicly accessible at the following links through the Simon
Fraser University library: https://digital.lib.sfu.ca/soundscapes-1521/soundscape-
herb-george-interview-interview-1500-van113a1, https://digital.lib.sfu.ca/soundsca
pes-1522/soundscape-herb-george-interview-interview-continued-1700-van113a2;
https://digital.lib.sfu.ca/soundscapes-1515/soundscape-herb-george-interview-interv
iew-continued-1510-van114a1
5. During a master class with Mina Shum at the 2015 Festival Nouveau Cinéma in
Montreal, Quebec, Canada, I asked her about the potential symbolism of the passing
train in this scene. She said that it was just a coincidence, but approved of my reading.
This is a good example of how an unsettled approach to listening in film can reveal
relationships across elements that speak to real-world truths even if not consciously
designed by the filmmakers.
6. See this promotional video for an illustration of the Kamloops Heritage Railway in ac-
tion: https://youtu.be/Ft9a75QMtnk
230 Notes
7. Details about the sound production in Larry Kent’s films were discussed with me in
private conversation with the filmmaker on various occasions.
8. This section expands on my short essay “Vancouver Is . . . ” for the Vancouver volume
of the World Film Locations book series (2013).
Conclusion
1. The exhibition opened in a condensed form for the rescheduled Bienale in 2021, and
is opening in full at the Museum of Contemporary Art (MoCA) in Toronto in June of
2023. Full project details here: https://www.impostorcities.com/
2. https://w ww.discogs.com/release/9105235-Phyllis-Mailing-Christopher-Jordan-
Derek-Bampton-Untitled
Index
For the benefit of digital users, indexed terms that span two pages (e.g., 52–53) may, on
occasion, appear on only one of those pages.
Figures are indicated by f following the page number
Abbott & Cordova, 7 August 1971 (Stan Bijsterveld, Karin, 10–11, 17–18, 181–82
Douglas, 2008), 203–4 The Bitter Ash (Larry Kent, 1963),
ableism, 17–18, 42 199–200
acousmatic Black Ice (Stan Brakhage, 1993), 84
music, 80 Blomley, Nicholas, 25–26, 172–73, 181
sound, 156–57, 229n.6 Blue Velvet (David Lynch, 1986), 160
acousmêtre, 24–25, 131, 146–54, 155–56, Bourges, Antoine. 229n.4, See also East
157–59, 161–64 Hastings Pharmacy
acoustic community, 18, 173, 174–75, 188 Brakhage, Stan, 64–65, 69–70, 77, 83–
acoustic design, 1–2, 6, 20–21, 29–30, 54– 88, 90
57, 224–25 See also Black Ice; Stellar
acoustic horizon, 18, 176 Browne, Colin, 189–92, 198
acoustic profile, 61, 64–65, 93–94, 100–1, See also The Image Before Us
107–8, 117–18, 131, 139, 184, 188– Bruzzi, Stella, 21–22, 61–62, 67–68, 70,
89, 190–91, 192, 220–21 72–73, 76–77
acoustic profiling, 15–16, 18–27, 36, Bugs Bunny, 171, 191–92
172–77, 193–94, 207–8, 213–14, 216, See also Falling Hare
223–24, 225–26
Altman, Rick, 3–4, 16, 17–18, 40–41, 141– Canadian Pacific (David Rimmer, 1974/
42, 145–46, 163, 172–73 75), 200–3, 205–6
Arrival of a Train at La Ciotat (Lumière Canadian Pacific Railway (CPR), 25–26,
Brothers, 1896), 76, 195–96 171, 189, 202–3
audible transparency. See transparency: Chion, Michel, 17–18, 24–25, 30–31, 63,
audible 79–80, 81–82, 86–87, 102, 103, 115–
audile technique, 39–40, 141–42, 151–52 16, 117–18, 128–29, 131, 146–54,
auditory extension, 17–22, 30–31, 107–8, 162–63, 180, 229n.4
111, 113, 139, 149, 158–59, 176, Churchill, Manitoba, 21–22, 61, 75–76, 78,
184, 214 86–87, 89, 91
aurora borealis, 21–22, 61, 214–15 Cobain, Kurt, 22–23, 97–98, 112–13, 120
Columbine High School, 1, 4, 109
Backbone (Richard Martin, 2013), 201–2 compilation soundtrack, 22–23, 98–99,
Badalamenti, Angelo, 151–52 100, 113–14, 117, 214
Bakhtin, Mikhail, 117–18 “Crying” (Roy Orbison, 1961), 150–51
Battlestar Galactica (various, 1997-
2007), 218–19 Davis, Bruce, 184, 187, 222–23
Bell Tower of False Creek (Randolph “Death to Birth” (Michael Pitt, 2005), 103–
Jordan, 2017), 220–25, 221f–22f 4, 109, 118–19, 121–23, 125, 143
232 Index
Debord, Guy, 29, 38–39, 52 electroacoustic

Del Rio, Rebekah, 150–52, 229n.7, ecology, 41–42
dérive (drift), 52–54 music, 1–2, 5, 21–22, 65–66
détournement, 52–54 sound transmission, 10, 14, 17–18, 20–
dialogism, 117–18, 228n.5 21, 31–32, 37, 39–40, 41–42
diegetic sound Elephant (Gus Van Sant, 2003)
internal diegetic sound, 103–4 comparison to Last Days, 22–23, 100,
metadiegetic sound, 115–16 108, 109, 111–12, 228n.2
vs. non-diegetic sound, 17–18, 19–20, use of sound, 1, 2–3, 4, 5, 18–19, 105
50, 103–4, 115–18, 153 Elephant Man, The (David Lynch,
digital media, 41–42, 79, 128, 129, 131, 1980), 134–35
133–37, 160, 164–65 empathy
digital humanities, 6 anempathetic sound, 115–16
surround sound, 149–50 between audience and film, 22–
vs. non-digital media, 23–24, 141–46, 24, 117–19
163, 214–15 between characters, 19–20, 99–100,
See also materiality: digital media 107–8, 109, 112, 120, 202–3
Disque 957 (Germaine Dulac, empathetic sound, 115–16
1928), 134–35 as formal strategy, 117–19, 124–25,
documentary 175, 214
conventions, 8–9, 64–70, 89, 108, 180–81 reflective empathy, 22–24, 99–100, 118,
films, 10, 13, 14–15, 16, 171–72, 182, 124–25, 214
188–90, 191, 196–97, 198, 199–200, sensory empathy, 115–16
201–2, 208, 216–17 Eraserhead (David Lynch, 1977), 23–24,
media practice, 6, 21–23, 117, 125, 171– 133–34, 135–36
72, 173, 177–78, 181–82, 183–84, Erikson, Arthur, 216–18, 224–25
188, 203–4, 207–8, 213 See also Vancouver, British Columbia:
performative, 21–22, 43–44, 61–62, 66– Museum of Anthropology;
68, 70, 73, 76–77, 91, 93–94, 175 Vancouver, British Columbia: Simon
skepticism, 3–4, 61–63, 78–79, 93–94 Fraser University
voiceover, 65–66, 69–74, 76–77, 190–
91, 192 Falling Hare (Robert Clampett, 1943),
“Doors of Perception” (Hildegard 179–80, 181
Westerkamp, 1989). See “Türen der fidelity, 65, 99–100, 128–29, 175–76, 190–
Wahrnehmung” 92, 213–14
Double Happiness (Mina Shum, discourse, 8–9, 10–12, 15–19, 21–26,
1994), 192–93 31–32, 39–41, 129–30, 131, 214–15
Dune (David Lynch, 1984), 141 faithful representation, 8–9, 15–16, 17,
31–32, 173, 176, 192
Ear Cleaning (R. Murray Schafer, 1967), hi-fi stereo culture, 9, 10–11, 20–21,
29, 54–55 23–24, 31–32, 39, 41, 56, 141–42,
East Hastings Pharmacy (Antoine Bourges, 175, 212–13
2011), 171–74, 177, 179–81, 189–90, hi-fi vs. lo-fi soundscape, 9, 16–19, 31–
191–92, 193–94, 206 32, 41, 42–43, 45–46, 175, 185–86,
ecomimesis, 12–13 190–91, 216–17, 222–23
Edison, Thomas, 144–45, 146–48 original vs. copy, 8–9, 15–16, 40–41,
Eisenstein, Sergei, 81–83, 84–85, 87–88, 141–42, 145–46, 160–61, 163
90, 227n.1 perceptual fidelity, 15–17, 147–48
Index 233
reproduction vs. representation, 3–4, The Image Before Us (Colin Browne, 1986),
15–16, 40–41, 145–46 189–90, 193–94
signal-to-noise ratio, 18, 175 immersive reflexivity. See reflexivity:
vanishing mediation, 9, 20–21, 22–25, immersive
26–27, 39–42, 92–93, 99–100, 131, Impostor Cities (2021), 211, 217–19,
136–37, 141–42, 143–44, 146, 148– 224, 230n.1
49, 154, 175, 177–78, 213–15, 217 indexicality, 69–70, 92, 143–46, 160, 163
Foley effects, 199 In the Daytime (Stan Fox, 1949), 198
Friedberg, Ann, 37–38, 47 In the Shadow of Gold Mountain (Karen
Cho, 2004), 191, 193–94
Gambling, Gods and LSD (Peter Mettler, Indigenous peoples
2002), 68–69 activism, 185
Gateway to Asia (Tom Daly, 1945), 224–25 dispossession, 171–72, 174–75, 181,
George, Herbert, 185–88, 222–23, 229n.1 188–90, 197, 206–7, 220–26
Gerry (Gus Van Sant, 2003), 228n.2 Indigeneity, 179, 224–25
gesture labour, 174–75
metaphorical, 49–50, 57, 58, 130 reconciliation, 225–26
musical, 80, 89, 90–91 representation in media, 10–11, 88–
physical, 33–34, 45–46, 49–50, 63, 140– 89, 172–73, 179–80, 185–88, 206,
41, 165–66 207, 222–24
glazed soundscape. See soundscape: glazed See also voice: Indigenous
The Great Train Robbery (Edwin S. Porter, Indigenous Plant Diva (Kamala Todd,
1902), 194, 195 2008), 207
The Grey Fox (Philip Borsos, 1982), 194– Inland Empire (David Lynch,
95, 199–200 2006), 133–35
Groundstar Conspiracy (Lamont Johnson, International Style (architecture), 20–21,
1972), 216–17, 218–19 29–31, 32–33, 38–39
“Into the Night” (Julee Cruise,
Hastings Street (Larry Kent, 1962/2007), 1989), 135–36
198–200, 203 Ivan the Terrible (Sergei Eisenstein,
Hempton, Gordon, 182–84, 192, 201–2 1944), 82–83
hi-fi stereo culture. See fidelity: hi-fi stereo “I’ve Been Working on the Railroad”
culture (trad.), 171, 179
hi-fi soundscape. See fidelity: hi-fi vs. lo-fi
soundscape Jameson, Fredric, 39–40, 133–34, 159, 160
Hollywood, 134–35, 177, 180, 192–93, Jordan, Robert Christopher, 212f
197, 217–18, 219–20 as “Dad,” 211–13, 216, 220–21,
classical, 73, 152 224, 230n.2
Hollywood North, 171–73, 181, 189–90,
198, 216–17 Kassabian, Anahid, 22–23, 114–17
human scale, 10–11, 16, 106–7, 109, 121– Kent, Larry. 194–95, 230n.7, See also The
22, 125 Bitter Ash; Hastings Street
hypermediacy, 142–43 “Kits Beach Soundwalk” (Hildegard
Westerkamp, 1989), 221
identification (audience), 22–23, 67, 112– Know Place (David Rimmer and Sylvia
13, 114–15, 117, 118, 144–45, 161–62 Spring, 1968), 200
affiliating vs. assimilating, 114–19, 120 Kulezic-Wilson, Danijela, 105,
extratextual, 117 133, 142–43
234 Index
Lady Blue Shanghai (David Lynch, phonography, 128–29, 130, 133–34,

2010), 133–34 135–44, 148–49, 154, 164–66
Last Days (Gus Van Sant, 2005), 19–20, See also materializing sound indices
22–24, 97–125, 143, 213, 214, materializing sound indices, 102, 111–12,
215, 228n.2 120–21, 128–29
Lastra, James, 3–4, 15–17, 40–41, 145–46, McCartney, Andra, 10–11, 41–42
147–48, 163, 177–78, 179 media convergence, 129
listening mediality
hungry Listening, 10–11, 222–24 in Canadian Pacific, 201–2
practices, 3–6, 8, 10–11, 14, 16–17, 29– definitions, 12–16, 17, 18–19, 20–22
30, 31–32, 33, 54, 172–73, 176, 200, in Last Days, 99–101, 106–7, 118, 124
213, 224 medial move, 12, 18–20, 30–32, 64–65,
reflective listening, 14, 99–100, 114–15, 130, 207, 213–14, 215
117, 124–25 medial writing, 12–13
unsettled listening, 25–26, 43–44, 172– in Picture of Light, 21–22, 62–63, 68–70,
73, 176–77, 180, 181, 207, 208, 215 76–77, 83–84, 91, 93–94
See also positionality: listener; in Playtime, 20–21, 31–33, 36, 39, 42–
soundwalking 44, 47, 56, 58
location in Twin Peaks, 129, 135–37, 139,
recording, 1–2, 13, 21–22, 78, 101, 146, 155–56
102–4, 105–6, 108, 109–11, 113, 115, medium specificity, 17, 23–24, 129, 133–34
171–72, 177–81, 183–84, 185, 188– See also materiality: medium-specific
89, 190–92, 198–200, 201–2, 204–6, metadiegetic sound. See diegetic sound:
207–8, 211, 216–21, 228n.4 metadiegetic sound
setting, 7, 13–14, 18–20, 173, 176–77, Mettler, Peter, 86
191, 193–94, 205–6, 217–18 See also Gambling, Gods and LSD;
shooting, 65, 87–88, 178, 193–95, 201– Petropolis; Picture of Light
2, 204, 207, 215 Minoru: Memory of Exile (Michael
lo-fi soundscape. See fidelity: hi-fi vs. lo-fi Fukushima, 1992), 192, 193–94
soundscape modernism, 20–21, 29–30, 31, 32–33, 36–
Lucky Corrigan (Lewis D. Collins, 39, 43–46, 47–48, 50–51, 54–55, 56,
1936), 197 57–58, 177, 214, 216, 225–26
Lynch, David. See Blue Velvet; Dune; The See also Erickson, Arthur
Elephant Man; Eraserhead; Inland Mon Oncle (Jacques Tati, 1958), 47, 51, 56–57
Empire; Lady Blue Shanghai; “No “Morning Sunlight” (Ross Barrett,
Stars”; “Slow 30s Room”; Twin Peaks 1971), 204–5
Mountain, Rosemary, 80
M (Fritz Lang, 1931), 98–99 moving visual thinking, 64–65, 77, 85–
Madeleine Is... (Sylvia Spring, 1971), 87, 90–91
200, 202–6 See also Brakhage, Stan
materiality Mulholland Drive (David Lynch,
the body, 163 2001), 150–52
dematerialization, 37–38 Museum of Anthropology. See Vancouver,
digital media, 129, 131, 145–46, British Columbia: Museum of
154, 164–65 Anthropology
film, 84, 163–64 musical performance, 22–23, 49–50, 100,
glass, 36–37, 43–44, 48–49, 55–56, 57 101, 103–4, 109, 115–16, 118–19,
medium-specific, 23–25, 129, 158–59 120–23, 125, 143–44, 151–52, 211–12
Index 235
Musqueam Nation, 206–7 settler, 3–4, 11, 26–27, 29–30, 43–44,

172–74, 176, 185–86, 187–88, 207,
neurodivergence, 23–24, 42, 160 212–13, 215–16, 220, 222–26
New Denver, British Columbia, 192 unsettled, 178, 180, 181–82, 207,
Nichols, Bill, 21–22, 61–62, 67 208, 224
noise abatement, 1–2 See also unsettled listening
Norman, Katharine, 14–15, 99–100, 114– postmodernism, 39–40, 133–34, 146,
15, 117 159–62, 163
“No Stars” (Rebekah Del Rio, David psychogeography, 20–21, 52, 53, 54–57
Lynch, Angelo Badalamenti,
2011), 151–52 Rashomon (Akira Kurosawa, 1950), 16
realism, 8–9, 15–16, 65–66, 68–69, 73, 81–
on-the-air sound, 17–19, 135–36 82, 122–23, 130, 149, 204–5, 211
offscreen sound, 87–88, 103, 105–6, 119– reflective empathy. See empathy: reflective
20, 121, 149, 153, 165–66, 171. See reflective listening. See listening: reflective
also acousmêtre reflexivity, 12–13, 31–32, 83–84, 89
“On Bended Knee” (Boyz II Men, 1994), in documentary, 19–20, 21–23, 61–
103–4, 109–13, 119, 120–21 62, 65–66, 67–68, 69–70, 71–72,
O’Rourke, Jim, 65–66, 71–72, 74, 78, 73–74, 76–77, 86–89, 190–91, 192–
80, 87–88 93, 200–2
in fiction film, 2, 5, 29–30, 53–54, 55–56
Paranoid Park (Gus Van Sant, 2007), immersive reflexivity, 21–22, 23–24,
105, 228n.2 61–65, 66, 70, 71–72, 78–79, 84, 91,
“Pennsylvania 6-5000” (Glenn Miller 92–94, 214–15
Orchestra, 1944), 136 in soundscape composition, 106–8,
perceptual fidelity. See fidelity: perceptual 183–84, 186–87, 207–8
performativity. See documentary: See also mediality
performative Rimmer, David, 174–75, 188–89, 200–
personal noise, 104, 106–7 3, 205–6
Peters, John Durham, 134–35, 143–45, 160 See also Canadian Pacific; Know Place
Petropolis (Peter Mettler, 2009), 73 Robinson, Dylan, 10–11, 222–23
phatic writing, 12–13 Rothenbuhler, Eric, 143–45, 160
phonography Russell, Catherine, 68–70, 200–1
in David Lynch films, 19–20, 23–
25, 132–35 Schaeffer, Pierre, 80, 229n.6
as representational style, 13, 15–16 Schafer, R. Murray
theories of, 141–48, 160 applications of, 20–21, 24–25, 29–30,
in Twin Peaks, 128–31, 135–41, 164– 36–39, 42–44, 45–46, 56–57, 93–94,
66, 214–15 113, 121–22, 125, 131, 150–51, 200–
See also schizophonographics 1, 206–7, 216–17
Picture of Light (Peter Mettler, 1994), 19– critiques of, 2–3, 10–11, 16–18, 43–44,
20, 21–22, 23–24, 61–94, 213, 214–15 106–7, 177, 185, 208, 212–13
Playtime (Jacques Tati, 1967), 19–21, 23– history of, 13, 29, 173–74, 200, 211–
24, 29–58, 177, 213, 214, 215, 224–25 13, 216
positionality methodology of, 1–3, 9, 11, 13, 18, 175,
Indigenous, 26–27 184, 220
listener, 10–11, 16, 17–18, 25–27, 40– theoretical intersections with, 16–17,
41, 43–44, 141–42, 163, 215, 219–20 39–42, 54–55, 141–42, 146–47, 160
236 Index
schizophonia, 10, 16–18, 20–21, 39–42, Soundtracker (Nick Sherman,

56–57, 64–65, 93–94, 113, 131, 154, 2010), 182–84
160, 163, 175, 177 soundwalking, 4–5, 54–55, 104, 106–
schizophonographics, 23–25, 131, 136– 7, 124–25
37, 155–64 Soviet Montage, 64–65, 73, 77, 78–79, 81–
Sen̓áḵw totem pole, 220–21 82, 84–85, 86–87, 227n.1
settler colonialism. See positionality: space replacement, 39–40, 41, 177,
settler 178, 181–82
Shatz, Leslie, 4, 5, 105, 107–8, 111, 124–25 spatialization
Shum, Mina, 229n.2, See also Double of music, 97–98, 100–1, 113–14
Happiness of voice (see acousmêtre)
signal-to-noise ratio. See fidelity: signal- spatial signature, 17–18, 105–6, 110, 111–
to-noise ratio 13, 119–20, 121–23, 176, 184
Silverman, Kaja, 73, 152 Spring, Sylvia, 174–75, 188–89, 200–3, 206
Simon Fraser University (SFU). See See also Know Place; Madeleine Is...
Vancouver, British Columbia: Simon “Squamish Narrative” (World Soundscape
Fraser University Project, 1973), 187, 222–23, 224
Situationists, 20–21, 29–30, 31, 38–39, 43– Squamish Nation, 179–80, 187, 206–7,
44, 51–56, 58 220–21, 222–23, 224
See also dérive; détournement; staging, 17, 21–22, 25, 174–75, 176, 181–
psychogeography; Unitary 82, 183–84, 188–91, 192, 193–94,
Urbanism 195–96, 199, 200–1
Sjogren, Britta, 73, 152–54, 156–57 Stargate SG-1 (various, 1997-
Skidrow (Allan King, 1956), 198, 203 2007), 218–19
“Slow 30s Room” (Dean Hurley and David Stellar (Stan Brakhage, 1993), 84
Lynch, 2017), 140–41 Sterne, Jonathan, 4, 6, 9–10, 12, 39–40, 41–
soundmark, 17, 179–80, 181–82, 184–85, 42, 69–70, 106–7, 141–42, 177–78
188, 190–91, 206–7 Synchromy (Norman McLaren, 1971), 79
sound recording. See location: recording; synchronization
World Soundscape Project: ideology asynchronous sound, 19–20, 65, 66–67,
and methods 73, 78–79, 81–83, 86–87, 93, 214–15
soundscape counterpoint, 64–65, 81–84, 89
composition, 1–3, 5, 7, 13–15, 22–24, creative examples of, 34–35, 65–66, 86–
54, 62–63, 94, 97–104, 105, 106–8, 87, 88, 98–99, 102–3, 111, 123, 125,
111, 113–15, 117, 122–23, 124–25, 179–80, 197
183–84, 186–87, 214 free counterpoint, 81–82, 86–87, 88–89
glazed, 20–21, 36–37, 42–44, 45, 200–1, harmonic counterpoint, 90–91
205–6, 224–25 lip-sync, 89, 90–91, 146–47, 150–
research, 3, 6, 8–9, 10–11, 21–22, 25 51, 152
terminology, 9, 16 non-synchronous sound, 64–65
See also hi-fi soundscape; lo-fi occult nature of, 93–94
soundscape; Soundscapes of Canada; orchestral counterpoint, 81
The Vancouver Soundscape spatial synchronization, 149
Soundscape Vancouver 1996 (World theories of, 64–65, 72–73, 78–80, 81–85,
Soundscape Project). See The 146–47, 153–54
Vancouver Soundscape
Soundscapes of Canada (CBC Radio, Tati, Jacques. See Mon Oncle; Playtime
1974), 184, 185 Thompson, Emily, 20–21, 37, 39, 56–57
Index 237
Todd, Kamala, 172–73, 207 unisonance, 185

trains, 25–26, 74, 76, 102–3, 173–75, 176, Unitary Urbanism, 51–52, 54–55,
179–80, 181–86, 187–208 57–58
transparency unsettled listening. See listening:
as accountability, 181–82, 186–87, unsettled
188, 216–17
audible transparency, 20–21, 23–24, 56, Vancouver, British Columbia
58, 214 Burrard Bridge, 206–7, 220–21,
of glass, 19–21, 30–33, 36–39, 42, 221f–22f
43–44, 45, 46, 47, 48–49, 53–54, 99– Chinatown, 191, 192
100, 123–24 Chinese Diaspora, 174–75, 188–89,
of media, 11, 30–33, 36, 76, 141–43, 145, 191–93, 196–97
175, 224–25 Downtown Eastside, 171–72, 179–
sonic, 3–4, 20–21, 31–32, 36–37, 39–41, 81, 188–89, 191, 197, 198, 202–4,
43–44, 53–54, 142–43 206, 207
spatiotemporal, 57–58, 214–15 False Creek, 206–7, 220, 221f–22f
transparent immediacy, 142–43 The Guitar Centre, 216
transsensoriality, 63–65, 77–78, 79–80, Indigeneity in, 171–73, 174–75,
82–83, 84, 85–87, 90–91, 93–94 179–80, 185–90, 197, 206–8,
Truax, Barry, 10–11, 13, 14, 16, 18, 39–40, 220–26
41–42, 114–15, 173, 186–87, 205–6 Kitsilano Indian Reserve, 206–
Tsleil-Waututh Nation, 185–86, 187, 206– 7, 220–21
7, 222–23 Museum of Anthropology, 224–25
Tuning of the World (R. Murray Schafer, rail yards, 184, 201–3, 204–5
1977), 29, 39, 227n.1 Simon Fraser University (SFU), 6, 29,
“Türen der Wahrnehmung” (“Doors 173–74, 188, 200, 203–4, 211–12,
of Perception”) (Hildegard 216–19, 218f, 220, 224–25
Westerkamp, 1989), 22–23, 97–99, University of British Columbia (UBC),
102–4, 105–8, 109, 110–12, 114–17, 211, 223f, 224–25
227–28n.1, 228n.3, 228n.4 Vancouver Academy of
Twin Peaks (David Lynch et. al., 1990- Music, 220–21
2017), 19–20, 23–25, 42, 128–29, 141, Vanier Park, 220–21
154, 155–56, 228n.1 See also Hollywood: Hollywood North;
critiques of, 159–63 The Vancouver Soundscape
The Final Dossier, 166–67 The Vancouver Soundscape (World
Fire Walk with Me, 128, 130, 147–49, Soundscape Project)
155, 156, 158–59, 161–62 1973 release, 7, 13, 25, 62–63, 185–86,
Laura Palmer, 23–25, 42, 127–33, 135– 187, 190–91, 212–13, 220
40, 146, 147–48, 154, 155–67 Soundscape Vancouver 1996, 7,
The Missing Pieces, 128, 228n.3 13, 62–63
original series, 130, 132–56, 158–59, vanishing mediation. See fidelity:
160–61, 162–63, 228n.1 vanishing mediation
pilot, 127–28, 130, 132–33, 156–58, 228n.1 Van Sant, Gus. See Elephant; Gerry; Last
Season 3, 127, 129–30, 132–33, 134–36, Days; Paranoid Park
139–41, 146, 156–58, 159–61, 162– The Velvet Underground. See “Venus
67, 228n.1 in Furs”
Sheryl Lee, 161–62 “Venus in Furs” (Velvet Underground,
See also phonography: in Twin Peaks 1967), 103–4, 109, 118–22
238 Index
visual music, 64–65, 77, 78–80, 82–84, See also “Türen der Wahrnehmung”
86, 89, 93 (“Doors of Perception”); “Kits Beach
musical imagery, 80 Soundwalk”
voice “What a Wonderful World” (Louis
disembodied (see acousmêtre) Armstrong, 1967), 137–38
Indigenous, 188, 224–26 (see also White, Frances. See “Walk Through
George, Herbert) Resonant Landscape #2”
mediated, 17–18, 119, 134–35, 140–41, World Forum for Acoustic Ecology,
144–45, 147–48, 151–52, 157–58, 221 3, 62–63
singing, 102–3, 109, 119, 122–23, World Soundscape Project (WSP)
124, 150–52 ideology and methods, 6–8, 10–11,
speech intelligibility, 71, 147– 13–14, 26–27, 62–63, 93–94, 173–
48, 216–17 75, 177, 181–82, 183–84, 188–89,
unamplified (see human scale) 194–95, 199–200, 205–8, 211–12,
voice-off, 152–54 215, 216–17
voiceover narration (see documentary: use of WSP materials, 17, 25, 201–
voiceover) 2, 220–24
See also synchronization: lip-sync See also Davis, Bruce; Schafer, R.
Murray; Soundscapes of Canada;
“Walk Through Resonant Landscape Truax, Barry; The Vancouver
#2” (Frances White, 1992), 1–2, 4– Soundscape; Westerkamp, Hildegard
5, 18–19 World War II (WWII), 179–80, 211,
Westerkamp, Hildegard, 2, 4–5, 10–11, 13, 217, 224–25
14, 22–23, 54, 97–98, 104–8, 186–
87, 224–26 Yelton, Darren. 221f

Acoustic Profiles - A Sound Ecology of The Cinema

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Acoustic Profiles - A Sound Ecology of The Cinema

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Acoustic Profiles - A Sound Ecology of The Cinema

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

The Oxford Music /​Media Series

Published in the United States of America by Oxford University Press

© Oxford University Press 2023

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in

You must not circulate this work in any other form

Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data

Paperback printed by Marquis Book Printing, Canada

Introduction: Acoustic Profiling  1

me several dissertations’ worth of space in the journal to wax at great length

reorchestration of a sonic environment experienced by another (Pritchett

A Sound Ecology of the Cinema

This book proposes a sound ecology of the cinema by way of establishing

Keeping the Faith

At the core of my investigation lies the notion of fidelity, a long-​standing

of his writings, most powerfully in the opening to Dylan Robinson’s book

The Medial Move

as problematic constructs that stand in the way of addressing nature as it is

the WSP shifted from implicit to explicit acknowledgment of the role

To enable my examination of the mediality on display in the films under

approach . . . assumes that sound possesses an intrinsic hierarchy that renders

refers to the distance between a sound source and point of audition by

In the chapters that follow, I employ the method of acoustic profiling,

meditation on the role of cinema in fostering heightened awareness of how

visual transparency; on the other hand, glass separates individuals through

Playtime is a thorough examination of International Style modernism. Not

a project on location—​none of which would have allowed the kind of con-

terms—​regardless of where the camera is positioned. With this, Tati sends

Glazing the Soundscape

and listening through media technologies, attempting either to make these

by virtual materials. These aspects of modernist architecture contribute

Reflecting upon Transparency

It is instructive to situate Schafer’s concerns over architectural isolation

environment. To complicate matters, space replacement also has a tem-

challenge of the schizophonic situation for the listener is to make sense

situate their importance within the culture of Situationist thinking in mid-​

The dramatic transformation at Playtime’s end depends upon the formal

This gag depends upon the simultaneous transparency and reflectivity

physical collapse of the restaurant. This begins, appropriately, with the

Is Modernism the Enemy?

In an essay provocatively titled “Modernism as Enemy,” Edwin Heathcote

creative renderings of the ideal Situationist city governed by the principles of

Schaferian Acoustic Design as Psychogeography

The Moral of the Story

In Picture of Light (1994), filmmaker Peter Mettler (serving here as di-

contemplation. My analysis will situate Picture of Light within the discourse

Transsensoriality is the basis for reading Picture of Light as an attempt to

in the use of recording technology to provide access to particular places and

Performing Documentary Convention

Picture of Light makes use of dramatic shifts in approaches to documentary

soundscape treatments. Though the sequence ends with a powerful example

a product of cinematic mediation. Tom McSorley stresses that Mettler’s

experience that is ultimately incommunicable,” a state of being “somewhere

process of cross-​reference,” without assuming that one form of experiencing

The relationship between voice and environment is established from the

calls an “unnecessary evil” in their constant emphasis on documentary films

I will demonstrate now, Mettler’s use of voiceover is profoundly connected to

A Surrogate for Real Experience?

Maybe this wacky process of harnessing money and technology is just an

The Oxford Music /Media Series

Introduction: Acoustic Profiling 1

At the core of my investigation lies the notion of fidelity, a long-standing

a project on location—none of which would have allowed the kind of con-

terms—regardless of where the camera is positioned. With this, Tati sends

situate their importance within the culture of Situationist thinking in mid-

process of cross-reference,” without assuming that one form of experiencing

Here Mettler positions cinematic mediation of the pro-filmic world as

then, an in-person discussion with a representative from the Yellow Pages

One of the film’s most prominent song-based set-pieces revolves around a

the film runs in slow-motion with complementing slow-motion sound, and

in Episode 2 of the original series—that blends with radio static as we watch

The missing media object in The Fireman’s gramophone seems tailor-made

itself—its regional specificity endlessly overwritten with narratives that hide

It’s instructive to note the connection between the single-take approach to